RIGGERS HANDBOOK - Hanes Supply Inc. Handbook 2017-web.pdf · RIGGERS HANDBOOK A tremendous...

RIGGERS HANDBOOKA tremendous reference guide for every Rigger!

Wire Rope • Chain • SlingmaxTM Slings • Fittings • Accessories • General Usage • Safety Guidelines

Work with HSI Slings TM Since 1930

VOL 17

SEVEN LOCATIONS & THE WEB TO SERVICE YOUR NEEDS!BUFFALO, NY ROCHESTER, NY ALBANY, NY SYRACUSE, NY WATERTOWN, NY BRANFORD, CT NORTH & SOUTH CAROLINA

Our Headquarters is located in Buffalo, New York 55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206PHONE 716.826.2636 FAX 716.826.4412

20 Jetview Dr • Rochester, NY 14624 • PHONE 585.235.0160 • FAX 585.235.02296181 Thompson Rd, Suite 500A • Syracuse, NY 13206 • PHONE 315.299.4114 • FAX 315.870.9345

22432 US Route 11 • Watertown, NY 13601 • PHONE 315.782.8247 • FAX 315.782.5709156 Railroad Avenue • Albany, NY 12205 • PHONE 518.438.0139 • FAX 518.438.5343

4 Indian Neck Avenue • Branford, CT 06405 • PHONE 203.481.3469 • FAX 203.481.7642NORTH CAROLINA 704.506.4744 SOUTH CAROLINA 843.458.0749

WWW.HANESSUPPLY.COM

REPAIR AND RENTAL SERVICES: • Hoists• Lifting Equipment

FIRE EXTINGUISHER SERVICES: • Sales• Testing

CONFINED SPACE: • Equipment Rental and Sales• Detection Device Service,

Calibration and Sales

LOAD TESTING: • Slings• Fittings

BELOW-THE-HOOK LIFTING DEVICES: • Standard or Custom Designed

for your Specific Application

CUSTOMIZED TOOL KITS• Assembled to Your Specifications• Rigging, Hoists, Hydraulics,

Tools, Safety, Etc.

• Hydraulic Equipment

• Service• Training

• Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices

ADDITIONAL SERVICES WE PROVIDE

HEADQUARTERS: 55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206 PHONE: 716.826.2636 FAX: 716.826.4412 www.Hanes Supply.comWORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930PB 1

Table of ContentsHanes Supply has complete testing facilities for tension and cycling of wire rope, chain, nylon, high- performance fiber slings, and related items including spreader beams and other types of rigging gear. With three new Chant Engineering testing machines, we have the latest state of the art testing equipment to satisfy all of your testing requirements.Buffalo, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 186' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 165' maxi-mum. Capacity: Two-load range 300 ton high or 35 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 12' ram. Capable of elongation measurement. Robert’s 50 Ton Vertical Test Machine. Ram Stroke: 4.5' ram.Albany, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 60' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 51' maximum. Capacity: Two-load range 175 ton high or 25 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 6' ram.Rochester, NY Specifications: Horizontal Machine, 100' length with testing capacity 3' minimum to 84' maximum. Capacity: Two-load range 300 ton high or 35 ton low holding range, pull or break test. Ram Stroke: 6' ram.Calibration: In accordance with ASTM E4 +/-1% and complies with MIL-STD-45662Aand traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technologies. Re-calibratedyearly. Applies to machines in all branches.

Digital Load Readout with Test Certificate in all branches.

Programmable Cycling Capability: Buffalo, NY and Rochester, NY branches.

TABLE OF CONTENTSAdjustable Slings ....................................................44Blocks ..............................................171-175, 191-193 Sheave .............................................................175 Snatch .......................................................171-174Boom ..............................................................148-154 Pendants ...................................................153-154 Pendant Fittings .........................148-151, 153-154Bridles ..................................13-14, 33-35, 40-44, 203 Chain .............................................................40-44 Measuring Length .............................................203 Twin-Path®.....................................................13-14 Wire Rope......................................................33-35Buttons, Swage......................................................152Chain .......................................................37-44, 60-61 Saddle Rings .....................................................44 Slings ............................................................40-44 Slings, Inspection................................................39 Transport (Binding) .............................................61Clevises .................................................................138Clips, Wire Rope .............................................100-101Cordage Information ...........................................69-86Davit Cranes ............................................................87Dynamometers ...................................................93-94Eye Bolts ........................................................155-160Gator-Flex® Grommets ...........................................26Gator-Laid® Slings, Wire Rope ...............................27General Information .......................................191-210

Conversions .....................................................208 Crane Hand Signals (USA Std.) ......................210 Definitions .................................................205-207 Formulas ...................................................195-197 How to Read a Tag ............................................204 Weights of Material ..........................................209Grommet Slings ...........................................26, 31-32 Cable-Laid ..........................................................31 Gator-Flex® .........................................................26 Strand-Laid .........................................................32Hoists .................................................................62-68 Hand (manual) Chain .............................63, 64, 67 Electric (power) Chain ..................................65, 68 Lever ......................................................62, 64, 66Hooks .............................................................123-137 Barrel ...............................................................136 Clevis ........................................................133, 135 Eye .....................................................129-130, 133 Golden Gate .....................................................137 Grab .................................................................133 Hoist ..........................................................125-130 Replacement ....................................................136 Shank ........................................................127-128 Shur-loc .....................................................134-135 Sliding Choker ..................................................136 Sling ...........................................123-126, 129-131 Snap .................................................................136

HEADQUARTERS: 55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206 PHONE: 716.826.2636 FAX: 716.826.4412 www.Hanes Supply.comWORK WITH HSI SLINGS, SINCE 1930 2

Table of Contents Sorting .............................................................136 Swivel ...............................................131-132, 134 Synthetic Sling ..........................................123-124Hydraulics ...........................................................88-92Lifting Attachments ..................................................98Lifting Beams ...........................................................97Lifting Clamps ................................................164-168Lift Engineering .............................................194-197Links, Master Oblong ............................................102Load Binders ......................................................57-59Machinery Rollers ...................................................95Man Baskets ...........................................................99Personnel Crane Basket .........................................99Ratchet Assembly, Polyester .............................56-57Rope ..................................................................69-86 Hand Line ..........................................................80 Pulling & Stringing Line ......................................80 Samson .........................................................78-81 Solid & Double Braid .....................................73-74 Specifications.....................................................75 Twisted ..........................................................72-73 Winch ............................................................81-86 Yale ...............................................................76-77Shackles .........................................................103-121 Easy-Loc ...........................................................111 Long Reach ......................................................118 Sheet Pile .........................................................121 Sling Saver ........................................110, 112-113 Wide ....................................................110-111, 116Slide-Loc ................................................................161Sling Connector ..............................................122-123Slings .............................6, 15, 23-35, 40-44, 198-202 Cable-Laid ....................................................25, 30 Chain ............................................................40-44 Gator-Flex® Grommets ........................................26 Gator-Laid® .........................................................27 Hitch Types ...............................................198-202 Nylon Web .........................................47-49, 52-54 Polyester Roundsling .........................................51 Reversed Eye......................................................51 Tri-Flex® ........................................................23-25 Twin-Path® .......................................................6, 15 Wide Lift ..............................................................50 Wire Mesh ....................................................45-46 Wire Rope .....................................................24-35Sling Protection ....................................................8-12 Cornermax® ...................................................10-11 Covermax® .........................................................8-9 Sleeves ...............................................................10 Shackle Pin Pad ................................................12 Synthetic Armor ..................................................11

Syn-Glide ..........................................................12Sockets ..........................................139-140, 148-154 Spelter ......................................................148-150 Swage .....................................................150-154 Wedge .....................................................139-140Spreader Beams ....................................................98Swivels .........................................................169-170Swivel Hoist Rings .......................................161,163Thimbles ......................................................146-147Tri-Flex® Slings .................................................23-25Turnbuckles ..................................................141-145Twin-Path® ..........................................................3-22 Abrasion .............................................................8 Check-Fast® ..................................................7, 15 Cornermax® ..................................................10-11 Covermax® .......................................................8-9 Equalizer Block ................................................16 Extra Covermax® Slings .....................................6 Field Taper .......................................................16 Inspection .....................................................7, 21 K-Spec® Core Yarn .............................................6 Mechanical Considerations .........................19-20 Rigging Practices .............................................17 RifledCover........................................................8 Shackle Pin Pad ...............................................12 Slings .............................................................6,15 Sparkeater Slings ..............................................15 Syn-Glide ..........................................................12 UV Resistance ....................................................9Wear Pads ..........................................................8-12Winches .................................................................87Winch Lines .....................................................81-86Windmill Lifting Brackets .......................................96Wire Mesh Slings ..............................................45-46Wire Rope ..........................................24-36, 176-190 6x19Classification.........................................177 6x36Classification.........................................178 Abrasion & Bending .................................181-182 Abuse ......................................................185-186 Aircraft Cable .................................................180 Breaking Strength ....................................187-188 Bridle Fittings ....................................................36 Clips .........................................................100-101 Cross Sections ...............................................176 D/d Ratio .........................................................189 High Performance ..........................................180 Inspection ................................................183-186 Rotation Resistant ..........................................179 Slings ...........................................................24-35


Innovative Lifting Solutions

Hanes Supply specializes in lifting solutions for a wide variety of applications. As a manu-facturer of Slingmax® slings we are proud to provide riggers with innovative products that

increase productivity and safety. The following product inventions provide benefits that make a rigger’s work easier, safer or more cost effective.

SYNTHETIC SLINGSTwin-Path® Synthetic roundslings for heavy lifting by Slingmax® Rigging Solutions are the only synthetic roundslings available that come equipped with the Check-Fast® External Warning Indicator, Covermax® Cover, and Rifled Cover® technology. Think Twin-Path® slings for all your heavy lifting and rigging needs.

INSPECTION METHODS

ABRASION PG. 8

SINGLE PATH PG. 15 ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE PG. 13-14

UV PG. 9

SPARKEATER PG. 15

CHECK-FAST PG. 7

TWIN-PATH PG. 6

NO EXPOSURE

500 Hrs EXPOSURE


Innovative Lifting Solutions

SYNTHETIC SLING PROTECTORS

SYNTHETIC SLING ACCESSORIES

WIRE ROPE SLINGS

Experts agree that over 80% of synthetic sling accidents are caused by cutting; always be SURE you have the correct Sling Protection for your specific lift!

TRI-FLEX PG. 25

SHACKLE PIN-PAD PG. 12

CORNER-MAX SLEEVE PG. 10

TWIN-PATH TAPER PG. 16

GATOR-FLEX GROMMETS PG. 26

SYNTHETIC ARMOR PG. 11

CORNER-MAX PAD PG. 11

EQUALIZER BLOCK PG. 16

GATOR-LAID PG. 27

SYN-GLIDE PG. 12


Twin-Path® Slings

TWIN-PATH®

SLINGS IN ACTION

88 ton Refinery Compressor with CornerMax™ Pads

Mark V Navy Assault Boat

Reactor Coolant Pump Motor

500 ton Steam Generator Replacement

Removal of 500 ton Bridge Decking Turbine Rotor


Twin-Path® Extra Covermax® Slings

UNITED STATESPATENT #4,850,629 RATED CAPACITIES (LBS.) 5:1 DF CANADIAN

PATENT #1,280,458

TWIN-PATH®

EXTRA COVERMAX®

STOCK NO.

VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET BASKET HITCHES APPROXIMATEWEIGHT

(LBS. PER FT.)(BEARING-BEARING)

NOMINALBODY WIDTH

(INCHES) 90° 60° 45°

TPXCCF/ TPXC 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .40 1.5 - 3

TPXCCF/ TPXC 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .45 1.5 - 3

TPXCCF/ TPXC 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .51 1.5 - 3

TPXCCF/ TPXC 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .57 1.5 - 3

TPXCCF/ TPXC 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .71 2.0 - 4

TPXCCF/ TPXC 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 .83 2.0 - 4

TPXCCF/ TPXC 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 1.14 2.5 - 5

TPXCCF/ TPXC 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.27 2.5 - 5

TPXCCF/ TPXC 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.39 2.5 - 5

TPXCCF/ TPXC 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.65 3.0 - 6

TPXCCF/ TPXC 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 1.84 3.0 - 6

TPXCCF/ TPXC 12500 125,000 100,000 250,000 216,500 176,750 2.35 4.0 - 8

TPXCCF/ TPXC 15000 150,000 120,000 300,000 259,800 212,100 2.66 4.0 - 8

TPXCCF/ TPXC 17500 175,000 140,000 350,000 303,100 247,450 3.14 5.0 - 10

TPXCCF/ TPXC 20000 200,000 160,000 400,000 346,400 282,800 3.45 5.0 - 10

TPXCCF/ TPXC 25000 250,000 200,000 500,000 433,000 353,500 4.07 5.0 - 10

TPXCCF/ TPXC 27500 275,000 220,000 550,000 476,300 388,850 4.61 6.0 - 12

TPXCCF/ TPXC 30000 300,000 240,000 600,000 519,600 424,200 4.92 6.0 - 12

TPXCCF/ TPXC 40000 400,000 320,000 800,000 692,800 565,600 6.54 7.0 - 14

TPXCCF/ TPXC 50000 500,000 400,000 1,000,000 866,000 707,000 8.15 8.0 - 16

TPXCCF/ TPXC 60000 600,000 480,000 1,200,000 1,039,000 848,000 10.20 9.0 - 18

TWIN-PATH® SLINGS WITH COVERMAX® COVER, K-SPEC® CORE YARN AND CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION SYSTEM

US Patent #7,926,859, #7,661,737, #7,568,333 CA #2,547,632EP #1,899,255 Japan #4,864,965 China #ZL200680017605.5

Twin-Path® synthetic roundslings have Check-Fast® Inspection overload indicators, Covermax® Covers for superior abrasion resistance, and inner red covers as an aid to inspection. Twin-Path® slings are used worldwide in place of steel rigging for heavy lifts. They are approximately 10% of the weight of a steel sling and are repairable. The Twin-Path® sling design, which has two individual paths of fiber working as one sling, gives the rigger confidence. These slings have less than 1% elongation at rated capacity. If productivity, safe-ty, and precision are important, then Twin-Path® high-performance roundslings are your best choice. Independent testing shows that K-Spec® core yarn is the longest lasting load-bearing core yarn in any sling.

NOTE: Capacitiesshownincludebothpathsandareforonecompletesling.Slingratingsbasedoncommercialfittingsofequalorgreater capacity. Conforms to ANSI/ASME B30.9 chapter 6, NAVFAC P-307 section 14.7.4.3, and the Cordage Institute Round-sling Standard. This chart is based on a 5:1 Design Factor (DF); but any other DF can be fabricated. Higher capacity slings are available. CAPACITIES ARE IN POUNDS (LBS.).

DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITYNOTE: When ordering a Twin-Path sling, the Check-Fast®Inspectionsystemisincludedunlessspecifiedotherwise.

WARNINGFollow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 180° F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.

!


Check-Fast® Inspection System

Patent US Patent #7,661,737 CA #2,547,632 EP #1,899,255The Check-Fast® Inspection System is designed to improve job site safety. The Check-Fast® External Warning Indicator (EWI) provides a criteria for pass/fail inspection when the internal load-bearing core yarn may be damaged. The Check-Fast® Inspection System can also indicate ultraviolet (UV) light degradation, fiber-on-fiber abrasion, fatigue, and severe overload. If the sling is overloaded beyond its rated capacity, the EWI is designed to retract before the sling fails. The sling inspector now has an objective “GO/NO-GO” inspection device rather than relying on subjective and labor-intensive inspection techniques to guess if the load-bearing core yarns are in good condition.

CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION SYSTEMNow available in Polyester or K-Spec® Single-Path and Twin-Path® Roundslings

Sacrificial strand (same material as sling core yarns)

Sacrificial strand recoils

“Weak Link” +/- 65% breaking strength vs. sling core yarns.

Weak Link fails from severe overload.

External Warning Indicator (E.W.I.)

External Warning Indicator pulls violently into the sling


Covermax® Covers

Any Twin-Path® sling can be made with a Covermax® cover. This is made of a heavy-duty, double layer industrial nylon material. The outside cover is green and the inside cover is red. If you see any red showing through the green cover, stop using the sling and get a repair evaluation. This cover has been tested to provide the best ultraviolet (UV) protection and the best abrasion protection of any commercially available synthetic lifting sling. Below are summary charts of the cover tests.

Rifled Cover® Technology is a major patented breakthrough only available on Slingmax® Twin-Path® high-performance fiber roundslings. Rifled Cover® Technology works like the inside of a rifle barrel, where the bullet spins as it leaves the muzzle of the gun. The helical winding of the core fibers signifi-cantly improves strength and efficiency.

Twin-Path® high-performance roundslings with patented Rifled Cover®

Technology yield three major advantages:1. Increased strength-to-weight ratio. 17% increased breaking strength with the same amount of core yarn.2. Consistent and predictable breaking strength for every sling.3. Repeatability in the manufacturing process.

COVERMAX® COVER - ABRASION

Roundsling Cover Abrasion Test Results

COVERMAX® RIFLED COVER TECHNOLOGYUS Patent #7,926,859

Covers

Cycle

s


Covermax® Protection

Ultra-Violet Light (UV) Resistance (Testing)Because of the Covermax® tubing’s thick dense structure the material restricts a vast majority of the ultra-violet rays that penetrate other roundsling covers.

Once synthetic slings have been selected, they then need to be protected. Web slings and roundslings can be quickly damaged from cutting and friction. In ASME B30.9 Slings it states, “Slings in contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or abrasive surfaces shall be protected with a material of sufficient strength, thickness, and construction to prevent damage”. Edges have varying degrees of danger. You should protect all edges. This removes all subjectivity from the workers guessing which edges protection and which may not. All edges can cut a sling. A sling’s design factor of 5:1 is not reached until the radius of the protected edge is approximately 1". THEREFORE: Slingmax® recommends cut protection for edges with a radius <1".

COVERMAX® COVER - UV RESISTANCE

SLING PROTECTION

NO EXPOSURE 500 Hrs EXPOSURE

FIBER TYPE

NO UV EXPOSURE

NO COVER

DBL YELLOW

POLY COVER

DBL ORANGE

DBL BLACK POLY COVER

COVERMAX® COVER

BASE LINE PERCENTAGE OF STRENGTH LOST AT 500 HOURS OF UV EXPOSURE TO COVERS / FIBER

POLYESTER 100% 36% 12% 9% 5% 2%

ARAMID 100% 28% 26% 27% 9% 2%

K-SPEC® 100% 12% – – – 1.13%

Chart 1: Sling Break Load vs. Edge Type

Edge Type

70,000

60,000

50,000

40,000

30,000

20,000

10,000

Knife 75° 90° 105° 1/64" 1/32" 1/16" 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 1"

WLL (12,800 LBS)

FS 2 (25,600 LBS)

Nylon

Polyester

Treated Polyester

0

Test

Loa

d (lb

s)


CornerMax® Sleeve (Cut Protection)

The CornerMax® Sleeve is the latest in rigging protection from SLINGMAX® Rigging Solutions. The CornerMax® Sleeve is the ideal solution to protect synthetic slings from cutting when it is not practical to use a CornerMax® Pad, whether due to curvature of the load edge or repetitive uses such as unloading steel coils. Independent field and laboratory testing has shown the CornerMax® Sleeve to be extremely cut resistant. The CornerMax® Sleeve is made with Dyneema® Fiber and is proven tough. To prevent sliding, the 6" wide CornerMax® Sleeve has been sewn down the middle (5") on each end of the Twin-Path® Extra Sling (pictured). The true benefits of this revolutionary material far outweigh the costs and now provide for the use of synthetic slings in applications previously dominated by heavy chain, mesh and wire rope slings

TWIN-PATH® Coil Sling• 10 times lighter than conventional steel coil gripper slings.• Chain and metal mesh slings require rigger to use a “fish hook” to grab & pull the sling through the coil. The Twin-Path® Coil Sling is so light that one underhanded toss is all you need. Also faster to make.• Will not damage the load.• Repairable as manufacturer can remove a damaged CornerMax™ sleeve & sew a new one to the sling.

CORNERMAX®

STOCK NO.EXTERNAL SLEEVE

WIDTH (IN)

FASTENED OVERBOTH LEGS OF

TWIN-PATH® SLING

CRNMXS03 5 UP TO TPXC 3,000




CORNERMAX™ PAD CUT PROTECTIONFollow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Damaged or misused protection can result in damage or sling failure. Inspect before each use. Inspect for cuts, tears or damage that may prevent protection of the sling. Ensure protection is the correct size & type to protect the sling. Prevent pads & sling from slipping or sliding across load edge. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use, maintenance &/or inspec-tion. MAXIMUM LOADING: Do NOT exceed 25,000 lbs. per inch of sling width.

WARNING!


Synthetic Armor™ Pads (Abrasion Protection)CornerMax® Pads (Edge Protection)

Synthetic Armor Pads protect slings from abrasion damage which can be caused by contact with rough surfaces such as concrete beams and structures. They are also used to protect finished or painted loads from marring. These wear pads can be made to fit any length or width sling. They can also be made in long lengths which the customer can cut into suitable sizes on the job. Double or triple thickness provides resistance for the more severe conditions. There is no maximum width and a variety of materials are used to protect slings & to protect loads.

SYNARM–SL “Sliding” SYNARM–RM “Removable”

SYNARM–EE “Eye and Eye”

CORNERMAX™ PAD CUT PROTECTIONFollow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Use only if trained. Damaged or misused protection can result in damage or sling failure. Inspect before each use. Inspect for cuts, tears or damage that may prevent protection of the sling. Ensure protection is the correct size & type to protect the sling. Prevent pads & sling from slipping or sliding across load edge. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use, maintenance &/or inspec-tion. MAXIMUM LOADING: Do NOT exceed 25,000 lbs. per inch of sling width.

CORNERMAX® PADSExposure of a sling to load edges or corners requires protection that is not susceptible to cutting because of toughness or zero contact. As shown in the photo below, the CornerMax® Pad forms a tunnel between the load edge and the pad. This geometric separation is essential in protecting the pad itself from contacting the load edge, which provides maximum protection to the sling.

CORNERMAX®

STOCK NO.SLING WIDTH

(INCHES)

CORNERMAXAPPROX WIDTH

(INCHES)

CORNERMAXAPPROX WEIGHT

(LBS)CRNMX02 1 & 2 4 1.00CRNMX03 3 5 1.25CRNMX04 4 6 1.50CRNMX05 5 8 2.00CRNMX06 6 8 2.00CRNMX08 8 10 2.50CRNMX10 10 12 3.00CRNMX12 12 16 5.50CRNMX14 14 18 6.50

US Patent #7,744,138

WARNING!


Shackle Pin PadsSyn-Glide

SHACKLE PIN PADSPatent Pending

The pin area of a shackle can damage synthetic slings. Placing synthetic slings on the pin should be avoided. Shackles have a sharp edge where the pin goes through the shackle ear. If the sling is rigged on this area, it can become severely damaged. If you must rig on the pin, protect your sling with a Shackle Pin Pad. The Shackle Pin Pad is sized for the model of shackle and protects the sling along the entire pin.

Syn-Glide Film is the only material available on the market today that reduces 70% of cover friction by allowing the cover to glide over itself or a piece of hardware. Syn-Glide is an important accessory for every rigger that works with Twin-Path® Slings. Syn-Glide is designed to eliminate the “bite” of the Covermax cover in situations where the cover is resting on itself when the weight of a load is applied. Syn-Glide will:

• Decrease cost of job• Eliminate large shackles & hardware• Increase job-site safety• Increase job speed• Significantly reduce the need for sling repair

SYN-GLIDE

Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkalis, ultraviolet light, sunlight & temperature above 180° F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.

WARNING!


Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLEUS Patent #5,651,572, #7,926,859 CA #2,195,393 EP #0785163 Japan #2929431 Australia #707924

The Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle (TPXA with K-Spec® core yarn, or TPA with polyester core yarn) is a two-leg bridle made with a Twin-Path® sling and an adjustable bridle ring. When tension is applied to the Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle, it self-adjusts until the lifting point is over the center of gravity. This allows the two legs to be adjusted for a level lift without the need for custom slings or hardware.

TWIN-PATH® ADJUSTABLE BRIDLE SPECIFICATIONS

STOCK NUMBERS

BRIDALCAPACITY

(LBS)

NOMINALSLING

WIDTH (IN)

ADJUSTABLE RING DIMENSIONS SHACKLE DIMENSIONS SLING WEIGHT (LBS.)

RING STOCKDIAMETER (IN)

MAIN HOOK AREA

(WIDTH)(IN)

RINGAREA

(LENGTH)(IN)

NOMINAL SHACKLE SIZE (IN)

TONNAGE(WLL)

APPROX3 FOOTBASE

APPROXADDER

PER FOOTTPA 06 6,000 2-1/2 1-3/16 3-1/8 2-5/8 5/8 3-1/4T 4.40 1.35

TPXA 12 12,000 3 1-1/8 4-1/8 4 7/8 6-1/2T 6.80 1.95TPXA 20 20,000 3 1-1/8 4-1/8 4 1-1/4 12T 13.60 2.70TPXA 40 40,000 4 1-5/8 5-1/4 5-1/2 1-3/4 25T 31.10 4.20TPXA 60 60,000 4 2 7 7-1/2 2 35T 60.00 5.70TPXA 90 90,000 5 2-1/4 8 8-1/2 2-1/4 55T 86.00 8.10

NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN ARE FOR ENTIRE BRIDLE ASSEMBLY WITH LEGS @ 45° ANGLE.DO NOT EXCEED RATED CAPACITY

METRIC CAPACITIES AVAILABLE


WARNING!


Twin-Path® Adjustable BridleThe Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle sling is a multi-purpose rigging tool and it’s important that it is used properly. The adjustment ring has a double sling on one side and a single sling on the other side.

If the lifting points are an equal distance from the cen-ter of gravity, then the Twin-Path® Adjustable can be hooked-up with the double or single sling on either lifting point.

If one of the lifting points is closer to the center of grav-ity, then attach the double sling to this lifting point. It will have the highest weight concentration. If the Twin-Path® Adjustable is attached so that the single sling is nearest the center of gravity, it will not allow the lift to be made.

If the lifting points are an equal distance on either side of the center of gravity but one is higher, then the dou-ble sling should be attached to the higher lifting point.

Never use the Twin-Path® Adjustable Bridle in situa-tions where the sling-to-hook angle is greater than 45°. Always connect above the center of gravity. If connec-tions are made below the center of gravity, then the load may turn when lifted.


WARNING!


Check-Fast® High Performance RoundslingsTwin-Path® Sparkeater Slings

SPARKEATER®

US Patent #4,850,629 CN Patent #1,280,458The Sparkeater® sling (SE) is the sling to use when the job site is in a hot environment (up to 300°F or 150°C). These slings are made with high-temperature core yarns and a high tempera-ture cover. Sparkeater® slings, as with all Twin-Path® slings, come with an inner red cover that provides an early warning for damage, as well as the patented Check-Fast® Inspection System.

US Patent #7,661,737, #7,926,859 CA #2,547,632 EP #1899255Slingmax® Single-Path Slings are the only single-path, high-performance fiber roundslings available with the Check-Fast® Inspection System and Covermax® Cover. The Covermax® Cover is the most durable cover available for a synthetic sling. Also available in polyester with a polyester cover and polyester core yarn.

NOTE: CAPACITIES SHOWN INCLUDE BOTH PATHS AND ARE FOR ONE COMPLETE SLING. SMALLER AND LARGER CAPACITIES AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS) 5:1 DF

SINGLE-PATH®

K-SPEC® SLINGS

STOCK NO.



NOMINALBODY WIDTH

(IN) 90° 60° 45°

SPXCF 500 5,000 4,000 10,000 8,660 7,070 .34 2.5SPXCF 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .38 2.5SPXCF 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .44 2.5SPXCF 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .52 2.5SPXCF 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .59 3SPXCF 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .65 3SPXCF 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 .85 3SPXCF 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 .98 4SPXCF 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.11 4SPXCF 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.24 4SPXCF 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.63 5SPXCF 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 1.81 5

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS) 5:1 DF

TWIN-PATH®

STOCK NO.



NOMINALBODY WIDTH

(IN) 90° 60° 45°

TPSE 1000 10,000 8,000 20,000 17,320 14,140 .40 1.5 - 3TPSE 1500 15,000 12,000 30,000 25,980 21,210 .45 1.5 - 3TPSE 2000 20,000 16,000 40,000 34,640 28,280 .51 1.5 - 3TPSE 2500 25,000 20,000 50,000 43,300 35,350 .57 1.5 - 3TPSE 3000 30,000 24,000 60,000 51,960 42,420 .71 2.0 - 4TPSE 4000 40,000 32,000 80,000 69,280 56,560 .83 2.0 - 4TPSE 5000 50,000 40,000 100,000 86,600 70,700 1.14 2.0 - 4TPSE 6000 60,000 48,000 120,000 103,920 84,840 1.27 2.0 - 4TPSE 7000 70,000 56,000 140,000 121,240 98,980 1.39 3.5 - 7TPSE 8500 85,000 68,000 170,000 147,220 120,190 1.65 3.5 - 7

TPSE 10000 100,000 80,000 200,000 173,200 141,400 1.84 3.5 - 7

DO

NO

T EX

CEE

D R

ATED

CA

PAC

ITY

SINGLE-PATH® EXTRA COVERMAX® WITH CHECK-FAST® INSPECTION


WARNING!


Equalizer BlockTwin-Path® Field Taper

Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or over-loaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from contact with edges. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.WARNING!

The Equalizer Block is used to maintain tension on all legs of the sling during a lift. Rather than adjusting slings and hooks prior to completing a lift, the Equalizer Block automatically adjusts itself when the load is put on the device from the sling. This product was designed specifically for Twin-Path® slings and is the only rolling block for synthetic roundslings.

PART NO. CAPACITY (5:1 DF)MAXIMUM SLING

WIDTH (IN)SUGGESTED SLING FOR 90°

BASKETBLOCK WEIGHT

(LBS)SEB10 10 US TON 3 TPXCF1000 44

SEB25 25 US TON 4 TPXCF2500 79



SEB125M 125 METRIC TON 8 TPXCF15000 640

Benefits: 1. Removable and transferable from sling to sling 2. Can be installed by the customer in the field 3. Bearing points can be changed throughout the sling length 4. Much quicker installation 5. Doesn’t contaminate a nuclear fuel pool 6. Easy inspection of sling after use

The Twin-Path® Field Taper is a removable, repositionable wrap that re-duces the width of TPXCF slings onsite. This is a tool that can be utilized to fit a sling into smaller openings without sacrificing sling capacity.

TWIN-PATH® FIELD TAPER

EQUALIZER BLOCK

Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions and abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkali and temperature over 180.WARNING!


Twin-Path® Rigging Practices

Keep folded and wrinkled sling covers off bearing points

Do not allow the sling to roll over itself and twist at inside the choker hitch

Do not fold one path over the other path to fit sling into tight fittings

Do not place the identification tag on the bearing point

Smooth folds and wrinkles out of the covers over the hook and hardware area with your hands

Makes sure the body of the sling paths run smooth in the choker hitch without any twisting

Squeeze both paths together to fit sling into tight hooks and fittings

Identification should be placed 18" - 24" away from the bearing point and facing away from the load

When placing multiple Twin-Path® slings in hardware place the slings directly on top of each other or side by side. When placing slings in narrow fittings squeeze sling to fit and maintain equal loading on the paths.

When connecting two slings with a shackle, do not place a sling over the pin area without protection

When connecting two slings with a shackle, use sling pro-tection over the pin to protect the sling from cutting

When rigging a basket hitch do not pull slack out of the hitch with the crane

When rigging a basket hitch, adjust slack out by hand, before lifting with the crane

When rigging a vertical hitch with a long sling don't pull the slack side out with the crane

When rigging a vertical hitch with a long sling equalize the slack side by hand

Sling can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Damaged sling shall not be used. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions and abrasive surfaces. Avoid exposure to acid, alkali and temperature over 180° F. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.

WARNING!


Twin-Path® Slings

40 ton Electric Transformer

F-15 Level Lift with Adjustable Bridles

220 ton Cement Kiln

90 ton Oil Rig Thruster

Transporting a 500 ton Electric Generator

Removing Nuclear Reactor Lid Sections

TWIN-PATH®

SLINGS... DO THE JOB


Use and Care

Mechanical Considerations1. Load both paths of Twin-Path® slings equally. Do not side load. Do not load the edge of the sling.2. Determine the weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling.3. Select a sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment.4. Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration shall be given to angle of lift which may affect the lifting capacity. Diameters of pins and edges also may affect the capacity of the lifting sling.5. Slings used in a choker shall not be forced to tighten around the load by pounding with hammers or other objects. Choker hitches are the least effective way to use a sling based on capacity. Two chokers should be used to balance the load. One choker in the center of the load may create an unbalanced situation which could lead to an accident.6. Slings used in a basket hitch must have the load balanced to prevent slippage and accidents.7. Slings used with fittings shall be compatible with the fittings used. The lifting capacity shall be rated at the lower of the fitting or sling. Fitting openings shall be of the proper shape and size to assure that the sling will seat properly.8. Slings in contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or abrasive surfaces shall be protected with a material of sufficient strength, thickness, and construction to prevent damage. The pin area of a shackle can cause synthetic slings to cut or tear.9. Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or drawn across other surfaces which may damage the sling.10. Slings shall not be twisted or tied in knots to shorten.11. Slings can be damaged by resting loads on them or by pulling slings from under a load.12. Do not drop objects on slings or run over them with vehicles.13. Slings which are damaged shall not be used.14. Sling hitches must provide control of the load.15. Portions of the human body shall be kept from between the sling and the load and from between the sling and any attachment to lifting devices such as hooks.16. Personnel shall stand clear of suspended loads.17. Personnel shall not ride on the sling or suspended loads.18. Avoid shock loading.19. Twisting and kinking the legs of the sling shall be avoided.20. Load applied to the hook should be centered in the bowl of the hooks. Do not point-load the hook.21. During lifting with or without the load all personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.22. The slings shall contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity so the load will not tilt when the load is lifted.


Use and Care

Mechanical Considerations23. Synthetic roundsling users shall be trained in the selection, inspection, cautions to personnel, effects of environment, and rigging practices.24. Only legibly marked or labeled slings must be used. If the tag is not legible, or missing, the sling must not be used.25. Keep labels or tags away from the load, the hook and the angle of choke.26. Synthetic slings should be inspected before each lift.

Environmental ConsiderationsK-Spec® core yarn strength retention is based on test results of components at 65°C/150°F (or less) for6 months. K-Spec® has a 100% strength retention when exposed to: age, 10% detergent solution, rot andmildew, sunlight and toluene; 99% strength retention when exposed to: acetic acid, gasoline, hydrochloricacid 1m, hydraulic fluid, kerosene, and sea water; 98% retention when exposed to: 25% ammoniumhydroxide, 10% hypophosphite solution, and 40% phosphoric acid; 97% retention when exposed to 5msodium hydroxide; 95% retention when exposed to Portland cement and sulfuric acid; and 88% retentionwhen exposed to Clorox® bleach, and nitric acid.

Fiber Characteristics

NYLON POLYESTER ARAMIDPOLY-ARYLATE

(LIQUID CRYSTAL) UHMwPE K-SPEC®

FIBER PROPERTIESTenacity - dry g/d 7.5 - 10.5 7.0 - 10.0 28 26 - 29 35 - 40 35

Elongation at break % 15 - 28 12 - 18 4.6 3.8 3.5 - 3.8 3.8

Moisture regain % 4.0 - 6 1 2 <0.10 0 0

Specific Gravity 1.14 1.38 1.38 1.41 .97 1.11

CHEMICAL RESISTANCE

Solvents Good Good Excel Excel Excel ExcelAcidsDilute:Conc:

GoodFair

GoodFair

GoodGood

Excel<90%

ExcelExcel

ExcelExcel

AlkalisDilute:Conc:

ExcelExcel

GoodFair

GoodGood

Excel<30%

ExcelExcel

ExcelExcel

TEMPERATURE TOLERANCE

Melt Point 425°F 490°F 900°F 625°F 300°F320°F

In use, Follow sling tag warning


Use and Care

Inspections of Twin-Path® Products1. Check-Fast® External Early Warning Indicator (EWI) and Tell-Tail indicators shall extend past the tag area of each sling. If your sling is equipped with Check-Fast® and the EWI is not visible or both Tell-Tails are not visible, remove the sling from service. Send to manufacturer for repair evaluation.2. If Fiber-Optic inspection is installed in the sling, inspect by allowing light to enter the fiber optics. If the fiber optics do not transmit light from end to end, remove the sling from service and contact the manufacturer for repair evaluation.3. Slings shall be inspected for evidence of cutting or tearing of the outer cover. Slings with cuts shall be removed from service and sent back to the manufacturer for repair evaluation. Damage to the cover may indicate core damage.4. Inspect slings for evidence of heat damage. Sparkeater® slings shall not be exposed to temperatures over 149 °C/300°F. K-Spec® and polyester slings shall not be exposed to temperatures above 82°C/180°F. Cold temperature exposure down to - 40°C/- 40°F do not affect the strength of the products.5. If any part of the sling shows evidence of chemical degradation or damage, remove the sling from service. Return the sling to the manufacturer for repair evaluation.6. Slings using aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays or mists of alkalis or acids are present.7. Twin-Path® lifting slings and any fittings attached shall be the subject of frequent and regular inspections. In addition to the initial inspection by a competent person and frequent written inspections, the slings shall be visually inspected before each use.8. Written inspections shall be performed as required and documents of such inspection by a competent person shall be kept on file in the safety department of the plant or site where used. Inspections may be done more often based on frequency of use, severity of conditions, experience of past service life.9. Slings shall be examined throughout their length for abrasion, cuts, heat damage, fitting distortion or damage, tag legibility, and if any doubts are held by the inspector, the sling shall be removed from service. If deterioration is found, the sling must be removed from service.10. Slings removed from service that are not repairable shall be destroyed and rendered completely unfit for future use.11. Abrasion, heat damage or cuts to the cover may indicate a loss of strength to the core yarns, and these slings shall not be used until evaluated by the manufacturer.

Test Procedures for Twin-Path® Sling Products1. Proof tests shall consist of pulling the slings to twice their rated capacity.2. Testing of Twin-Path® sling products and core yarn shall be on a testing machine which meets or exceeds the standards as described in ASME E-4.3. Break testing of slings shall be as above with results documented. Pin size for break testing should be a diameter equal to half the nominal sling width, or larger.4. Repaired fittings or slings shall be proof-tested before they are returned to service. Certifications may be provided to the fitting or sling owner.


Sling Reference Charts

PARTS OF WIRE ROPE IN BODY D/d BODY* D/d EYE*

TERMINATION OF EACH EYE MINIMUM LENGTH FEATURES

Tri-Flex® Sling 3 5/1 1.5/1 1 Ferrule 6' for 7/8"

component wire*

Good replacement for

single-strand wire rope slings

Gator-Laid® sling 9 5/1 1/1 3 Ferrules 6' for 3/4"

component wire*80%efficiency;

parallel-laid eyes

Gator-Flex®

grommet 9 5/1 N/A Hand tuck 5' for 1/4"component wire* Endless

* Ratio based onfinished

body diameter

* Ratio based onfinished

body diameter

* Minimum length increases as

component wire size increases

INSPECTION OF SLINGMAX® WIRE ROPE SLINGS1. Follow general criteria in ASME/ANSI B30.9 Chapter 9-2 “Wire Rope Slings - Selection, Use, and Maintenance”2. Retirement criteria: for Tri-Flex® slings of less than 9 parts, 20 broken wires per lay length means that the sling should be removed from service. For slings of 9 parts or more, 40 Broken wires per lay length means that the sling should be removed from service.

ADVANTAGES: FLEXIBILITY, LOW D/d RATIOS, GOOD LENGTH TOLERANCEMeets conditions specified by the Wire Rope Technical Board Sling Manual

QUICK REFERENCE CHART OF THE MOST POPULAR SLINGMAX®

HEAVY-LIFT WIRE ROPE SLINGS

RIGGING COMPARISONTYPES OF SLINGS

COMPARISONTWIN-PATH®

EXTRA SLINGSWIRE ROPE

SLINGSHPF ROPE

SLINGSALLOY CHAIN

SLINGSPOLYESTER

ROUNDSLINGSSYNTHETIC WEB

SLINGSHMPE ROPE

SLINGSWEIGHT Lightest Very Heavy Light Very Heavy 3 Times Heavier 3 Times Heavier Light

FLEXIBILITY Excellent Moderate Excellent Excellent Excellent Multi-ply stiff Excellent

ELONGATION Negligible Negligible Low Negligible Med to High High High

REPAIRABLE Yes No No Yes No No No

ABSORPTION No No No No No Yes Yes

CORROSION No Yes No Yes No No No

SAFETY FEATURES Yes No No No No No No

UV RESISTANT Yes Yes No Yes No No Minimal

ABRASION RESISTANT Best Syn. Yes No Yes No No No

BUOYANCY Yes Sinks Fast Yes Sinks Fast Sinks Sinks

CONDUCTIVITY No Yes No Yes No No No

SPARKING No Yes No Yes No No No


Tri-Flex® Slings

TRI-FLEX SLINGS IN ACTION


Tri-Flex® Wire Rope Slings

COMPOSED3 PARTS OF

EIP ROPE (IN)

DESIGN FACTOR 5:1 RATED LOAD IN TONS FINISHEDACTUAL

DIAMETER (IN)

WEIGHTPER FT.

LBS.VERTICAL CHOKER VERTICAL BASKET1/4 1.7 1.3 3.4 1/2 .44

5/16 2.6 1.9 5.2 5/8 .68

3/8 3.6 2.7 7.2 3/4 .99

7/16 4.9 3.7 9.8 7/8 1.33

1/2 6.4 4.8 12.8 1 1.75

9/16 8.0 6.0 16.0 1-1/8 2.24

5/8 9.9 7.4 19.8 1-1/4 2.73

3/4 14.0 10.5 28.0 1-1/2 3.9

7/8 19.0 14.3 38.0 1-3/4 5.4

1 24.8 18.6 49.6 2 7.0

1-1/8 31.2 23.4 62.4 2-1/4 8.9

1-1/4 38.4 28.8 76.8 2-1/2 10.0

1-3/8 46.0 34.5 92.0 2-3/4 13.3

1-1/2 55.0 41.2 110.0 3 15.8

1-3/4 73.0 54.8 146.0 3-1/2 21.5

2 95.0 71.2 190.0 4 28.0

2-1/4 118.0 88.5 236.0 4-1/2 35.6

2-1/2 145.0 109.0 290.0 5 44.0

TRI-FLEX® ENGINEERING INFORMATION

BASKET HITCH EQUALSD/d OF 5:1 USING

FINISHED DIAMETER

PIN SIZE EQUALSD/d OF 1.5:1 IN THE EYE USING

FINISHED DIAMETER

Patent #4,043,581

TRI-FLEX® WIRE ROPE SLINGS provide the best combination of strength and flexibility. Because of the patented TRI-FLEX® SLING construction, there is a large savings in material and machine costs in the larger sizes; this, combined with ease of use make TRI-FLEX® SLINGS the only sling for smart buyers.

Tri-Flex® Wire Rope Slings provide the best combination of strength and flexibility. Because of the Tri-Flex® sling construction, there is a large savings in material and machine costs in the larger sizes. This, combined with ease of use, makes Tri-Flex® Wire Rope Slings the slings for smart buyers.

Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Can fail if damaged, misused or overloaded. Inspect before each use. Use only if trained. Do not exceed rated capacity. Protect sling from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusions & abrasive surfaces. Avoid environments stated on Warning Tag. DEATH or INJURY can occur from improper use or maintenance.

WARNING!


NOTE: Vertical rated capacity is based on 5:1 Design Factor, EIP, IWRC, or GAC.Bending radius of the sling body is 5:1 where D is the Pin or Load and d is the sling body.D/d of loops: 1/1 where D is the pin and d is the sling body

Tri-Flex® with Cable Laid Wire Rope

This wire rope sling is an extremely flexible product with great applications for general rigging purposes. It makes a fantastic choker sling, especially when setting or removing utility poles.

COMPOSED 3 PARTS OF: (IN) VERTICAL (TONS) CHOKER (TONS) VERTICAL BASKET (TONS) FINISHED DIAMETER (IN)

1/4 1.3 .9 2.6 1/2

3/8 2.7 2.0 5.4 3/4

1/2 4.6 3.4 9.2 1

5/8 7.0 5.2 14.0 1-1/4

3/4 10.0 7.5 20.0 1-1/2

Inspect before each use. Follow OSHA, ANSI B30.9 and Manufacturer's Guidelines. Use by untrained persons is hazardous. Improper use will result in serious injury or death. Do not exceed rated capacity. This product will fail if damaged, abused, misused, overused or improperly maintained.WARNING!


Gator-Flex® Grommets

GATOR-FLEX® GROMMETSU.S. Patent #5,561,973

Gator-Flex® Grommets are endless for heavy lifts that re-quire short connections. These slings can be made shorter than standard multi-part slings. They are the most flexible grommets in the industry.

GATOR-FLEX® GROMMETS (D/d = 5:1)RATED CAPACITY AT 5:1 DF

PIN SIZE 5 x FDFINISHED DIA. (IN)

9 PTS.WIRE ROPE SIZE (IN)

TONS (2000 LBS) WEIGHTPER FT./LBS.VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET VERTICAL

1 1/4 10 7 20 2

1-1/4 5/16 15 11 30 3

1-1/2 3/8 22 15 44 5

1-3/4 7/16 29 21 58 6

2 1/2 38 27 76 8

2-1/4 9/16 48 34 96 11

2-1/2 5/8 59 42 118 13

3 3/4 85 59 170 19

3-1/2 7/8 115 81 230 25

4 1 148 104 296 33

4-1/2 1-1/8 187 131 374 42

5 1-1/4 230 161 460 52

5-1/2 1-3/8 276 194 552 63

6 1-1/2 328 230 656 75

7 1-3/4 441 308 882 102

8 2 570 399 1140 133

9 2-1/4 711 498 1422 168

10 2-1/2 870 609 1740 209

11 2-3/4 1040 728 2080 250

12 3 1224 857 2448 300


WARNING!


Gator-Laid® Wire Rope Slings

GATOR-LAID® WIRE ROPE SLINGSFor heavy lifting work, Gator-Laid® Wire Rope Slings are the most efficient and flexible wire rope slings that meet all industrial and regulatory standards. These slings have metal sleeves for the splice connection and parallel-laid wire in the eyes. It is a heavy-lift sling that can be made in short working lengths. Gator-Laid® products were developed in conjunction with the offshore oil industry to provide the world's best heavy lift wire rope slings.

GATOR-LAID® SLINGSTECHNICAL CHART

FINISHEDDIAMETER (IN)

COMPONENTPARTS (IN)

STANDARDEYE SIZE (IN)

VERTICAL RATED CAPACITY (TONS)

CHOKER RATED CAPACITY (TONS)

BASKET RATED CAPACITY (TONS)

WEIGHTPER FOOT (LBS)

1/2 1/8 8 1.4 1.0 2.8 .26

5/8 5/32 10 2.0 1.5 4.0 .40

3/4 3/16 12 3.0 2.2 6.0 .59

7/8 7/32 14 4.0 3.0 8.0 .77

1 1/4 16 4.8 3.6 9.6 .99

1-1/4 5/16 18 7.5 5.6 15.0 1.56

1-1/2 3/8 20 10.5 7.8 21.0 2.19

1-3/4 7/16 22 14.6 10.9 29.2 3.15

2 1/2 24 19.1 14.3 38.2 4.14

2-1/4 9/16 26 24.1 18.0 48.2 5.13

2-1/2 5/8 28 29.6 22.2 59.2 6.48

3 3/4 30 42.3 31.7 84.6 9.36

3-1/2 7/8 35 57.3 42.9 114.6 12.78

4 1 40 74.4 55.8 148.4 16.65

4-1/2 1-1/8 45 93.6 60.2 187.2 21.06

5 1-1/4 50 115.0 86.2 230.0 26.01

5-1/2 1-3/8 55 138.2 103.6 276.4 31.50

6 1-1/2 60 164.0 123.0 328.2 37.44

7 1-3/4 70 220.3 165.2 440.6 51.03

8 2 80 285.1 213.8 570.2 66.51

9 2-1/4 90 355.6 266.7 711.2 84.24

10 2-1/2 100 434.8 326.1 869.6 104.00

NOTE: Rated capacity is based on 5:1 Design Factor.


WARNING!


Hand-Spliced Slings

NO. 100 B

The end of a single wire rope is turned back along the rope to form the eye, and strands are hand-tucked into the body of the rope. There are two styles available: 1: Standard Four Tuck burnt-end splice. The strands are left exposed, cut off and fused with a torch.2: The tapered and concealed splice utilizes tension in the rope body to secure strands where they are tucked back into the rope. The center core of either fiber or wire is removed along the length of the splice. When “tapered and concealed”, ends of strands are tucked inward and concealed inside the rope.Standard Four tuck and tapered and concealed slings have the same rated capacity for each available diameter of wire rope.

WARNING: Hand-spliced slings should not be used in lifts where the sling may rotate and cause the wire rope to unlay.

DIAMETEROF ROPE (IN)

MIN LENGTH (SL)OF SLING (FT-IN)

LOOPDIMENSIONS

RATED CAPACITIES IN TONS (2000 LBS)

6 X 19 AND 6 x 37 EIPS ROPE - FIBERCORE & IWRC

W(IN)

L(IN)

SINGLE LEGVERTICAL

CHOKERHITCH

BASKET HITCH

60°

45°

30°1/4 1-9 2 4 0.54 0.42 0.94 0.77 0.54

5/16 2 2-1/2 5 0.83 0.66 1.4 1.2 0.833/8 2-6 3 6 1.2 0.94 2.0 1.7 1.27/16 2-9 3-1/2 7 1.6 1.3 2.7 2.2 1.61/2 3 4 8 2.0 1.6 3.5 2.9 2.09/16 3-6 4-1/4 9 2.5 2.1 4.4 3.6 2.55/8 4 5 10 3.1 2.6 5.3 4.4 3.13/4 4-6 6 12 4.3 3.7 7.4 6.1 4.37/8 5-6 7 14 5.7 5.0 9.8 8.0 5.71 6 8 16 7.4 6.4 13 10 7.4

1-1/8 6-6 9 18 9.3 8.1 16 13 9.31-1/4 7 10 20 11 9.9 20 16 11

Rated capacities of choker hitches apply when the angle of choke is greater than 120°.Rated capacities of basket hitches are based on a minimum diameter of curvature at the point of load contact of 25 times the rope diameter.


WARNING!

The Wayne special- Wayne Printup who was a Native American Ironworker who came up with the idea of having one loop hand Tuck and the other loop Flemished eye.


Mechanical SpliceFlemish Eye Slings NO. 105 BEyes are formed using the flemish eye splice. Ends are secured by pressing a metal sleeve over the ends of the strands of the splice. Pull is directly along the centerline of rope & eye. Gives most effi-cient use of rope capacity & is economical.

Swaging Provides Positive GripThis cutaway of a metal sleeve swaged onto a splice shows how metal “flows” into valleys between strands to positively prevent ends from unlaying when sling is used within its rated capacity.

Flemish Eye SpliceIn the standard flemish eye me-chanical splice, rope is separat-ed into two parts – 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent strands and core. These two parts are then re-laid back in opposite directions to form an eye, and ends are secured with a pressed metal sleeve.

DIAMETEROF ROPE (IN)

MIN LENGTH (SL)OF SLING (FT-IN)

LOOP DIMENSIONSRATED CAPACITIES IN TONS (2000 LBS)

6 X 19 AND 6 X 37 EIPS ROPE - IWRC

W(IN)

L(IN)

SINGLE LEGVERTICAL

CHOKERHITCH

BASKET HITCH

60°

45°

30°1/4 1 - 6 2 4 0.65 0.48 1.1 .91 .655/16 1 - 9 2-1/2 5 1.0 0.74 1.7 1.4 1.03/8 2 3 6 1.4 1.1 2.5 2.0 1.47/16 2 - 3 3-1/2 7 1.9 1.4 3.4 2.7 1.91/2 2 - 6 4 8 2.5 1.9 4.4 3.6 2.59/16 2 - 9 4-1/2 9 3.2 2.4 5.5 4.5 3.25/8 3 5 10 3.9 2.9 6.8 5.5 3.93/4 3 - 6 6 12 5.6 4.1 9.7 7.9 5.67/8 4 7 14 7.6 5.6 13 11 7.61 4 - 6 8 16 9.8 7.2 17 14 9.8

1-1/8 5 9 18 12 9.1 21 17 121-1/4 5 - 6 10 20 15 11 26 21 151-3/8 6 11 22 18 13 31 25 181-1/2 7 12 24 21 16 37 30 211-3/4 8 14 28 28 21 49 40 28

2 9 16 32 37 28 63 52 372-1/4 10 18 36 44 35 77 63 442-1/2 11 20 40 54 42 94 77 542-3/4 12 22 44 65 51 113 92 65

3 13 24 48 77 60 133 108 773-1/2 16 - 6 32 64 102 79 176 144 1023-3/4 18 36 72 115 90 199 163 115

4 20 40 80 130 101 225 184 1304-1/2 24 50 100 160 124 277 226 160

*Rated capacities of basket hitches are based on a minimum diameter of curvature at the point of load contact of 40 times the rope diameter for slings 1/4" thru 1" diameter and 25 times the rope diameter for slings 1-1/4" diameter and larger.


WARNING!


Cable-Laid Slings

Swaging Provides Positive GripThis cutaway of a metal sleeve swaged onto a splice shows how metal “flows” into valleys between strands to posi-tively prevent ends from unlaying when sling is used within its rated capacity.

Flemish Eye SpliceIn the standard flemish eye mechanical splice, rope is separated into two parts – 3 adjacent strands, and 3 adjacent strands and core. These two parts are then re-laid back in opposite directions to form an eye, and ends are secured with a pressed metal sleeve.

NO. 108C These smooth and very flexible slings are made from cut lengths of cable-laid fabric that is machine formed by laying six wire ropes in a helical pattern around a core rope. Flemish eye mechanical splices, secured by pressed metal sleeves, provide centerline pull at the eyes. More flexible than same capacity single-part slings.

Ideal for use as basket or choker hitches, where flexibility and ease of handling are essential and cutting or abrasion is not a critical factor.

Sling Bodiesare made from

7 IndividualWire Ropes

BODYDIA(IN)

RATED CAPACITY (TONS)

LOOPSLIP THRUTHIMBLE

ST

HEAVYTHIMBLE

HT

SLIP-ONTHIMBLE

QTVERT CHOKER

BASKET HITCH

60° 45° 30° A B

7x7x

7

1/4 .50 .34 1.0 .87 .71 .50 2 4 W-2 1/4 3/8

3/8 1.1 .74 2.2 1.9 1.5 1.1 3 6 W-2 3/8 3/8

1/2 1.9 1.3 3.7 3.2 2.6 1.9 4 8 W-3 1/2 1/2

5/8 2.8 1.9 5.5 4.8 3.9 2.8 5 10 W-4 5/8 5/8

7x7x

19

3/4 4.1 2.8 8.1 7.0 5.8 4.1 6 12 W-4 3/4 3/4

7/8 5.4 3.7 11 9.4 7.6 5.4 7 14 W-5 7/8 7/8

1 6.9 4.7 14 12 9.7 6.9 8 16 W-5 1 1

1-1/8 8.3 5.8 17 14 12 8.3 9 18 W-6 1-1/8

1-1/4 9.9 7.0 20 17 14 9.9 10 20 W-6 1-1/4E-E ST-ST HT-HT OT-OTA

B

LENG

TH


WARNING!


Grommet Slings

Rated Capacities Basket Hitch and vertical lift based on D/d ratio of 5 when “d” is diameter of the finished grommet.Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no smaller than5x the body diameter.Rated capacities based on design factor of 5.Sling angles of less than 30 degrees shall not be used.

CABLE LAID GROMMETWIRE ROPE SLINGS

Cable Laid Grommets have six wire ropes laid helically around a wire rope core, with ends joined either by a hand-tucked or a mechanical splice to form an endless body. Highly flexible, they resist kinks and are easy to handle. Minimum circumference of the sling is 96 times the grommet body diameter.

NO. 21 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) NO. 15 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.)

Hand-TuckedContinuous Construction...

made from one continuous wire rope

Mechanical Splice7 Parts of Wire Rope

in the Sling Body

EIPCOMPONENTROPE DIA (IN)

FINISHEDSLINGBODY

DIA (IN) VERT CHOKER

BASKET HITCHES

VERTICAL 60° 45° 30°

7 X 7 X 7 GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE

1/8 3/8 1.6 1.0 3.2 12.8 2.2 1.6

3/16 9/16 3.5 2.3 6.9 6.0 4.9 3.5

7/32 5/8 4.5 2.9 9.0 7.8 6.4 4.5

7 X 6 X 9 & 7 X 6 X 37 - EIP

1/4 3/4 5.6 3.6 11 9.7 7.9 5.6

5/16 15/16 8.7 5.6 17 15 12 8.7

3/8 1-1/8 12 8.0 25 21 17 12

7/16 1-5/16 17 11 33 29 23 17

1/2 1-1/2 21 14 43 37 30 21

9/16 1-11/16 27 17 53 46 38 27

5/8 1-7/8 33 21 66 57 46 33

3/4 2-1/4 46 30 92 80 65 46

7/8 2-5/8 62 40 123 107 87 62

1 3 79 51 158 137 112 79

1-1/8 3-3/8 98 64 196 170 138 98

1-1/4 3-3/4 119 77 237 205 168 119

FINISHEDSLINGBODY

DIA (IN) VERT CHOKER

BASKET HITCHES

VERTICAL 60° 45° 30°7 X 7 X 19 CONSTRUCTION

1/4 .83 .54 1.7 1.4 1.2 .83

3/8 1.8 1.2 3.6 3.1 2.5 1.8

1/2 3.0 2.0 6.1 5.3 4.3 3.0

5/8 4.6 3.0 9.1 7.9 6.4 4.6

7 x 6 x 9 & 7 x 6 x 37 - EIP CONSTRUCTION

3/4 6.2 4.1 11 11 8.8 6.2

7/8 8.3 5.4 17 14 12 8.3

1 11 6.8 25 18 15 11

1-1/8 13 8.4 33 22 18 13

1-1/4 16 10 43 27 22 16

1-3/8 18 12 53 32 26 18

1-1/2 22 14 66 38 31 22

1-5/8 25 16 92 44 36 25

1-3/4 28 18 123 49 40 28


Grommet Slings

Rated Capacities Basket Hitch and vertical lift based on D/d ratio of 5 when “d” is diameter of the finished grommet.Rated Capacities based on pin diameter no smaller than 5x the body diameter.Sling angles of less than 30 degrees shall not be used

STRAND LAID GROMMET WIRE ROPE SLINGSStrand Laid Grommets have either a wire rope body, or a body of six strands laid helically around a fiber or strand core, with either a hand tucked or a mechanical splice to form an endless sling body. Minimum circumference of the sling is 96 times the grommet body diameter.

NO. 11 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.) NO. 14 B Rated Capacity - Tons (2,000 lbs.)

Hand-TuckedContinuous Construction...

made from one continuous wire rope

Mechanical Splice7 Parts of Wire Rope

in the Sling Body

6 X 19 CLASS - FC EIPS

SLINGBODYDIA.(IN) VERT CHOKER

BASKET HITCHES


1/4 0.94 0.66 1.9 1.6 1.3 0.94

5/16 1.5 1.0 2.9 2.5 2.1 1.5

3/8 2.1 1.5 4.2 3.6 3.0 2.1

7/16 2.8 2.0 5.7 4.9 4.0 2.8

1/2 3.7 2.6 7.3 6.4 5.2 3.7

9/16 4.6 3.2 9.3 8.0 6.6 4.6

5/8 5.7 4.0 11 9.9 8.1 5.7

3/4 8.2 5.7 16 14 12 8.2

7/8 11 7.7 22 19 16 11

1 14 10 29 25 20 14

1-1/8 18 12 35 31 25 18

1-1/4 21 15 43 37 30 21

1-3/8 25 18 51 44 36 25

1-1/2 30 21 60 52 42 30

1-5/8 34 24 69 60 49 34

1-3/4 40 28 79 69 56 40

1-7/8 45 31 89 77 63 45

2 50 35 101 87 71 50

2-1/8 56 39 112 97 79 56

2-1/4 62 43 124 107 88 62

2-3/8 68 48 137 118 97 68

2-1/2 75 52 149 129 106 75

2-3/4 89 62 177 154 125 89

3 95 67 191 180 147 104

6 X 19 & 6 X 37 CLASS - IWRC EIPS

SLINGBODYDIA.(IN) VERT CHOKER

BASKET HITCHES


1/4 1.1 0.74 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.1

5/16 1.6 1.2 3.3 2.8 2.3 1.6

3/8 2.4 1.6 4.7 4.1 3.3 2.4

7/16 3.2 2.2 6.4 5.5 4.5 3.2

1/2 4.1 2.9 8.3 7.2 5.9 4.1

9/16 5.2 3.7 10 9.1 7.4 5.2

5/8 6.4 4.5 13 11 9.1 6.4

3/4 9.2 6.4 18 16 13 9.2

7/8 12 8.7 25 22 18 12

1 16 11 32 28 23 16

1-1/8 20 14 41 35 29 20

1-1/4 25 17 50 43 35 25

1-3/8 30 21 60 52 42 30

1-1/2 36 25 71 62 50 36

1-5/8 41 29 82 71 58 41

1-3/4 48 33 95 83 68 48

1-7/8 54 38 109 94 77 54

2 62 43 124 107 87 62

2-1/8 69 48 138 119 98 69

2-1/4 77 54 154 133 109 77

2-3/8 85 60 171 148 121 85

2-1/2 94 66 188 163 133 94

2-3/4 113 79 225 195 159 113

3 133 93 265 230 188 133


2 Leg Wire Rope Bridles

For approximate capacities using Fibre Core IPS: deduct 10% from IPS-IWRC strengths. For approximate capacities on Hand Braided Slings: deduct 15% from corresponding mechanically swaged strengths. For approximate capacities on Socket Attachments: add 5% to corresponding IWRC swaged strengths.

DIAMETER OFWIRE ROPE (IN)

MINIMUM LENGTH

(SL) OF SLING (FT - IN)

ALLOYOBLONG

LINKS DIAMETER

(IN)

RATED CAPACITIES (TONS) EIPS-IWRC

60° 45° 30°

1/4 1 - 3 1/2 1.10 0.91 0.65

5/16 1 - 6 1/2 1.70 1.40 1.00

3/8 1 - 8 3/4 2.50 2.00 1.40

7/16 1 - 10 3/4 3.40 2.70 1.90

1/2 2 - 0 3/4 4.40 3.60 2.50

9/16 2 - 2 1 5.50 4.50 3.20

5/8 2 - 4 1 6.80 5.50 3.90

3/4 2 - 9 1-1/4 9.70 7.90 5.60

7/8 3 - 3 1-1/4 13.00 11.00 7.60

1 3 - 6 1-1/2 17.00 14.00 9.80

1-1/8 4 - 0 1-3/4 21.00 17.00 12.0

1-1/4 4 - 6 1-3/4 26.00 21.00 15.0

1-3/8 5 - 0 2 31.00 25.00 18.0

1-1/2 5 - 6 2-1/4 37.00 30.00 21.0

1-5/8 6 - 0 2-1/2 42.00 35.00 24.0

1-3/4 6 - 6 2-1/2 49.00 40.00 28.0

2 8 - 0 2-3/4 63.00 52.00 37.0

2-1/4 8 - 9 3-1/4 77.00 63.00 44.0

2-1/2 10 - 0 3-3/4 94.00 77.00 54.0

No. 200 Series

Slings are 2-leg all-purpose bridles, designed for general lifting purposes where attachment may be made directly to the load, such as hooking into lifting eyes or placing loops over lugs.

200FL2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Flemish Loops on bottom.

200HT2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Heavy Duty Thimbles on bottom.

200EH2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Eye Hoist Hooks Safety Latches on bottom.

200SPA2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Screw Pin An-chor Shackle on bottom.

200CT2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Crescent Thimble on bottom.

200OS2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Open Swage Socket on bottom.

200CS2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Closed Swage Socket on bottom.

200BAS2 leg – Oblong link with heavy duty thimbles on top and Bolt Anchor Shackle on bottom.





MINIMUM LENGTH

(SL)OF SLING(FT - IN)

ALLOYOBLONG

LINKSDIAMETER

(IN)


60° 45° 30°

1/4 1 - 3 1/2 1.70 1.40 0.97

5/16 1 - 6 3/4 2.60 2.10 1.50

3/8 1 - 8 3/4 3.70 3.00 2.20

7/16 1 - 10 1 5.00 4.10 2.90

1/2 2 - 0 1 6.60 5.40 3.80

9/16 2 - 2 1 8.30 6.80 4.80

5/8 2 - 4 1-1/4 10.0 8.30 5.90

3/4 2 - 9 1-1/2 15.0 12.0 8.40

7/8 3 - 3 1-1/2 20.0 16.0 11.0

1 3 - 6 1-3/4 26.0 21.0 15.0

1-1/8 4 - 0 2 31.0 26.0 18.0

1-1/4 4 - 6 2-1/4 38.0 31.0 22.0

1-3/8 5 - 0 2-3/4 46.0 38.0 27.0

1-1/2 5 - 6 2-3/4 55.0 45.0 32.0

1-5/8 6 - 0 2-3/4 63.0 52.0 37.0

1-3/4 6 - 6 3 74.0 60.0 42.0

2 8 - 0 3-1/2 95.0 78.0 55.0

2-1/4 8 - 9 4 116.0 94.0 67.0

2-1/2 10 - 0 4-1/2 141.0 115.0 82.0

No. 300 Series

Slings are 3-leg all-pur-pose bridles, generally recommended for handling unbalanced loads.













MINIMUM LENGTH

(SL)OF SLING(FT - IN)

ALLOYOBLONG

LINKSDIAMETER

(IN)


60° 45° 30°

1/4 1 - 3 1/2 2.20 1.80 1.30

5/16 1 - 6 3/4 3.50 2.80 2.00

3/8 1 - 8 1 5.00 4.10 2.90

7/16 1 - 10 1 6.70 5.50 3.90

1/2 2 - 0 1-1/4 8.80 7.10 5.10

9/16 2 - 2 1-1/4 11.0 9.00 6.40

5/8 2 - 4 1-1/4 14.0 11.0 7.80

3/4 2 - 9 1-3/4 19.0 16.0 11.0

7/8 3 - 3 1-3/4 26.0 21.0 15.0

1 3 - 6 2-1/4 34.0 28.0 20.0

1-1/8 4 - 0 2-3/4 42.0 34.0 24.0

1-1/4 4 - 6 2-3/4 51.0 42.0 30.0

1-3/8 5 - 0 3-1/4 62.0 50.0 36.0

1-1/2 5 - 6 3-3/4 73.0 60.0 42.0

1-5/8 6 - 0 3-3/4 85.0 69.0 49.0

1-3/4 6 - 6 4-1/2 98.0 80.0 57.0

2 8 - 0 4-1/2 127.0 104.0 73.0

2-1/4 8 - 9 CALL 154.0 126.0 89.0

2-1/2 10 - 0 CALL 188.0 154.0 109.0

No. 400 Series

Slings are 4-leg all-pur-pose bridles, used both for balanced and unbalanced loads and for heavier loads where design calls for more distribution of weight by the use of attachment at four points.










Wire Rope Bridle End Fittings

DIAOF

WIREROPE

(IN)

STANDARDLOOP INSIDE

HEAVY DUTYTHIMBLE INSIDE

ALLOYHOOKSIZE

(TONS)IPS & EIPS

CARBONSHACKLE SIZE (IN)

1/2 THIMBLE INSIDELOOP SIZE (TONS)

OPENSWAGE SOCKET

CLOSEDSWAGE SOCKET

W(IN)

L(IN)

W(IN)

L(IN)

FORIPS

FOREIPS

W(IN)

L(IN)

W(IN)

JAWOPENING

(IN)HOLE DIA

(IN)

HEADTHICKNESS

(IN)

6 x 19 - WITH IWRC

1/4 2 4 7/8 1-5/8 1 5/16 5/16 – – 11/16 11/16 3/4 1/2

5/16 2-1/2 5 1-1/16 1-7/8 1 3/8 3/8 – – 13/16 13/16 7/8 11/16

3/8 3 6 1-1/8 2-1/8 1-1/2 7/16 7/16 2 4 13/16 13/16 7/8 11/16

7/16 3-1/2 7 1-1/4 2-3/8 2 1/2 1/2 2-1/4 5 1 1 1-1/16 7/8

1/2 4 8 1-1/2 2-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 2-1/4 5-1/2 1 1 1-1/16 7/8

9/16 4-1/2 9 1-1/2 2-3/4 5 5/8 5/8 2-1/4 5-1/2 1-3/16 1-1/4 1-1/4 1-1/8

5/8 5 10 1-3/4 3-1/4 5 3/4 3/4 3-1/4 7 1-3/16 1-1/4 1-7/16 1-1/8

3/4 6 12 2 3-3/4 7 7/8 7/8 3-1/4 9 1-3/8 1-1/2 1-11/16 1-5/16

7/8 7 14 2-1/4 4-1/4 11 1 1 4-1/2 10-1/2 1-3/8 1-3/4 1-11/16 1-1/2

1 8 16 2-1/2 4-1/2 11 1-1/4 1-1/8 4-1/2 12 2 2 2-1/16 1-3/4

1-1/8 9 18 2-7/8 5-1/8 15 1-1/4 1-1/4 4-5/8 13-1/2 2-1/4 2-1/4 2-5/16 2

6 x 37 - WITH IWRC

1-1/4 10 20 2-7/8 5-1/8 15 1-3/8 1-3/8 5-1/2 15 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-9/16 2-1/4

1-3/8 11 22 3-1/2 6-1/4 22 1-1/2 1-1/2 6 17 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-9/16 2-1/4

1-1/2 12 24 3-1/2 6-1/4 22 1-3/4 1-3/4 6-1/2 18 2-3/4 3 2-16/16 2-1/2

1-5/8 13 26 4 8 30 1-3/4 2 6-1/2 18 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-9/16 3

1-3/4 14 28 4-1/2 9 30 2 2-1/2 7 21-1/2 3-1/2 3-1/2 3-9/16 3

2 16 32 6 12 37 2-1/2 2-1/2 7 24-1/2 3-3/4 4 3-16/16 3-1/4

2-1/4 18 36 7 14 45 2-1/2 3 8-1/2 25-12 4-1/4 4-1/4 4-5/16 4

2-1/2 20 40 – – 60 3 3 8-1/2 26-1/2 4-1/4 4-1/4 4-5/16 4

2-3/4 22 44 – – – 3 3 10 30 – – – –

3 24 48 – – – 3 3-1/2 10 32 – – – –

3-1/4 – – – – – 3-1/2 3-1/2 – – – – – –

3-1/2 – – – – – 3-1/2 4 – – – – – –

3-3/4 – – – – – 4 4 – – – – – –

4 – – – – – – – – – – – – –

PERTINENT DIMENSIONS FOR END FITTINGS FOR NO. 200, 300 & 400 SERIES SLINGS


Chain Sling Assembly

BASIC TYPES OF CHAIN SLINGSBasic types of chain slings are designated throughout the industry by the following symbols:First Symbol (basic type): S - Single chain sling with master link and hook, or hook at each end. C - Choker chain sling with master link on each end; no hooks. D - Double chain sling with standard master link and hooks. T - Triple chain sling with standard master link and hooks. Q - Quadruple chain sling with master link and hooks.Second Symbol (type of master link or end link): O - Oblong master link – Recommended standard for all types. P - Pear shaped master link – Available on request.Third Symbol (type of hook): S - Sling hook G - Grab hook F - Foundry hook L - Latchlok hookSling tags are coded with numerals 1 through 4 to reflect number of branches in sling. Additional coding is defined as follows: AS - Adjustable sling SB - Single Basket ES - Endless single ED - Endless double SAL - Single adjustable loop DAL - Double adjustable loop AD - Adjustable double DB - Double basket

HOW TO SELECT & ORDER THE PROPER CHAIN SLING1. Determine the weight and configuration of the load(s) to be lifted.2. Determine the type of chain sling required, according to weight and configuration.3. Determine the size of the body chain according to the working load

limits. Be sure to take into consideration the effect of the required angle. Working Load Limit: The working load limit is the maximum load in

pounds which should ever be applied to chain, even when chain is new, and when load is uniformly applied in direct tension to a straight length of chain.

4. Determine the reach required to give the desired angle. The reach is measured from the upper bearing surface of the master link to the bearing surface of the lower attachment. If chain slings are to be used in pairs & are to be matched for reach, please indicate when ordering.

5. Be sure to specify type, size and reach when ordering chain slings. For specifications on additional hooks, attachments and accessories, refer to the following pages.

Note: Angle to the load on multiple leg slings will be 60° or greater as long as the distance between lifting eyes of load is NOT greater than reach shown on Identification Tag.

GRADE 80 AND 100 CHAIN SLING ASSEMBLY

Type TOS

LOAD

ANGLE

SLING HOOKREAC

H AS

REQ

UIRE

D

MASTEROBLONG

LINK


Alloy Chain Slings

GRADE 80 ALLOY SINGLE CHAIN SLINGS

GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN AND ATTACHMENTS CONVERSION TABLE

GRADE 80 ALLOY CHAIN SIZES AND WORKING LOAD LIMITS

A higher strength heat treated alloy steel chain, Grade 80 Alloy chain is primarily used as a sling com-ponent for overhead lifting, but can be used in rigging and tie down applications where a lighter weight high strength chain is desirable. Recommended for over-head lifting by NACM, ANSI, & OSHA.Grade 80 Alloy chain slings and attachments are manufactured from special analysis alloy steel, engineered for a superior combination of strength, lightness & durability.All Grade 80 chain and attachments are black finish &/or color coded orange for easy, permanent iden-tification. The chain is embossed with the grade & trace code.

Before shipment, all Grade 80 chain slings undergo a succession of demanding quality control checks. Every sling is proof tested, registered and guaranteed for one year to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. A durable metal tag attached to the sling permanently identifies the grade, type, working load limit (at a specific angle of lift) and registration number of the sling.Chain slings are used primarily for overhead lifting and are generally used in conjunction with a crane or some type of lifting device. Standard sling configura-tions consist of chain branches which are affixed on one end to a master link or ring with some type of at-tachment, usually a hook, affixed to the opposite end.

CHAIN SIZEFRACTION (IN) DECIMAL (IN) METRIC (MM)

HOOK SIZE DESIGNATION AND MARKINGSSLING CRADLE GRAB FLAT GRAB FOUNDRY LATCHLOK

7/32 .218 5.5 HA22 10M 10M – – 9/32 .281 7.0 HA220 HA9/32 HA1 HA498 9/32 3/8 .394 10.0 HA250 HA3/8 HA3 HA499 3/8 1/2 .512 13.0 HA280 HA1/2 HA5 HA500 1/2 5/8 .630 16.0 HA290 HA5/8 HA6 HA501 5/8 3/4 .787 20.0 HA300 HA3/4 HA7 HA502 3/4 7/8 .875 22.0 HA320 HA7/8 HA8 HA503 – 1 1.024 26.0 HA330 HA1 HA9 HA504 – 1-1/4 1.260 32.0 HA350 HA1-1/4 HA11 HA505 –

90° 60° 45° 30° 60° 45° 30°

WORKING LOAD LIMITS (LBS) NOMINAL DIMENSIONS (IN)

APPROX.NO.

LINKSPER FT

APPROX.WEIGHT

PER 100 FT (LBS)

CHAIN SIZE(IN) (MM)

PRODUCTCODE

SINGLE90°

DOUBLE60° 45° 30°

TRIPLE & QUAD60° 45° 30°

INSIDE LENGTH

INSIDE WIDTH

7/32 5.5 607020 2,100 3,600 3,000 2,100 5,450 4,450 3,150 .671 .296 17.9 44.7

9/32 7.0 607028 3,500 6,100 4,900 3,500 9,100 7,400 5,200 .868 .395 13.8 74.23/8 10.0 607037 7,100 12,300 10,000 7,100 18,400 15,100 10,600 1.222 .572 9.8 145.91/2 13.0 607050 12,000 20,800 17,000 12,000 31,200 25,500 18,000 1.101 .720 8.5 257.75/8 16.0 607062 18,100 31,300 25,600 18,100 47,000 38,400 27,100 1.733 .854 6.9 387.33/4 20.0 607075 28,300 49,000 40,000 28,300 73,500 60,000 42,400 2.160 1.052 5.5 622.0

7/8 22.0 607087 34,200 59,200 48,400 34,200 88,900 72,500 51,300 2.250 1.137 5.3 776.41 26.0 607101 47,700 82,600 67,400 47,700 123,900 101,200 71,500 2.664 1.348 4.5 995.41-1/4 32.0 607128 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300 187,800 153,400 108,400 3.250 1.656 3.7 1,570.9


Alloy Chain Slings

The life & strength of Alloy chain slings depends on proper inspection, maintenance and use. For additional info, refer to ANSI B30.9 & OSHA 1920.184.CAREChain requires careful storage & regular maintenance. • Store chains on an A frame in a clean, dry place. • To avoid corrosion, oil chains before prolonged storage. • Do not heat Alloy chain; this will alter its thermal treatment • Do not plate or change surface finish of chain. Contact

Hanes for special requirements.USETo protect both operators and materials, observe these precautions when using chain slings: • Before use, inspect chain and attachments following the

instructions under “Inspection” below. • Do not exceed working load limit. Any of the factors

listed here can reduce the load the chain will hold:• Acceleration in rate of load to application –

can produce dangerous overloading.• Variation in the angle of the load to the sling

– as the angle decreases, the working load of the sling will increase.

• Twisting, knotting or kinking – subjects links to unusual loading, decreasing the working load of the sling.

• Use for purposes other than those for which slings are intended – can reduce the working load of the sling.

• Free chain of all twists, knots and kinks. • Center load in hook(s); hook latches must not support load. • Avoid sudden jerks when lifting and lowering. • Balance all loads; avoid tipping of loads. • Use pads around sharp corners. • Do not drop load on chains. • Match the size & working load limit of attachments such

as hooks or rings to the size & WLL of the chain. • For overhead lifting, use only alloy chain

and attachments (grade 80 or 100).INSPECTIONIt is important both to inspect chain slings regularly and to keep a record of all chain inspections. Follow this guide for such an inspection system. • Before inspecting, clean chains with a non-acid/

non-causic solvent so that marks, nicks, wear and other defects are visible.

• Inspect each link for these conditions:• Twists or bends.• Nicks or gouges.• Excessive wear at bearing points.• Stretch.

• Distorted or damaged master links, coupling links or attachments, especially spread in throat opening of hooks.

• Mark plainly with paint each link or attachment showing any of the conditions listed here to indicate rejection; remove from service until properly repaired.

WEAR ALLOWANCES OF ALLOY CHAINMeasure cross section at link ends to determine wear. If chain is worn to less than the minimum allowable thickness, remove from service.

USE OF CHAIN UNDER HEAT CONDITIONSWhen the chain itself is heated to temperatures shown here, working load limits should be reduced as indicated.

1While chain is at temperature shown in first column.2When chain is used at room temperature after having been heated to temperatures shown in first column.

CERTIFICATE OF TEST AND IDENTIFICATIONThe identification tag found on the master coupling link of each chain sling contains this information: • Grade • Size • Reach • Type • Working load limit (at a specific angle of lift) • Serial number

MM INCHES

MAXIMUMALLOWABLE

WEAR (INCHES)

MINIMUM THICKNESS ALLOWABLE AT LINK

ENDS (INCHES)*5.5 7/32 2/64 (.031) 12/64 (.189)

7.0 9/32 2/64 (.031) 16/64 (.239)

10.0 3/8 3/64 (.047) 21/64 (.342)

13.0 1/2 4/64 (.062) 28/64 (.443)

16.0 5/8 5/64 (.078) 35/64 (.546)

20.0 3/4 6/64 (.094) 42/64 (.687)

22.0 7/8 8/64 (.125) 48/64 (.750)

26.0 1 9/64 (.140) 53/64 (.887)

32.0 1-1/4 10/64 (.156) 70/64 (1.09)

TEMPERATURE OF CHAIN

REDUCTION IN WORKING LOAD LIMIT1

WHILE HEATED

PERMANENT REDUCTION IN WORKING

LOAD LIMIT2

500°F 25% 5%

600°F 30% 15%

700°F 40% 20%

800°F 50% 25%

900°F 60% 30%

1000°F 70% 35%

CARE, USE AND INSPECTION


Alloy Chain Sling Specifications

SINGLECHAIN

SLINGS

DOUBLECHAIN

SLINGS

TRIPLE& QUADCHAIN

SLINGS

TYPE SOGGRAB HOOK

SINGLEBASKET

TYPE SOGCLEVLOCK

GRAB HOOK

TYPE DOSCLEVLOK

SLING HOOK

TYPE DOGCLEVLOK

GRAB HOOK

TYPE SOFFOUNDRY

HOOK

TYPE DOFFOUNDRY

HOOK

TYPE TOS

TYPE SAL ATYPE ASOSA TYPE ADOSA

ADJUSTABLE CHAIN SLINGS STYLE A

TYPE ADOSBTYPE ASOAB

TYPE SOSSLINGHOOK

TYPE DOS

TYPE OOS

TYPE SAL B

TYPE SOLLATCHLOK

HOOK

TYPE DOGGRAB HOOK

DOUBLE BASKET

REA

CH

REAC

H

REA

CH

STYLE B

REA

CH

TYPE SOOOBLONG


Chain Slings - Single Types S & C

GRADE 80 SINGLE ALLOY CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C

GRADE 100 SINGLE ALLOY CHAIN SLING TYPE S & C

WORKINGCHAIN SIZE WORKING

LOAD LIMIT (LBS)*

OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX WT(LBS)MASTER

LINKNUMBER

DIMENSIONS (IN)

(IN) (MM)DIAMETER

MATERIAL AINSIDE WIDTH

BINSIDE LENGTH

CTYPE SOS5' REACH

7/32 5.5 2,100 HA40 13/32 1-1/2 3 4

9/32 7 3,500 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 5

3/8 10 7,100 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 101/2 13 12,000 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 185/8 16 18,100 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 253/4 20 28,300 HA125 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 38

7/8 22 34,200 HA150 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 34

1 26 47,700 HA175 1-3/4 6 12 76

1-1/4 32 72,300 HA200 2 7 14 116

WORKINGCHAIN SIZE WORKING

LOAD LIMIT (LBS)*


LINKNUMBER

DIMENSIONS (IN)

(IN) (MM)DIAMETER


BINSIDE LENGTH

CTYPE SOS5' REACH

7/32 5.5 2,700 HA40 13/32 1-1/2 3 4

9/32 7 4,300 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 5

3/8 10 8,800 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 10

1/2 13 15,000 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 18

5/8 16 22,600 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 25

3/4 20 35,300 HA125 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 38

7/8 22 42,700 HA150 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 34

1 26 59,700 HA175 1-3/4 6 12 76

SOSSLINGHOOK

SOGGRABHOOK

SOFFOUNDRYHOOK

SOLLATCHLOK

SOOOBLONG

REA

CH

A

B

C


WARNING!


Chain Slings - Grade 80 AlloyDOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D

TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q

CHAIN SIZE

WORKINGLOAD LIMIT

(LBS)*

OBLONG MASTER LINKAPPROX WT

(LBS)TYPE DOS5' REACH

MASTERLINK

NUMBER

DIMENSIONS (IN)

(IN) (MM) 60° 45° 30°DIAMETER


BINSIDE

LENGTH C7/32 5.5 3,600 3,000 2,100 HA40 13/32 1-1/2 3 8

9/32 7 6,100 4,900 3,500 HA50 1/2 2-1/2 5 9

3/8 10 12,300 10,000 7,100 HA75 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 18

1/2 13 20,800 17,000 12,000 HA100 1 3-1/2 7 31

5/8 16 31,300 25,600 18,100 HA125 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 49

3/4 20 49,000 40,000 28,300 HA150 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 71

7/8 22 59,200 48,400 34,200 HA175 1-3/4 6 12 98

1 26 82,600 67,400 47,700 HA200 2 7 14 132

1-1/4 32 125,200 102,200 72,300 HA225 2-1/4 8 16 221

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)*


LINKNUMBER

DIMENSIONS (IN)



BINSIDE

LENGTH CTYPE TOS5' REACH

TYPE QOS 5'REACH

7/32 5.5 5,450 4,450 3,150 HA50-SA 1/2 2-1/2 5 12 16

9/32 7 9,100 7,400 5,200 HA75-SA 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 14 18

3/8 10 18,400 15,100 10,600 HA100-SA 1 3-1/2 7 28 36

1/2 13 31,200 25,500 18,000 HA125-SA 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 50 62

5/8 16 47,000 38,400 27,100 HA150-SA 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 79 97

3/4 20 73,500 60,000 42,400 HA175-SA 1-3/4 6 12 112 137

7/8 22 88,900 72,500 51,300 HA200-SA 2 7 14 155 188

1 26 123,900 101,200 71,500 HA225-SA 2-1/4 8 16 215 260

1-1/4 32 187,800 153,400 108,400 HA275-SA 2-3/4 9 16 348 421

DOSSLINGHOOKS

AB

C

DOGGRABHOOKS

DOFFOUNDRYHOOKS

DOLLATCHLOKHOOKSR

EAC

H

Safety note: A quad branch chain sling usually does not sustain loads with even distribution to its four branches, especially when loads are of rigid struc-ture. Therefore, maximum working load limits are set at the same values as for triple branch chain slings of equal qual-ity and size and used with branches at the same angle of inclination.

TOSSLINGHOOKS

QOSSLINGHOOKS

A A

B B

C C

REAC

H

REAC

H


Chain Slings - Grade 100 Alloy

DOUBLE CHAIN SLING TYPE D

TRIPLE & QUAD CHAIN SLING TYPE T & Q

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)*OBLONG MASTER LINK

APPROX WT(LBS)

TYPE DOS5' REACH

MASTERLINK

NUMBER

DIMENSIONS (IN)



BINSIDE

LENGTH C7/32 5.5 4,700 3,800 2,700 555231 13/32 1-1/2 3 8

9/32 7 7,400 6,100 4,300 555232 1/2 2-1/2 5 9

3/8 10 15,200 12,400 8,800 555235 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 18

1/2 13 26,000 21,200 15,000 555238 1 3-1/2 7 31

5/8 16 39,100 32,000 22,600 555240 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 49

3/4 20 61,100 49,900 35,300 555243 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 71

CHAIN SIZE WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)*OBLONG MASTER LINK APPROX WT

(LBS)MASTERLINK

NUMBER

DIMENSIONS (IN)



BINSIDE

LENGTH CTYPE TOS5' REACH

TYPE QOS 5'REACH

7/32 5.5 7,000 5,700 4,000 HA50-SA 1/2 2-1/2 5 12 16

9/32 7 11,200 9,100 6,400 HA75-SA 3/4 2-3/4 5-1/2 14 18

3/8 10 22,900 18,700 13,200 HA100-SA 1 3-1/2 7 28 36

1/2 13 39,000 31,800 22,500 HA125-SA 1-1/4 4-3/8 8-3/4 50 62

5/8 16 58,700 47,900 33,900 HA150-SA 1-1/2 5-1/4 10-1/2 79 97

3/4 20 91,700 74,900 53,000 HA175-SA 1-3/4 6 12 112 137

DOSSLINGHOOKS

AB

C

DOGGRABHOOKS

DOFFOUNDRYHOOKS

DOLLATCHLOKHOOKSR

EAC

H

Safety note: A quad branch chain sling usually does not sustain loads with even distribution to its four branches, especially when loads are of rigid structure. Therefore, max-imum working load limits are set at the same values as for triple branch chain slings of equal quality and size and used with branches at the same angle of inclination.

TOSSLINGHOOKS

QOSSLINGHOOKS

A A

B B

C C

REAC

H

REAC

H


Chain Saddle Rings give a chain bridle length adjustment capabilities in each leg. They aid the rigger in placing the lifting point over the center of gravity so the load will lift in a level manner. Chain Saddle Rings allow for many configurations, making them more versitile than any standard chain sling.

Grab Hooks can be added to a single, double, triple, or quad chain sling to make one or all of the legs adjustable. The Style A Adjustable Sling features grab hooks attached directly to the mechanical couplers at the master link to keep them out of the way. The Style B Ad-justable Sling adds approximately 12″ of chain between the master link and the grab hook ad-justers to allow for ease of use.

Chain Slings AdjustableChain Saddle Rings

ADJUSTABLE CHAIN SLINGS

CHAIN SADDLE RINGSUnited States Patent #4,241,575

Canadian Patent #1,086,510 British Patent #2,029,370

SYSTEM

CHAINSIZE

INCHES

SINGLE BRANCH SLING 90 DEGREE LOADING

DOUBLE SLING

60° 45° 30°10 9/32 4,300 7,400 6,100 4,300

10 3/8 8,800 15,200 12,400 8,800

10 1/2 15,000 26,000 21,200 15,000

10 5/8 22,600 39,100 32,000 22,600

10 3/4 35,300 61,100 49,900 35,300

10 7/8 42,700 74,000 60,400 42,700

8 1 47,700 82,600 67,400 47,700

8 1-1/4 72,300 125,200 102,200 72,300

8 1-1/2 80,000 138,600 113,100 80,000

CHAINSIZE

INCHES

TRIPLE AND QUADRUPLE SLING

60° 45° 30°9/32 11,200 9,100 6,400

3/8 22,800 18,600 13,200

1/2 39,000 31,800 22,500

5/8 58,700 47,900 33,900

3/4 91,700 74,900 53,000

7/8 110,900 90,600 64,000

1 123,900 101,200 71,500

1-1/4 187,800 153,400 108,400

1-1/2 — — —

Design Factor is 4:1. Rated loads are in pounds.

Inspect before each use. Follow OSHA, ANSI B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines. Use by untrained persons is hazardous. Improper use will result in serious injury or death. Do not exceed rated capacity. This product will fail if damaged, abused, misused or improperly maintained.WARNING!

STYLE A STYLE B

12" of chain


Wire Mesh Slings

LIKEA GIANTHAND...

STRONG, GENTLE GRIP – SAFE, SURE BALANCE MAKES

BEST FOR FAST, SAFE, EASY LIFTS

GRIPPER SLINGSWOVEN WIRE

Safer than wire rope, gentle as canvas, flexible as manila... that’s only a part of the story of the Gripper Sling – the ultimate in versatile materials handling tools. Like a giant hand, Gripper Slings grasp and hold the load in a strong, gentle grip when used in a choke hitch... safely and gently cradle it on a broad, flat surface in a basket hitch.Whatever the size or shape of the load you handle – rounds, flats, hexes or squares--Gripper Slings can reduce load damage in production or shipping, provide greater safety for load and operator, cut rigging and unhitching time and eliminate the need for two-legged slings. Here’s how –NO LOAD DAMAGE – The unique woven wire construction of Gripper Slings consists of a series of smooth, spiral wires joined together across the body of the sling. This gives the sling complete flexibility, enabling it to bend easily around even irregularly shaped loads and eliminating the danger of gouging or marring edges of the load members. For turned or ground surfaces, PVS or Neoprene-covered slings assure extremely delicate handling.SAFE – The wide bearing surface of the Gripper Sling provides better load balance and gripping power... less crushing effect when handling hollow tubing or similar parts. Its instant gripping action means there’s no slipping of shifting when load is applied. All metal construction means there’s no core to rot, nothing to tear suddenly. Gripper Slings will not whip, kink or tangle, and there are no loose strands to snag load or operator. As for rigging and hitching, a single man can easily do the job.STRONG – Thousands of spiral wire loops in a transverse construction give Gripper Slings exceptionally long life. Should a single wire break, the slack is absorbed by the rest of the sling. Gripper Slings are pretested and guaranteed to meet load specifications. Standard lengths and widths with capacities up to 100,000 lbs. are available. Special sizes and corrosion resistant alloys available on request.


WARNING!


Wire Mesh Specifications

HOW TO SELECT PROPER SLING WIDTHFirst, determine the hitch you will use for the gauge selected. Then read down the column under the selected hitch and gauge to the load weight you wish to lift. Then read across to the first column at left to find sling width required. Example: You wish to use a G-43 sling in a choke hitch to lift 6,400 pounds. Sling width required is 8".

NOMINAL WIDTH OF SLING (IN) CHOKER

VERTICAL BASKET

EFFECT OF ANGLE ON RATEDCAPACITIES IN BASKET HITCH

30° VERT. 60° HORZ.



G-35HEAVY DUTY

2 1,600 3,200 2,700 2,000 1,6003 3,000 6,000 5,100 3,800 2,8004 4,400 8,800 7,480 5,600 4,4006 6,600 13,200 11,225 8,400 6,6008 8,800 17,600 15,000 11,250 8,80010 11,000 22,000 18,700 14,000 11,00012 13,200 26,400 22,440 16,800 13,20014 15,400 30,800 26,180 19,600 15,40016 17,600 35,200 29,920 22,400 17,60018 19,800 39,600 33,660 25,200 19,80020 22,000 44,000 37,400 28,000 22,000

G-43MED. DUTY

2 1,450 2,900 2,320 1,740 1,4503 2,175 4,350 3,700 2,700 2,1754 2,900 5,800 4,900 3,670 2,9006 4,800 9,600 8,150 6,100 4,8008 6,400 12,800 10,880 8,100 6,40010 8,000 16,000 13,600 10,200 8,00012 9,600 19,200 16,300 12,000 9,60014 11,200 22,400 19,000 14,000 11,20016 12,800 25,600 21,700 16,200 12,80018 13,500 27,000 22,900 17,000 13,50020 15,000 30,000 25,500 19,000 15,000

G-59LIGHT DUTY

2 900 1,800 1,600 1,300 9003 1,400 2,800 2,400 2,000 1,4004 2,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,0006 3,000 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,0008 4,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,00010 5,000 10,000 8,600 7,100 5,00012 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,00014 7,000 14,000 12,100 9,900 7,00016 8,000 16,000 13,900 11,300 8,00018 9,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9,00020 10,000 20,000 17,300 14,100 10,000

60°60°45°

45°30°

30°


WARNING!


Nylon Web Slings

BASIC SLING TYPES HITCHESType 1 TC SlingsSlings with a triangle on one end and a slotted triangle (the choker) on the other end. Choice of lightweight alumi-num or durable steel fittings.

Type 4 EE SlingsSame basic type as Type 3 but eyes are twisted to a right an-gle to the sling body. (Tapered eye are standard on 2" & larger web-widths).

Type 2 TT SlingsSlings with a triangle at both ends. Used in vertical and basket hitches only. Choice of lightweight aluminum or dura-ble steel fittings.

Type 5 EN SlingsEndless slings, sometimes also referred to as grommet slings. The most versatile sling.

Type 3 EE SlingsSlings with an eye on both ends. Choice of straight or tapered eyes (tapered eye are standard on 2" and larger web-widths).

Type 6 RE SlingsReturn eye sling, also referred to as reversed eye sling. Sling body is formed by 2 parts of webbing sewn side by side us-ing either a cordura tube or web in the finished width.


WARNING!


Nylon Web Sling Capacities

• Resistant to Alkalies.• Untreated – approx. 6% stretch; treated – approx. 10% stretch at rated capacity.• Temperature limits are listed on Warning Labels.• Contains red warning yarns.• Subject to damage of edges.

WEBWIDTH (IN)

CODENUMBER

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS)VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET

SINGLE PLY SLINGS234568

101216182024

TC1-802TC1-803TC1-804TC1-805TC1-806TC1-808TC1-810TC1-812TC1-816TC1-818TC1-820TC1-824

3,2004,8006,4008,0009,600

12,80016,00019,20025,50028,70032,00038,400

2,4003,6004,8006,0007,2009,60012,00014,40019,20021,00024,00028,800

6,4009,60012,80016,00019,20025,60032,00038,40051,00057,40064,00076,800

TWO PLY SLINGS234568

101216182024

TC2-802TC2-803TC2-804TC2-805TC2-806TC2-808TC2-810TC2-812TC2-816TC2-818TC2-820TC2-824

6,4008,60011,50014,00016,80022,40028,00033,60044,80050,40056,00067,200

4,8006,5008,60010,50012,60016,80021,00025,20033,60037,80042,00050,400

12,80017,20023,00028,00033,60044,80056,00067,20089,600100,800112,000134,400


101216182024

TT1-802TT1-803TT1-804 TT1-805 TT1-806 TT1-808TT1-810 TT1-812TT1-816TT1-818TT1-820TT1-824

3,2004,8006,4008,0009,600

12,80016,00019,20025,50028,70032,00038,400

––––––––––––

6,4009,60012,80016,00019,20025,60032,00038,40051,00057,40064,00076,800


101216182024

TT2-802TT2-803 TT2-804 TT2-805TT2-806TT2-808TT2-810TT2-812TT2-816TT2-818TT2-820TT2-824

6,4008,60011,50014,00016,80022,40028,00033,60044,80050,40056,00067,200

––––––––––––

12,80017,20023,00028,00033,60044,80056,00067,20089,600100,800112,000134,400

TYPE 1 SLINGSCHOKER & BASKET HITCH

TRIANGLE & CHOKER FITTINGS

TYPE 2 SLINGSBASKET & VERTICAL

HITCHES ONLY

TWO TRIANGLE FITTINGS

Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width.


WARNING!

Type 1 Sling Type 2 Sling


Nylon Web Sling Capacities

WEBWIDTH (IN)

CODENUMBER

RATED CAPACITIES (LBS)VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET


1012

EE1-801EE1-802EE1-803 EE1-804 EE1-805EE1-806EE1-808EE1-810EE1-812

1,6003,2004,8006,4008,0009,600

12,80016,00019,200

1,2002,4003,6004,8006,0007,2009,60012,00014,400

3,2006,4009,60012,80016,00019,20025,60032,00038,400


1012


3,2006,4008,60011,50013,60016,30019,20022,40026,900

2,4004,8006,5008,60010,20012,20014,40016,80020,100

6,40012,80017,20023,00027,20032,60038,40044,80053,800

THREE PLY SLINGS1234568

1012


4,1008,300

12,50016,00019,20023,00030,70036,80044,000

3,1006,2009,30012,00014,40017,20023,00027,60033,000

8,20016,60025,00032,00038,40046,00061,40073,60088,000

FOUR PLY SLINGS1234568

1012


5,00010,00014,90019,80024,80029,80039,70049,60059,500

3,8007,50011,10014,80018,60022,30029,70037,20044,600

10,00020,00029,80039,60049,60059,60079,40099,200119,000


EN1-801EN1-802EN1-803 EN1-804 EN1-805EN1-806

3,2006,4008,60011,50013,60016,300

2,5005,0006,9009,20010,90013,000

6,40012,80017,20023,00027,20032,600

TWO PLY SLINGS 123456

EN2-801EN2-802EN2-803 EN2-804 EN2-805EN2-806

6,20012,20016,30020,70024,50028,600

4,9009,80013,00016,50019,60023,000

12,40024,40032,60041,40049,00057,200

TYPE 3 & 4 SLINGSFLAT OR TWISTED EYES

VERTICAL, CHOKER, BASKETHITCHES

TYPE 5 SLINGSVERTICAL, CHOKER, BASKET

HITCHESENDLESS OR GROMMET TYPE

Ratings based on straight pin diameter one-half the sling width.


WARNING!

Type 3 Flat Eye Sling

Type 4 Twisted Eye Sling


Wide Lift Nylon Slings

Continuous Eye Wide-Lift for Heavy Loads - Constructed from one endless sling with the two body lengths butted and joined side by side. Stiffener webbing is used at the base of the eyes to deter the body webbing from folding down the middle.

BODYWIDTH

(IN) CODE

VERTICAL BASKET

HITCH CAPACITY(LBS)

EYELENGTH

(IN)

EYE MATLWIDTH

(IN)

CONTINUOUS EYE WIDE-LIFT

1 PLY

6 WL1-806 15,400 9 1-1/2

8 WL1-808 20,400 12 2

10 WL1-810 25,600 15 2-1/2

12 WL1-812 30,800 18 2

16 WL1-816 38,000 24 2-3/4

20 WL1-820 45,000 30 3-1/2

24 WL1-824 52,000 36 4

2 PLY

6 WL2-806 28,600 9 1-1/28 WL2-808 38,000 12 2

12 WL2-812 57,200 18 3

16 WL2-816 75,000 24 4

20 WL2-820 90,000 30 5

24 WL2-824 110,000 36 8

Attached Eye Wide-Lift For Light, Bulky Loadsthat require wider bearing areas and some balance attributes. Eyes are made from separate material – WLA1 is 1 ply – WLA2 is 2 ply – both sewn to sling body. Body is single ply for both 1 and 2 ply eyes.

BODY WIDTH

(IN) CODE

VERTICAL BASKET HITCH

CAPACITY (LBS)

EYE LENGH

(IN)

EYE MAT’L. WIDTH

(IN)ATTACHED EYE WIDE-LIFT

1 PLY EYE

6810

WLA1-806WLA1-808WLA1-810

5,0005,0005,000

68

10

111

12162024

WLA1-812WLA1-816WLA1-820WLA1-824

5,00010,00010,00010,000

12141620

1222

2 PLY EYE

6810

WLA2-806WLA2-808WLA2-810

10,000 10,00010,000

101012

111

12162024

WLA2-812WLA2-816WLA2-820WLA2-824

10,00018,00018,00018,000

12121818

1222

WIDE LIFT SLINGS


Reversed Eye SlingsPolyester Roundslings

SINGLE PATH - ENDLESS POLYESTER ROUND SLINGS • A flexible solution to your lifting needs. • Rotation of lift points extends service life of sling. • Length measure from Bearing Point to Bearing Point. • Two same color polyester tubular jackets. • The economical choice!

WARNING! DO NOT exceed rated capacities.When slings are used at angles of less than 90° from horizontal ratings must be reduced.

ITEMNO. COLOR

RATED CAPACITY (LBS)

MIN.LGTH.(FT)

APPROX. MEASUREMENTS

VERTICAL CHOKER BASKETWT.

(LBS/FT)

BODY DIA.RELAXED

(IN)

WIDTH@ LOAD

(IN)

SP260 Purple 2,600 2,100 5,200 1- 1/2 .2 5/8 1- 1/8

SP530 Green 5,300 4,200 10,600 1- 1/2 .3 7/8 1- 1/2

SP840 Yellow 8,400 6,700 16,800 3 .4 1- 1/8 1- 7/8

SP1060 Tan 10,600 8,500 21,200 3 .5 1- 1/8 2- 1/8

SP1320 Red 13,200 10,600 26,400 3 .7 1- 3/8 2- 1/4

SP1680 White 16,800 13,400 33,600 3 .8 1- 3/8 2- 1/2SP2120 Blue 21,200 17,000 42,400 3 1.1 1- 3/4 3SP3100 Grey 31,000 24,800 62,000 3 1.6 2- 1/4 3- 3/4

SP5300 Brown 53,000 42,400 106,000 8 2.5 2 -3/4 4- 5/8

SP6600 Olive 66,000 52,800 132,000 8 3.1 3- 1/8 5- 1/4

SP9000 Black 90,000 72,000 180,000 8 4.0 3- 5/8 6

REVERSED EYE (RE) SLINGS - TYPE 6Reversed Eye Sling is a modified endless sling. Cordura wear pads offer added protection on the body and eyes of the sling. This extra Cordura webbing offers superior abrasion resistance and sling life.

CODEVERTICAL

(LBS)CHOKER

(LBS)BASKET

(LBS)

SLINGWIDTH

(IN)

SLINGTHICKNESS

(IN)

EYELENGTH

(IN)

HEAVY DUTY WEB

1 PLYRE1-802 4,500 3,600 9,000 2 5/16 9RE1-804 7,700 6,200 15,400 4 5/16 15RE1-806 11,000 8,800 22,000 6 5/16 15

2 PLYRE2-802 6,500 5,200 13,000 2 1/2 9RE2-804 13,000 10,400 26,000 4 1/2 15RE2-806 20,000 16,000 40,000 6 1/2 15

3 PLYRE3-804 16,400 13,100 32,800 4 11/16 15RE3-806 25,500 20,400 51,000 6 11/16 15

4 PLY RE4-806 34,000 27,200 68,000 6 7/8 15


Synthetic Web Slings5.2 - MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS

5.2.1 Use only if trained. Determine weight of the load. The weight of the load shall be within the rated capacity of the sling.

5.2.2 Select the proper sling having suitable characteristics for the type of load, hitch and environment.

5.2.3 Slings shall not be loaded in excess of the rated capacity. Consideration should be given to the angle of lift (sling-to- load angle), which affects rated capacity.

5.2.4 Slings with fittings which are used in a choker hitch shall be of sufficient length to assure that the choking action is on the webbing, and never on the other fitting.

5.2.5 Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced to prevent slippage.

5.2.6 The opening in fittings shall be the proper shape and size to insure that the fitting will seat properly in the hook or other attachments.

5.2.7 Slings shall always be protected from being cut by load edges, corners, protrusion, or abrasive surfaces.

5.2.8 Slings shall not be dragged on the floor or over an abrasive surface.

5.2.9 Slings shall not be twisted or tied into knots, or joined by knotting.

5.2.10 Slings shall not be pulled from under loads when the load is resting on the sling.

5.2.11 Do not drop slings equipped with metal fittings.

5.2.12 Slings that appear to be damaged shall not be used unless inspected and accepted as usable under Section 5.2.

5.2.13 The sling shall be hitched in a manner providing control of the load.

5.2.14 Portions of the human body should be kept from between the sling and the load, and from between the sling and the crane hook or hoist hook.

5.2.15 Personnel should stand clear of the suspended load.

5.2.16 Personnel shall not ride the sling.

5.2.17 Shock loading should be avoided.

5.2.18 Twisting the legs (branches) shall be avoided.

5.2.19 Load applied to the hook should be centered in the base (bowl) of hook to prevent point loading on the hook.

5.2.20 During lifting, with or without the load, personnel shall be alert for possible snagging.

5.2.21 The slings' legs (branches) should contain or support the load from the sides above the center of gravity when using a basket hitch.

5.2.22 Slings shall be long enough so that the rated load (rated capacity) is adequate when the angle of the legs (branches) is taken into consideration.


Synthetic Web Slings5.3 - ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS

5.3.1 Slings should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should not be exposed to sunlight or ultraviolet light, to prevent mechanical or chemical damage when not in use.

5.3.2 Chemically active environments can affect the strength of synthetic web slings in varying degrees ranging from none to total degradation. The sling manufacturer should be consulted before slings are used in chemically active environments.

a. ACIDS 1. Nylon is subject to degradation in acids, ranging from none to total degradation. 2. Polyester is resistant to many acids, but is subject to degradation, ranging from none to moderate in some acids. 3. Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:

i Type of Acid ii Exposure to conditions iii Concentration iv Temperature b. ALKALIS

1. Polyester is subject to degradation in alkalis, ranging from none to total degradation. 2. Nylon is resistant to many alkalis, but is subject to degradation ranging from none to moderate in some alkalis. 3. Each application shall be evaluated, taking into consideration the following:

i Type of Alkali ii Exposure to conditions iii Concentration iv Temperature

5.3.3 Nylon and polyester slings shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 194°F (90°C), however, they may be used in temperatures as low as -40°F (-40°C).

5.3.4 Slings incorporating aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of alkalis and/or acids are present.

5.3.5 Environments in which synthetic webbing slings are continuously exposed to ultra-violet light can affect the strength of synthetic webbing slings in varying degrees ranging from slight to total degradation.

a. Factors which affect the degree of strength loss are: 1. Length of time of continuous exposure 2. Sling construction and design 3. Other environmental factors such as weather conditions and geographic location.

b. Suggested procedures to minimize the effects of ultra-violet light 1. Store slings in a cool, dry and dark place when not being used for prolonged periods of time 2. Inspect slings weekly or more often depending on frequency of sling use

c. Visual indications of ultra-violet degradation are: 1. Bleaching out of sling color 2. Increased stiffness of sling material 3. Surface abrasion in areas not normally in contact with the load.

d. Proof-Testing – Slings used in environments where they are subject to continuous exposure to ultra-violet light should be proof-tested to two times rated capacity annually, or more frequently depending on severity of exposure.


Synthetic Web Slings5.4 - INSPECTION

5.4.1 TYPE OF INSPECTION

a. INITIAL INSPECTION – Before any new or repaired sling is placed in service, it shall be inspected to insure that the correct sling is being used, as well as to determine that the sling meets the requirements of this specification.

b. FREQUENT INSPECTION – This inspection should be made by the person handling the sling each time the sling is used.

c. PERIODIC INSPECTION – This inspection shall be conducted by designated personnel. Frequency of inspection should be based on: 1. Frequency of sling use 2. Severity of service conditions 3. Experience gained on the service life of slings used in similar applications 4. Periodic inspections should be conducted at least monthly

5.5 - POSSIBLE DEFECTS

5.5.1 A sling shall be removed from service if any defects such as the following are visible:

a. Acid or alkali burns b. Melting, charring, or weld spatter of any part of the sling c. Holes, tears, cuts, snags or embedded particles d. Broken or worn stitching in load bearing splices e. Excessive abrasive wear f. Knots in any part of the sling g. Distortion and excessive pitting or corrosion or broken fittings h. Other apparent defects which cause doubt as to the strength of the sling i. If sling rated capacity or sling material identification is missing or not readable

5.6 - INSPECTION RECORDS

5.6.1 Written inspection records, utilizing the identification for each sling as established by the user, should be kept on file for all slings. These records should show a description of the new sling and its condition on each subsequent inspection.

5.7 - REPAIR OF WEB SLINGS

5.7.1 Slings shall be repaired only by a sling manufacturer. When repaired by other than the original manufacturer, the sling shall be permanently marked to identify the repair agent.

5.7.2 All repaired slings shall be proof-tested to two (2) times its newly assigned rated capacity, before being put back into service. Certification of proof-test should be provided.

5.7.3 Temporary repairs of either webbing, fittings, or stitching shall not be permitted.


Polyester Ratchet Assembly

1" RATCHET STRAP WITH 800 RATCHET AND VINYL COATED S HOOKS • Breaking Strength: 1,200 lbs. • WLL: 1000 lbs.

4" WINCH STRAPS WITH FLAT HOOK • Breaking Strength: 15,000 lbs • WLL: 5,400 lbs.

2" RATCHET STRAP WITH WIRE HOOK • Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs. • WLL: 3,335 lbs.

2" RATCHET STRAP WITH FLAT HOOK • Breaking Strength: 10,000 lbs. • WLL: 3,335 lbs.

TIE12505 1" x 15'

427FH 4" x 27'430FH 4" x 30'

TIE11602 2" x 27'

TIE11600 2" x 27'


TRUCKER TIE DOWN AND LASHING EQUIPMENT

RATCHET STRAPS – Designed to handle most types of flatbed tie-down requirements. • All straps have an 18" fixed end as standard, except for straps with 3705-2 and 3705-3 chain anchors which have a fixed end of 30". Special length fixed ends and alternate end hardware available through Hanes Supply. Labeled to meet CVSA guidelines, DOT regulations and WSTDA recommended standards.

2" RATCHET STRAPS W/804 WIDE HANDLE AND 2004 WEBBING

3" RATCHET STRAPS W/806 LONG HANDLE AND 3004 WEBBING

4" RATCHET STRAPS W/808 LONG HANDLE AND 4004 WEBBING

10,000 LB. BREAKING STRENGTH





STRAPLENGTH (FT)

ENDHARDWARE WLL

27TIE11600

1015 Flat Hook3,335 lbs.1515 kgs.

30

27 3705-2 Chain Anchor 3,335 lbs.1515 kgs.

27 TIE116021006 Wire Hook

3,335 lbs.1515 kgs.

STRAPLENGTH (FT)

ENDHARDWARE WLL

271021-3 Flat Hook 5,000 LBS

2270 KGS30

STRAPLENGTH (FT)

END HARDWARE WLL

273705-3 Chain Anchor 5,400 LBS

2450 KGS30

273704 Grab Hook 5,400 LBS

2450 KGS30

STRAPLENGTH (FT)

ENDHARDWARE WLL

271021-3 Flat Hook 5,000 LBS

2270 KGS30

STRAPLENGTH (FT)

END HARDWARE WLL

271016 Wire Hook 6,600 LBS

2995 KGS30

Polyester Ratchet Assembly

Custom fabricated to meet your requirements.

Many hook/fitting options available to choose from.

Bulk purchasing at special pricing also available.


Load Binders

LOAD BINDER WARNINGS AND APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONSINSTRUCTIONS - LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERS• Hook load binder to chain so you can operate it while standing

on the ground. Position load binder so its han-dle can be pulled downward to tighten chain (see photo). Be aware of ice, snow, rain, oil, etc. that can affect your footing. Make certain your footing is secure.

• The Crosby Group LLC specifically recommends AGAINST the use of a handle extender (cheater pipe). If sufficient leverage cannot be obtained using the lever type load binder by itself, a ratchet type binder should be used.

• If the above recommendation is disregarded and a cheater pipe is used, it must closely fit the handle and must slide down the handle until the handle projections are contacted. The pipe should be secured to the handle, for example, by a pin, so that the pipe cannot fly off the handle if you lose control and let go. The increased leverage, by using a cheater pipe, can cause deformation and failure of the chain and load binder.

• During and after tightening chain, check load binder han-dle position. Be sure it is in the locked position and that its bottom side touches the chain link.

• Chain tension may decrease due to load shifting during transport. To be sure the load binder remains in proper position: Secure handle to chain by wrapping the loose end of chain around the handle and the tight chain, or tie han-dle to chain with soft wire.

• When releasing load binder, remember there is a great deal of energy in the stretched chain. This will cause the load binder handle to move very quickly with great force when it is unlatched. Move handle with caution. It may whip - Keep body clear.

• Never use a cheater pipe or handle extender to release handle. Use a steel bar and pry under the handle and stay out of the path of handle as it moves upward.

• If you release the handle by hand, use an open hand under the handle and push upward. Do not close your hand around the handle. Always keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle.

INSTRUCTIONS - RATCHET LOAD BINDERS• Position ratchet binder so it can be operated from the ground. • Make sure your footing is secure.MAINTENANCE OF ALL LOAD BINDERS•Routinely check load binders for wear, bending, cracks, nicks,

or gouges. If visual wear bending or cracks are present -Do not use load binder.

• Routinely lubricate pivot and swivel points of Lever Binders, and pawl part and screw threads of Ratchet Binders to extend product life and reduce friction wear.

• Follow OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturer’s Guidelines.• Use only if trained.• Failure to use this load binder properly may result in serious injury or even death.• Do not operate load binder while standing on the load.• Move handle with caution. It may whip – Keep body clear.• Keep yourself out of the path of the moving handle.• You must be familiar with state and federal regulations regarding size and number of chain systems required for securing loads on trucks.• Always consider the safety of nearby workers as well as your self when using load binder.• While under tension, load binder must not bear against any object.• Do not throw these instructions away. Keep them close at hand & share them with any others who use this load binder.

WARNING!

RATCHET TYPE LEVER TYPE

LEVER WALKING TYPELEVER SNUBBING TYPE

LEVER RELEASING TYPE

Mechanical AdvantageLever Type Binder = 25:1Ratchet Type Binder = 50:1Example: 100 pounds of effort applied to the binder results inthe following force on the binder.Lever Type:2500 (100 lbs. x 25) lbs. of forceRatchet Type:5000 (100 lbs. x 50) lbs. of force


Load Binders

STANDARD LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDERSL-150• Forged Steel–Quenched & Tempered.• Binder toggles away from the load.

3/8" LEVER TYPE LOAD BINDER• Provides more control in binding and releasing without extra tools.• Handle closes down away from load with more leverage.• Hooks are heat treated steel.• Functionally superior to any other on the road.• Handles are drop forged from special bar quality steel.• Single welded links as in binder chain for better reliability. • More take-up for binding greater loads. Smaller handle slot with riveted nose to prevent spreading at the critical loading point.• Meets DOT and CVSA requirements.

MODELSTOCK

NO.STD.PKG.

MIN-MAXCHAIN SIZE(IN)

WORKINGLOADLIMIT(LBS)

PROOFLOAD(LBS)

ULTIMATE LOAD(LBS)

WEIGHTEACH(LBS)

HANDLELENGTH

(IN)

TAKEUP(IN)

7-1 1048128 4 5/16-3/8 5400 10800 19000 7.02 16.00 4.50

A-1 1048146 4 3/8-1/2 9200 18400 33000 12.47 18.69 4.50

C-1 1048164 4 1/2-5/8 13000 26000 46000 19.68 21.00 4.75

CHAIN SIZE(IN)

CHAINGRADE

WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)*

PRODUCTCODE

HANDLELENGTH (IN)

TAKE-UP(IN)

WEIGHT(LBS)

3/8 30, 43, 70, 80 7,100 48769 16 4-7/8 8-1/4

• Forged handle, hooks and swivel link.• Steel swivels and clevis.• Meets or exceeds requirements of US DOT FMCSA Part 393 Subpart I.

L-130 MIDGET LOAD BINDER

MODELL-130

STOCK NOMIN-MAX

CHAIN SIZE (IN)

WORKING LOAD LIMIT

(LBS)ULTIMATE

LOAD (LBS)WEIGHT EACH

(LBS) TAKE UP (IN)

W-1 1048100 3/16-1/4 1450 5100 2.57 2.40


Load Binders

• Upgrade for use with Grade 7 Transport Chain - applies to R-7 only.• Utilizes standard Crosby A-323 Alloy Eye Grab Hooks.• New design “one piece” forged handle.• Continuous take-up feature, gets the last half of chain.• One piece assembly, no bolts or nuts to loosen.• All load bearing or holding parts forged.• Easy operating positive ratchet.• Meets or exceeds requirements of US DOT FMCSA

Part 393 Subpart I.

• Handle is designed loose using self-locking, one-way bolts allowing easy removal of unwanted debris such as mud, snow or ice

• Proof tested to 50% of minimum breaking strength• Gears are permanently welded to the barrel• Durable powder coat finish• Design factor 4:1 (except 48358 & 48387, which are 3:1)

• Hook on each end• Meets all Department of Transportation (D.O.T.) requirements and is

required in most states by the D.O.T.• Chain won't degrade in ultra-violet light, as compared to nylon straps• Available in 12, 14, 16, 18, 24 or 25ft as well as custom lengths• Design factor 4:1

MODEL STOCK NO.

MIN-MAXCHAIN SIZE

(IN)WLL(LBS)

PROOFLOAD(LBS)

WEIGHTEACH(LBS)

HANDLELENGTH

(IN)

BARRELLENGTH

(IN)

TAKEUP(IN)

R-7** 1048404 5/16-3/8 8800 17600 12.11 14 10 8.0

R-A** 1048422 3/8-1/2 15000 30000 14.70 14 10 8.0

R-C*** 1048440 1/2-5/8 16000 32000 14.55 14 10 8.0

STOCK NO.

MIN-MAXCHAIN SIZE

(IN)WLL(LBS)

WEIGHTEACH(LBS)

HANDLELENGTH

(IN)

BARREL SIZE DIAM. X LENGTH

(IN)TAKE UP

(IN)48455 5/16 - 3/8 8800 16 14 1-1/2 x 10 8

48358 3/8 - 1/2 15000 16 14 1-1/2 x 10 8

48387 3/8 - 1/2 16000 16 14 1-1/2 x 10 8

CHAIN SIZE (IN) WLL (LBS)

PRODUCT CODE L (FT) WEIGHT (LBS)

SHORT LINK1/4 3150 638265 20 16.41

5/16 4700 638284 20 21.13

3/8 6600 638294 20 31.11

1/2 11300 638350 20 56.93

STANDARD RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDER

NOTE: Binders shown with Proof Load Pounds have been individually Proof Tested to these values shown, prior to shipment. *Ultimate Load is 3 times the Working Load Limit. **Matches the Working Load Limit of Grade 100 chain for both sizes. ***Matches the Working Load Limit of Grade 100 chain for 1/2" size.

L-140

FORGED RATCHET TYPE LOAD BINDER

CLEVIS ASSEMBLY

L


Chain Specifications

CARBON CHAIN SPECIFICATIONS

GRADE 30 PROOF COIL CHAINLow carbon steel utility chain with a wide range of general purpose uses. Self-col-ored finish. Links embossed every 10" with date code and grade appearing alter-nately. Also available in Hot Galvanized or Bright Zinc finish.

GRADE 43 HIGH TEST CHAINMade from a selected analysis carbon steel to provide higher tensile strength and working load limits, as well as better resistance to wear. Bright (polished) fin-ish. Links embossed every 10" with date code and grade appearing alternately. Also available in Hot Galvanized or Bright Zinc finish.

GRADE 70 TRANSPORT (BINDING) CHAINSignificantly higher tensile strength for all load binding and tie down applica-tions, which permits you to hold a given load with the next smaller size chain than Grade 43. This increased strength-to-weight ratio means lower costs and a lighter chain, for easier storage and han-dling. Gold finish. Links embossed every 10" with date code and grade appearing alternately.

CHAIN SIZE WORKINGLOAD LIMIT

(LBS)*

NOMINAL INSIDE LINKDIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT

PER 100 FT(LBS)INCHES DECIMAL LENGTH WIDTH

3/16 0.218 800 0.95 0.40 38

1/4 0.276 1,300 1.00 0.47 66

5/16 0.327 1,900 1.10 0.50 98

3/8 0.390 2,650 1.23 0.62 144

7/16 0.468 3,700 1.37 0.75 210

1/2 0.531 4,500 1.50 0.81 278

5/8 0.656 6,900 1.87 1.00 422

3/4 0.787 10,600 2.12 1.12 628

1 1.031 17,900 2.75 1.50 1,069

1/4 0.281 2,600 1.00 0.47 71

5/16 0.327 3,900 1.10 0.50 98

3/8 0.390 5,400 1.23 0.62 144

7/16 0.468 7,200 1.37 0.75 210

1/2 0.531 9,200 1.50 0.81 278

5/8 0.656 13,000 1.87 1.00 422

3/4 0.781 20,200 2.12 1.12 606

7/8 0.875 24,500 2.25 1.14 776

1 1.000 34,100 2.75 1.50 1,050

1/4 0.281 3,150 0.84 0.47 74

5/16 0.327 4,700 0.98 0.46 100

3/8 0.406 6,600 1.14 0.54 156

7/16 0.468 8,750 1.33 0.62 204

1/2 0.531 11,300 1.43 0.72 259

*WARNING! DO NOT EXCEED WORKING LOAD LIMIT.

BINDER CHAIN ASSEMBLIES AVAILABLE IN GRADE 43, 70 & 80AND A VARIETY OF SIZES AND LENGTHS

See page 61 for additional Binding Chain information.


Transport Chain (Binding Chain)

GRADE 70 TRANSPORT (BINDING) CHAIN• Do not use for overhead lifting• High-carbon steel, heat treated• Zinc plated with gold chromate finish• Meets ASTM & NACM standards• Meets FMCSA & CVSA requirements• Thermal heat treated using advanced technology• Heat treated for superior wear and toughness• 100% proof tested• Permanent identification on chain• Full weld trim• Chart Note: ** Standard Link Grade 70 Chain• Design Factor 4:1

BINDING CHAIN SPECIFICATIONSThis chart indicates the minimum number of chains required to secure loads in the forward direction (0.8g deceleration)* per federal Motor Carriers Safety Administration, DOT Regulations; per 49CFR, Part 393 - Paragraph 393.102.*Refer to 49CFR, Parts 392 and 393, for North American Standard for Protection Against Falling & Shifting Cargo for complete regulations.

CHAINSIZE (IN)

WLL (LBS)

NOMINAL CHAIN DIMENSIONS (IN) PER FOOT

PER DRUM PER PAILFULL DRUM HALF DRUM

PRODUCT CODE

LENGTH (FT)A B C

PRODUCT CODE

WEIGHT (LBS)

APPROXIMATE NUMBER OF

LINKSPRODUCT

CODELENGTH

(FT)PRODUCT

CODELENGTH

(FT)1/4 3,150 0.28 0.84 0.47 608927 0.76 14.30 678531 800 678521 400 678517 130

5/16 4,700 0.33 0.98 0.46 608935 1.01 12.20 678532 550 678522 275 678518 90

5/16** 4,700 0.33 1.10 0.50 609035 0.97 10.90 679032 550 679022 275 679018 90

3/8 6,600 0.39 1.14 0.54 608941 1.46 10.50 678533 400 678523 200 678519 60

3/8** 6,600 0.39 1.38 0.60 609041 1.37 8.73 679033 400 679023 200 679019 60

1/2 11,300 0.53 1.56 0.73 608954 2.70 7.70 678535 200 678525 100 – –

MIN # OF CHAINS REQUIRED TO SECURE LOADS IN FORWARDDIRECTION BY WEIGHT OF THE ARTICLE IN LBS (kN)

CHAIN GRADE SIZEWORKING

LOAD LIMIT 5,000(22)

10,000(44)

15,000(67)

20,000(89)

25,000(111)

30,000(133)

35,000(156)

40,000(178)

45,000(200)

50,000(222)(IN) (LBS) (kN)

GRADE 30PROOF COIL

5/16 1,900 8 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 22

3/8 2,650 12 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 14 16

GRADE 43HIGH TEST

5/16 3,900 17 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

3/8 5,400 24 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8

GRADE 70TRANSPORT

1/4 3,150 14 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13

5/16 4,700 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9

3/8 6,600 29 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 7

GRADE 80ALLOY

7/32 2,100 9 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

9/32 3,500 16 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12

5/16 4,500 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3/8 7,100 32 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 6 6

GRADE 100 ALLOY 3/8 8,800 39 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5


CM Lever Hoists

SERIES 602/ 603 BANDIT SERIES 653 SERIES 640 SHORT HAND

CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING1/4 3 1

1/2 3 1

3/4 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1

1 3 1

1-1/2 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1

2 3 1

3 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 2

4-1/2

6 3 2 3 2 3 4

FEATURES

Load Limiter Optional Optional Optional

Metal Housing 3 3 3

Aluminum Housing 3 3

Free Chaining 3 3 3 3 3

Weston Brake 3 3 3 3 3

Standard Lifts (ft) 5, 10 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 20

Zinc-Plated Chain 3 3 3

Self-Colored Chain 3 3

Metric Rated 3 3 3 3

Warranty Lifetime Lifetime 5 Years Lifetime Lifetime

SERIES 602/603 Mini Ratchet HoistThe most compact and comfortable ratchet lever hoist in the market. Performs just like larger lever hoist models.

SHORT HANDLE PULLERSame heavy-duty design as the Puller in a smaller size for lighter loads and tighter spaces.

THE BANDIT Ratchet Lever Hoist One of the most compact and durable ratchet lever hoists in the industry. Its lightweight and portable design, easy free-chain-ing feature and 360° rotating handle make a versatile hoist.

PULLER SERIES 640 Heavy-duty design for pulling, lifting, dragging, and stretching construction and industrial applications. Built for ease of use, ease of maintenance and long life.

SERIES 653 Lever Operated Hoist Features a short handle and minimal lever pull effort. High quality, rugged steel for close quarter pulling, stretching, and hoisting applications. Ideal for a wide array of applications in construction, industrial and plant operations.

LEVER HOIST MODEL COMPARISON


CM Hand Chain Hoists

SERIES 622The CM Series 622 Hand Chain Hoist features a simple, efficient and economical design. Its compact design, low headroom and lightweight steel construction makes this hoist easy to install, even in confined spaces.

CYCLONE The CM Cyclone Hand Chain Hoist features superior engineering, efficiency and durability and is considered one of the most popular and reliable hand chain hoists ever designed.

SERIES 622 CYCLONE

CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING1/4 3 1

1/2 3 1 3 1

1 3 1 3 1

1-1/2 3 1

2 3 1 3 1

3 3 2 3 2

4 3 2

5 3 2 3 3

6 3 3

8 3 4

10 3 5

12 3* 6*

FEATURESLoad Limiter 3

Metal Housing 3

Aluminum Housing 3

Weston Brake 3 3

Standard Lifts (ft) 10, 15, 20 10

Low Headroom Option 3

Zinc Plate Hand Chain

Zinc Plate Load Chain

Self-Colored Hand Chain 3 3

Self-Colored Load Chain 3 3

ConfiguratorQuoted 3

Domestic Hoist 3

Warranty 1 Year Lifetime

Metric Ton Rated 3 3

622 CYCLONE


360º Hoists

HURRICANE 360° The CM Hurricane 360º features a full cycle of flexibility for a wide range of lifting and pulling applications. A unique hand chain hoist by any comparison in the market, the CM Hurricane 360º provides maximum versatility and safety on any job site. The patented hand chain cover rotates a full 360 degrees to allow loads to be lifted, pulled, or positioned from virtually any angle.

TORNADO 360° Redefining lever-operated hoists, the CM® Tornado 360°™ features the revolutionary Sidewinder™ lever handle that allows for efficient operation in both lifting and pulling applications. Ergonomically designed for increased safety, the patent-pendingCM Tornado 360° lets the operator work up to 12 times faster and with as much as 30% less pull force than with conventional ratchet lever tools.

TORNADO 360 HURRICANE 360

CAPACITY (TON) CAPACITY REEVING CAPACITY REEVING1/4

1/2 3 1

3/4 3 1

1 3 1

1-1/2 3 1

2 3 1

3 3 1 3 1

4

5 3 2

6 3 2

8

10 3 3

FEATURESLoad Limiter Optional 3

Metal Housing 3

Aluminum Housing 3

Free Chaining 3

Weston Brake 3 3

Standard Lifts (ft) 5, 10, 15, 20 10, 15, 20

Low Headroom Option

Standard Chain Gold Chromate Zinc Plated

ConfiguratorQuoted 3

Domestic Hoist

Warranty Lifetime Lifetime

Metric Ton Rated 3

TORNADO 360

HURRICANE 360


CM Lodestar

KEY BENEFITS

STANDARD FEATURES

SPECIFICATIONS

3-STEP INFINITELY VARIABLE CONTROL STANDARD Provides acceleration and deceleration for full load control and precise positioning.

SOFT STARTS Increase the life of gear train components, load chain, hooks and brake components.

ELECTRONIC REVERSINGEliminates the need for magnetic contactor and speed relay controls.

6:1 SPEED RATIO

FAULT HISTORY

PHASE LOSS PROTECTION

VFD PROGRAMMABLE To customer’s exact voltage requirements.

MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM SPEED SETTINGS With the ability to choose intermediate speeds during operation without timely programming or upgrades.

115 VOLT INTERFACE CARD STANDARD Allows for integration into existing bridge and crane systems without upgrades or modifications to the hoist VFD controls.

MOTOR THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

ADJUSTABLE RAMP TIME AND SPEEDS 3 second ramp time between minimum and maximum speed setting.

3-STEP ROBUST NEMA 4X CONTROL STATION

RATED CAPACITY (TONS)

STANDARD LIFT (FT)

LIFT SPEED (FPM)MOTOR HP MODEL REEVING

PRODUCT CODEMINIMUM MAXIMUM 230-3-60 460-3-60

1/8 10 5.3 32 1/4 A 1 2709NH 2710NH

1/410 2.6 16 1/4 B 1 2726NH 2729NH10 5.3 32 1/2 C 1 2734NH 2736NH

1/210 2.6 16 1/2 F 1 2730NH 2731NH10 5.3 32 1 J 1 3635NH 3636NH10 10.6 64 2 JJ 1 3642NH 3643NH

110 2.6 16 1 L 1 3625NH 3626NH10 5.3 32 2 LL 1 3644NH 3645NH

210 1.3 8 1 R 2 3632NH 3633NH10 2.6 16 2 RR 2 3646NH 3647NH

310 0.9 5.5 1 RT 3 9531NH 9534NH10 1.8 11 2 RRT 3 9539NH 9540NH

For versatility and ultimate control, choose the CM Lodestar electric chain hoist equipped with an under-the-cover Variable Frequency Drive.

CAPACITIES1/8 to 3 Ton

LIFT10 feet standard

VOLTAGESAvailable on 3-phase,460 volt and 230 volt models


Harrington Lever Hoists

LB LEVER MANUAL HOISTS

Harrington's LB lever hoists combine easy operation with a compact, low headroom design that easily handles real-world demands. These hoists can be used horizontally, vertically, inverted or at any other load angle and have the strength to get the job done. • Capacities 3/4 Ton through 9 Ton • Compact design makes it a perfect fit for use in tight quarters • Steel body is more durable yet lighter in weight than die cast aluminum models • Revolutionary freewheeling offers one handed operation • 360 degree handle rotation and pivot & swivel top hook for easy rigging

LX LEVER MANUAL HOISTS

Harrington's LX lever pullers are ultra lightweight and compact yet extremely durable. Known as the perfect “toolbox hoists”, these little hoists have all the power you need to get the job done. Revolutionary 1/2 Ton model is the only 1/2 Ton “toolbox” sized puller in the industry. • Capacities 1/4 Ton and 1/2 Ton • Compact, low headroom design makes it a perfect tool for use in tight quarters • Low pulling force required for ease of use • Effortless to transport, install & store • Free-chain adjusting mechanism for quick adjustments • Rugged die-cast aluminum body with steel frame

CAP (TONS)

PRODUCT CODE

HEAD-ROOM C

(IN)STANDARD

LIFT (FT)

PULL TO LIFT LOAD

(LBS)

LOAD CHAIN DIA (MM) x CHAIN FALL

LINES

NET WEIGHT

(LBS)

SHIPPING WEIGHT

APPROX (LBS)WEIGHT FOR ADD’L

1' OF LIFT (LBS)3/4 LB008 11.0

5

545.6 X 1 13

130.5

1 LB010 11.8 72 14

1-1/2 LB015 13.2 64 7.1 X 1 18 18 0.72 LB020

14.859

8.8 X 1 25 26 1.12-3/4 LB028 81

3 LB030 15.6 69 10.0 X 1 33 35 1.56 LB060 21.3 72 10.0 X 2 57 60 3.29 LB090 26.8 78 10.0 X 3 88 93 4.7

CAP (TONS)

PRODUCT CODE

HEAD-ROOM C

(IN)STANDARD

LIFT (FT)

PULL TO LIFT LOAD

(LBS)


LINES

NET WEIGHT

(LBS)

SHIPPING WEIGHT

APPROX (LBS)WEIGHT FOR ADD’L

1' OF LIFT (LBS)1/4 LX003 8.1

540 3.2 X 1 3.5 4.0 0.15

1/2 LX005 9.7 62 4.3 X 1 5.7 6.2 0.25


Harrington Hand Chain Hoists

CF HAND CHAIN HOISTS

Harrington's CF hand chain hoists were designed for portability and durability. These hoists are the economical and practical choice for efficient, trouble-free service. The CF model is a long-lasting construction grade hoist that offers the best value in a hand chain hoist. • Capacities 1/2 Ton through 5 Ton • Rugged die-cast aluminum body provides exceptional strength • Pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings for long life and low maintenance • Weston-style load brakes for positive braking action • Designed with fewer parts to simplify maintenance

CB HAND CHAIN HOISTS

Harrington's CB hand chain hoists combine heavy duty construction with top-of-the-line internal compo-nents for the most demanding industrial applications. These hoists are built to withstand rugged, day-in, day-out use and they are easily maintained and repairable making them the perfect hoist for a long-lasting fleet of industrial products. • Capacities 1/2 Ton through 100 Ton • All-steel construction for extreme durability • Low headroom and lightweight design for ease of use • Slip clutch prevents lifting damaging loads beyond rated capacity • Limited number of parts simplifies and reduces maintenance

CAP (TONS)

PRODUCT CODE

HEAD-ROOM C

(IN)STANDARD

LIFT (FT)

PULL TO LIFT LOAD

(LBS)OVERHAUL

RATIO


LINES

NET WEIGHT

(LBS)

SHIPPING WEIGHT

APPROX (LBS)

WEIGHT FOR ADD’L 1' OF LIFT (LBS)

1/2 CF005 12.8

10

60 19 5.0 x 1 24 26 1.01 CF010 14.6 72 31 6.3 x 1 29 31 1.2

1-1/2 CF015 17.3 84 41 7.1 x 1 40 42 1.42 CF020 20.1 80 63 6.3 x 2 47 49 1.83 CF030 23.2

9281 7.1 x 2 62 66 2.1

5 CF050 24.4 134 7.1 x 3 82 86 2.9

CAP (TONS)

PRODUCT CODE

HEAD-ROOM

(IN)STANDARD

LIFT (FT)

PULL TO LIFT LOAD

(LBS)OVERHAUL

RATIO


LINES

NET WEIGHT

(LBS)

SHIPPING WEIGHT

APPROX (LBS)

WEIGHT FOR ADD’L 1' OF LIFT (LBS)

1/2 CB005 11.2

8

48 25 5.0 x 1 22 23 1.01 CB010 11.6 58 43 6.3 x 1 25 26 1.2

1-1/2 CB015 13.8 70 57 7.1 x 1 32 33 1.42 CB020 14.8 72 70 8.0 x 1 41 43 1.6

2-1/2 CB025 16.5 66 99 9.0 x 1 56 58 1.83 CB030 20.1 72 114 7.1 x 2 49 53 2.15 CB050 23.6 68 198 9.0 x 2 85 89 3.08 CB080 30.3 75 297 9.0 x 3 124 131 4.210 CB100 29.9

12

72 396 9.0 x 4 186 203 5.515 CB150 40.2 74 594 9.0 x 6 346 368 7.920 CB200 46.5 72 x 2 396 x 2 9.0 x 8 524 678 10.930 CB300 51.2

86 x 2495 x 2 9.0 x 10 690 889 13.3

40 CB400 58.3 693 x 2 9.0 x 14 1068 1398 18.250 CB500 61.4 98 x 2 792 x 2 9.0 x 16 1422 1752 20.680 CB800 100.8 86 x 4 693 x 4 9.0 x 28 3392

–36.3

100 CB1000 125.2 98 x 4 792 x 4 9.0 x 32 6525 41.2


Harrington Electric Chain Hoists

SNER ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS

Harrington's SNER electric chain hoists are built for extreme duty applications that require single phase power. A hoist with a 60 minute, H4 duty rated motor is revolutionary and unmatched in a single phase offering. Maintenance friendly features include a unique chain guide, hinged control panel, sealed housing and durable load sheave. For beam travel requirements couple with SMR motorized, PT manual push and GT manual geared trolleys. • SNER, SNERM, SNERP, SNERG capacities 1/4 Ton through 3 Ton • 60 minute, H4 rated, fan cooled motor for the most demanding applications • Pull-rotor electric brake is self-adjusting and virtually maintenance-free • Ability to accommodate very long lifts • Compact, low headroom design • Completely sealed body suitable for harsh indoor or outdoor environments - IP55 rated

CAP (TONS)

PRODUCT CODE

HEADROOM C (IN)

STD LIFT (FT)

PUSH BUTTON CORD L

(FT)

LIFTING SPEED

(FT/MIN)

LIFTING MOTOR 1 PHASE 60 Hz LOAD CHAIN

DIA (MM) X CHAIN FALL

LINES

NET WEIGHT

(LBS)

WEIGHT FOR

ADD’L1' OF LIFT

(LBS)OUTPUT

(Hp)

RATED CURRENT

@115V (AMPS) @230V (AMPS)1/4 SNER003S 13.8

107.2

140.34 7.7 3.9

5.0 x 1 82 0.37

1/2 SNER005L 14.0 7 6.3 x 1 84 0.57

1/2 SNER005S 14.6 150.6 16.9 8.5

6.3 x 1 104 0.57

1 SNER010L 16.1 7 8.0 x 1 110 0.93

1 SNER010S 17.3 14

1.2 23.9 12.0

8.0 x 1 159 0.93

2 SNER020L 22.6 7 10.0 x 1 174 1.5

3 SNER030C 29.5 8.2 3.5 10.0 x 2 207 3.1

HARRINGTON ELECTRIC CHAIN HOISTS

Easy AccessSuspension

“The Guardian” Smart Brake Technology

Unique Chain Guide

Dual Speed VFD

Pendant Controls

Standard Count Hour Meter

Notched Nook & Latch System

Harrington electric hoists can be customized to various specifications.


Cordage Information

Select the Correct SizeA rope too small may fail quickly, one too large will prove expensive. Don't work any rope above one-fifth of its breaking strength.

Avoid OverloadsSafe working load ranges for any new rope is between 1/5 and 1/12 of its minimum tensile. Make enough allowances for safety if your rope is old or worn. Ignoring this safety factor causes early rope replacement and is dangerous to men and materials.

Keep Away from ChemicalsAcids & Alkalis are injurious to rope. If exposed, wash thoroughly and inspect before using. Watch for battery and building cleaning acids, caustic soda and paint. Keep rats away.

Stop Unnecessary WearOuter and inner rope fibers contribute equally to the strength of your rope. If worn out, the rope is naturally weakened. Eliminate rubbing, dragging or working over rough surfaces. Protect its surface with chafing gear, such as canvas wrapped and tied around the rope. Pad corners of sharp objects when lifting, and avoid strain on sharp bends. Remove kinks if they form.

To Uncoil RopeA new coil of rope should be placed flat on its side with the "tag" inside end down. Remove the outside lashings and unfasten the inside bands. Leave burlap around the coil to keep rope clean. Reach down through the eye of coil and pull out the inside end, where tag is attached,through the eye of the coil.

Store it ProperlyKeep in dry, cool place with good air circulation. Use wooden grating on concrete or steel floors, and keep away from steam pipes and metal walls. Protect from prolonged exposure to sunlight. Store only clean, dry rope.

Use Right SheavesBlock sizes or sheaves should be eight times the diameter of the rope. For power transmis-sion or for use with continuous load, sheaves should be at least forty times the diameter of the rope. Small sheaves cause added friction and rope wear. Keep sheaves smooth.

Watch Rope ConditionInspect rope frequently, whether working or in storage. Occasionally reverse your rope, end-to-end, to distribute the wear more evenly.Use worn rope only where strength failure will not cause injury or damage.

*All ropes will last longer if given proper care and handling, storage and use. These are the more important points to keep in mind to assure greatest service and safety.


Cordage InformationROPE CONSTRUCTION SELECTION GUIDE*

CHARACTERISTICS SOLID BRAID HOLLOW BRAID DOUBLE BRAID DIAMOND BRAID TWISTED

No. of Strands or Carriers 9, 12 or 18 8, 12 or 16 16, 24 or 32 8 or 16 3

Spliceable No Yes Yes No Yes

Strength to Weight 5 2 1 4 3

Flexibility 3 1 2 4 5

Flattens Under Load No Yes No Yes No

Rotates Under Load No No No No Yes

Mechanical Elongation 1 4 5 3 2

Cost Per Size 2 4 1 3 5

Working Load (as a % of Tensile) 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 15-20% 8-14%

Abrasion Resistance 1 5 2 3 4

WARNING: This guide is de-signed for general reference only. The construction comparisons assumeusingthesameropefiberand size. Expert advice should be sought when choosing a rope where protection of life or property is involved.

Top View Top View Top View Top View Top View

Solid or Single BraidThis construction leaves a void in the center and utilizes strand counts of eight, 12 or 16. The hollow is instrumental in making it easy to splice. Hollow braids are nonrotating and are an extremely efficient way to utilize fiber.

Plaited or Hollow RopeEight-strand “Square Braid” is comprised of eight individual strands, which are woven together as four pairs. Its major advantages are non-rotation & high energy absorption.

Double BraidThis is really two separate ropes in one: the core, which is a single braid, is over-braided with a sleeve. This construction allows the rope to be used for more applications; the same or dissimilar fibers can be engineered into a rope suited to any of many specific applications. This construction entirely shields one of the two elements in the rope from abrasion.

Three-Strand or TwistedThe simplest type of rope is formed by twisting fiber into a strand, and then twisting three strands into rope. Its conversion efficiency is relatively low since this construction technique is the hardest on fiber.


Cordage Information

ROPE FIBER SELECTION GUIDE: FIBER PROPERTIES - TYPICAL VALUESMANILA SISAL COTTON NYLON POLYESTER

STRENGTH:Breaking Tenacity – Dry (grams/denier)Wet Strength vs. Dry StrengthShock-load Absorption Ability

5.0 - 6.0Up to 120%

Poor

4.0 - 5.0Up to 120%

Poor

2.0 - 3.0 Up to 120%

Very Poor

7.0 - 9.585-90%

Excellent

7.0 - 9.5100%Good

WEIGHT:Specific GravityFloats

1.38No

1.38No

1.54No

1.14No

1.38No

ELONGATION:Percent of BreakCreep (ext. under sustained load)

10 - 12%Very Low

10 - 12%Very Low

5 - 12%Very Low

18 - 25%Moderate

12 - 15%Low

EFFECTS OF MOISTURE:Water Absorp. of Indiv. FibersDielectric Properties

Up to 100%Very Poor

Up to 100%Very Poor

Up to 100%Very Poor

2 - 8%Poor

<1%Good

DEGRADATION:Resistance to UV SunlightResistance to Rot MildewStorage Requirements

GoodPoor

Dry Only

GoodPoor

Dry Only

GoodPoor

Dry Only

GoodExcellent

Wet or Dry

ExcellentExcellent

Wet or DryTHERMAL PROPERTIES:Melts at

Does Not MeltChars at 350°

Does Not MeltChars at 350°

Does Not MeltChars at 300° 420 - 480° 490 - 500°

RESISTANCE3:Resistance to AcidsResistance to AlkalisResistance to Oils & Gas

PoorPoorPoor

PoorPoorFair

PoorFairPoor

FairVery GoodVery Good

GoodFair

Very Good

POLYPROPYLENE POLYETHENE KEVLAR1 SPECTRA2

STRENGTH:Breaking Tenacity – Dry (grams/denier)Wet Strength vs. Dry StrengthShock-load Absorption Ability

6.5100%

Very Good

6.0100%Fair

18-26.595%Poor

30.0100%Fair

WEIGHT:Specific GravityFloats

0.91Yes

0.95Yes

1.44No

0.97Yes

ELONGATION:Percent of BreakCreep (ext. under sustained load)

15 - 25%High

15 - 25%High

1.5 - 3.6%Very Low

3.5%Moderate

EFFECTS OF MOISTURE:Water Absorp. of Indiv. FibersDielectric Properties

NoneExcellent

NoneExcellent

3.5 - 7.0%Poor

NoneExcellent

DEGRADATION:Resistance to UV SunlightResistance to Rot MildewStorage Requirements

Poor*Excellent

Wet or Dry

Fair*Excellent

Wet or Dry

FairExcellent

Wet or Dry

FairExcellent

Wet or DryTHERMAL PROPERTIES:Melts at 330° 275°

800° Beginsto Decompose 297°

RESISTANCE3:Resistance to AcidsResistance to AlkalisResistance to Oils & Gas

ExcellentExcellent

Very Good

ExcellentExcellent

Very Good

FairFair

Very Good

ExcellentExcellent

Very Good

* Black is best 1 - Based on Dupont Kevlar® Data 2 - Based on Allied/Signa; Spectra® Data - Type 990 3 - Resistance is relative to the length of exposure, percent of concentration & temperature.


Twisted Ropes

DIAMETER(IN)

NOMINAL STANDARDTENSILE

(LBS)

MINIMUMTENSILE

(LBS)

UNITS-SPOOL-

(FT)

RWL5:1 - 12:1

(LBS)

APPROX.DENSITY

(LBS/100°)SIZENO

DIA DECEQUIV.

1/4 3/4 0.250 1,650 1,490 600 298 - 124 1.55/16 1 0.313 2,550 2,300 600 460 - 192 2.53/8 1-1/8 0.375 3,750 3,340 600 668 - 278 3.41/2 1-1/2 0.500 6,400 5,750 600 1,150 - 479 6.55/8 2 0.625 10,000 9,000 600 1,800 - 750 10.03/4 2-1/2 0.750 14,200 12,800 600 2,560 - 1,067 14.57/8 2-3/4 0.875 20,000 18,000 600 3,600 - 1,500 20.01 3 1.000 25,000 22,600 600 4,520 - 1,883 26.0

1-1/8 3-1/2 1.125 32,000 28,800 600 5,760 - 2,400 32.51-1/4 3-3/4 1.250 37,500 33,800 600 6,760 - 2,817 40.01-1/2 4-1/2 1.625 53,000 47,800 600 9,560 - 3,983 55.01-5/8 5 1.500 65,000 58,500 600 11,700 - 4,875 66.5

2 6 2.000 92,000 83,000 600 16,600 - 6,917 95.02-1/4 7 2.250 125,000 113,000 600 22,600 - 9,417 129.02-1/2 7-1/2 2.500 140,000 126,000 600 25,200 - 10,500 149.02-5/8 8 2.625 162,000 146,000 600 29,200 - 12,167 168.0

3 9 3.000 200,000 180,000 600 36,000 - 15,000 210.04 12 4.000 360,000 324,000 600 64,800 - 27,000 379.0

DIAMETER(IN)


(LBS)

MINIMUMTENSILE

(LBS)

UNITS-SPOOL-

(FT)

RWL5:1 - 12:1

(LBS)

APPROX.DENSITY

(LBS/100°)SIZENO

DIA DECEQUIV.

3/8 1-1/8 0.375 3,750 3,340 600 668- 278 4.57/16 1-1/4 0.438 5,000 4,500 600 900 - 375 6.21/2 1-1/2 0.500 6,400 5,750 600 1,150 - 479 8.05/8 2 0.625 9,550 8,600 600 1,720 - 717 12.33/4 2-1/4 0.750 12,500 11,300 600 2,260 - 942 17.57/8 2-3/4 0.875 17,000 15,250 600 3,050 - 1,271 23.41 3 1.000 22,000 19,800 600 3,960 - 1,650 30.4

1-1/8 3-1/2 1.125 27,550 24,800 600 4,960 - 2,067 38.21-1/4 3-3/4 1.250 33,200 29,800 600 5,960 - 2,483 46.51-1/2 4-1/2 1.500 46,800 42,200 600 8,440 - 3,517 67.01-5/8 5 1.625 55,500 50,000 600 10,000 - 4,167 79.0

2 6 2.000 80,000 72,000 600 14,400 - 6,000 118.02-1/4 7 2.250 100,500 90,500 600 18,100 - 7,542 148.02-1/2 7-1/2 2.500 122,000 110,000 600 22,000 - 9,167 181.02-5/8 8 2.625 137,000 123,000 600 24,600 - 10,250 204.0

3 9 3.000 174,000 157,000 600 31,400 - 13,083 258.0

NYLON ROPE • Four stage construction • High strength and elasticity • Medium-Soft Lay • Color: Natural White

POLYESTER ROPE • Continuous multifilament yarn • Good abrasion resistance • Low stretch • Color: Natural White • Excellent UV resistance


Twisted & Solid Braid Ropes

MANILA • Traditional three-strand rope • Subject to rot • Holds knots well • Color: Tan • Absorbs water

SOLID BRAID ROPESSolid braid ropes are constructed of various bundles of fiber interlocked together in a circular braiding pattern

PROLINE® MULTIFILAMENT POLY • Inexpensive • Flexible • Floats • Holds knots well • Color: Natural White

NOMINAL DIAMETER(IN)

UNITS -SPOOL-(FT)

TENSILE STRENGTH(LBS)

RWL(LBS)

APPROX. WT.PER COIL (LBS)

3/16 1600 405 81 251/4 1200 540 108 251/4 2400 540 108 505/16 850 900 180 255/16 1700 900 180 503/8 600 1,215 243 253/8 1200 1,215 243 507/16 600 1,575 315 321/2 600 2,385 477 451/2 1200 2,385 477 905/8 600 3,960 792 825/8 1200 3,960 792 1643/4 600 4,860 972 1043/4 1200 4,860 972 208

13/16 600 5,850 1170 1177/8 600 6,930 1386 1391 300 8,100 1620 811 600 8,100 1620 1621 1200 8,100 1620 324

1-1/4 600 12,150 2430 2511-1/2 600 16,650 3330 364

2 600 27,900 5580 624

DIAMETER(IN)


(LBS)

MINIMUMTENSILE

(LBS)

UNITS-REEL-

(FT)

RWL5:1 - 12:1

(LBS)

APPROX.DENSITY

(LBS/100°)SIZENO

DIA DECEQUIV.

1/8 4 0.125 175 158 1000 32 - 13 0.2

3/16 6 0.188 450 405 1000 71 - 34 0.6

1/4 8 0.250 725 653 1000 131 - 54 1.13/8 12 0.375 1,400 1,260 500 252 - 105 2.41/2 16 0.500 2,200 1,980 500 396 - 165 4.0


Solid & Double Braid RopesNYLON

• Color: Natural White • Good general purpose cord • Good UV resistance • Works well in pulleys • Strong

NYLON • Gold Braid® Brand • Spliceable • Resists abrasion & snagging • Color: White & Gold • Excellent shock absorbing elasticity • Torque-free

POLYESTER • Rhino Flex™ Brand • Low stretch, high stretch • Good dielectric properties • Torque-free • Resistant to ultraviolet degradation • Color: White w/gold Tracer

DOUBLE BRAID ROPESDouble braid ropes are actually two ropes in one and are sometimes called braid on braid ropes.

The jacket is braided over a braided core.

DIAMETER(IN)


(LBS)

MINIMUMTENSILE

(LBS)

UNITS-REEL-

(FT)

RWL5:1 - 12:1

(LBS)

APPROX.DENSITY

(LBS/100°)SIZENO

DIA DECEQUIV.

3/32 3 0.094 275 248 1000 50 - 21 0.27/64 3-1/2 0.109 325 293 1000 59 - 24 0.31/8 4 0.125 400 360 1000 72 - 30 0.45/32 5 0.156 600 540 1000 108 - 45 0.63/16 6 0.188 850 765 1000 153 - 64 0.81/4 8 0.250 1,300 1,170 1000 234 - 98 1.35/16 10 0.313 1,950 1,755 500 351 - 146 2.03/8 12 0.375 2,750 2,475 500 495 - 206 2.91/2 16 0.500 4,200 3,780 500 756 - 315 5.1

DIAMETER(IN)


(LBS)

MINIMUMTENSILE

(LBS)

UNITS-REEL-

(FT)

RWL5:1 - 12:1

(LBS)

APPROX.DENSITY

(LBS/100°)SIZENO

DIA DECEQUIV.

1/4 3/4 0.250 1,850 1,665 600 330 - 138 1.65/16 1 0.303 2,850 2,570 600 514 - 214 2.43/8 1-1/8 0.975 4,100 3,700 600 740 - 308 3.51/2 1-1/2 0.500 7,275 6,550 600 1,310 - 546 6.35/8 2 0.625 11,300 10,200 600 2,040 - 850 9.83/4 2-1/4 0.750 16,300 14,700 600 2,940 - 1,225 14.17/8 2-3/4 0.875 22,100 19,900 600 3,980 - 1,658 19.11 3 1.000 28,900 26,000 600 5,200 - 2,167 25.0

DIAMETER(IN)


(LBS)

MINIMUMTENSILE

(LBS)

UNITS-REEL-

(FT)

RWL5:1 - 12:1

(LBS)

APPROX.DENSITY

(LBS/100°)SIZENO

DIA DECEQUIV.

1/4 3/4 0.250 2,500 2,250 600 450 - 188 2.13/8 1-1/8 0.375 5,085 5,085 600 1,017 - 424 4.51/2 1-1/2 0.500 9,900 8,910 600 1,782 - 743 8.05/8 2 0.625 15,000 13,500 600 2,700 - 1,125 12.53/4 2-1/4 0.750 21,000 18,900 600 3,780 - 1,575 17.97/8 2-3/4 0.875 28,000 25,200 600 5,040 - 2,100 24.41 3 1.000 37,200 33,480 600 6,696 - 2,790 33.3

1-1/8 3-1/2 1.125 46,400 41,760 600 8,352 - 3,480 42.21-1/4 3-3/4 1.250 54,000 48,600 600 9,720 - 4,050 49.81-1/2 4-1/2 1.500 76,000 68,400 600 13,680 - 5,700 71.81-5/8 5 1.625 88,000 79,200 600 15,840 - 6,600 84.0


Rope Specifications

ROPE SPECIFICATIONSTHREE STRAND AND EIGHT STRAND – STANDARD LAY ROPES

DIA.(IN)

CIR.(IN)

POLYPRO NYLON POLYESTER MANILALBS. PER 100'

FEET PER LB.

BRK.STGTH.(LBS)

LBS. PER 100'

FEET PER LB.

BRK.STGTH.(LBS)

LBS. PER 100'

FEET PER LB

BRK.STGTH.(LBS.)

LBS. PER 100'

FEET PER LB.

BRK.STGTH.(LBS)

3/16 5/8 .75 133.0 800 1.0 100.0 1,000 1.2 83.4 850 1.5 66.7 450

1/4 3/4 1.2 83.4 1,250 1.5 66.7 1,650 2.0 50.0 1,650 2.0 50.0 600

5/16 1 1.8 55.6 1,900 2.5 40.0 2,550 3.1 32.2 2,550 3.0 35.0 1,000

3/8 1-1/8 2.8 35.7 2,700 3.5 28.5 3,700 4.5 22.2 3,700 4.0 25.0 1,350

7/16 1-1/4 3.8 26.3 3,500 5.0 20.0 5,000 6.2 16.1 5,000 5.3 19.0 1,750

1/2 1-1/2 4.7 21.3 4,200 6.5 15.4 6,400 8.0 12.5 6,400 7.5 13.3 2,650

5/8 2 7.5 13.3 6,200 10.5 9.5 10,400 13.0 7.7 10,000 13.3 7.5 4,400

3/4 2-1/4 10.7 9.3 8,500 14.5 6.9 14,000 17.5 5.7 12,500 16.7 6.0 5,400

7/8 2-3/4 15.0 6.7 11,500 20.0 5.0 20,000 25.0 4.0 18,000 22.0 4.5 7,700

1 3 18.0 5.5 14,000 26.0 3.8 25,000 30.5 3.3 22,000 27.0 3.7 9,000

1-1/8 3-1/2 23.7 4.2 18,300 34.0 2.9 33,000 40.0 2.5 29,500 36.0 2.8 12,000

1-1/4 3-3/4 27.0 3.7 21,000 40.0 2.5 37,500 46.3 2.5 33,200 42.0 2.4 13,500

1-5/16 4 30.5 3.3 23,500 45.0 2.2 43,000 52.5 1.9 37,500 48.0 2.2 –

1-1/2 4-1/2 38.5 2.6 29,700 55.0 1.8 53,000 66.8 1.5 46,800 60.0 1.7 18,500

1-5/8 5 47.5 2.1 36,000 68.0 1.5 65,000 82.0 1.2 57,000 75.0 1.3 22,500

1-3/4 5-1/2 57.0 1.7 43,000 83.0 1.2 78,000 98.0 1.02 67,800 90.0 1.1 26,500

2 6 69.0 1.4 53,000 95.0 1.1 92,000 118.0 .85 75,000 108.0 .93 31,000

2-1/8 6-1/2 80.0 1.2 62,000 109.0 .92 105,000 135.0 .75 81,000 125.0 .79 36,000

2-1/4 7 92.0 1.1 70,000 129.0 .77 125,000 157.0 .64 96,000 146.0 .69 41,000

2-1/2 7-1/2 107.0 .93 80,500 150.0 .67 138,000 181.0 .55 110,000 167.0 .59 46,500

2-5/8 8 120.0 .83 90,000 168.0 .59 154,000 205.0 .49 125,000 191.0 .53 52,000

2-7/8 8-1/2 137.0 .73 100,000 189.0 .53 173,000 230.0 .43 140,000 213.0 .47 58,000

3 9 153.0 .65 116,000 210.0 .47 195,000 258.0 .39 158,000 242.0 .42 64,000

3-1/4 10 190.0 .52 137,000 263.0 .38 238,000 319.0 .31 190,000 299.0 .33 77,000

3-1/2 11 232.0 .43 162,000 316.0 .31 288,000 384.0 .26 230,000 367.0 .28 91,000

4 12 275.0 .36 190,000 397.0 .26 342,000 460.0 .21 275,000 436.0 .23 105,000


Yale Rope

DIAMETER (IN)AVERAGE SPLICED BREAK

STRENGTH* (LBS)MINIMUM SPLICED BREAK

STRENGTH* (LBS)MAXIMUM** WORK

LOAD 5:1 (LBS)WEIGHT

(LBS/100FT)1/4 6,000 5,400 1,200 2.4

5/16 9,500 8,550 1,900 2.9

3/8 12,700 11,430 2,540 3.8

7/16 15,300 13,770 3,060 4.9

1/2 22,000 19,800 4,400 7.3

9/16 27,800 25,020 5,560 8.0

5/8 33,000 29,700 6,600 11.0

3/4 45,000 40,500 9,000 14.1

7/8 60,000 54,000 12,000 21.6

1 75,000 67,500 15,000 26.0

1-1/8 98,000 88,200 19,600 35.5

1-1/4 120,000 108,000 24,000 43.5

1-5/16 148,000 133,200 29,600 45.7

1-1/2 172,000 154,800 34,400 61.3

1-5/8 184,000 165,600 36,800 71.7

1-3/4 230,000 207,000 46,000 85.6

2 285,000 256,500 57,000 108.6





(LBS/100FT)5/16 3,900 3,510 780 3.2

3/8 5,900 5,310 1,180 3.9

7/16 9,800 8,820 1,960 6.4

1/2 12,500 11,250 2,500 8.5

9/16 15,800 14,220 3,160 10.5

5/8 18,500 16,650 3,700 12.5

3/4 23,250 20,925 4,650 17.4

7/8 34,350 30,915 6,870 25.9

1 41,600 37,440 8,320 31.3

*Knots and abrupt bends significantly reduce the strength of all ropes and lowers maximum working load. **Working load is based on static or moderately dynamic lifting/pulling operations. Instantaneous changes in load up or down, in excess of 10% of the rope's rated working load constitutes hazardous shock load and would void normal working load recommendation. Consult Yale Cordage for guidelines for working loads and safe use of rope.


ULTREX PLUS ROPE Ultrex Plus is a double braid of Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene, treated with Maxijacket coating for enhanced tough-ness. Sleeved with high tenacity polyester, Ultrex Plus is spliceable utilizing conventional high modulus splice techniques, or the new Yale tuck splice, which shortens the bury portion and minimizes the length of the larger diameter associated with a bury type splice. All strengths shown are for spliced line.

PE-12 ROPE PE-12 has been recently re-engineered boosting its strengths significantly. Using the same high tenacity fiber we use in our value packed Portland Braid, this high tenacity polyester single braid offers a single end per carrier construction which keeps the rope from flattening out in service and self centers in sheaves beautifully. PE-12 comes with the same tough grades of Maxijacket urethane we use on our more expensive products. PE-12 is easy to splice and field repairs are easily accomplished. It is available in unlimited lengths and brilliant colors for easy identification. PE-12 is torque free and is undamaged when rigging with swivels.


Yale Rope





(LBS/100FT)3/8 3,200 2,880 400 3.3

7/16 4,900 4,410 610 4.0

1/2 5,600 5,040 700 4.8

9/16 7,000 6,300 875 5.4

5/8 8,500 7,650 1,060 7.6

3/4 11,000 9,900 1,375 10.7





(LBS/100FT)0.44 20,000 18,000 5,000 6.7

0.53 26,000 23,400 6,500 9.2

0.58 34,000 30,600 8,500 11.4

0.63 42,500 38,250 10,625 13.5

0.71 50,500 45,450 12,625 16.9

0.84 73,500 66,150 18,375 24.2

1 100,000 90,000 25,000 32.4

1.15 125,000 112,500 31,250 42.4

1.25 158,000 142,200 39,500 52.5

1.4 195,000 175,500 48,750 64.9

1.7 264,000 237,600 66,000 92.6

1.8 310,000 279,000 77,500 98.8

1.9 360,000 324,000 90,000 113.3

2.2 430,000 387,000 107,500 144.0



HY-DEE BRAIT ROPE Hy-Dee is an 8-strand bi-polymer rope with extraordinary dielectric properties. The rope is nubby which provides excellent grip, and treated with a proprietary chemical mixture Yale calls Aralube-dielectric. This treatment is the key to Hy-Dee Brait's wet dielectric performance and allows us to make the highest dielectric strength rope commercially available. Easy to splice with a tucking procedure or by the quick splice method illustrated. Hy-Dee Brait meets ASTM 1701-12 which calls for a maximum leakage of 250 micro amperes at any time during the wet test. Elec trodes are 1 foot apart, shielded and the test is conducted at 50KV-AC. This product is 100% lot tested for dielectric conformance.

UNITREX XS ROPE Unitrex XS Max Wear is Uniline's high tech cousin, which is a parallel cored rope of Honeywell's Spectra, wrapped with a Neoprene tape and over braided with a tough jacket of high tenacity polyester. The result is a synthetic cable, somewhat stiffer than your usual rope, which is much like wire in its stretch characteristics. Unlike wire it is much lighter and easily handled. Due to its tough ness we are comfortable assigning it a higher working load rating which is 25% of its break ing strength. Unitrex XS Max Wear has high strength retention in service which is supported by field studies and our long standing track record with Uniline polyester. Unitrex's tough rubber layer protects its high modulus Spectra core and the outer jacket is saturated with Urethane making it the toughest UHMPE rope you can buy. All Yale's parallel core ropes are torque free, with bonded cores preventing contamination of the internal strength member.


Amsteel® Rope

AMSTEEL®

• Highly abrasion resistant • Nonrotational • Samthane coated • Highly flex-fatigue resistant • Made with Dyneema and lnnegra fiber • Lightweight • Wire rope replacement

AMSTEEL® – BLUE• Made with 100% Dyneema fiber • Samthane coated • Maximum strength-to weight ratio• Highly flex-fatigue resistant • Highly abrasion resistant • Nonrotational • 117th the weight of wire • Same elongation as wire • Wire rope replacement

SIZE DIAMETER (IN) SIZE CIRC. (IN)

WEIGHT PER 100 FT. (LBS)

SAMSON AVG. STRENGTH* (LBS)

SAMSON MBS* (LBS)

1/4 3/4 1.6 7,400 6,700

5/16 1 2.7 10,500 9,500

3/8 1-1/8 3.6 15,500 14,000

7/16 1-1/4 4.2 18,000 16,200

1/2 1-1/2 6.4 27,500 24,800

9/16 1-3/4 7.9 34,000 30,600

5/8 2 10.2 40,700 36,600

3/4 2-1/4 13.3 52,000 46,800

13/16 2-1/2 15.8 61,000 54,900

7/8 2-3/4 19.6 74,000 66,600

1 3 21.8 90,000 81,000

1-1/16 3-1/4 29.5 100,000 90,000

1-1/8 3-1/2 31.9 110,000 99,000

1-1/4 3-3/4 36.2 125,000 113,000

1-5/16 4 41.8 135,000 122,000

1-1/2 4-1/2 51.7 175,000 158,000

SIZE DIAMETER (IN) SIZE CIRC. (IN)

WEIGHT PER 100 FT. (LBS)

SAMSON AVG. STRENGTH* (LBS)

SAMSON MBS* (LBS)

7/64 5/16 0.3 1,600 1,4001/8 3/8 0.5 2,500 2,3005/32 15/32 .75 4,000 3,6001/4 3/4 1.6 8,600 7,7005/16 1 2.7 13,700 12,3003/8 1-1/8 3.6 19,600 17,6007/16 1-1/4 4.2 23,900 21,5001/2 1-1/2 6.4 34,000 30,6009/16 1-3/4 7.9 40,500 36,5005/8 2 10.2 52,800 47,5003/4 2-1/4 13.3 64,400 58,0007/8 2-3/4 19.6 90,800 81,7001 3 21.8 109,000 98,100

1-1/16 3-1/4 27.5 131,000 118,0001-1/8 3-1/2 31.9 148,000 133,0001-1/4 3-3/4 36.2 165,000 149,0001-5/16 4 41.8 184,000 166,0001-3/8 4-1/8 45.0 205,000 185,0001-1/2 4-1/2 51.7 228,000 205,000


Samson Rope

DIAMETER (IN) CIRCUMFERENCE (IN) WEIGHT (LBS/100FT)AVERAGE STRENGTH

(LBS)MINIMUM

STRENGTH (LBS)3/16 9/16 1.3 1,800 1,600

1/4 3/4 2.1 3,200 2,900

5/16 1 3.2 4,700 4,200

3/8 1-1/8 3.9 5,800 5,200

7/16 1-1/4 6.3 9,000 8,100

1/2 1-1/2 8 11,800 10,600

9/16 1-3/4 10 15,000 13,500

5/8 2 12 17,100 15,400

3/4 2-1/4 17.2 22,400 20,200

7/8 2-3/4 25.8 32,600 29,300

1 3 34.5 42,700 38,400

1-1/8 3-1/2 43 50,000 45,000

1-1/4 3-3/4 52.2 57,200 51,500

1-5/16 4 59.7 69,500 62,600

1-1/2 4-1/2 71.5 81,700 73,500

1-5/8 5 90.3 94,000 84,600

1-3/4 5-1/12 105 109,000 98,100

2-1/2 7-1/2 209 226,000 204,000Specifications are for spliced strengths.

APPLICATIONS• Lifting Sling / Utility• Other Fishing Line• Prusiks and Tails• Pulling / Stringing Line• Purse Seine Line

FEATURES AND BENEFITS• Available in long lengths• Easy to inspect• Easy to splice• Economical• Excellent abrasion resistance

TENEX (826) ROPE Tenex is a 12-strand single braid that offers high strength with low stretch and outstanding abrasion re-sistance. It is Samthane coated to provide abrasion resistance, enhance wear life, snag resistance, and increase ease of splicing. It is a viable alternative to using double braids when easy field splicing and economy are major considerations.

• Excellent snag resistance• Firm construction• High strength per diameter• High strength-to-weight ratio• Samthane coated


Rope Selection

Utility structures, linemen, and Samson ropes are a natural fit. Our strong, durable hand lines stand up to rigorous bending through blocks, yet are still easy on the hands. Excellent grip helps prevent slips, and allows for quick and efficient lifts. Available in an economical 3-strand or non-rotational 12-strand constructions, these ropes bring the quality and dependability Samson is known for to the worksite.

The athletes of the utility industry - strong enough to tackle the heaviest loads, yet light enough to be dependably handled by man or machine. Long and strong, they also withstand miles of use and abuse and keep on working to get the job done. The right rope makes quick work of handling conductors, whether they're aerial or underground. Whether it's the economy of traditional fibers like polyester or the high performance of Dyneema®, Samson sets the standard in pulling and stringing lines for the utility industry.

HAND LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER)

DURA-PLEX - Coated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend

DURA-PLEX - Uncoated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend

PRO-MASTER (WHITE) 3-Strand UltraBluePolyolefin-PolyesterBlend

PRO-SET-3 3-Strand Nylon

QUIK-SPLICE 12-Strand UltraBluePolyolefin

SSR-100-3 3-Strand UltraBluePolyolefin-PolyesterBlend

SSR-1200-3 3-Strand UltraBluePolyolefin-PolyesterBlend

STABLE BRAID - Coated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester

STABLE BRAID - Uncoated Double Braid Polyester / Polyester

STABLE BRAID BLACK Double Braid Polyester / Polyester

ULTRA BLUE-3 3-Strand UltraBluePolyolefin

PULLING/ STRINGING LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER)

AMSTEEL® 12-Strand Dyneema®

AMSTEEL® II - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® - MFP Blend / Polyester

AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® / Polyester

AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Uncoated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® / Polyester

AMSTEEL® -BLUE 12-Strand Dyneema®

DURA-PLEX - Coated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend

DURA-PLEX - Uncoated 12-Strand Polypropylene-Polyester Blend

ML-12 12-Strand Dyneema®

QUIK-SPLICE 12-Strand UltraBluePolyolefin




TENEX 12-Strand Polyester

HAND LINE

PULLING & STRINGING LINE


Rope Selection

Lifting or shifting dead weight loads calls for lines that have the strength to perform, and the resistance to bend fatigue needed to get the work to be done. Firm constructions that work well on winch drums, enhance lifting capacity, and have the durability for long-lasting performance all typify Samson’s range of winch lines. Available in single braid or double-braid constructions, and in several different fibers that allow you to regulate the length, diameter and strength of the winch line to suit your application.

PULLING/ STRINGING LINE PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION FIBER (CORE/COVER)

AMSTEEL® 12-Strand Dyneema®

AMSTEEL® II - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® - MFP Blend / Polyester

AMSTEEL® II - Uncoated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® - MFP Blend / Polyester

AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Coated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® / Polyester

AMSTEEL® II PLUS - Uncoated Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® / Polyester

AMSTEEL® -BLUE 12-Strand Dyneema®

ML-12 12-Strand Dyneema®

NYSTRON - Coated Double Braid Nylon / Polyester

NYSTRON - Uncoated Double Braid Nylon / Polyester

QUANTUM-12 12-Strand Dyneema® -Polyester Blend




TURBO-RC Core Dependent Double Braid Dyneema® / Dyneema®

VALIDATOR II Core Dependent Double Braid Vectran® / Polyester

WINCH LINE

ROPE SELECTION

SELECT THE RIGHT ROPE FOR THE JOBSelecting a rope involves evaluating a combination of factors. Some of these factors are straight forward like comparing rope specifications. Others are not easily quantified, like color preference or how a rope feels in your hand. Cutting corners, reducing sizes, or strengths on an initial purchase creates unnecessary replacements, potentially danger-ous conditions, and increases long-term costs. Fiber and construction being equal, a larger rope outlasts a smaller rope because of the great-er surface wear distribution. Similarly, a stronger rope outlasts a weaker one because it will be used at a lower percentage of its break strength with less chance of being overstressed. The following areas should be considered in your rope selection.

STRENGTHWhen given a choice between ropes, select the strongest of any given size. A load of 200 pounds represents 2% of the strength of a rope with a breaking strength of 10,000 pounds. The same load represents 4% of the strength of a rope that has a breaking strength of 5,000 pounds. The weaker rope is having to work harder and as a result will have to

be retired sooner. Braided ropes are stronger than twisted ropes of the same size and fiber type. Note carefully the quoted breaking strengths of the various Samson products. These are average breaking strengths. Published breaking strengths are determined by standard cordage testing and do not cover conditions such as sustained loads or shock loading. These strengths are attained under laboratory conditions. Remember also, that this is a breaking strength-not a recommended working load.

ELONGATIONIt is well accepted that ropes with lower elongation under load will give you better load control-a big help at complicated job sites. However, ropes with lower elongation that are shock loaded, like a lowering line, can fail without warning even though it appears to be in good shape. Low elongating ropes should be selected with the highest possible strength. Both twisted ropes and braided ropes are suitable for rigging. Twisted rope has lower strength and more stretch. Braided rope has higher strength and lower stretch.


Rope Selection

SHOCK LOADINGWorking loads as described herein are not applicable when rope has been subjected to shock loading. Whenever a load is picked up, stopped, moved, or swung there is an increased force caused by the dynamic nature of the movement. The force increases as these actions occur more rapidly or suddenly, which is known as “shock loading.” Examples of applications where shock loading occurs include ropes used as a tow line, picking up a load on a slack line, or using rope to stop a falling object. In extreme cases, the force put on the rope may be two, three, or more times the normal load involved. Shock-loading effects are greater on a low elongation rope such as polyester than on a high-elongation rope such as nylon, and greater on a short rope than on a long one. For example, the shock load on a winch line that occurs when a 5,000-lb object is lifted vertically with a sudden jerk may “weigh” 30,000 lb under the dynamic force. If the winch line is rated in the 30,000-lb break-strength range, it is very likely to break. Where shock loads, sustained loads, or where life, limb, or valuable property is involved, it is recommended that an increased working load factor be used. It is recommended that a lower working load factor be selected with only expert knowledge of conditions and professional estimates of risk; if the rope has been inspected and found to be in good condition; and if the rope has not been subject to shock loads, excessive use, elevated temperatures, or extended periods under load. For dynamic loading applications that involve severe exposure con-ditions, or for recommendations on special applications, consult the manufacturer.

FIRMNESSSelect ropes that are firm and round and hold their shape during use. Soft or mushy ropes will snag easily and abrade quickly causing accel-erated strength loss. Because the fibers are in a straighter line, which improves strength but compromises durability, loose or mushy rope will almost always have higher break strengths than a similar rope that is firm and holds its shape.

CONSTRUCTION AND ABRASION It is important to choose the right rope construction for your applica-tion, because it affects resistance to normal wear and abrasion. Braid-ed ropes have a round, smooth construction that tends to flatten out somewhat on a bearing surface. This distributes the wear over a much greater area, as opposed to the crowns of a 3-strand or, to a lesser degree, on an 8-strand rope.

ASSIGNED WORKING LOAD FACTORSAssigned working load factors vary in accordance with the different safety practices and policies of utilities and industrial users. However, our recommendation, and one that is fairly well accepted in the indus-try, is a minimum 5:1 working load factor. Thus, your maximum work-load should be approximately 1/5th, or 20%, of the quoted breaking strength. This factor provides greater safety and extends the service life of the winch line.

Assume that you have seven identical ropes, each with a 30,000-lb breaking strength and you work these ropes daily with each rope lifting a different load, as shown in Table 5.

Table 5 shows that the higher the working load factor, the greater the service life and the lower the replacement factor. Therefore, the work-ing load factor directly reflects the economy of the purchase.

TABLE 5. Working loads for seven ropes with breaking strengths of 30,000 lb.

BREAKING STRENGTH

WORKING LOAD*

WORKING LOAD

FACTORNUMBER OF

LIFTS1 30,000 LB 5,000 LB 6:1 1,000

2 30,000 LB 6,000 LB 5:1 750

3 30,000 LB 7,500 LB 4:1 500

4 30,000 LB 10,000 LB 3:1 300

5 30,000 LB 15,500 LB 2:1 100

6 30,000 LB 20,000 LB 1.5:1 25

7 30,000 LB 28,000 LB 1.1:1 5

*Relative values only. The higher the working load factor the greater the service life, and, of course, the lower the replacement factor. Thus, a working load factor also directly reflects an economy factor; if you always lifting the same weight, then the stronger the rope, the higher the working load factor, and the longer the rope will last. IMPORTANT NOTE: It is important to note that many industries are subject to state and federal regulation on workload limits that supersede the manufacturer's recom-mendation. It is the responsibility of the rope user to be aware of and adhere to those laws and regulations.

ROPE HANDLING AND USAGEDIELECTRIC PROPERTIESBased on rope industry practices, dielectric property testing is conduct-ed on clean, new rope samples and holds true only under such ideal conditions. Dirt, grease, other foreign matter, and moisture (including humidity) will alter the nonconductivity/ conductivity of any synthetic rope or material. No rope manufacturer can attest to a rope's dielectric properties under actual operating conditions.

REMOVING ROPE FROM A REEL OR COILSynthetic-fiber ropes are normally shipped on reels for maximum protection while in transit. The rope should be removed from the reel by pulling it off the top while the reel is free to rotate. This can be accomplished by passing a pipe through the center of the reel and jacking it up until the reel is free from the deck. Rope should never be taken from a reel lying on its side. If the rope is supplied on a coil, it should always be un-coiled from the inside so that the first turn comes off the bottom in a counter clockwise direction.


Winch Lines and Operations

ROPE STORAGE: COILING, FLAKING, AND BAGGINGGreat care must be taken in the stowage and proper coiling of 3-strand ropes to prevent the natural built-in twist of the line from developing kinks and heckles. Braided ropes on the other hand have no built-in twist and are far more resistant to kinking. Even if kinks do develop, they cannot develop further into heckles.

WINCH LINES AND WINCHING OPERATIONSSHARP CUTTING EDGESSamson winch lines should not be exposed to sharp edges and surfac-es such as metal burrs on winch drums, sheaves, shackles, thimbles, wire slings, etc. Our winch lines are made from synthetic fibers and, as such, can be cut or damaged by sharp edges. When installing winch lines on old truck units, great care must be exercised to assure that the rope is not coming in contact with hardware that has been scored and chewed by previously used wire lines. Sheaves, shackles, thimbles, etc., should be replaced in most cases. Other metal surfaces should be carefully examined and dressed if necessary.

ATTACHING LINE TO A WINCH DRUMThere are various methods of attaching a winch line to a winch drum: using a wedge or plug and set-screw in the main body of the drum, or using a “U” bolt through the side of the flange. Another method involves welding a round plug to the winch drum. The soft eye at the end of the winch line is placed over the plug and held in place with a flat keeper. The attachment method should not have a sharp edge that will cut the line under load. If possible, it is advisable to have an eye splice in both

ends of the winch line so that it can be reversed in the event of damage to one end; however, this is not always possible, depending upon the method of attachment to the winch drum and whether or not a closed thimble is spliced into the eye. If an eye is not used at the drum end, then this end should be tightly whipped with a strong twine.

Three-strand and braided ropes should be coiled in a clockwise direction (or in the direction of the lay of the rope) and uncoiled in a counter-clockwise direction to avoid kinks. An alternate and perhaps better method is to flake out the line in a figure eight. This avoids putting twist in the line in either direction and lessens the risk of kinking.

Figure 8

Hockled Rope

Coiling - Twisting Rope

ROPE DIAMETER FEET ON DRUM

1/2" 510'

5/8" 325'

3/4" 225'

7/8" 165'

1" 125'

1-1/8" 100'

TABLE 6. EFFECT OF ROPE DIAMETER ON DRUM CAPACITY.

ROPE CAPACITY OF A WINCH DRUMThe formula for rope capacity on a winch drum is:

(values based on a 2' drum)

(Where A, B, C, and rope diameter are expressed in inches and length [L ] is expressed in feet.)

Length to be A(B 2– C2) stored (feet) = 15.3 (rope dia.) 2



WINDING ROPE ON THE WINCH DRUMThe first layer (wrap) around the winch drum should be put on closely and tightly. The initial winding tension (load) should be approximate-ly 50 pounds. This will prevent subsequent wraps from slipping down between turns when tension is applied. Samson winch lines tend to self-level. Important: Samson recommends at least four wraps* always be left on winch drum. *IMPORTANT NOTE: Due to their low coeffi-cient of friction AmSteel® and AmSteel®-Blue lines must be worked with at least eight wraps on the drum at all times.

LEVEL WINDINGUsing the appropriate amount of tension, wind the rope evenly, without spaces across the drum of the winch. The next level should wind over the previous layer of rope and follow the valley between turns on the previous level. This pattern is followed for all layers of rope, with each layer of turns slightly offset from the layer below.

CROSS WINDINGWhen the rope is placed under load it can dive, or push into, the previously wrapped level below it. To avoid diving, cross winding is recommended. When cross winding, start with two layers of level wound rope using the appropriate back tension. At the end of the second layer, pull the rope quickly across the drum, allow it to wind one full turn at the side of the drum, then quickly pull it back to the opposite side of the drum. This will force the rope to cross in the middle and form a barrier that willprevent the rope from diving into the lower layers of the drum when placed under load. Follow the cross-wound layer with two layers of level wound turns, then form an-other cross. Repeat this pattern un-til the length of rope is fully spooled onto the winch.

*4 wraps on a drum

DANGER TO PERSONNELPersons should be warned against the serious danger of standing in line with a rope under tension. Should the rope separate, it may recoil with considerable force. In all cases where any such risks are present, or where there is any question about the load involved or the condition of use, the working load should be substantially reduced and the rope properly inspected before every use.

AVOID KINKING AND HOCKLINGThe continuous use of 3-strand and 4-strand lines on one side of a winch or windlass is a common abuse that can render a line useless in a short time. Repeated hauling of a line over a winch in a counterclockwise direction will extend the lay of the rope and simul-taneously shorten the twist of each strand. As this action continues, kinks (or heckles) will develop. Once heckles appear, they cannot be removed and the rope is permanently damaged. If, on the other hand, the line is continuously hauled over a winch in a clockwise direction, the rope lay is shortened and the rope becomes stiff and readily kinks. To avoid detrimental conditions, the direction of turns over the winch should be alternated regularly. Clockwise turns are recommended for the initial use of a new line. If this practice is observed, the original rope balance will be maintained and the lines will have a much longer useful life. Excessive turns can cause kinking in any rope but heckles can occur only in the basic “twisted” ropes (3-strand, 4-strand, and wire rope). Braided and plaited ropes cannot be heckled; their inter-locking strand construction prevents the unlaying. Strands run in both directions creating a torque-free balance thus eliminating any inherent tendency toward twist or rotation. Swivels can be used safely but are seldom necessary. One word of caution here: when marrying a braided line to a twisted line (and also to wire rope) the twisted line can impart its twist to the braided line if the ropes are married without a swivel in between.

A braided or plaited rope, being torque-free, can have twist induced by constant working on winches. If a twist develops, it can easily be removed by “counter-rotating” when the rope is relaxed.

EYE SPLICINGThe standard eye splice cannot be pulled out under tension; however, it can be pulled out by hand when the winch line is in a relaxed state. To prevent such tampering, it is recommended that lock stitching or tight seizing be applied to the base or throat of the splice. Lock stitching may also prove advantageous on some splices to pre-vent no-load opening due to mishandling. The material required is one fid length of nylon whipping twine approximately the same size diam-eter as the strands in the rope you are lock stitching. The strands cut from the rope you are lock stitching may also be used, but whipping twine is preferable. You may download lock-stitch instructions from our website SamsonRope.com or call customer service to receive them by mail.

First Cross

Second Cross

Level Layer


Eye splices at the end of winch lines (if not put in at the factory) should be done in strict accordance with the steps and procedures outlined in Samson splicing instructions. These splicing methods can be easily learned and executed by line crews and shop personnel. Assistance in splicing instruction is available through the Samson Technical Repre-sentative in your area. Splicing Training Kits, manuals, and tools can be ordered through your local Samson Distributor or direct from the factory. Instructions are also available on-line at SamsonRope.com.

KNOTS AND WINCH LINESSplicing is, by far, the strongest and most efficient means of attach-ment. Knots should never be tied in a winch line if it can be in any way avoided because knots can reduce the strength of any rope (or wire) by as much as 50%. Also, avoid sharp bends in the line where possible because this will also greatly reduce strength.

BOOM-SHEAVE RECOMMENDATIONSTo assure maximum efficiency and safety, the boom-sheave diameter should be no less than eight times the rope's diameter. The sheave's groove diameter should be no less than 10% greater than the rope diameter, and the groove should be round in shape, not “V” shaped.

TWISTED / PLAITED10 times rope diameter

BRAIDED8 times rope diameter

BENDING RADIUSAny sharp bend in a rope under load decreases its strength substantial-ly and may cause premature damage or failure. In sizing the radius of bills, fairleads and chocks for best performance the following guidelines are offered: Where a rope bends more than 10 degrees around bills or chocks or, for that matter, is bending across any surface, the diameter of that sur-face should not be less than 3 times the diameter of the rope. Stated another way, the diameter of the surface should be at least three times the rope diameter. A 4-to-1 ratio (or larger) would be better yet because the durability of the rope increases substantially as the diameter of the surface over which it is worked increases.

Sheave

Rope

8:1Ratio

GrooveDiameter

than ropediameter

10% greater

RopeDiameter

1-inchDiameter

8-inchDiameter

On a cleat when the rope does not bend radially around, the barrel of the cleat can be one half the rope circumference (minimum). The ratio of the length of an eye splice to the diameter of the object over which the eye is to be placed (for example, bollard, bill, cleat, etc.) should be a minimum 3-to-1 relationship and preferably 5-to-1. In other words, if you have a bollard 2 feet in diameter the eye splice should be 6 or 10 feet in length. By using this ratio the angle of the 2 legs of the eye splice at its throat will not be so severe as to cause a parting or tearing action at this point (thimbles are normally designed with a 3-to-1 ratio).

ABRASION PROTECTION OF LINEWith their outer jacket of polyester, Stable Braid, AmSteel® II, Valida-tor SKB, and Progen II have a relatively high degree of resistance to abrasion and melting. However, all synthetics are subject to melting if subjected to enough friction and heat; therefore, such practices as surging on a gypsy-head winch, hard rendering around poles, or over cross-arms, etc., should be avoided whenever possible.

USE OF SLINGS WITH WINCH LINESThe winch line itself should not be used as a choker to pick up a pole or other objects. The hook attached on the end of the winch line can cut deeply into the rope itself. We recommend a separate line, sling or strap be used as the choker and not the winch line itself.

TEMPERATUREFriction can be your best friend or worst enemy if it is not managed properly. Friction takes place anytime two surfaces come in contact. Mild friction, sometimes referred to as grip is a good characteristic, especially in winching applications. However, by definition, friction cre-ates heat, the greater the friction, the greater the heat buildup. Heat is an enemy to synthetic fiber and elevated temperatures can drastically reduce the strength and/or cause rope melt-through. High temperatures can be achieved when checking ropes on a cable or running over stuck or non-rolling sheaves or rollers. Each rope's construction and fiber type will yield a different coefficient of friction (resistance to slipping) in a new and used state. It is important to un-derstand the operational demands, and take into account the size, rope construction, and fiber type to minimize heat buildup.


Surface diameter should be at least three times the rope diameter.

Bollards with undersized horns minimum 6 ft

This angle is more than 10°



FATIGUESynthetic fibers have memory: they remember and retain the effects of being overloaded and shock loaded. This why winch line proce-dures are so important to reducing the danger of shock loading, which prolongs the life of the rope and reduces premature down grading. If there is reason to believe that a line has been shock loaded above its recommended working load, it should be logged. If a number of these instances occur, the line should be inspected and rotated.

END-FOR-ENDINGIt is recommended that every winch line be rotated end-for-end on a periodic basis. This will vary high stress and wear points and extend useful life. The recommended end-for-ending period is six months, at which time visual inspection and washing can also be done.

ROPE INSPECTION AND RETIREMENTOne of the most frequently asked questions is: “When should I retire my rope?” The most obvious answer is before it breaks. But, without a thor-ough understanding of how to inspect it and without knowing the load history, you are left making an educated guess. Unfortunately, there are no definitive rules nor are there industry guidelines to establish when a rope should be retired because there are so many variables that af-fect rope strength. Factors like load history, bending radius, abrasion, chemical exposure or some combination of those factors, make retire-ment decisions difficult. Inspecting your rope should be a continuous process of observation before, during, and after each use. In synthetic fiber ropes, the amount of strength loss due to abrasion and/or flexing is directly related to the amount of broken fiber in the rope's cross sec-tion. After each use, look and feel along every inch of the rope length inspecting for damage as listed below.

VISUAL INSPECTIONThe load-bearing capacity of double braid ropes such as Stable Braid is divided equally between the inner core and the outer cover. If upon in-spection, there are cut strands or significant abrasion damage the rope must be retired because the strength of the entire rope is decreased. Core-dependent double braids such as AmSteel® II have 100% of their load-bearing capacity handled by the core alone. For these ropes, the jacket can sustain damage without compromising the strength of the load-bearing member. Inspection of core-dependent double braids can be misleading because it is difficult to see the core. In the case of 12-strand single braids such as AmSteel® and Am-Steel®-Blue, each of the 12-strands carries approximately 8.33%, or 1/12th, of the load. If upon inspection, there are cut strands or signifi-cant abrasion damage to the rope, the rope must be retired or the areas of damage removed and the rope repaired with the appropriate splice.

Never let ropes under tension rub together or move relative to one an-other. Enough heat to melt the fibers can buildup and cause the rope to fail quickly: as if it had been cut with a knife. Always be aware of areas of heat buildup and take steps to minimize it; under no circumstances let any rope come in contact with an exhaust muffler or any other hot object. The strength of a used rope can be determined by testing, but the rope is destroyed in the process so the ability to determine the retirement point before it fails in service is es-sential. That ability is based on a combination of education in rope use and construction along with good judgment and experience. Remem-ber, you almost always get what you pay for in the form of performance and reliability.

TABLE 7. The critical and melting temperatures for synthetic fibers.

FIBER TYPE CRITICAL TEMP. MELTING TEMP.DYNEEMA® 150°F 300°F

POLYPROPYLENE 250°F 330°F

NYLON 325°F 425-490°F

POLYESTER 350°F 480°F

TECHNORA® 450°F 900°F*

*while the term “melting” does not apply to this fiber, it does undergo extreme degra-dation in these temperatures, and they char.

STRENGTH DEGRADATION FROM ULTRAVIOLET LIGHTProlonged exposure of synthetic ropes to ultraviolet (UV) radiation of sunlight causes varying degrees of strength degradation. Polyester fibers are the least affected by UV exposure, and the result-ing strength degradation of exposed fibers is negligible. Nylon is more susceptible to strength loss due to ultraviolet rays, but with both polyes-ter and nylon, the degree of susceptibility to UV damage is dependent on the type of fiber and the various UV inhibitors with which the fiber manufacturer treats them (i.e., Samthane coaling). Polyolefin and PBO fibers are severely affected by ultraviolet exposure, especially in their natural, undyed, and/or uncovered states.

HARMFUL CHEMICALSCertain chemicals break down synthetic fibers. Sulfuric acids, alkalis, and chlorinate hydrocarbons over 160° F are to be avoided, while strong cleaning agents or bleaches may be harmful. If you are unsure about the effect of a specific chemical, contact our customer service department for more information.

AVOID SHOCK LOADINGShock loading of any line, synthetic, manila, or wire, produces a drastically different set of physical properties and results as com-pared with normal loading. Shock loading is a jerking or snatching of a line, or a very sudden change in tension such as from a relaxed state or low load to one of high load. A sudden drop off a platform as short a distance as four inches actually doubles the rope's load. Similarly, an over wrap “falling off” the winch drum can result in a 50% shock load. This results in accelerated wear of the rope.


Davit Cranes and Winches

MAX CAPACITY 2000 LBS 2000 LBS 2000 LBSLINE SPEED 8 - 19 fpm 8 - 19 fpm 13 - 22 fpm

TRAVEL DISTANCE 190 - 280 ft 190 - 280 ft 90 ft

HP 1.3 1.3 1.2

MODELS 4WP2T8 4WP2T8-2000-8 4771

HANES NO. WIN40506 WIN40505 WIN20300

MAX CAPACITY 2000 LBSMAX LIFT UP TO 240 FTMODELS 5PT10-M1HANES NO. WIN40515

MAX CAPACITY 500 LBS 1000 LBS 2000 LBS 2000 LBS 4000 LBS

GEAR RATIO – 3:1 15:1 4:1 25:1

APROX. WEIGHT 8 LBS 17 LBS 28 LBS 23 LBS 83 LBS

MODELS M401 M4022PB M4312PB M4312 M452

HANES NO. WIN20001 WIN40041 WIN20650 WIN20600 WIN20385

MAX CAPACITY 750 LBS 1000 LBS 2000 LBS

GEAR RATIO 20:1 15:1 24:1

APROX. WEIGHT 12 LBS 15 LBS 32 LBS

MODELS 465 462 472

HANES NO. WIN20200 WIN20000 WIN20100

WORM GEAR HAND WINCHES

SPUR GEAR HAND WINCHES

PORTABLE POWER WINCHES

DAVIT CRANES

When it comes to equipment for heavy-duty lifting and positioning, Thern has the experience you are looking for. Large or small, heavy or light, Thern has designed and manufactured standard and custom cranes and winches for countless customer applications around the world.


Hydraulics

Enerpac's Bolting Solutions cater to the complete bolting work-flow, ensuring joint integrity in a variety of applications throughout industry: Joint Assembly, Controlled Tightening and Joint Separation.

Enerpac Hydraulic Pumps are available in over 1,000 different configurations. Whatever your high pressure pump needs are… speed, control, intermittent or heavy-duty performance… you can be sure that Enerpac has the pump to suit the ap-plication. Featuring Hand, Battery, Electric, Air and Gasoline powered models, with multiple reservoir and valve configurations, Enerpac offers the most comprehensive high pressure pump line available.

Enerpac Hydraulic Cylinders are available in hundreds of different configurations. Whatever the industrial application… lifting, pushing, pulling, bending, holding… whatever the force capacity, stroke length, or size restrictions… single- or dou-ble-acting, solid or hollow plunger, you can be sure that Enerpac has the cylinder to suit your high force application. Enerpac jacking cylinders fully comply to ASME B30.1 (except RD-Series).


Hydraulics

Powerteam Cylinders are used for mechanical load holding over an extended period of time. Available in low-profile, lightweight or tonnage models see charts on pages 89-90 to help you select a cylinder for your application.

From inflatable jacks, torque wrenches, hydraulic pumps, cylinders and valves to clamping components and hydraulic accessories, Power Team brand high-force tools and equipment are used wherever strong, concentrated force is required ― on construction sites, in power plants, on rail lines, in shipyards, in mining operations and more.

Need a pump for your application? Use the chart on page 88 to help you select the right Powerteam Pump for your specific needs.

TORQUE WRENCH LOW CLEARANCE TORQUE WRENCH

HYDRAULIC PRY BARHYDRAULIC FLANGE

HYDRAULIC TOOLS

• Start-Up Kits cover a range of lifting, shifting, and positioning needs.

• 10 Ton kit ranges from 1-3/4" to 9-3/4", and the 25 ton kit ranges from 2-5/16" to 10-3/4". Both include strokes ranging from approximately 1/2" to 6" respectively. All of these cylinders are single-acting spring return.


SPX Pump Selection

10,000 PSI MAXIMUM WORKING PRESSURE

PRESSURE STAGE

CYLINDER CAPACITY (TONS)5 10 15 20 25 30 55 75 100 150 200 300 400 500

Hand

Pum

ps*

P12‡ Single 14 32 44 65 72 93

P55‡ Single 6 14 19 28 31 40 71

P19/P19L

LowHigh

413

830

1042

1559

1768

2186

P59F LowHigh

1.88

4.117

5.724

834

948

1250

2085

29122

P59(L)‡P157‡

LowHigh

1.56

3.214

4.719

728

7.731

9.740

16.771

23.9101

P159‡P300‡

LowHigh

0.57

115

1.321

1.930

2.234

2.843

577

7110

9143

13200

18250

P460‡ LowHigh

0.13.3

0.37.7

0.69

0.614

0.717.5

0.922

1.537

2.255

2.871

4.2105

5.6143

8.4213

11.2284

Elec

tric/

Hydr

aulic

Pum

ps†

PE10 LowHigh

0.56

1.213.4

1.618.9

2.227

2.631

3.239

5.566.2

PE17‡ LowHigh

0.23.5

0.57.9

0.710.9

0.916

1.118

1.423

2.339

3.356.3

4.373

6.5109

8.7146

PE18 LowHigh

0.43.3

0.87.5

1.210.3

1.615

1.817

2.321

3.937

5.753

7.369

10.8102

14.6136

21.9207

29.2276

PE21‡ LowHigh

0.22.8

0.56.4

0.79

1.013

1.115

1.419

2.532

3.645.5

4.659

6.888

9.2118

13.8177

18.4236

PED25 LowHigh

0.22.4

0.45.4

0.67.5

0.910.6

1.012.4

1.315.6

2.226.5

3.238.2

4.149.5

6.173.6

8.399.1

12.0144.3

15.7188.5

19.9238.6

PE30‡ LowHigh

0.22

0.454.5

0.66

0.99

110

1.313

2.222

3.232

4.141

660

PE46‡ LowHigh

0.11.3

0.32.9

0.44.1

0.55.9

0.66.8

0.78.6

1.314

1.822

2.428

3.542

4.756

7.284

9.6112

PE55‡PE60‡

LowHigh

0.11.1

0.22.4

0.33.4

0.44.8

0.45.6

0.67.1

0.912

1.417.8

1.823

2.634

3.545

5.469

7.292

PQ60 LowHigh

0.11

0.22.2

0.33.3

0.44.4

0.45.2

0.56.5

0.911

1.316.2

1.721

2.531

3.441

5.163

6.884

8.5105

PQ120 LowHigh

0.10.5

0.21.1

0.31.6

0.42.2

0.42.6

0.53.2

0.95.5

1.37.7

1.710

2.515

3.421

5.130

6.840

8.550

PE400 LowHigh

0.10.1

0.10.3

0.20.4

0.20.6

0.30.7

0.30.9

0.61.6

82.2

12.9

1.54.4

2.15.9

38.7

411.6

514.5

Air/

Hydr

olic

Pum

ps†

PA6‡PA9‡

SingleSingle

1010

22.422.4

3131

44.444.4

51.351.3

65.265.2

PA17‡ LowHigh

0.23.5

0.57.9

0.710.9

0.916

1.118

1.423

2.339

3.356

4.373

6.5109

8.7146

PA46‡ LowHigh

0.11.3

0.32.9

0.44.1

0.55.9

0.66.8

0.78.6

1.314

222

2.428

3.556

4.742

7.284

9.6112

PA55‡ LowHigh

0.11.1

0.32.4

0.43.4

0.64.8

0.75.6

0.97.1

1.512

2.218

2.823

4.134

5.545

8.469

11.292

Gas/

Hydr

olic

Pum

ps† PG30 Low

High0.32

0.74.5

16.3

1.38.9

1.610.3

213

3.322

4.831.8

6.241.3

9.361.4

12.483

18.1121

PG55‡ LowHigh

0.11.1

0.32.5

0.43.5

0.64.9

0.75.6

0.87.1

1.412.1

217.3

2.622.5

3.933.5

5.245

7.666

9.986

12.5109

PG120‡ LowHigh

0.10.5

0.31.0

0.41.5

0.62.0

0.72.4

0.83.0

1.45.1

27.3

2.69.5

3.914.2

5.219.1

7.627.8

9.936.3

12.546.0

PG400 LowHigh

0.10.2

0.10.3

0.20.5

0.20.7

0.30.8

0.31.0

0.61.7

0.82.4

1.03.1

1.54.6

2.06.2

3.09.0

3.811.8

4.915.0

‡ Some Power Team pumps are available in special configurations not listed in this catalog. Power Team can "Assemble to order" pumps with special seals, voltages, valves, relief valve settings, etc. For your special requirements please consult your local distributor or the Power Team factory. *Hand Pumps= Number of strokes required to move piston 1". † Air, Electric and Gasoline Engine/Hydraulic pumps= Number of seconds required to move piston 1"

Generally Recommended

Marginal Check Requirements

Not recommended for most applications


SPX Cylinder Selection

TONSStroke

(IN)Height

(IN) Order No.

5

9/16 1-5/8 RLS501 4-3/8 C51C

3-1/4 6-1/2 C53C5-1/4 8-1/2 C55C5-1/4 10-1/2 C55CBT7-1/4 10-3/4 C57C9-1/4 12-3/4 C59C

10

7/16 1-3/4 RLS1001 3-5/8 C101C

1-1/2 3-1/2 RSS1012-1/8 4-3/4 C102C2-1/2 5-1/4 RH1024-1/8 6-3/4 C104C6-1/8 9-3/4 C106C6-1/8 11-1/2 C106CBT6-1/4 11-11/16 RD106

8 11-5/16 RH1088-1/8 11-3/4 C108C

10 15-11/16 RD101010-1/8 13-3/4 C1010C10-1/8 15-1/2 C1010CBT12-1/8 15-3/4 C1012C14-1/8 17-3/4 C1014C

12

5/16 2-3/16 RH1201-5/8 4-13/16 RH1211-5/8 4-13/16 RH121T

3 7-1/4 RH123

15

1 4-7/8 C151C2-1/8 5-7/8 C152C4-1/8 7-7/8 C154C6-1/8 10-11/16 C156C8-1/8 12-11/16 C158C10-1/8 14-11/16 C1510C

TONSStroke

(IN)Height

(IN) Order No.

1512-1/8 16-11/16 C1512C14-1/8 18-11/16 C1514C

16 20-9/16 C1516C17.5 2 6-7/8 RT172

20

7/16 2 RLS2001-3/4 3-3/4 RSS202

2 6-1/8 RH2022-1/8 6-3/8 RA202

3 6-1/16 RH2034-1/8 8-3/8 RA204

6 12-1/8 RH2066-1/8 10-3/8 RA206

25

1 5-1/2 C251C2 6-1/2 C252C4 8-1/2 C254C

6-1/4 10-3/4 C256C6-1/4 13-3/8 C256CBT6-1/4 12-3/8 RD2568-1/4 12-3/4 C258C10-1/4 14-3/4 C2510C12-1/4 16-3/4 C2512C14-1/8 18-3/4 C2514C14-1/8 21-3/8 C2514CBT14-1/8 20-3/8 RD2514

30

1/2 2-5/16 RLS3002-1/8 7-3/8 RA3022-7/16 4-5/8 RSS3022-1/2 6-1/4 RH3022-1/2 8-7/16 RT302

3 7-1/16 RH3034-1/8 9-3/8 RA3045-7/8 11-1/8 RHA306

6 9-3/4 RH306

TONSStroke

(IN)Height

(IN) Order No.

306 11-1/16 RH306D

6-1/8 11-3/8 RA306

10-1/8 17-1/4 RH3010

50

5/8 2-5/8 RLS500S

2-3/8 5 RSS502

3 7-1/8 RH503

3 10-9/16 RT503

55

2 4-15/16 R552C2 6-3/8 R552L2 6-7/8 C552C

2-1/8 6-3/4 RA5524-1/8 8-3/4 RA5544-1/4 9-1/8 C554C

6 8-15/16 R556C6 10-3/8 R556L

6-1/8 10-3/4 RA5566-1/8 12-1/2 RA556L6-1/4 11-1/8 C556C6-1/4 12-31/32 RD556

10 12-15/16 R5510C10 14-3/8 R5510L10 15-1/8 RA5510

10-1/4 15-1/8 C5510C13-1/8 19-27/32 RD551313-1/4 18-1/8 C5513C18-1/8 25-7/8 RD5518

60

3 9-1/4 RH6034 9-1/2 RHA604D5 9-1/2 RH6056 12-1/2 RH606

10-1/8 18-1/16 RH61075 5/8 3-1/8 RLS750S

Hydraulic Circuit Example


SPX Cylinder Selection

TONSStroke

(IN)Height

(IN) Order No.

756-1/8 12-3/8 C756C

13-1/8 19-3/8 C7513C80 13-1/8 20-3/8 RD8013

100

5/8 3-3/8 RLS1000S1-1/2 5-11/16 RSS1002D1-1/2 6-1/2 RH1001

2 5-1/2 R1002C2 6-41/64 R1002D2 7-1/4 R1002L2 8-5/8 C1002C

2-1/8 7-3/4 RA10022-1/4 5-1/2 RSS1002

3 10 RH10034-7/8 15-1/8 RT1004

6 9-1/2 R1006C6 10-41/64 R1006D6 11-1/4 R1006L6 12-3/8 RH1006

6-1/4 11-3/4 RA10066-1/4 13-3/8 RA1006L6-5/8 13-1/4 C1006C6-5/8 13-25/32 RD1006

10 13-1/2 R10010C10 14-41/64 R10010D10 15-1/4 R10010L

10-1/8 19-13/16 RH1001010-1/4 16-7/8 C10010C13-1/8 20-9/32 RD1001320-1/8 28-9/32 RD10020

1509/16 4 RLS1500S

2 6-3/8 R1502C2 7-7/16 R1502D

TONSStroke

(IN)Height

(IN) Order No.

150

2 8-1/8 R1502L5 12-1/8 RH15056 10-3/8 R1506C6 11-7/16 R1506D6 12-1/8 R1506L

6-5/8 14-7/8 RD15068 13-3/4 RH1508

10 14-3/8 R15010C10 15-7/16 R15010D10 16-1/8 R15010L

13-1/8 21-3/8 RD1501318-1/8 26-17/32 RD15018

200

2 7-1/2 R2002C2 8-9/64 R2002D2 9-1/2 R2002L6 11-1/2 R2006C6 12-9/64 R2006D6 13-1/2 R2006L

6-5/8 16 RD20068 16-1/16 RH2008

10 15-1/2 R20010C10 16-9/64 R20010D10 17-1/2 R20010L

13-1/8 22-1/2 RD2001318-1/8 28-1/2 RD20018

250 3 11-7/16 RSS2503

280

2 7-1/2 R2802C2 9-13/64 R2802D2 9-3/4 R2802L6 11-1/2 R2806C6 13-13/64 R2806D6 13-3/4 R2806L

TONSStroke

(IN)Height

(IN) Order No.

28010 15-1/2 R28010C10 17-13/64 R28010D10 17-3/4 R28010L

3006 17-9/32 RD3006

13 24-9/32 RD30013

355

2 9-1/8 R3552C2 11-1/2 R3552L2 15-3/8 R3552D6 12-5/8 R3556C6 15-1/2 R3556L6 17-21/32 R3556D

10 17-1/8 R35510C10 19-1/2 R35510L10 21-21/32 R35510D

4006 18-5/8 RD4006

13 25-5/8 RD40013

430

2 10-3/8 R4302C2 12-5/16 R4302D6 14-3/8 R4306C6 16-5/16 R4306D

10 20-5/16 R43010C10 20-53/64 R43010D

5006 19-21/32 RD5006

13 26-21/32 RD50013

565

2 11-1/2 R5652C2 14-5/8 R5652L2 16-19/32 R5652D6 15-1/2 R5656C6 18-5/8 R5656L6 20-19/32 R5656D

10 19-1/2 R56510C10 22-5/8 R56510L10 24-19/32 R56510D

1 8

2 10

4 115

Cylinder

Hydraulic Circuit Example

Quick Coupling

Pump Load-Lowering Valve

Guage T-Gauge AdapterHose


Dynamometers

DYNA-LINKSPECIFICATIONS

500 LB.TO 250 TON

RANGE

MSI-7200DYNA-LINK

MSI-4300“PORTA-WEIGH PLUS”

MSI-3360CHALLENGER

MSI-6260TRANS-WEIGH

“PORTA-WEIGH PLUS”

SPECIFICATIONS

500 LB.TO 250 TON

RANGE

CHALLENGERSPECIFICATIONS

250 LB.TO 15,000 LB.

RANGE

TRANS-WEIGHSPECIFICATIONS

500 LB.TO 250 TON

RANGE

The MSI-7200 Dyna-Link is a versatile digital force measurement and load-indicatinginstrument for inside and outside use. Ask about remote display options.

The MSI-4300 “Porta-Weigh Plus” Overhead Crane Scale has served duty in aerospace, chemical, marine, mining, petroleum, and steel industry applications for heavy-duty use. Ask about the MSI-4260 “Porta-Weigh” for Intrinsically Safe and High Heat applications.

The MSI-3360 Challenger II Digital Crane Scale is an instrument for light-duty overhead industrial weighing.

The MSI-6260 Trans-Weigh Radio Telemetry Crane Scale provides trouble-free data trans-mission from crane hook to digital indicator.

Do not use this product unless properly trained.Inspect and use according to OSHA, ASME B30.9 & Manufacturers Instructions.WARNING!


Dynamometers

The DYNAFOR™ LLX1 devices are electronic load indicators to measure tensile forces (N) and determine hanging loads (Lbs).

Precision: +/- 0.2 %Available models from 1000 lbs to 40000 lbs.

Option: mobile display using the Zigbee technology (2.4 GHz)

DYNAFOR™ LLXh devices are load indicators to measure tensile forces (N) and determine hanging loads (Lbs).One Dynafor LLXh unit consists of a sensor and a remotely installed display (2.4 GHz connection).

Optional PC connection via USB interface.Precision: 0.2 %Available models from 30,000 lbs to 500,000 lbs.

CMU (T)PRECISION

+/- (KG)AFFICHAGE

MINIMUM (KG)INCRÉMENT

(KG) POIDS (KG).5 1 .5 .2 1.1

1 2 1 .5 1.1

2 4 2 1 1.3

3.2 6 2 1 1.5

5 10 5 2 2.3

6.3 13 5 2 2.3

12.5 25 10 5 4.3

20 40 20 10 7

Model LLX1


Hilman Rollers

GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING THE PROPER MODEL1. How much does the load weigh?2. How many contact points does the load have? The Hilman rollers are rated in metric tons. Divide the number of contact

points into the total load to determine the capacity of individual rollers. Determine if the load is equally distributed or unbalanced. If unbalanced, some rollers may carry more load and some less.

3. What is the rolling surface and its condition? The rolling surface should be hard and level, and free of debris. Where the surface is not hard such as asphalt or dirt, a track or steel plate can be used as the rolling surface. If the surface is not level, there must be a hold-back system on the load to brake and control it. If the floor is composed of a delicate surface, then specify Nyton rollers which are coated to soften the roller contact.

4. Are there turns involved or is it a straight line move? If there are turns, rollers with swivels or swivels with a locking top are suggested. If no turns, then a rigid style top is fine.

Rollers are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 to 3,000 tons. Riggers kits which consist of four rollers, steering handles and various tops are available if moving loads with rollers is a common task. The kit comes complete with a locking steel box. A riggers set is the same as a kit without the steel box.

Hilman Rollersprovide maximumturning options

Move and position all types of heavy equipment

14 gauge steelcarrying case

Raised base prevents corrosion and provides forklift loading

Two full-length steeringhandles knock-downfor storage

HILMAN DELUXE KITS • Steel or Nyton Chain


Windmill Lifting Brackets

Engineered Lifting Technologies, Inc., a subsidiary of the Hanes Supply Group, has received patent protection of its propri-etary tower erection system. The system consists of all the necessary brackets, rigging & hardware required for the installation of towers. The patent is all-inclusive, consisting of lightweight tower lifting brackets, tipping brackets, rigging and hardware.

Exclusive Two-Point Top Bracket Pick“The Safest and Fastest Solution”

Each Bracket Weighs Only 92 lbs.• Alternatives are often over 300 lbs.• Small size and weight offers

superior ergonomics.• Reduces required manpower

to install and reduces crane time – Can be installed by one worker.

Adjustable Eccentric Inserts• Replaceable inserts easily

and quickly adjust to variances in hole tolerances “on-the-fly.”

Two-Point Top Pick• Eliminates the dangers inherent

with using wire rope blocks to balance a four-point pick.

• Reduced number of brackets – Only four needed for entire lift.

Exceeds ANSI/ASME Requirements• Zinc Dichromate plated body for outstanding

corrosion protection.• Nickel plated inserts.• No load bearing welds.• Tighter bolt clearance holes.

Designed to be Used with Slingmax®

• Twin-Path® slings offer the patented Check-Fast® system for inspection.

• Two individual paths offer superior safety in the event of a rip or tear.

HUB BRACKET NACELLE BEAM ADJUSTABLE STAGING HOOK

Other Windmill Industry Equipment Available...


Lifting Beams

INSPECTION

The lifter should be visually inspected by or under the direction of an appointed person on a daily or weekly schedule depending on the nature of the lifter and the severity of the service. Defects to look for include but are not limited to:

1. Structural deformation.2. Cracks in the structural frame, welds, hoist

hook attachment points, mechanically operating lifter.

3. Malfunctions during operation of mechanically operating lifter.

4. Loose covers, fasteners and stops.5. Faulty operation of automatic hold and

release mechanisms.6. Wear of hoist hooking points, load

supporting clevises, pins, slings, linkages and mechanical parts.

7. Missing nameplates and markings.

HANDLING THE LOAD1. The lifter should not be loaded in excess of

its rated load.2. The combined weight of the lifter and load

should not exceed the rated load of the crane or hoist.

3. The lifter should be applied to the load in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended operating procedures.

4. Lifter ropes and chains should not be kinked, and multiple part lines shall not be twisted about each other.

5. The lifter should not touch obstructions during load movement.

6. The operator or other personnel should not ride suspended loads or enter restricted spaces adjacent to them.

7. The load or lifter should not be slid on the floor or other surface.

8. The lifter should not be used for loads for which it is not designed.

9. If suspended loads are moved manually, they should be pushed, not pulled.

10. A preliminary lift of a few inches should be made to establish that the load is stable.

11. All loads should be accelerated and decelerated smoothly.

OPERATING PRACTICES1. The operator should watch carefully that the

lifter is performing properly during the lifting procedure.

2. The operator should be familiar with the standard crane directing hand signals.

3. The operator should respond to signals from an appointed person only. However, stop signals from anyone shall be obeyed.

4. The operator should notify a designated person when he considers a load to be unsafe.

LIFTING BEAMS

Practical Tips for Using Overhead Lifting Attachments

The Difference – Lifter vs SpreaderLifting beams are used when available headroom is not sufficient for top rigging. Lifting beams must be designed structurally larger than spreader beams to adequately handle load stress. Spreader beams with top rigging are smaller because most load stress is absorbed by the rigging. This differentiation is critical in order to properly specify the equipment required. Make sure you know the difference.

5. The operator should observe the lifter before using. A defect observed shall be examined by a qualified person to determine if it is a hazard.

LIFTING ATTACHMENTS COMPLY TO ASME STANDARDS


Lifting AttachmentsHanes Supply, Inc., is an industry leader in the development and manufacturing of below-the-hook lifting devices for cranes and hoists. We have a product line to provide the customer with an ergonomic and economical solution to various application needs. We custom manu-facture products to suit almost any application requirement where there is not a standard solution available. It is the diversity along with our commitment to quality that is responsible for our worldwide reputation for best possible service, competitive product and customer satisfaction.All of our products meet OSHA & ASME stan-dards. Some of the products currently offered are Pallet Lifters, C-hooks, Narrow Aisle Coil Lifters, Telescoping Lifters, Lifting Beams, Lift-ing Tongs and accessories.

Easier cutting! Easier drilling!• Tube Steel ends do not need to

be cut square for proper operation.• Square profile makes cutting and

drilling faster and easier.• Tube steel can be drilled in multiple

locations for quick transitions from one length to another with a single system. The bracket itself serves as the drilling template.

Better design!• Does not lose capacity

at maximum spreader length.• Capacities up to 100 Ton & 40 foot.• Brackets always fit and align due

to more consistent nature of tube steel over pipe.

Easier to transport!

• Brackets are stamped with size and grade of tube steel needed for the system.

• No need to ship long beams – just buy new steel locally at the next jobsite.

AdjustableSpreader BEAM

ASBThe most versatile spreader beam system on the market!


Man Baskets/ Personnel Crane Baskets

Personnel Crane or Man Baskets are used to suspend workers from either a crane or forklift. They are designed to ASME BTH-1, and are OSHA compliant. Manufactured and tested in accordance with code of Federal Regulations 1926.550 and ASME B30.23. Crane Baskets are designed, fabricated, tested and certified to exceed the above standards in order to meet the demands for a long life of rugged job site use. High Profile and Low profile options are available.

In addition to offering a wide variety of standard models, custom models can be fabricated to best suit your needs.

All Baskets are proof tested to 125% of their WLL and can have your company’s name included on it at no extra charge.

Standard Equipment• Four Leg Bridle w/master link & four bolt type shackles• Anchors for safety lanyard and / or tagline• Quick attach/detach test weight assembly• In-Swing, self-closing, self-latching door• Grab Rail around full interior perimeter• Full 4″ kick plate• Full 42″ height expanded metal to reduce wind affect• Slip resistant checkered plate floor• Fork Lift Tubes for easy movement at the job site• Painted safety yellow

Optional Equipment• Solid Bail, optional for restricted headroom• Emergency Ramp• Rubber Bumper around bottom and top perimeter• Casters System allow rolling fully loaded• Expanded Metal removable or fixed overhead protection• Test Weight is available as steel concrete form for you to

fill with concrete on the jobsite in order to provide a more economical solution

Easier to transport!

• Brackets are stamped with size and grade of tube steel needed for the system.

• No need to ship long beams – just buy new steel locally at the next jobsite.


Wire Rope ClipsCROSBY CLIP WARNINGS &

APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

• Failure to read, understand, and follow these instructions may cause death or serious injury.

• Read and understand these instructions before using clips.• Match the same size clip to the same size wire rope.• Prepare wire rope end termination only as instructed.• Do not use with plastic coated wire rope.• Apply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of

equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and retighten nuts to recommended torque (See Table 1 ).

WARNING!

4.If a pulley (sheave) is used in place of a thimble, add one additional Fist Grip. Fist Grip spacing should be as shown. (See Figure 4)

5. WIRE ROPE SPLICING PROCEDURES:The preferred method of splicing two wire ropes together is to use inter-locking turnback eyes with thimbles, using the recommended number of clips on each eye. An alternate method is to use twice the number of clips as used for a turnback termination. The rope ends are placed parallel to each other, overlapping by twice the turnback amount shown in the application instruc-tions. The minimum number of clips should be installed on each dead end (See Figure 6). Spacing, installation torque, and other instructions still apply.

6. IMPORTANTApply first load to test the assembly. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use. Next, check and use torque wrench to retighten nuts to recommended torque. In accordance with good rigging and maintenance practices, the wire rope end termination should be inspected periodically for wear, abuse, and general adequacy.

Efficiency ratings for wire rope end terminations are based upon the mini-mum breaking force of wire rope. The efficiency rating of a properly prepared loop or thimble-eye termination for clip sizes 1/8" through 7/8" is 80%, and for sizes 1" through 3-1/2" is 90%.

The number of clips shown (see Table 1) is based upon using RRL or ALL wire rope, 6 x 19 or 6 x 37 Class, FC or IWRC; IPS or XIP, XXIP. If Seale construction or similar large outer wire type construction in the 6 x 19 Class is to be used for sizes 1 inch and larger, add one additional clip. If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip.

The number of clips shown also applies to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 8 x 19 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller; and to rotation-resistant RRL wire rope, 19 x 7 Class, IPS, XIP, XXIP sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller.

For other classes of wire rope not mentioned above, we recommend contact-ing Crosby Engineering to ensure the desired efficiency rating. The style of wire rope termination used for any application is the obligation of the user.

For OSHA (Construction) applications, see OSHA 1926.251.

1.Refer to Table I following these instructions. Turn back specified amount of rope from thimble or loop. Apply first clip one base width from dead end of rope. Apply U-Bolt over dead end of wire rope – live end rests in saddle. Tighten nuts evenly, alternate from one nut to the other until reaching the recommended torque.

2.When two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible. Tighten nuts evenly, alternating until reaching the recommended torque. When more than two clips are required, apply the second clip as near the loop or thimble as possible, turn nuts on second clip firmly, but do not tighten.

3.When three or more clips are required, space additional clips equally between first two – take up rope slack – tighten nuts on each U-Bolt evenly, alternating from one nut to the other until reaching recommended torque.

G-450(Red-U-Bolt)

If a pulley (sheave) is used for turning back the wire rope, add one additional clip.If a greater number of clips are used than shown in the table, the amount of turnback should be increased proportionately.*The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.

TABLE ICLIP SIZE

(IN)MINIMUM NO.

OF CLIPSAMOUNT OF ROPE TO TURN BACK IN INCHES

*TORQUE IN FT. (LBS)

1/8 2 3-1/4 4.53/16 2 3-3/4 7.51/4 2 4-3/4 155/16 2 5-1/4 303/8 2 6-1/2 457/16 2 7 651/2 3 11-1/2 65

9/16 3 12 955/8 3 12 953/4 4 18 1307/8 4 19 2251 5 26 225

1-1/8 6 34 2251-1/4 7 44 3601-3/8 7 44 3601-1/2 8 54 3601-5/8 8 58 4301-3/4 8 61 590

2 8 71 7502-1/4 8 73 7502-1/2 9 84 7502-3/4 10 100 750

3 10 106 12003-1/2 12 149 1200

D

60°

1 CLIP BASE WIDTH

1 CLIP BASE WIDTH

D

NOTE:D= TREAD DIAMETER

TURNBACK

FIGURE 5

FIGURE 6

DEAD END

DEAD END

LIVE END

LIVE END

LOAD

LOAD

FIGURE 4


Wire Rope Clips

ROPE SIZE (IN)

G-450 STOCK NO. GALV.

STD. PKG. QTY.

WT PER 100 (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E F G H1/8 1010015 100 6 .22 .72 .44 .47 .37 .38 .81 .99

*3/16 1010033 100 10 .25 .97 .56 .59 .50 .44 .94 1.181/4 1010051 100 19 .31 1.03 .50 .75 .66 .56 1.19 1.43

5/16 1010079 100 28 .38 1.38 .75 .88 .73 .69 1.31 1.663/8 1010097 100 48 .44 1.50 .75 1.00 .91 .75 1.63 1.94

7/16 1010113 50 78 .50 1.88 1.00 1.19 1.13 .88 1.91 2.281/2 1010131 50 80 .50 1.88 1.00 1.19 1.13 .88 1.91 2.289/16 1010159 50 109 .56 2.25 1.25 1.31 1.34 .94 2.06 2.505/8 1010177 50 110 .56 2.25 1.25 1.31 1.34 .94 2.06 2.503/4 1010195 25 142 .62 2.75 1.44 1.50 1.39 1.06 2.25 2.847/8 1010211 25 212 .75 3.12 1.62 1.75 1.58 1.25 2.44 3.161 1010239 10 252 .75 3.50 1.81 1.88 1.77 1.25 2.63 3.47

1-1/8 1010257 10 283 .75 3.88 2.00 2.00 1.91 1.25 2.81 3.591-1/4 1010275 10 438 .88 4.44 2.22 2.34 2.17 1.44 3.13 4.131-3/8 1010293 10 442 .88 4.44 2.22 2.34 2.31 1.44 3.13 4.191-1/2 1010319 10 544 .88 4.94 2.38 2.59 2.44 1.44 3.41 4.441-5/8 1010337 Bulk 704 1.00 5.31 2.62 2.75 2.66 1.63 3.63 4.751-3/4 1010355 Bulk 934 1.13 5.75 2.75 3.06 2.92 1.81 3.81 5.24

2 1010373 Bulk 1300 1.25 6.44 3.00 3.38 3.03 2.00 4.44 5.882-1/4 1010391 Bulk 1600 1.25 7.13 3.19 3.88 3.19 2.00 4.56 6.382-1/2 1010417 Bulk 1900 1.25 7.69 3.44 4.13 3.69 2.00 4.69 6.63†2-3/4 1010435 Bulk 2300 1.25 8.31 3.56 4.38 4.88 2.00 5.00 6.88

3 1010453 Bulk 3100 1.50 9.19 3.88 4.75 4.44 2.38 5.31 7.61†3-1/2 1010426 Bulk 4000 1.50 10.75 4.50 5.50 6.00 2.38 6.19 8.38

G-450

Look for the Red-U-Bolt®, your assurance of

Crosby Clips.E

A

FG

D

H

CB

CROSBY® CLIPS

• Sizes 1/8" through 3" have forged bases

• Entire clip – hot dip galvanized to resist corrosive and rusting action.

• Only genuine Crosby clips have a red U-BOLT for instant recognition.

• All clips are individually bagged or tagged with proper application instructions and warning information.

• Clip sizes up through 1-1/2" have rolled threads.

SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION!Crosby clips all sizes 1/4" and larger meet

Federal Specification FF-C-450 TYPE 1 CLASS 1.

*Electro-plated U-Bolt and Nuts†2-3/4" and 3-1/2" are made of cast steel.


Master LinkMASTER LINK

• Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered.• Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification.• Proof test certification shipped with each link.• Sizes from 1/2" to 2" are drop forged.

SIZE (IN)

A-342 STOCK

NO.

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

WLL BASED ON 5:1

DESIGN FACTOR

(LBS)

PROOF LOAD

(LBS)**

DIMENSIONS (IN) DEFORMA-TION

INDICATORA B C D E F G3/4W 1014739 3.5 12300 28400 .73 3.20 6.00 .56 3.35 1.77 .30 4.007/8W 1014742 4.8 15200 35200 .88 3.75 6.38 .56 3.35 1.77 .30 4.501W 1014766 9.3 26000 60000 1.10 4.30 7.50 .75 3.94 2.36 .33 5.50

1-1/4W 1014779 15.8 39100 90400 1.33 5.50 9.50 1.00 6.30 3.54 .51 7.001-1/2W 1014807 34.1 61100 141200 1.61 5.90 10.50 1.25 7.09 3.94 .65 7.501-3/4 1014814 46.7 84900 212250 1.75 6.00 12.00 1.38 8.00 5.00 .73 7.50

2 1014832 67.2 102600 256500 2.00 7.00 14.00 1.50 9.00 5.75 – 9.002-1/2 1014855 206 160000 320000 2.50 8.38 16.00 2.50 16.00 8.38 – 11.002-3/4 1014864 282 216900 433800 2.75 9.88 18.00 2.75 18.00 9.88 – 12.50

4 1014999 667 373000 746000 4.00 12.00 24.00 3.50 24.00 12.00 – 15.50***

*Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. **Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. ††Welded Master Link.

*Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. The maximum individual sublink working load limit is 75% of the assembly working load limit except for 2-1/2" and 2-3/4", which are 100% of assembly working load limit. Applications with wire rope and synthetic sling generally require a design factor of 5. **Proof Test Load equals or exceeds the requirement of ASTM A952(8.1) and ASME B30.9. ***Sublink only.

MASTER LINK ASSEMBLY• Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered.• Individually proof tested at 2 times Working Load Limit with certification.• Proof test certification shipped with each link.

A-342

A-345

C

AB

E

D

F

A

B

C

G

SIZE (IN)A-342 STOCK

NO.WEIGHT EACH

(LBS) WLL (LBS)*PROOF LOAD

(LBS)**

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B CDEFORMATION

INDICATOR1/2W 1014266 1.3 7400 17200 .62 2.80 5.00 3.505/8 1014280 1.5 9000 18000 .62 3.00 6.00 3.50

3/4W 1014285 2.0 12300 28400 .73 3.20 6.00 4.007/8W 1014319 3.3 15200 35200 .88 3.75 6.38 4.501W 1014331 6.1 26000 60000 1.10 4.30 7.50 5.50

1-1/4W 1014348 12.0 39100 90400 1.33 5.50 9.50 7.001-1/2W 1014365 18.6 61100 141200 1.61 5.90 10.50 7.501-3/4 1014388 25.2 84900 212250 1.75 6.00 12.00 7.50

2 1014404 37.0 102600 256500 2.00 7.00 14.00 9.002-1/4 1014422 54.1 143100 289200 2.25 8.00 16.00 10.002-1/2 1014468 68.5 160000 320000 2.50 8.38 16.00 11.002-3/4 1014440 94.0 216900 433800 2.75 9.88 18.00 12.50

3 1014486 115 228000 456000 3.00 9.88 18.00 13.003-1/4 1014501 145 262200 524400 3.25 10.00 20.00 13.503-1/2 1014529 200 279000 558000 3.50 12.00 24.00 15.503-3/4 1015051 198 336000 672000 3.75 10.00 20.00 13.50

4 1015060 264 373000 746000 4.00 12.00 24.00 16.00†† 4-1/4 1015067 302 354000 708000 4.25 12.00 24.00 –†† 4-1/2 1015079 345 360000 720000 4.50 14.00 28.00 – †† 4-3/4 1015088 436 389000 778000 4.75 14.00 28.00 –

†† 5 1015094 516 395000 790000 5.00 15.00 30.00 –


Shackle Application Instructions

Round Pin Shackles can be used in tie down towing, suspension or lifting applications where the load is strictly applied in-line. Round pin shackles should never be used in rigging applications to gather, multiple sling legs, or where side loading conditions may occur.

Screw Pin Shackles are used in Pick and Place* applications. For permanent or long-term installations, Crosby recommends the use of bolt type shackles.If you choose to disregard Crosby's recommendation, the screw pin shall be secured from rotation or loosening (next page).Screw pin shackles can be used for applications involving side-loading circumstances. Reduced working load limits are required for side-load-ing applications. While in service, do not allow the screw pin to be rotated by a live line, such as a chocker application.*Pick and Place application: Pick (move) a load and place as required. Tighten screw pin before each pick.

Bolt-Type Shackles can be used in any application where round pin or screw pin shackles are used. In addition, they are recommended for permanent or long term installations and where the load may slide on the shackle pin causing the pin to rotate. The bolt-type shackle's secondary securement system, utilizing a nut and cotter, eliminates the requirement to tighten pin before each lift or movement of load.


Shackle Application InstructionsRIGGING PRACTICE SHACKLESScrew pin shall be fully engaged. If designed for a cotter pin, it shall be used and maintained. Applied load should be centered in the bow to prevent side loading. Multiple sling legs should not be applied to the pin. If side loaded, the rated load shall be reduced according to Table 1 on the next page.

MOUSE SCREW PIN WHEN USED IN LONG-TERM OR HIGH-VIBRATION APPLICATIONS.Mouse or Mousing (screw pin shackle) is a secondary securement method used to secure screw pin from rotation or loosening. Annealed iron wire is looped through hole in collar of pin and around adjacent leg of shackle body with wire ends securely twisted together.

ROUND PINDo not side load, do not use as a collector ring, always use cotter pin.

Diameter of shackle must be greater than wire rope diame-ter if no thimble in eye.

Use Bolt-Type Shackle when a permanent or long-term connection

Use a screw pin shackle when it will be a temporary connection.

Shackle must be large enough to avoid pinching of synthetic slings.

SCREW PINUse when picking and

placing a load, tighten pin prior to each lift.

BOLT TYPEUse in permanent or long-term installations, always

use nut and cotter.

SCREW PIN SHACKLES PIN SECURITY

SHACKLES

CONNECTION OF SLINGS TO SHACKLES

BOLT TYPE SHACKLES

WIRE ROPE SLINGS AND CONNECTIONS TO FITTINGS

WIRE ROPE SLINGS AND CONNECTIONS TO FITTINGS

SYNTHETIC SLINGS RATED LOAD

CHOKER HITCH FORMED

CROSBY SHACKLES POINT LOADING

USE A THIMBLE TO PROTECT SLING AND TO INCREASE D/d

NEVER PLACE EYE OVER FITTING SMALLER DIAMETER OR WIDTH THAN THE ROPE'S DIAMETER

NEVER PLACE A SLING EYE OVER A FITTING WITH A DIAMETER OR WIDTH GREATER THAN ONE HALF THE NATURAL LENGTH OF THE EYE

FOLDING, BUNCHING OR PINCHING OF SYN-THETIC SLINGS, WHICH OCCURS WHEN USED WITH SHACKLES, HOOK OR OTHER APPLICA-

TIONS. WILL REDUCE THE RATED LOAD.

BUNCHINGASME B30.9

WITH CHOKER HOOK

WITH SHACKLES

PLACE PIN IN EYE OF SLING

CORRECT!

POINT LOADING OF CROSBY SHACKLE BOWS IS ACCEPT-ABLEPOINT LOADING OF CROSBY SHACKLE PINS IS ACCEPT-ABLE AS LOAD IS REASON-ABLY CENTERED ON THE PIN

Although point loading is acceptable, a pad eye width of 80% or more of shackle spread is best practice.

PINCHING


Shackle Application Instructions

+ In-Line load is applied perpendicular to pin. * DO NOT SIDE LOAD ROUND PIN SHACKLE

SIDE LOADED RATING REDUCTION TABLE 3/16" - 3" (120 METRIC TONS)

INCLUDED ANGLE - SHACKLES

Angle loads must be applied in the plane of the bow.

Never exceed 120° included angle. Use Bolt Type and Screw Pin Shackles ONLY.

Shackles symmetrically loaded with two leg slings having a maximum included angle of 120° can be utilized to full Working Load Limit.

For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, where the angle of the side load is greater than 5 degrees, contact Crosby Engineering.

For shackles larger than 125 metric tons, the maximum included angle is 90 degrees for full working load limit. Contact Crosby Engineering if included angle is greater than 90 degrees.

TABLE ISIDE LOADING REDUCTION CHART FOR

SCREW PIN & BOLT TYPE SHACKLES ONLY+ANGLE OF SIDE LOAD FROM VERTICAL IN-LINE SHACKLE ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD LIMIT

0°-5° In-Line* 100% of rated working load limit45° from In-Line* 70% of rated working load limit90° from In-Line* 50% of rated working load limit


Forged Shackles• Working load limit permanently shown on every shackle.• Forged – Quenched and Tempered, with alloy pins.• Capacities 1/3 through 55 tons.• Look for the red pin...the mark of genuine Crosby quality.• Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to

designated standards such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification available when requested at the time of order.

• Hot dip galvanized or self-colored.• Fatigue rated.

SCREW PIN ROUND PIN

NOM. SIZE (IN)

WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

(TONS)

STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH (LBS)G-209 GALV. S-209 S.C.

G-213 GALV. S-213 S.C.

G-209S-209

G-213S-213

3/16 †1/3 1018357 – – – .06 –1/4 1/2 1018375 1018384 1018017 1018026 .10 .135/16 3/4 1018393 1018400 1018035 1018044 .18 .183/8 1 1018419 1018428 1018053 1018062 .31 .297/16 1-1/2 1018437 1018446 1018071 1018080 .38 .381/2 2 1018455 1018464 1018099 1018106 .72 .715/8 3-1/4 1018473 1018482 1018115 1018124 1.37 1.503/4 4-3/4 1018491 1018507 1018133 1018142 2.35 2.327/8 6-1/2 1018516 1018525 1018151 1018160 3.62 3.491 8-1/2 1018534 1018543 1018179 1018188 5.03 5.00

1-1/8 9-1/2 1018552 1018561 1018197 1018204 7.41 6.971-1/4 12 1018570 1018589 1018213 1018222 9.50 9.751-3/8 13-1/2 1018598 1018605 1018231 1018240 13.53 13.251-1/2 17 1018614 1018623 1018259 1018268 17.20 17.251-3/4 25 1018632 1018641 1018277 1018286 27.78 29.46

2 35 1018650 1018669 1018295 1018302 45.00 45.752-1/2 †55 1018678 1018687 – – 85.75 –

NOM. SIZE

WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

DIMENSIONS (IN) TOLERANCE +/-

A B C D E F G H L M N P C A3/16 †1/3 .38 .25 .88 .19 .60 .56 .98 1.47 .16 1.14 – .19 .06 .061/4 1/2 .47 .31 1.13 .25 .78 .61 1.28 1.84 .19 1.43 1.34 .25 .06 .065/16 3/4 .53 .38 1.22 .31 .84 .75 1.47 2.09 .22 1.71 1.59 .31 .06 .063/8 1 .66 .44 1.44 .38 1.03 .91 1.78 2.49 .25 2.02 1.86 .38 .13 .067/16 1-1/2 .75 .50 1.69 .44 1.16 1.06 2.03 2.91 .31 2.37 2.13 .44 .13 .061/2 2 .81 .63 1.88 .50 1.31 1.19 2.31 3.28 .38 2.69 2.38 .50 .13 .065/8 3-1/4 1.06 .75 2.38 .63 1.69 1.50 2.94 4.19 .44 3.34 2.91 .69 .13 .063/4 4-3/4 1.25 .88 2.81 .75 2.00 1.81 3.50 4.97 .50 3.97 3.44 .81 .25 .067/8 6-1/2 1.44 1.00 3.31 .88 2.28 2.09 4.03 5.83 .50 4.50 3.81 .97 .25 .061 8-1/2 1.69 1.13 3.75 1.00 2.69 2.38 4.69 6.56 .56 5.13 4.53 1.06 .25 .06

1-1/8 9-1/2 1.81 1.25 4.25 1.16 2.91 2.69 5.16 7.47 .63 5.71 5.13 1.25 .25 .061-1/4 12 2.03 1.38 4.69 1.29 3.25 3.00 5.75 8.25 .69 6.25 5.50 1.38 .25 .061-3/8 13-1/2 2.25 1.50 5.25 1.42 3.63 3.31 6.38 9.16 .75 6.83 6.13 1.50 .25 .131-1/2 17 2.38 1.63 5.75 1.54 3.88 3.63 6.88 10.00 .81 7.33 6.50 1.62 .25 .131-3/4 25 2.88 2.00 7.00 1.84 5.00 4.19 8.86 12.34 1.00 9.06 7.75 2.25 .25 .13

2 35 3.25 2.25 7.75 2.08 5.75 4.81 9.97 13.68 1.22 10.35 8.75 2.40 .25 .132-1/2 †55 4.13 2.75 10.50 2.71 7.25 5.69 12.87 17.84 1.38 13.00 – 3.13 .25 .25

*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. †Furnished in screw pin only.

Screw pin anchor shackles meet the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 2.

Round pin anchor shackles meet the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 1.

G-209 S-209 G-213 S-213


Bolt-Type Shackles

• Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle.• Forged – quenched and tempered, with alloy pins.• Capacities 1/3 through 150 metric tons.• Look for the red pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality.• Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to designated

standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification available when requested at time of order.

• Hot dip galvanized or self colored.• Fatigue rated.• Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.• Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME

B30.26.• Approved for use at -40° F to 400° F.

BOLT-TYPE ANCHOR SHACKLE

NOM. SIZE (IN)

WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (TONS)

STOCK NO.2130

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS(IN)TOLERANCE

+/-G-2130 GALV. S-2130 A B C D E F H L M N C A

3/16 1/3ŧ 1019464 – .06 .38 .25 .88 .19 .60 .56 1.47 .98 1.29 .19 .06 .061/4 1/2 1019466 – .11 .47 .31 1.13 .25 .78 .61 1.84 1.28 1.56 .25 .06 .065/16 3/4 1019468 – .22 .53 .38 1.22 .31 .84 .75 2.09 1.47 1.82 .31 .06 .063/8 1 1019470 – .33 .66 .44 1.44 .38 1.03 .91 2.49 1.78 2.17 .38 .13 .067/16 1-1/2 1019471 – .49 .75 .50 1.69 .44 1.16 1.06 2.91 2.03 2.51 .44 .13 .061/2 2 1019472 1019481 .79 .81 .64 1.88 .50 1.31 1.19 3.28 2.31 2.80 .50 .13 .065/8 3-1/4 1019490 1019506 1.68 1.06 .77 2.38 .63 1.69 1.50 4.19 2.94 3.56 .69 .13 .063/4 4-3/4 1019515 1019524 2.72 1.25 .89 2.81 .75 2.00 1.81 4.97 3.50 4.15 .81 .25 .067/8 6-1/2 1019533 1019542 3.95 1.44 1.02 3.31 .88 2.28 2.09 5.83 4.03 4.82 .97 .25 .061 8-1/2 1019551 1019560 5.66 1.69 1.15 3.75 1.00 2.69 2.38 6.56 4.69 5.39 1.06 .25 .06

1-1/8 9-1/2 1019579 1019588 8.27 1.81 1.25 4.25 1.13 2.91 2.69 7.47 5.16 5.90 1.25 .25 .061-1/4 12 1019597 1019604 11.71 2.03 1.40 4.69 1.29 3.25 3.00 8.25 5.75 6.69 1.38 .25 .061-3/8 13-1/2 1019613 1019622 15.83 2.25 1.53 5.25 1.42 3.63 3.31 9.16 6.38 7.21 1.50 .25 .131-1/2 17 1019631 1019640 19.00 2.38 1.66 5.75 1.53 3.88 3.63 10.00 6.88 7.73 1.62 .25 .131-3/4 25 1019659 1019668 33.91 2.88 2.04 7.00 1.84 5.00 4.19 12.34 8.80 9.68 2.25 .25 .13

2 35 1019677 1019686 52.25 3.25 2.30 7.75 2.08 5.75 4.81 13.68 10.15 10.81 2.40 .25 .132-1/2 55 1019695 1019702 98.25 4.13 2.80 10.50 2.71 7.25 5.69 17.90 12.75 13.58 3.13 .25 .25

3 †85 1019711 – 154.00 5.00 3.30 13.00 3.12 7.88 6.50 21.50 14.62 15.13 3.62 .25 .253-1/2 †120ŧ 1019739 – 265.00 5.25 3.76 14.63 3.62 9.00 8.00 24.88 17.02 17.00 4.38 .25 .25

4 †150ŧ 1019757 – 383.00 5.50 4.26 14.50 4.00 10.00 9.00 25.68 18.00 17.75 4.56 .25 .25

Bolt Type Anchor shackles with thin head bolt–nut with cotter pin, meets the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVA, Grade A, Class 3.

G-2130 S-2130

*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. † Individually Proof Tested with certification ŧ Furnished in Anchor style only and furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handles

®


Bolt-Type Shackles

NOM. SIZE (IN)

WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

(TONS)

STOCK NO.2150

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS(IN)TOLERANCE

+/-

G-2150 GALV. A-2150 S.C. A B D F G K M P R G A1/4 1/2 1019768 – .13 .47 .31 .25 .62 .91 1.59 .97 1.56 .25 .06 .065/16 3/4 1019770 – .23 .53 .38 .31 .75 1.07 1.91 1.15 1.82 .31 .06 .063/8 1 1019772 – .33 .66 .44 .38 .92 1.28 2.31 1.42 2.17 .38 .13 .067/16 1-1/2 1019774 – .49 .75 .50 .44 1.06 1.48 2.67 1.63 2.51 .44 .13 .061/2 2 1019775 1019784 .75 .81 .64 .50 1.18 1.66 3.03 1.81 2.80 .50 .13 .065/8 3-1/4 1019793 1019800 1.47 1.06 .77 .63 1.50 2.04 3.76 2.32 3.56 .63 .13 .063/4 4-3/4 1019819 1019828 2.52 1.25 .89 .75 1.81 2.40 4.53 2.75 4.15 .81 .25 .067/8 6-1/2 1019837 1019846 3.85 1.44 1.02 .88 2.10 2.86 5.33 3.20 4.82 .97 .25 .061 8-1/2 1019855 1019864 5.55 1.69 1.15 1.00 2.38 3.24 5.94 3.69 5.39 1.00 .25 .06

1-1/8 9-1/2 1019873 1019882 7.60 1.81 1.25 1.13 2.68 3.61 6.78 4.07 5.90 1.25 .25 .061-1/4 12 1019891 1019908 10.81 2.03 1.40 1.25 3.00 3.97 7.50 4.53 6.69 1.38 .25 .061-3/8 13-1/2 1019917 1019926 13.75 2.25 1.53 1.38 3.31 4.43 8.28 5.01 7.21 1.50 .25 .131-1/2 17 1019935 1019944 18.50 2.38 1.66 1.50 3.62 4.87 9.05 5.38 7.73 1.62 .25 .131-3/4 25 1019953 1019962 31.40 2.88 2.04 1.75 4.19 5.82 10.97 6.38 9.33 2.12 .25 .13

2 35 1019971 1019980 46.75 3.25 2.30 2.10 5.00 6.82 12.74 7.25 10.41 2.36 .25 .132-1/2 55 1019999 1020004 85.00 4.13 2.80 2.63 5.68 8.07 14.85 9.38 13.58 2.63 .25 .25

3 †85 1020013 – 124.25 5.00 3.25 3.00 6.50 8.56 16.87 11.00 15.13 3.50 .25 .25

BOLT-TYPE CHAIN SHACKLE

Bolt Type Chain shackles with thin hex head bolt–nut with cotter pin, meets the requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-271D Type IVB, Grade A, Class 3.

G-2150 S-2150

• Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle.• Forged – quenched and tempered, with alloy pins.• Capacities 1/2 through 85 metric tons.• Look for the red pin... the mark of genuine Crosby quality.• Shackles can be furnished proof tested with certificates to

designated standards, such as ABS, DNV, Lloyds, or other certification. Charges for proof testing and certification avail-able when requested at time of order.

• Hot dip galvanized or self colored.• Fatigue rated.• Shackles 25t and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.• Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME B30.26.• Approved for use at -40° F to 400° F.

*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 6 times the Working Load Limit. † Individually Proof Tested with certification

®


Alloy Bolt-Type Shackles

• Working Load Limit is permanently shown on every shackle.• Alloy bows, alloy bolts.• Quenched and tempered.• Sizes 200 tons and larger are individually proof tested.• Forged Alloy Steel 30 through 175 metric tons. Cast Alloy

Steel 200 through 400 metric tons.• Pins are galvanized and painted red.• Sizes 1-1/2 and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.• Approved use at -40°F to 400°F.

BOLT-TYPE ANCHOR SHACKLE

*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.0 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit on 200 through 400 metric tons. For sizes 30 thru 175 metric tons, Minimum Ultimate Load is 5.4 times the Working Load Limit.**Cast Alloy Steel.†Furnished with Round Head Bolts with welded handle.

G-2140 S-2140NOM. SIZE (IN)

WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

(TONS)

STOCK NO. WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

G-2140 GALV.

S-2140S.C.

1-1/2 30 1021110 1021129 18.81-3/4 40 1021138 1021147 33.8

2 55 1021156 1021165 49.92-1/2 85 1021174 1021183 103

3 120 1021192 – 1623-1/2 †150 1021218 – 327

4 †175 1021236 – 3184-3/4 †200 1021234 – 461

5 †250 1021443 – 6086 †300 1021252 – 797

7** †400 1021478 – 1289

NOM. SIZE (IN)

WORKING LOAD LIM-IT* (TONS)

DIMENSIONS(IN) TOLERANCE +/-A B C D +/- .02 E F G H J K L M N A E

1-1/2 30 2.38 3.62 1.62 1.63 5.75 1.39 6.88 7.73 10.00 3.88 1.53 – – .13 .251-3/4 40 2.88 4.19 2.25 2.00 7.00 1.75 8.81 9.33 12.34 5.00 1.84 – – .13 .25

2 55 3.25 4.81 2.40 2.25 7.75 2.00 10.16 10.41 13.68 5.75 2.08 – – .13 .252-1/2 85 4.12 5.81 3.12 2.75 10.50 2.62 12.75 13.58 17.90 7.25 2.71 – – .25 .25

3 †120 5.00 6.50 3.63 3.25 13.00 3.00 14.62 15.13 21.50 7.88 3.12 – – .25 .253-1/2 †150 5.25 8.00 4.38 3.75 14.63 3.75 17.02 20.33 24.88 9.00 3.62 4.00 1.80 .25 .25

4 †175 5.50 9.00 4.56 4.25 14.50 4.00 18.00 21.20 25.68 10.00 4.00 4.00 1.80 .25 .254-3/4 †200 7.25 10.50 5.00 4.75 15.19 4.58 20.84 24.04 27.81 11.00 4.75 4.00 1.80 .25 .25

5 †250 8.50 12.00 5.62 5.00 18.50 4.85 23.62 24.87 32.61 13.00 5.00 4.00 1.80 .25 .256 †300 8.38 13.00 6.06 6.00 18.72 4.89 24.76 26.22 34.28 13.00 5.88 4.00 1.80 .25 .25

7** †400 8.25 14.00 7.25 7.00 22.50 6.50 26.00 29.66 40.25 13.00 6.00 4.00 1.80 .25 .25


Wide Body Shackles

• Greatly improves wearability of wire rope slings.• Increase in shackle bow radius provides minimum 58% gain

in sling bearing surface & eliminates need for a thimble.• Increases usable sling strength minimum of 15%.• Pin is non-rotating, with weld on handles for easier use.• All ratings are in metric tons, embossed on side of bow.• Sizes 400 tons and larger are tested to 1.33 times WLL.• Standard 2160 shackles 400 tons and larger are individually

proof tested with Crosby certification. Shackles requiring ABS, DNV, Lloyds and other certifications are available upon spe-cial request and must be specified at time of order.

• Weighs no more than conventionally designed shackles.• All sizes quenched and tempered for maximum strength.• Forged alloy steel from 7 tons through 1,550 metric tons.• Cast alloy steel from 400 tons through 1,550 metric tons.• All bows are furnished Dimetcoted. All pins are Dimetcoted

then painted red.

“WIDE BODY” SLING SAVER SHACKLES INCREASE SLING LIFE

*7t-300t Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit.400t-1550t Prof Load is 1.33 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.

G-2160Patented

WLL(T)*

G-2160STOCK

NO.

S-2160STOCK

NO.

WEIGHTEACH(LBS)

DIMENSIONS(IN)

AB

+/- .25 CD

+/- .02 E G H J K M N P R7 1021256 1021548 4.0 4.14 1.25 0.69 0.88 1.82 1.25 3.56 1.60 1.25 – – 4.10 5.87

12.5 1021265 1021557 8.80 5.38 1.69 0.92 1.13 2.38 1.37 4.63 2.13 1.63 – – 5.51 7.63

18 1021274 1021566 14.90 6.69 2.03 1.16 1.38 2.69 1.50 5.81 2.50 2.00 – – 6.76 9.38

30 1021283 1021575 26.50 7.69 2.37 1.38 1.63 3.50 2.50 6.94 3.13 2.50 – – 8.50 11.38

40 1021285 1021584 46.00 9.28 2.88 1.69 2.00 4.00 1.75 8.06 3.75 3.00 – – 10.62 13.62

55 1021287 1021593 68.00 10.36 3.25 2.00 2.25 4.63 2.63 9.36 4.50 3.50 – – 12.26 15.63

75 1022101 – 112 14.37 4.13 2.12 2.75 5.34 3.50 15.91 4.75 3.64 4.00 1.80 12.28 18.41

125 1022110 – 193 18.32 5.12 2.66 3.15 6.50 3.75 18.32 5.91 4.33 4.00 1.80 15.46 22.98

200 1022118 – 420 21.20 5.91 2.94 4.12 8.41 5.25 21.20 8.63 5.42 4.00 1.80 20.26 30.43

300 1022127 – 805 24.20 7.38 3.84 5.25 10.50 6.13 24.20 10.38 6.31 4.00 1.80 23.93 37.66

400 1021334 – 1143 30.27 8.66 5.16 6.30 12.56 7.99 28.72 12.60 7.28 4.00 1.80 27.17 38.78

500 1021343 – 1439 33.35 9.84 5.73 7.09 13.39 8.09 31.21 13.39 8.86 4.00 1.80 31.10 42.72

600 1021352 – 2132 36.02 10.83 6.23 7.87 15.50 13.00 35.36 14.57 9.74 5.75 2.25 34.05 47.24

700 1021361 – 2579 38.91 11.81 6.59 8.46 17.03 8.87 37.52 15.75 10.63 5.75 2.25 37.01 50.18

800 1021254 – 3025 41.66 12.80 7.30 9.06 17.69 9.76 39.90 16.54 10.92 5.75 2.25 38.39 52.09

900 1021389 – 3775 43.73 13.78 7.78 9.84 18.81 13.00 42.20 18.81 11.52 5.75 2.25 40.35 54.59

1000 1021370 – 4079 45.98 14.96 8.33 10.63 20.00 10.26 44.30 18.11 12.11 5.75 2.25 42.32 55.31

1250 1021272 – 5320 49.86 16.99 9.16 11.81 22.56 13.92 39.62 20.87 12.70 – – 46.26 65.35

1550 1021281 – 8302 54.89 18.31 11.10 12.60 24.25 12.52 42.32 22.82 13.29 – – 51.81 74.63

ConventionalShackle

"Wide body"Shackle


*Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit.

*Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit.

Easy-Loc®

CROSBY ALLOY EASY-LOC SHACKLES

CROSBY WIDE BODY EASY-LOC SHACKLES

G-2140E

G-2160EPatented

NOMINAL SHACKLE SIZE (IN)

WLL (TONS)*

STOCK NO.

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)TOLERANCE

+/-

A B CD +/- .02 E F G H J K L M N A E

4-3/4 200 1021475 458 7.25 10.50 5.00 4.75 15.19 4.58 20.84 23.01 27.81 11.00 4.75 4.00 1.80 0.25 0.25

5 250 1021484 597 8.50 12.00 5.63 5.00 18.50 4.48 23.63 23.84 32.63 13.00 5.00 4.00 1.80 0.25 0.25

6 300 1021493 791 8.38 13.00 6.06 6.00 18.72 4.89 24.76 25.01 34.28 13.00 5.88 4.00 1.80 0.25 0.25

WLL (TONS)*

STOCK NO.

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

AB +/- .25 C

D +/- .02 E G H J K M N P R

75 1021500 110 15.04 4.13 2.39 2.75 5.34 3.75 11.54 5.00 3.64 4.00 1.80 12.64 18.66

125 1021509 190 17.70 5.12 3.10 3.15 6.50 3.75 14.37 5.91 4.33 4.00 1.80 15.47 23.00

200 1021518 408 19.35 5.91 3.39 4.12 8.41 5.25 18.91 8.63 5.42 4.00 1.80 20.47 30.44

300 1021527 787 22.61 7.38 4.30 5.25 10.50 6.13 23.63 10.38 6.31 4.00 1.80 23.93 37.51

• Quenched and tempered.• RFID EQUIPPED• Approved for use at -40°F to 400°F• All sizes are individually proof tested to

2.0 times the Working Load Limit• Furnished with Round Head bolts with

an eyebolt for handling

• Quenched and tempered.• RFID EQUIPPED• Approved for use at -40°F to 400°F• All sizes are individually proof tested to

2.0 times the Working Load Limit


Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles

• All Alloy Construction. • Design Factor of 5 to 1. • Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. • Incorporates same ear spread and pin dimensions as conventional Crosby

Shackles. Allows easy connection to pad eyes, eye bolts, and lifting lugs. • Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting

in an increased area for load distribution, thus: • Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard anchor and chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved. • Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers.

• Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26 including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B30.26.

• Look for the Red Pin... The mark of genuine Crosby Quality.

SLING SAVER S-281

S-281 WEB SLING SHACKLEROUNDSLINGSIZE(NO)

WEB SLINGS* WORKINGLOADLIMIT

(TONS)S-281

STOCK NO

WEIGHTEACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)WEBBING

WIDTH(IN)

EYEWIDTH

(IN) PLY A C D E K M N

1 & 2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021048 1.2 1.06 2.50 0.75 1.62 1.22 3.84 3.34

3 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021057 1.5 1.25 2.00 0.88 1.50 1.41 3.38 3.97

4 4 2 2 6-1/4 1021066 2.5 1.44 2.50 1.00 2.00 1.62 4.22 4.50

5 & 6 6 3 2 8-1/2 1021075 4.3 1.69 3.62 1.13 2.75 1.84 5.64 5.13

*NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7, 2 Ply web slings. For 3" and larger webbing width, tapered eye is required.† NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements for minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Roundslings by the Web Sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2001).

Web Sling Shackle is designed to connect Synthetic Web Slings and Synthetic Round Slings to eyebolts, pad eyes, and lifting logs.


Sling Saver Web Sling Shackles

• All Alloy Construction. • Design Factor of 5 to 1. • Shackles available in size 3-1/4 to 50 tons. • Each shackle has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability

along with a WLL and the name Crosby forged into it. • Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an

increased area for load distribution, thus: • Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to standard

anchor & chain shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.

• Allowing better load distribution on internal fibers. • Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26

including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load & temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical performance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B30.26.

• Shackles available in both a Screw Pin & Bolt, Nut & cotter pin configuration. • Bolt (Pin) has a larger diameter that provides better load distribution. • Look for the Red Pin... The mark of Genuine Crosby Quality.

S-252 BOLT TYPESLING SHACKLE

S-253 SCREW PINSLING SHACKLE

S-253 SCREW PIN SLING SHACKLE

S-252 BOLT TYPE SLING SHACKLE


*NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Minimum Ultimate Strength is 5 times the Working Load Limit.

SLINGEYE

WIDTH(IN)

ROUNDSLINGSIZE(NO)

WLL(TONS)*

S-252STOCK NO

WEIGHTEACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E F G H J K L M1 1 & 2 3-1/4 1020485 1.4 1.06 0.58 1.38 0.75 1.50 0.44 3.38 3.68 1.12 1.50 0.75 2.69

1.5 3 & 4 6-1/2 1020496 2.4 1.25 0.75 1.75 0.88 1.88 0.50 4.15 4.25 1.31 1.81 1.00 3.38

2 5 & 6 8-3/4 1020507 4.1 1.38 0.88 2.25 1.00 2.81 0.56 5.50 4.72 1.50 2.09 1.12 4.19

3 7 & 8 12-1/2 1020518 8.0 1.62 1.12 3.25 1.25 3.06 0.75 6.34 5.88 1.88 2.62 1.38 5.62

4 9 & 10 20-1/2 1020529 16.9 2.12 1.38 4.50 1.50 5.25 0.88 9.45 7.19 2.25 3.12 1.75 7.50

5 11 & 12 35 1020540 35.0 2.50 1.75 5.50 2.00 6.34 1.12 11.50 9.31 3.00 4.19 2.25 9.19

6 13 50 1020551 57.5 3.00 2.12 6.50 2.25 7.70 1.25 13.75 10.38 3.38 4.75 2.75 11.00

SLINGEYE

WIDTH(IN)

ROUNDSLINGSIZE(NO)

WLL(TONS)*

S-252STOCK NO

WEIGHTEACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E G K L M N P R1 1 & 2 3-1/4 1020575 1.4 0.88 0.62 1.38 0.75 1.50 3.38 1.50 0.75 2.69 3.22 0.44 1.00

1.5 3 & 4 6-1/2 1020584 2.2 1.25 0.75 1.75 0.88 1.88 4.15 1.81 1.00 3.38 4.03 0.50 1.19

2 5 & 6 8-3/4 1020593 3.8 1.38 0.88 2.25 1.00 2.81 5.50 2.09 1.12 4.19 4.50 0.50 1.44

3 7 & 8 12-1/2 1020602 7.3 1.62 1.12 3.25 1.25 3.06 6.34 2.62 1.38 5.62 5.59 0.62 1.81

4 9 & 10 20-1/2 1020611 15.2 2.12 1.38 4.50 1.50 5.25 9.45 3.12 1.75 7.50 6.88 0.75 2.13

5 11 & 12 35 1020620 30.8 2.50 1.75 5.50 2.00 6.34 11.50 4.19 2.25 9.19 8.66 1.00 2.88

6 13 50 1020629 52.0 3.00 2.12 6.50 2.25 7.70 13.75 4.75 2.75 11.00 10.22 1.22 3.19


Van Beest Green Pin® Standard Shackles

BOW SHACKLES WITH SCREW COLLAR PIN

• Material: bow and pin high tensile steel, Grade 6, quenched and tempered

• Safety Factor: MBL equals 6 x WLL

• Standard: EN 13889 and meets performance requirements of US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 Type IVA Class 2, Grade A from 2T and upward these shackles comply with ASME B30.26

• Finish: Hot dipped galvanized

• Temperature range: -40ºC up to + 200º C

• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCa,* DNV 2.7-1b,* DNV 2.22, CE * For shackles ≥ WLL 2 T

WLLDIAMETER

BOWDIAMETER

PINDIAMETER

EYEWIDTH

EYEWIDTH INSIDE

LENGTH INSIDE WIDTH BOW LENGTH

LENGTH BOLT WIDTH

WEIGHT EACH

TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) LBS0.33 3/16 1/4 1/2 3/16 3/8 7/8 5/8 1-13/32 1-5/32 1-1/32 0.05

0.5 1/4 5/16 21/32 9/32 15/32 1-5/32 25/32 1-29/32 1-1/2 1-11/32 0.11

0.75 5/16 3/8 25/32 11/32 17/32 1-1/4 7/8 2-7/32 1-27/32 1-9/16 0.22

1 3/8 7/16 7/8 13/32 21/32 1-7/16 1-1/32 2-1/2 2-1/8 1-13/16 0.3

1.5 7/16 1/2 1-1/32 7/16 3/4 1-11/16 1-5/32 2-29/32 2-11/32 2 0.42

2 1/2 5/8 1-11/32 1/2 7/8 2 1-1/4 3-1/2 2-7/8 2-9/32 0.79

3.25 5/8 3/4 1-9/16 5/8 1-1/16 2-17/32 1-11/16 4-11/32 3-1/2 2-15/16 1.38

4.75 3/4 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-7/32 3 2 5-3/32 4-1/16 3-1/2 2.22

6.5 7/8 1 2-1/16 7/8 1-13/32 3-9/32 2-9/32 5-21/32 4-11/16 4-1/32 3.31

8.5 1 1-1/8 2-5/16 31/32 1-11/16 3-3/4 2-11/16 6-15/32 5-13/32 4-21/32 4.86

9.5 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 1-27/32 4-1/4 2-15/16 7-9/32 6-1/32 5-5/32 6.97

12 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 2 4-17/32 3-9/32 7-29/32 6-11/16 5-25/32 9.49

13.5 1-3/8 1-1/2 3-5/32 1-3/8 2-1/4 5-1/4 3-5/8 8-15/16 7-5/16 6-3/8 12.24

17 1-1/2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 2-3/8 5-3/4 3-29/32 9-13/16 8 6-7/8 16.37

25 1-3/4 2 4-1/16 1-25/32 2-29/32 7 4-31/32 11-13/16 9-9/16 8-1/2 28.31

35 2 2-1/4 4-3/8 1-31/32 3-9/32 7-3/4 5-7/16 13-1/32 10-23/32 9-3/8 40.01

42.5 2-1/4 2-9/16 5-1/8 2-1/4 3-3/4 8-3/4 6-5/16 14-27/32 12-7/32 10-25/32 57.96

55 2-1/2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 4-1/8 10-1/4 7-3/32 17-1/16 13-17/32 12-7/32 82.89

G-4161

G-4161 BOW SHACKLE WITH SCREW PIN


Van Beest Green Pin® Standard Shackles

BOW SHACKLES WITH SAFETY BOLT

• Material: bow and pin high tensile steel, Grade 6, quenched and tempered


• Standard: EN 13889 and meets performance requirements of US Fed. Spec. RR-C-271 Type IVA Class 3, Grade A from 2 T and upward these shackles comply with ASME B30.26


• Temperature range: -40ºC up to +200º C

• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCa,* DNV 2.7-1b,* DNV 2.22, CE * For shackles ≥ WLL 2 T

WLLDIAMETER

BOWDIAMETER

PINDIAMETER

EYEWIDTH

EYEWIDTH INSIDE

LENGTH INSIDE

WIDTH BOW LENGTH

LENGTH BOLT WIDTH

THICKNESS NUT

WEIGHT EACH

TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) K (IN) LBS0.5 1/4 5/16 21/32 9/32 15/32 1-5/32 25/32 1-29/32 1-21/32 1-11/32 5/32 0.13

0.75 5/16 3/8 25/32 11/32 17/32 1-1/4 7/8 2-7/32 1-31/32 1-9/16 3/16 0.25

1 3/8 7/16 7/8 13/32 21/32 1-7/16 1-1/32 2-1/2 2-3/8 1-13/16 5/16 0.34

1.5 7/16 1/2 1-1/32 7/16 3/4 1-11/16 1-5/32 2-29/32 2-5/8 2 7/16 0.48

2 1/2 5/8 1-11/32 1/2 7/8 2 1-1/4 3-1/2 3-7/32 2-9/32 1/2 0.92

3.25 5/8 3/4 1-9/16 5/8 1-1/16 2-17/32 1-11/16 4-11/32 3-27/32 2-15/16 21/32 1.62

4.75 3/4 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-7/32 3 2 5-3/32 4-1/2 3-1/2 3/4 2.59

6.5 7/8 1 2-1/16 7/8 1-13/32 3-9/32 2-9/32 5-21/32 5-1/8 4-1/32 7/8 3.9

8.5 1 1-1/8 2-5/16 31/32 1-11/16 3-3/4 2-11/16 6-15/32 5-29/32 4-21/32 31/32 5.69

9.5 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 1-27/32 4-1/4 2-15/16 7-9/32 6-17/32 5-5/32 1-1/16 8.06

12 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 2 4-17/32 3-9/32 7-29/32 7 5-25/32 1-3/16 10.81

13.5 1-3/8 1-1/2 3-5/32 1-3/8 2-1/4 5-1/4 3-5/8 8-15/16 7-3/4 6-3/8 1-5/16 14.42

17 1-1/2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 2-3/8 5-3/4 3-29/32 9-13/16 7-15/16 6-7/8 3/4 18.06

25 1-3/4 2 4-1/16 1-25/32 2-29/32 7 4-31/32 11-13/16 9-13/16 8-1/2 29/32 31.34

35 2 2-1/4 4-3/8 1-31/32 3-9/32 7-3/4 5-7/16 13-1/32 10-19/32 9-3/8 1-1/32 43.77

42.5 2-1/4 2-9/16 5-1/8 2-1/4 3-3/4 8-3/4 6-5/16 14-27/32 11-27/32 10-23/32 1-5/32 62.46

55 2-1/2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 4-1/8 10-1/4 7-3/32 17-1/16 13 12-7/32 1-1/4 87.27

85 3 3-1/4 6-3/8 2-7/8 5 12-15/16 7-15/32 20-3/4 14-31/32 13-3/8 1-17/32 136.69

G-4163

G-4163 BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT


Van Beest Green Pin® Wide Mouth Shackle


• Material: bow and pin alloy steel, Grade 8, quenched and tempered



• Temperature Range: -20°C up to 200°C

• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCa, CE

WLLDIAMETER

BOWDIAMETER

PINDIAMETER

EYEWIDTH

EYEWIDTH INSIDE

LENGTH INSIDE

WIDTH BOW LENGTH

LENGTH BOLT WIDTH

THICKNESS NUT

WEIGHT EACH

TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) K (IN) LBS4.75 7/8 1 2-1/16 7/8 2-15/32 4-13/32 3-15/32 6-13/16 6-3/16 5-3/16 7/8 4.59

6.5 1 1-1/8 2-5/16 31/32 2-15/16 5-5/16 4-1/8 8-1/32 7-7/32 6-3/32 31/32 6.92

8.5 1-1/8 1-1/4 2-19/32 1-3/32 3-7/32 5-13/16 4-17/32 8-27/32 8-1/16 6-23/32 1-1/16 9.61

9.5 1-1/4 1-3/8 2-27/32 1-1/4 3-17/32 6-3/8 4-31/32 9-3/4 8-13/16 7-15/32 1-3/16 13.12

12 1-3/8 1-1/2 3-1/8 1-3/8 3-15/16 7-3/32 5-1/2 10-25/32 9-21/32 8-9/32 1-5/16 17.35

16 1-1/2 1-5/8 3-15/32 1-1/2 4-3/16 8-1/2 6-1/4 12-9/16 9-3/4 9-1/4 3/4 27.56

25 1-3/4 2 4-1/16 1-25/32 5 9-3/4 6-7/8 14-9/16 11-21/32 10-7/16 29/32 36.82

30 2 2-1/4 4-21/32 1-31/32 5-3/4 10-3/4 8-5/32 16-3/16 13-1/16 12-3/32 1-1/32 55.12

55 2-1/2 2-3/4 5-23/32 2-9/16 6-1/2 12-3/8 8-3/8 19-3/16 15-13/32 13-1/2 1-1/4 105.82

75 3-1/4 3-1/4 6-15/32 3-9/32 7-1/4 13 10 21-5/32 18-1/8 16-17/32 1-17/32 154.32

G-4263

G-4263 WIDE MOUTH BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT


Van Beest Green Pin® Sling Shackles


• Material: bow and pin alloy steel, Grade 8, quenched and tempered


• Finish: shackle bow painted silver, pin painted green

• Temperature range: -20ºC up to +200º C

• Certification: 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, MTCb,*LROS,* MPIb,* USb, CE * For shackles ≥ WLL 75 T

WLLDIAMETER

BODYDIAMETER

PINDIAMETER

EYEWIDTH

EYEWIDTH INSIDE

LENGTH INSIDE

WIDTH BOW LENGTH

LENGTH BOLT WIDTH

THICKNESS NUT

BEARING SURFACE

WEIGHT EACH

TON A (IN) B (IN) C (IN) D (IN) E (IN) F (IN) G (IN) H (IN) I (IN) J (IN) K (IN) L (IN) LBS7 7/8 7/8 1-13/16 3/4 1-9/32 3-25/32 2-17/32 6 4-17/32 4-5/16 3/4 1-5/18 4.41

12.5 1-1/8 1-1/8 2-3/8 1 1-3/4 4-3/4 3-1/4 7-3/4 5-15/16 5-3/4 15/16 2-1/8 8.82

18 1-3/8 1-3/8 2-23/32 1-3/16 2-1/8 5-13/16 4-1/32 9-13/32 6-7/8 7-3/32 1-5/32 2-17/32 18

30 1-9/16 1-21/32 3-17/32 1-3/8 2-23/32 6-1/2 4-31/32 10-31/32 8-5/16 7-7/8 1-11/32 3-1/8 29

40 2-5/32 2 4-9/32 1-25/32 3-5/16 7-27/32 5-1/2 13-1/32 9-29/32 9-1/4 1-1/2 3-13/16 46

55 2-3/8 2-1/4 4-17/32 2-5/32 3-17/32 9-7/16 6-5/16 15-5/16 11-25/32 10-5/8 1-25/32 3-15/16 66

75 2-11/16 2-3/4 4-29/32 2-1/8 4-11/32 11-13/32 7-9/32 18-5/8 12-7/8 12-15/32 2-1/8 4-23/32 106

125 3-11/32 3-5/32 6-1/16 3-11/32 5-13/32 14-13/32 8-21/32 22-15/16 16-25/32 15-11/32 2-17/32 5-29/32 203

150 3-11/16 3-3/4 7-1/16 3-1/2 5-25/32 15-13/32 9-31/32 25-13/32 17-1/8 17-3/32 1-31/32 6-11/16 309

200 4-11/32 4-1/8 7-27/32 3-15/16 6-7/32 18-15/16 11-1/32 29-7/8 18-1/2 18-31/32 1-31/32 8-1/16 452

250 4-31/32 4-23/32 8-15/16 4-11/32 7-1/16 21-11/32 11-13/16 33-13/16 20-7/16 20-7/8 2-3/8 9-7/16 582

300 5-5/16 5-9/32 9-21/32 4-13/16 7-11/16 23-21/32 13-25/32 37-9/32 22-5/8 24-13/32 2-3/4 10-7/16 794

400 6-5/16 6-5/16 11-17/32 5-23/32 9-3/32 22-11/16 14-9/16 38-25/32 26-9/16 27-5/32 3-5/32 12-19/32 1279

500 6-11/16 7-3/32 12-29/32 6-5/16 10-11/32 26-13/16 17-23/32 44-17/32 29-7/16 31-3/32 3-17/32 13-11/32 1720

600 7-15/32 7-7/8 13-11/16 6-11/16 11-3/8 29-3/16 19-9/32 48-19/32 31-27/32 34-1/16 3-15/16 14-9/16 2161

700 7-7/8 8-15/32 15-7/16 7-15/32 12-13/32 29-9/16 21-1/4 50-9/16 34-19/32 35-15/32 3-15/16 15-3/4 2998

800 8-19/32 9-1/16 16-17/32 7-7/8 13-15/32 33-1/2 21-13/16 56-5/32 37-3/32 37-9/32 4-11/32 16-17/32 3153

900 9-17/32 10-1/32 18-11/32 8-21/32 14-1/2 33-1/2 22-27/32 58-19/32 40-9/32 40-9/32 4-23/32 17-5/16 3638

1000 10-1/4 10-5/8 19-9/32 9-7/16 15-23/32 33-1/2 24-3/16 60-5/16 43-7/16 43-19/32 4-23/32 18-1/8 6548

1250 11-7/32 11-13/16 20-3/32 10-1/4 17-25/32 36-21/32 25-19/32 65-19/32 48-5/16 46-17/32 5-29/32 20-7/8 8157

1550 11-7/32 12-19/32 21-21/32 11-1/32 19-1/32 37-13/32 26-25/32 67-5/16 51-3/16 49-11/32 5-29/32 22-1/16 8818

P-6033

P-6033 SLING BOW SHACKLE WITH SAFETY BOLT


CM Long Reach Shackle

As one of the only manufacturers of long-reach shackles, we designed these shackles for use in construction applications where a longer reach is needed to attach to pick points.

• Design factor of 5:1• Meets the requirements of ASME B30.26• Alloy Steel• WLL forged on body• Do not point load. The load should be evenly distributed over• The entire pin to achieve full working load limit.

SIZE (IN) WLL

SCREW PIN BOLT, NUT & COTTER

DIMENSIONS (IN)PRODUCT CODEWEIGHT

(LBS)

PRODUCT CODEWEIGHT

(LBS)SELF

COLORED PAINTEDSELF

COLORED PAINTED P D L W G5/8 7,000 M7151 M7151P 1.80 M9151 M9151P 1.95 0.75 0.63 4.00 2.25 1.57

3/4 10,000 M7152 M7152P 2.72 M9152 M9152P 3.21 0.88 0.75 5.00 2.75 1.81

1 19,000 M7154 M7154P 5.86 M9154 M9154P 6.31 1.00 1.00 5.50 3.25 2.38

1-1/4 28,000 M7156 M7156P 11.90 M9156 M9156P 12.90 1.38 1.25 6.19 3.88 3.06

1-1/2 34,000 M7157 M7157P 19.60 M9157 M9157P 20.70 1.50 1.50 7.00 4.50 3.50

1-3/4 50,000 M7177 M7177P 30.70 M9177 M9177P 33.30 2.00 1.75 8.00 5.25 4.00

Screw Pin

Bolt, Nut & Cotter

LONG REACH SHACKLES


Skookum® Shackles

ALLOY ANCHOR SHACKLES

• Skookum Gold Standard Forgings• All sizes are forged, quenched and tempered.• Enamel, zinc plate or galvanized finish.• Custom sizes & materials (stainless steel, etc.) are available upon request.• Superior strength, hardness & uniformity.• Size & working load permanently imprinted.• Material heat codes imprinted on bale and pin.

SIZE (IN)

WLL1

(TONS)WEIGHT2

(LBS)

STOCK NO.

263 264 320 3301/2 5.00 1.00 626304 626404 632004 633004

5/8 7.00 2.00 626305 626405 632005 633005

3/4 9.00 3.00 626306 626406 632006 633006

7/8 12.00 4.00 626307 626407 632007 633007

1 16.00 5.50 626308 626408 632008 633008

1-1/8 18.00 8.00 626309 626409 632009 633009

1-1/4 21.00 11.00 626310 626410 632010 633010

1-3/8 26.00 14.00 626311 626411 632011 633011

1-1/2 31.00 18.00 626312 626412 632012 633012

1-5/8 35.00 23.00 626313 626413 632013 633013

1-3/4 41.00 30.00 626314 626414 632014 633014

2 52.00 42.00 626316 626416 632016 633016

2-1/4 67.00 57.00 626318 626418 632018 633018

2-1/2 82.00 85.00 626320 626420 632020 633020

2-3/4 104.00 100.00 626322 626422 632022 633022

3 117.00 136.00 626324 626424 632024 633024

3-1/2 150.00 256.00 – – 632028 633028

4 175.00 310.00 – – 632032 633032

D W L B R P0.63 0.81 ± .125 1.88 ± .125 1.28 1.44 0.63

0.75 1.06 ± .0625 2.50 ± .125 1.75 1.63 0.75

0.88 1.25 ± .0625 2.88 ± .25 2.00 1.84 0.88

1.00 1.44 ± .0625 3.31 ± .25 2.28 2.13 1.00

1.13 1.69 ± .0625 3.75 ± .25 2.69 2.25 1.13

1.13 1.81 ± .0625 4.25 ± .25 2.94 2.63 1.25

1.25 2.03 ± .0625 4.63 ± .25 3.25 3.00 1.38

1.38 2.25 ± .125 5.25 ± .25 3.63 3.25 1.50

1.50 2.38 ± .125 5.75 ± .25 3.88 3.44 1.63

1.63 2.63 ± .125 6.25 ± .25 4.63 4.00 1.75

1.75 2.88 ± .125 7.00 ± .25 5.00 4.25 2.00

2.00 3.25 ± .125 7.75 ± .50 5.75 5.00 2.25

2.25 3.88 ± .125 9.25 ± .50 6.50 5.50 2.50

2.50 4.13 ± .125 10.50 ± .50 7.25 5.88 2.75

2.75 4.50 ± .125 11.50 ± .75 7.50 6.25 3.00

3.00 5.00 ± .125 13.00 ± .75 7.88 6.50 3.25

3.50 5.75 ± .25 15.00 ± .75 9.50 8.00 3.75

4.00 6.55 ± .25 17.00 ± .75 11.00 9.25 4.251Ton=2,000lbs - Design factor is 5 to 1.2Weightsvaryslightlywithstyleofshacklepinused.Specificationssubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

SPECIFICATIONSDIMENSIONS (IN)

W

LB

P

D

R

Screw Pin Shackle Eyed Pin Screw Pin Shackle Hex Head Pin or Marine Hex Head

Screw Pin Shackle Towing Shackle Double Nut with Locking Bolts

NO. 263 NO. 264 NO. 320 NO. 330


Skookum® Shackles

ALLOY CHAIN SHACKLES

• Skookum Gold Standard Forgings• All sizes are forged, quenched and tempered.• Enamel, zinc plate or galvanized finish.• Custom sizes & materials (stainless steel, etc..) are available upon request.• Superior strength, hardness & uniformity.• Size & working load permanently imprinted.• Material heat codes imprinted on bale and pin.

SIZE (IN)

WLL1

(TONS)WEIGHT2

(LBS)

STOCK NO.

270 271 321 3251 16.00 5.50 627008 627108 632108 –

1-1/8 18.00 6.60 627009 627109 632109 –

1-1/4 21.00 8.90 627010 627110 632110 –

1-3/8 26.00 12.00 627011 627111 632111 –

1-1/2 31.00 16.20 627012 627112 632112 –

1-5/8 35.00 21.00 627013 627113 632113 –

1-3/4 41.00 25.00 627014 627114 632114 632514

2 52.00 36.00 627016 627116 632116 632516

2-1/4 67.00 60.00 – – 632118 632518

2-1/2 82.00 74.00 – – 632120 632520

2-3/4 104.00 90.00 – – 632122 632522

3 117.00 110.00 – – 632124 632524

3-1/2 150.00 200.00 – – 632128 632528

4 175.00 310.00 – – 632132 632532

D W L R P1.00 1.69 =/- 0.6 3.25 ± .25 2.25 1.13

1.13 1.81 ± 0.13 3.56 ± .25 2.63 1.25

1.25 2.03 ± .0625 3.94 ± .25 2.88 1.38

1.38 2.25 ± .125 4.44 ± .25 3.25 1.50

1.50 2.38 ± .125 4.88 ± .25 3.44 1.63

1.63 2.63 ± .125 5.25 ± .25 4.00 1.75

1.75 2.88 ± .125 5.75 ± .25 4.50 2.00

2.00 3.25 ± .125 6.75 ± .50 5.13 2.25

2.25 3.88 ± .125 7.13 ± .50 5.25 2.50

2.50 4.13 ± .125 8.00 ± .50 6.25 2.75

2.75 4.50 ± .125 8.25 ± .75 6.25 3.00

3.00 5.13 ± .125 9.00 ± .75 6.50 3.25

3.50 5.75 ± .25 10.50 ± .75 8.00 3.75

4.00 6.50 ± .25 12.00 ± .75 9.00 4.25

1 Ton=2,00lbs - Design factor is 5 to 1.2Weightsvaryslightlywithstyleofshacklepinused.Specificationssubjecttochangewithoutnotice.


Screw Pin Shackle Eyed Pin Screw Pin Shackle Hex Head Pin or Marine Hex Head

Screw Pin Shackle Towing Shackle Double Nut with Locking Bolts

NO. 270 NO. 271 NO. 321 NO. 325

W

L

P

R

D


Skookum® Shackles

SHEET PILE SHACKLE

12-TON GROUND RELEASE SHEET PILE SHACKLE

• The No. 59A shackles were specifically designed for pulling sheet piling. They are equipped with an easy opening pin which will not detach and become lost. No tools are required.

• Replacement pins must replaced or repaired by Skookum in Hubbard, OR.• Max opening with pin in open (unlocked) position.• Design factor is 5 to1.

• 12 ton WLL @ 4:1 design factor.• Equipped with Skookum 1" #320 bolt type anchor shackle• Built with high strength steel.• 12" lg. stainless steel release cable with thimble.• Repair Kit Available

SIZE PART NO.WLL1

(TONS)WEIGHT

(LBS) OPENING2 J1 605908 8.00 10.00 1-3/4

1-1/8 605909 10.00 13.50 1-7/8

1-1/4 605910 12.00 18.00 2.00

1-1/2 605912 17.00 29.00 2-1/8

1-3/4 605914 24.00 45.00 2-1/2

2 605916 30.00 63.00 3.00

A B C D E F G H4.25 2.25 1.00 1.13 7.00 ± .25 0.63 2.38 5.00

4.50 2.50 1.00 1.25 8.00 ± .50 0.75 3.00 5.00

5.25 2.75 1.25 1.38 9.00 ± .50 0.88 3.00 5.00

6.25 3.00 1.50 1.63 10.00 ± .50 1.13 3.50 6.00

7.00 3.50 1.75 2.00 11.00 ± .50 1.25 4.00 7.00

8.00 4.00 2.00 2.25 12.00 ± .75 1.38 4.50 8.00

159A GROUND RELEASE SHEET PILE SHACKLE COMES WITH 1” #320 SHACKLE NOT SHOWN IN PICTURE

DESC PART NO.

GROUND RELEASE 615912

REPAIR KIT 615912K



Sling Saver Fittings / Accessories

• Capacities available: • Working Load Limit (5 to 1): 10,000 through 60,000 lbs. • Sling body Widths: 3" through 6" • Allows easy connection to master links or eye hooks, and is ideal for bridles • Increased radius of bow gives wider sling bearing surface resulting in an

increased area for load distribution, thus: • Increasing Synthetic Sling efficiency as compared to master links,

shackle bows and conventional eye hooks. This allows 100% of the slings rated Working Load Limit to be achieved.

• All alloy construction. • Design factor of 5 to 1. • Individually Proof Tested at 2.5 times Working Load Limit. • Each connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material

traceability, along with a frame size, and the name Crosby and USA in raised letters.

HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR IS DESIGNED TO CONNECT HIGH PERFORMANCE SYNTHETIC SLINGS OF ALL MATERIALS.

*Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times Working Load Limit.Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements of the minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the web sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2010)

*Maximum Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit at 4:1 design factor. Minimum Ultimate strength is 5 times Working Load Limit.Crosby Sling Saver hardware meets the requirements of the minimum stock diameter or thickness, and effective contact width shown in the Recommended Standards Specification for Synthetic Polyester Round Slings by the web sling & Tie Down Association. WSTDA-RS1 (revised 2010)

WLL S-237 WEB TO LOK-A-LOY

ASSY. STOCK NO.

FRAME NO.

NOMINAL SLING BODY

WIDTH (IN)LOK-A-LOY

SIZE (IN)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

4:1 (LBS)*

5:1 (LBS) A B C E G H L N R S W

12500 10000 1020704 10 3 5/8 2.96 1.42 1.52 2.75 4.13 1.25 .98 5.68 1.71 3.94 .75 1.75

18750 15000 1020713 15 3 3/4 4.75 1.63 1.58 2.75 4.37 1.38 1.10 6.49 2.04 4.46 .93 1.88

31250 25000 1020722 25 4 7/8 8.59 2.00 2.33 3.75 6.00 1.75 1.41 7.97 2.27 5.51 1.06 2.25

37500 30000 1020731 30 4 7/8 9.24 2.00 2.20 3.75 6.19 1.75 1.41 7.84 2.27 5.38 1.06 2.38

50000 40000 1020740 40 5 1 15.7 2.25 2.91 4.75 7.25 2.25 1.78 9.45 2.44 6.45 1.22 3.09

75000 60000 1020759 60 6 1-1/4 26.0 2.56 3.36 5.75 9.13 2.31 1.86 11.08 3.07 7.72 1.50 3.16

WLL (LBS)

S-238 WEB TO WEB ASSEMBLY

STOCK NO.FRAME

NO.

NOMINAL SLING BODY WIDTH (IN)

LOK-A-LOY SIZE (IN)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C E G H K M W5000 1020415 5 2 3/8 1.6 .88 1.42 2.00 3.18 1.00 .80 4.90 3.30 1.38

10000 1020423 10 3 5/8 3.3 1.42 1.52 2.75 4.13 1.25 .98 5.72 3.76 1.75

15000 1020432 15 3 3/4 4.9 1.63 1.58 2.75 4.37 1.38 1.10 6.16 3.96 1.88

25000 1020441 25 4 7/8 10.1 2.00 2.33 3.75 6.00 1.75 1.41 8.40 5.58 2.25

30000 1020450 30 4 7/8 11.4 2.00 2.20 3.75 6.19 1.75 1.41 8.14 5.32 2.38

40000 1020469 40 5 1 20.7 2.25 2.91 4.75 7.25 2.25 1.78 10.48 6.92 3.09

60000 1020478 60 6 1-1/4 32.0 2.56 3.36 5.75 9.13 2.31 1.86 11.72 8.00 3.16

S-237

S-237 HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR

S-238 HIGH PERFORMANCE SLING CONNECTOR

S-238


Sling Saver Fittings/Accessories


• Available in three sizes: • 3-1/4 ton Working Load Limit - 2" Webbing to 3/8" (10mm) chain. • 4-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 1-1/2" (3" Tapered Webbing) to 1/2" (13mm) chain. • 6-1/2 ton Working Load Limit - 2" (4" Tapered Webbing) to 5/8" (16mm) chain. • Alloy Steel (Quenched and Tempered) • Each Connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability

along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. • Uses same spool & cover as S-280 Web Connector. • Replacement Kit for Spool & Web Cover available.

• Available in 2 sizes: 3-1/4 tons (2" webbing) and 4-1/2 tons (3" webbing). • Each Connector has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for materials traceability along with a Working Load Limit and the name Crosby forged into it. • Special design of hook protects the synthetic sling when dropped or dragged. • Design factor of 5 to 1. • Forged Alloy steel - Quenched & Tempered. • Designed to reduce friction, abrasion, & fraying in choker area. • Use same spool and cover as S-280 Web Connector. • Replacement Kit for Spool and Web Cover available.

S-282 WEB/CHAIN CONNECTOR

S-287 CHOKER HOOK

ROUNDSLING

SIZE (NO)

WEB SLINGS*CHAINSIZE

WLL(TONS)**

S-282STOCK

NO

WEIGHTEACH(LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)WEBBINGWIDTH (IN)

EYEWIDTH (IN) PLY B C E F

1 & 2 2 2 2 3/8 3-1/4 1021084 1.9 4.33 2.13 2.11 4.77

3 3 1.5 2 1/2 4-1/2 1021093 2.8 5.04 1.63 2.44 4.544 4 2 2 5/8 6-1/4 1021100 4.3 5.69 2.13 2.54 5.31

ROUNDSLING

SIZE (NO)

WEB SLINGS*WLL

(TONS)**

S-287STOCK

NO

WEIGHTEACH(LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)WEBBINGWIDTH (IN)

EYEWIDTH (IN) PLY A B C D E F G H J AA

1 & 2 2 2 2 3-1/4 1021909 3.7 2.13 2.50 3.32 0.38 6.03 4.77 4.88 0.34 1.50 1.50

3 3 1.5 2 4-1/2 1021918 6.1 1.63 3.50 3.67 0.38 7.06 4.53 6.51 1.36 1.88 -

Designed around the same concept as our S-280 Web Connector, the S-282 Chain Connector makes the connection from your web sling to existing chain quick & easy.

NOTE: Designed for use with Type III, (Eye & Eye), Class 7,2 Ply web slings.**NOTE: Maximum Proof Load is 2-1/2 times the Working Load Limit. Average straightening load (ultimate load) is 5 times the Working Load Limit.


Sling Saver Synthetic Sling Hooks

HOOKID

CODEWLL

(TONS)*

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D F G H J K L M N O P Q T AAFA 1-1/2 5.25 2.26 3.98 3.11 1.38 0.84 0.94 0.93 0.71 1.50 0.63 0.75 0.91 2.24 1.01 0.98 2.00

HA 3 7.11 3.66 5.31 3.97 1.63 1.13 1.32 1.13 0.94 2.50 0.85 1.13 1.09 2.82 1.69 1.16 2.00

IA 5 9.33 5.13 7.06 4.81 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.47 1.31 3.75 1.13 1.63 1.36 3.51 2.59 1.53 2.50


WEBSLING

EYE WIDTH(IN)

ROUNDSLINGSIZE(NO)

WLL(TONS)

WS-320ASTOCK NO

WSL-320AWITH LATCH

WEIGHTEACH (LBS)

HOOKID

CODES-4320

REP LATCH1 1 1-1/2 1022701 1022706 1.10 FA 1096374

2 2 3 1022712 1022717 2.86 HA 1096468

3 3 5 1022723 1022728 6.60 IA 1096515

• Hook capacity available: 1-1/2, 3, and 5 tons.• All Alloy construction.• Design factor of 5 to 1.• Each hook has a Product Identification Code (PIC) for material traceability

along with a working load limit and the name Crosby forged into it.• Originally designed for 2-Ply Web slings, the Crosby Web Sling hook can also

be used with Round Slings as long as the Working Load Limit ratings are compatible. The new hook incorporates the following features.:

• Eye is designed with a wide beam surface which: Eliminates bunching effects.

• Reduces sling tendency to slide. • Allows a better load distribution on internal fibers.• All hooks feature Crosby's patented QUIC-CHECK indicators.• Hook Web Sling Eye width available: 1", 2", and 3".• Fatigue rated to 20,000 cycles at 1-1/2 times the WLL.

WS-320A SYNTHETIC SLING HOOK

®


Sling and Hoist HooksSLING & HOIST HOOKS

WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

• Loads may disengage from hook if proper procedures are not followed.

• A falling load may cause serious injury or death. • See OSHA Rule 1926.1431(g)(1)(i)(A) and 1926.1501(g)(4)

(iv)(B) for personnel hoisting by cranes and derricks, and OSHA Directive CPL 2-1.36 -Interim Inspection Procedures During Communication Tower Construction Activities. A Crosby 319, 320 or 322 hook with a PL latch attached and secured with a bolt, nut and cotter pin (or toggle pin) may be used for lifting personnel. A Crosby 319N, 320N or 322N hook with an S-4320 latch attached and secured with cotter pin or bolt, nut and pin; or a PL-N latch attached and secured with toggle pin may be used for lifting personnel. A hook with a Crosby SS-4055 latch attached shall NOT be used for personnel lifting.

• See OSHA Directive CPL 2-1.36 - Crosby does not recom-mend the placement of lanyards directly into the positive locking Crosby hook when hoisting personnel. Crosby requires that all suspension systems (vertical lifelines/ lanyard) shall be gathered at the positive locked load hook by use of a master link, or a bolt-type shackle secured with cotter pin.

• Threads or Split-Nut may corrode and/or strip and drop the load.

• Remove securement nut to inspect or to replace S-322 and S-3319 bearing washers (2).

• Hook must always support the load. The load must never be supported by the latch.

• Never apply more force than the hook's assigned Working Load Limit (WLL) rating.

• Read and understand these instructions before using hook

WARNING!

S-319

ZONE A: REPAIR NOT REQUIREDZONE B: 10% OF ORIGINAL DIMENSIONZONE C: 5% OF ORIGINAL DIMENSIONZONE D: SEE MINIMUM THREAD SIZE

S-320

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5

Side LoadWRONG

Side LoadWRONG

i.e.,BackhoeBucket

RIGHT WRONG

Back LoadWRONG

Tip LoadWRONG

S-320N S-322

*For two legged slings with angles greater than 90°, use an inter-mediate link such as a master link or bolt type shackle to collect the legs of the slings. The intermediate link can then be placed over the hook to provide an in-line load on the hook. This approach must also be used when using slings with three or more legs.

2/3 2/3

60O 60O

45O 45O 45O 45O

ZONE CZONE D

ZONE C

ZONE A ZONE AZO

NE

B

ZON

E B


Sling and Hoist HooksSLING & HOIST HOOKS

WARNINGS & APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

Important Safety Information – Read & Follow

• A visual periodic inspection for cracks, nicks, wear, gouges and deformation as part of a comprehensive documented inspection program, should be conducted by trained personnel in compliance with the schedule in ANSI 830.10.

• For hooks used in frequent load cycles or pulsating loads, the hook and threads should be periodically inspected by Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant. (Note: Some disassembly may be required.)

• Never use a hook whose throat opening has been increased, or whose tip has been bent more than 10 degrees out of plane from the hook body, or is in any other way distorted or bent. Note: A latch will not work properly on a hook with a bent or worn tip.

• Never use a hook that is worn beyond the limits shown in Figure 1.

• Remove from service any hook with a crack, nick, or gouge. Hooks with a nick or gouge shall be repaired by grinding lengthwise, following the contour of the hook,

QUIC-CHECK® Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features: Deformation Indicators - Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e., tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage.

Angle Indicators - Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs.

provided that the reduced dimension is within the limits shown in Figure 1. Contact Crosby Engineering to evaluate any crack.

• Remove from service any hook which has threads corroded more than 20% of the nut engagement length.

• Never repair, alter, rework, or reshape a hook by welding, heating, burning, or bending.

• Never side load, back load, or tip load a hook.(Side loading, back loading and tip loading are conditions that damage and reduce the capacity of the hook). (See Figure 2.)

• Eye hooks, shank hooks and swivel hooks are designed to be used with wire rope or chain. Efficiency of assem-bly may be reduced when used with synthetic material.

• Do not swivel the S-322 or S-3319 swivel hooks while supporting a load. These hooks are distinguishable by hex nuts and flat washers.

• The S-3322 swivel hook is designed to rotate under load. The S-3322 is distinguishable from the S-322 by use of a round nut designed to shield bearing.

• The frequency of bearing lubrication on the S-3322 depends upon frequency and period of product use as well as environmental conditions, which are contingent upon the user's good judgment.

• The use of a latch may be mandatory by regulations or safety code e.g., OSHA, MSHA, ASME 830, Insurance, etc .. (Note: When using latches, see instructions in “Understanding: The Crosby Group Warnings” for further information.)

• Always make sure the hook supports the load. (See Figure 3). The latch must never support the load (See Figure 4).

• When placing two (2) sling legs in hook, make sure the angle from the vertical to the outermost leg is not great-er than 45 degrees, and the included angle between the legs does not exceed 90 degrees* (See Figure 5).

• Reference Crosby's Hoist Hook Warning and Appli-cation information for basic machining and minimum thread size.

• See ASME 830.10 “Hooks” for additional information.


Hoist Hooks

Proof Load is 2 Times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks designed with 5/1 design factor. All alloy hooks 1-22t designed with a 4.5/1 design factor. All alloy hooks 30t and larger designed with a 4/1 design factor. All bronze hooks designed with a 4/1 design factor. † New 319 style hook. ‡See column “Y” for actual shank length on next page


HOOK ID CODE

SHANK HOOK STOCK NO.SHANK‡LENGTH

TYPE

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

REP. LATCH KITS STOCK NO.

CARBON ALLOY BRONZE

CARBON S-319C

S-319CN

ALLOY S-319A

S-319ANBRONZE S-319BN S-4320 PL SS-4055

3/4 1 .5 †D 1028505 1028701 1028900 Std. .50 1096325 – –1 1-1/2 .6 †F 1028514 1028710 1028909 Std. .75 1096374 – –

1-1/2 2 1.0 †G 1028523 1028723 1028918 Std. 1.00 1096421 – –2 3 1.4 †H 1028532 1028732 1028927 Std. 1.82 1096468 – –3 5 2.0 †I 1028541 1028741 1028936 Std. 3.69 1096515 1092000 –5 7 3.5 †J 1028550 1028750 1028945 Std. 7.25 1096562 1092001 –

7-1/2 11 5.0 †K 1028563 1028765 1028954 Std. 13.49 1096609 1092002 –10 15 6.5 †L 1028590 1028792 1028981 Std. 21.90 1096657 1092003 –15 22 10.0 †N 1028599 1028801 1028990 Std. 38.40 1096704 1092004 –20 30 – O 1024386 1024803 – Std. 72.00 – 1093716 109016120 30 – O 1024402 1024821 – Long 85.50 – 1093716 109016125 37 – P 1024420 1024849 – Std. 134.00 – 1093717 109018925 37 – P 1024448 1024867 – Long 172.00 – 1093717 109018930 45 – S 1024466 1024885 – Std. 182.00 – 1093718 109018930 45 – S 1024484 1024901 – Long 214.00 – 1093718 109018940 60 – T 1024509 1024929 – Std. 268.00 – 1093719 109020540 60 – T 1024545 1024965 – Long 312.00 – 1093719 109020550 75 – U 1024563 1024983 – Std. 390.00 – 1093720 –50 75 – U 1024581 1025009 – Long 426.00 – 1093720 –– 100 – W – 1025027 – Std. 610.00 – 1093721 –– 100 – W – 1025045 – Long 675.00 – 1093721 –– 150 – X – 1025063 – Std. 735.00 – 1093721 –– 200 – Y – 1025081 – Std. 1020.00 – 1093723 –– 300 – Z – 1025090 – Std. 1390.00 – 1093724 –

SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION!

• The most complete line of shank hoist hooks. Available 3/4 to 300 tons.

• Available in carbon steel, alloy steel, and bronze.• Quenched and Tempered.• Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quench

and tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk.

• Every Crosby Shank Hook has a pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added.

• Load Rating code stamped on each hook (Refer to Hook Identification Code columns below).

SHANK HOOKS

S-319 S-319N


Hoist Hooks

Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features. • Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and

the other on the hook up, which allow for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload.

• To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage.

• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs.

HOOK ID

CODE

DIMENSIONS (IN)

D F G H J K L M O P R T X Y Z AA**D 2.88 1.25 .73 .81 .93 .63 5.14 .63 .93† 1.96 2.35 .97 .59 2.06 .69 1.50F 3.16 1.38 .84 .94 .97 .71 5.68 .71 .97† 2.22 2.59 .97 .66 2.25 .78 2.00G 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 .88 6.35 .88 1.06† 2.44 2.76 1.03 .72 2.59 .88 2.00H 4.00 1.62 1.14 1.31 1.19 .94 7.14 .94 1.16† 2.78 3.16 1.16 .88 2.84 1.00 2.00I 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 8.63 1.13 1.36† 3.47 3.85 1.53 1.16 3.44 1.25 2.50J 6.28 2.50 1.82 2.06 1.78 1.66 10.43 1.44 1.61† 4.59 4.77 1.96 1.41 3.84 1.56 3.00K 7.54 3.00 2.26 2.63 2.41 1.88 12.52 1.63 2.08† 5.25 5.88 2.47 1.81 4.38 1.94 4.00L 8.34 3.25 2.60 2.94 2.62 2.19 16.10 1.94 2.27† 5.96 6.37 2.62 2.00 7.00 2.19 4.00N 10.34 4.25 3.01 3.50 3.41 2.69 18.15 2.38 3.02† 6.88 8.14 2.83 2.56 7.00 2.63 5.00O 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.62 4.00 3.00 23.09 3.00 3.25 8.78 9.44 3.44 3.12 10.00 3.12 6.50O 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.62 4.00 3.00 31.09 3.00 3.25 8.78 9.44 3.44 3.12 18.00 3.12 6.50P 14.06 5.38 4.56 5.00 4.25 3.62 32.12 3.00 3.00 11.31 12.50 3.88 4.00 15.00 4.00 7.00P 14.06 5.38 4.56 5.00 4.25 3.62 41.12 3.00 3.00 11.31 12.50 3.88 4.00 24.00 4.00 7.00S 15.44 6.00 5.06 5.50 4.75 3.72 34.12 3.25 3.38 12.56 14.00 4.75 4.19 15.00 4.19 8.00S 15.44 6.00 5.06 5.50 4.75 3.72 43.12 3.25 3.38 12.56 14.00 4.75 4.19 24.00 4.19 8.00T 18.50 7.00 6.00 6.50 5.75 4.44 36.06 3.91 4.12 14.75 15.56 5.69 4.50 14.50 4.50 10.00T 18.50 7.00 6.00 6.50 5.75 4.44 47.56 3.91 4.12 14.75 15.56 5.69 4.50 26.00 4.50 10.00U 20.62 7.75 6.69 7.25 6.50 5.25 41.16 4.25 4.88 16.53 19.38 6.00 5.00 15.00 5.00 11.50U 20.62 7.75 6.69 7.25 6.50 5.25 49.16 4.25 4.88 16.53 19.38 6.00 5.00 23.00 5.00 11.50W 23.00 6.81 8.59 9.88 5.88 5.50 42.12 5.50 4.50 17.25 18.41 7.00 7.00 15.00 7.00 12.00W 23.00 6.81 8.59 9.88 5.88 5.50 48.12 5.50 4.50 17.25 18.41 7.00 7.00 21.00 7.00 12.00X 24.38 6.75 9.12 10.94 6.00 6.00 45.75 6.00 4.50 18.00 18.38 7.00 7.25 18.00 7.25 13.00Y 26.69 7.50 9.75 11.81 6.60 7.00 50.50 7.00 5.00 19.75 20.50 8.00 8.00 20.00 8.00 13.00Z 30.12 9.50 10.62 12.94 8.00 7.25 54.69 8.00 6.25 22.69 23.50 8.25 9.50 20.00 9.50 15.00

†3/4TC -22TA Dimensions shown are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits.

S-319 Continued


Sling and Hoist Hooks

*Eye Hooks (3/4TC - 22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks – average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 1 ton through 22 ton – average load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.†New 320N style hook.

WLL* (TONS)

HOOK ID CODE

EYE HOOK STOCK NO.

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

REPLACEMENT LATCH KITS

CARBON ALLOY

CARBON S-320C

S.C.

CARBON L-320C

L-320CN S.C.

CARBONG-320CGALV.

ALLOYS320AS.C.

ALLOY L-320A

L-320AN S.C.

S-4320 STOCK

N0. PL STOCK NO.SS-4055

STOCK NO.3/4 1 †D 1022200 1022205 1022208 1022375 1022380 .61 1096325 – –

1 1-1/2 †F 1022211 1022216 1022219 1022386 1022391 .89 1096374 – –

1-1/2 2 †G 1022222 1022227 1022230 1022397 1022402 1.44 1096421 – –

2 3 †H 1022233 1022238 1022241 1022406 1022413 2.07 1096468 – –

3 5 †I 1022244 1022246 1022249 1022419 1022424 4.30 1096515 1092000 –

5 7 †J 1022255 1022260 1022262 1022430 1022435 8.30 1096562 1092001 –

7-1/2 11 †K 1022264 1022271 1022274 1022441 1022446 15.00 1096609 1092002 –

10 15 †L 1022277 1022282 1022285 1022452 1022457 20.77 1096657 1092003 –

15 22 †N 1022288 1022293 1022296 1022465 1022468 39.50 1096704 1092004 –

20 30 O 1022289 10222302 – 1023546 1022477 60.00 – 1093716 1090161

25 37 P 1023305 – – 1023564 – 105.00 – 1093717 1090189

30 45 S 1023323 – – 1023582 – 148.00 – 1093718 1090189

40 60 T 1023341 – – 1023608 – 228.00 – 1093719 1090205

All Crosby 320 Eye Hoist Hooks incorporate the following features:• Designed with 5:1 Design Factor.• Proper design, careful forging and precision controlled quenched and

tempering give maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk.• Pre-drilled cam which can be equipped with a latch. • Eye hooks are load rated.• Available in carbon steel and alloy steel.• Strategically placed markings forged into the product which address

two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features. (See following page)• Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles.• Low profile hook tip.• Integrated latch (S-4320) meets the World class standard for lifting.• Heavy duty stamped latch interlocks with the hook tip.• High cycle, long life spring.• When secured with proper cotter pin through the hole in the tip of the hook, meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550(g) for personnel hoisting.

EYE HOOKS

S-320 L-320N

®



Sling and Hoist Hooks


Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK® features.

• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook up, which allow for a QUIC-CHECK® measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload.

• To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the

measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage.

• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two sling legs.

HOOK ID*

DIMENSIONS (IN)

C D F G J K M N O† O2†† Q T† T2†† AAD 3.34 2.83 1.25 .73 .90 .63 .63 .36 .89 – .75 .87 – 1.50

F 3.81 3.11 1.38 .84 .93 .71 .71 .42 .91 – .91 .98 – 2.00

G 4.14 3.53 1.50 1.00 1.00 .88 .88 .55 1.00 – 1.13 1.03 – 2.00

H 4.69 3.97 1.63 1.13 1.13 .94 .94 .58 1.09 – 1.25 1.16 – 2.00

I 5.77 4.81 2.00 1.44 1.47 1.31 1.31 .72 1.36 1.00 1.56 1.53 1.50 2.50

J 7.37 6.27 2.50 1.81 1.75 1.66 1.66 .90 1.61 1.31 2.00 1.96 1.88 3.00

K 9.07 7.45 3.00 2.25 2.29 1.88 1.63 1.11 2.08 1.81 2.44 2.47 2.25 4.00

L 10.08 8.30 3.25 2.59 2.50 2.19 1.94 1.27 2.27 2.00 2.84 2.62 2.31 4.00

N 12.53 10.30 4.25 3.00 3.30 2.69 2.38 1.56 3.02 2.75 3.50 2.83 2.56 5.00

O 14.06 13.62 5.00 3.62 4.00 3.00 3.00 1.75 3.25 – 3.50 3.44 – 6.50

P 18.19 14.06 5.38 4.56 4.25 3.75 3.19 2.00 3.00 – 4.50 3.88 – 7.00

S 20.12 15.44 6.00 5.06 4.75 4.50 3.25 2.18 3.38 – 4.94 4.75 – 8.00

T 23.72 18.50 7.00 6.00 5.75 5.50 3.91 2.53 4.12 – 5.69 5.69 – 10.00

*Eye Hooks (3/4TC - 22TA), Proof load is 2.5 times Working Load Limit. Eye Hooks (20TC - 60TA), Proof Load is 2 times Working Load Limit. All carbon hooks – average straightening loads (ultimate load) is 5 times Working Load Limit. Alloy eye hooks 30 tons through 60 tons – aver-age straightening load (ultimate load) is 4.5 times Working Load Limit.† 3/4C-22TA dimensions shown are for S-4320 Latch Kits. Dimensions for sizes 20 ton carbon and larger are for PL Latch Kits. †† Dimension are for PL-N Latch Kits.

S-320 Continued


Swivel Hooks

WLL (TONS)*

STOC

K NO

S-

322 C

N

STOC

K NO

S3

22 A

N

WEI

GHT

EACH

(LBS

) DIMENSIONS (IN)

REP

LATC

H ST

OCK

NO

CARB

ON

ALLO

Y

A B C D F G H J K L M O† R S AA3/4 1 1048600 1048804 0.75 2.00 0.82 1.25 2.86 1.25 0.73 0.81 0.93 0.63 5.66 0.63 0.89 4.55 0.38 1.50 1096325

1 1-1/2 1048609 1048813 1.25 2.50 1.31 1.50 3.15 1.38 0.84 0.94 0.97 0.71 6.71 0.71 0.91 5.37 0.50 2.00 1096374

1-1/2 2 1048618 1048822 2.25 3.00 1.50 1.75 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 0.88 7.75 0.88 1.00 6.12 0.63 2.00 1096421

2 3 1048627 1048831 2.30 3.00 1.50 1.75 4.00 1.62 1.13 1.31 1.19 0.94 8.25 0.94 1.09 6.50 0.63 2.00 1096468

3 5 1048636 1048837 4.96 3.50 1.64 2.00 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 9.69 1.13 1.36 7.50 0.75 2.50 1096515

5 7 1048645 1048854 10.29 4.56 2.29 2.50 6.28 2.50 1.81 2.06 1.78 1.66 12.47 1.44 1.61 9.63 1.00 3.00 10965627-1/2 11 1048654 1048865 19.40 5.00 2.44 2.75 7.54 3.00 2.25 2.63 2.41 1.88 14.75 1.63 2.08 11.37 1.13 4.00 1096609

10 15 1048663 1048877 23.25 5.62 2.48 3.12 8.34 3.25 2.59 2.94 2.62 2.19 16.40 1.94 2.27 12.25 1.25 4.00 1096657

15 22 1048672 1048886 47.00 7.10 3.76 4.10 10.34 4.25 3.00 3.50 3.41 2.69 21.34 2.38 3.02 16.71 1.50 5.00 1096704

- 30 - 1025688 70.50 7.10 3.76 4.10 13.62 5.00 3.61 4.63 4.00 3.00 23.25 3.00 3.25 18.01 1.50 6.50 1093716

*NOTE: Carbon swivel hooks .75tC-15tC: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 5 to 1 design factor.Alloy swivel hooks 1.5tA-22tA : proof load is 2.5 times the working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor.

Alloy swivel hooks 30tA: proof load is 2 times working load limit. Designed with a 4 to 1 design factor.†Dimensions for hooks 3/4 ton carbon thru 22 ton alloy are for S-4320 latch kits. Dimensions for hooks 30 ton alloy are for PL latch kit.

WARNING: SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION PRIOR TO USE!

• Forged - Quenched and Tempered.• Load rating codes stamped on each hook. 322 Swivel Hooks use the same load rating code as 319 Shank Hooks, (review proper Hook Identification Codes).• Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk.• Hoist hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2) QUIC-CHECK FEATURES:

• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage.

• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two slings legs.

This hook is a positioning device and is not intended to rotate under load. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with A.S.M.E. B30.10-1.2.1(b)(2)(c) 2000. U.S. Patents 5,381,650 & 5,193,480 & 5,103,755 and foreign equivalents.

S-322 CN/S-322 AN

®


Swivel HooksW

LL (T

ONS)

*

S-33

22ST

OCK

NO

L-33

22ST

OCK

NO†

WEI

GHT

EACH

(LBS

) DIMENSIONS (IN)

REP

LATC

HST

OCK

NO

A B C D F G H J K L M O R S AA2 1028605 1028609 2.5 3.00 1.50 1.75 3.59 1.50 1.00 1.16 1.06 0.88 7.64 0.88 1.00 6.01 0.63 2.00 1096421

3 1028614 1028618 3.8 3.50 1.56 2.00 4.00 1.62 1.13 1.31 1.19 0.94 8.60 0.94 1.09 6.72 0.75 2.00 1096468

5 1028623 1028627 7.0 4.00 1.56 2.25 4.84 2.00 1.44 1.63 1.50 1.31 10.32 1.13 1.36 8.00 0.88 2.50 1096515

7 1028632 1028636 14.0 5.00 1.94 2.75 6.27 2.50 1.81 2.06 1.78 1.66 12.84 1.44 1.61 9.90 1.13 3.00 1096562

11 1028641 1028645 22.3 5.62 2.05 3.12 7.54 3.00 2.25 2.63 2.41 1.88 15.24 1.63 2.08 11.74 1.25 4.00 1096609

15 1028650 1028654 36.0 7.12 3.62 4.10 8.33 3.25 2.59 2.94 2.62 2.19 18.64 1.94 2.27 14.41 1.50 4.00 1096657

New anti-friction bearing design allows hook to rotate freely under load. • Capacities ranging from 2 through 15 metric tons. • Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. • Proper design, careful forging, and precision controlled quench and tempering gives maximum strength without excessive weight and bulk. • Low profile hook tip designed to utilize Crosby S-4320 or PL-N latch kit. Simply purchase the latch assemblies. Even years after purchase of the original hook, latch assemblies can be added. • S-3322 hooks incorporate markings forged into the product which address two (2)

QUIC-CHECK FEATURES:• Deformation Indicators – Two strategically placed marks, one just below the shank or eye and the other on the hook tip, which allows for a QUIC-CHECK measurement

to determine if the throat opening has changed, thus indicating abuse or overload. To check, use a measuring device (i.e. tape measure) to measure the distance between the marks. The marks should align to either an inch or half-inch increment on the measuring device. If the measurement does not meet this criteria, the hook should be inspected further for possible damage.

• Angle Indicators – Indicates the maximum included angle which is allowed between two (2) sling legs in the hook. These indicators also provide the opportunity to approximate other included angles between two slings legs.

S-3322 SWIVEL HOOKS WITH BEARING

For other swivel hooks designed to rotate under load, see page 95, 103, 106, 111-115. Use in corrosive environment requires shank and nut inspection in accordance with A.S.M.E. B30.10-1.2.1(b)(2)(c) 2000. U.S. Patents 5,381,650 & 5,193,480 & 5,103,755 and foreign equivalents.

* NOTE: Proof load is 2.5 times the working load limit. Designed with a 4.5 to 1 design factor.† Supplied with latch attached.

WARNING: SEE APPLICATION AND WARNING INFORMATION PRIOR TO USE!


Grab Hooks

* These A-330 hooks are forged with an “8” designating Grade 80, and are suitable for use with Grade 8 chain in overhead lifting applications as long as hook is proof-tested as part of the chain sling assembly or as an individual component per ASME B30.9. We recommend the use of theA-338whichisprooftestedandsuppliedwithprooftestcertificate.

CHAIN SIZE (IN)

STOCK NO. WLL (LBS) WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)H-330

CARBONA-330

ALLOY*H-330

CARBONA-330

ALLOY A B C D E G H K L N P R1/4 1027105 1027249* 2600 3500 .36 1.00 .32 .31 1.81 .34 .88 .72 .47 3.05 1.75 .31 1.64

5/16 1027123 1027267* 3900 4700 .62 1.22 .43 .36 2.12 .44 .97 .91 .59 3.66 2.06 .38 2.02

3/8 1027141 1027285* 5400 7100 1.00 1.42 .48 .49 2.53 .50 1.17 1.00 .72 4.42 2.34 .44 2.41

7/16 1027169 1027301 7200 8750 1.31 1.66 .66 .62 3.09 .56 1.31 1.13 .69 4.94 2.66 .56 2.75

1/2 1027187 1027329* 9200 12000 2.22 1.88 .57 .51 3.56 .66 1.53 1.25 .78 5.72 2.97 .63 3.19

5/8 1027203 1027347 13000 18100 4.41 2.31 .71 .67 4.39 .78 1.78 1.56 1.09 6.83 4.31 .75 4.09

3/4 1027221 1027365 20200 24700 6.50 2.62 .94 .94 5.22 .94 2.13 1.88 1.31 8.13 5.09 .88 4.63

CHAIN SIZE (IN)

STOCK NO. WLL (LBS) WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)H-323

CARBONA-323

ALLOY*H-323

CARBONA-323

ALLOY A B C D E G K L N R1/4 1026204 1026384* 2600 3500 .28 1.09 .53 .31 1.81 .34 .88 .47 3.05 1.75 1.88

5/16 1026222 1026400* 3900 4700 .45 1.31 .62 .38 2.12 .44 .97 .59 3.59 2.06 2.28

3/8 1026240 1026428* 5400 7100 .79 1.56 .75 .44 2.53 .50 1.17 .72 4.28 2.34 2.69

1/2 1026286 1026464* 9200 12000 1.75 1.94 .88 .53 3.56 .66 1.53 .78 5.44 2.97 3.38

5/8 1026302 1026482* 13000 18100 3.25 2.48 1.16 .66 4.41 .79 1.89 1.16 6.82 4.25 4.25

3/4 1026320 1026507 20200 24700 5.94 2.88 1.38 .75 5.22 .94 2.13 1.31 8.06 5.09 5.16

• Forged Steel - Quenched and Tempered.• Design factor is 4:1.• Features quick and easy assembly.• H-330 designed for Crosby Spectrum 4® chain• A-330 designed for Crosby Spectrum 7® chain

• Forged Steel - Quenched and Tempered.• Design factor is 4:1.• Features quick and easy assembly.• H-323 designed for Crosby Spectrum 4® chain• A-323 designed for Crosby Spectrum 7® chain

H-330 CLEVIS GRAB HOOK

H-323 EYE GRAB HOOK


Crosby Shur-Loc Hooks• Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. • Individually Proof Tested at 2-1/2 times the 4:1 Working Load Limit

with certification.• Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the

trigger from potential damage. • Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access.• Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded.• Rated for both Wire Rope and use with Grade 80/100 Chain.• G-414 Heavy Thimble should be used with wire rope slings. • Trigger Repair Kit available (S-4316). Consists of spring, roll pin

and trigger. • S-13326 Swivel Hook utilizes anti-friction bearing design which

allows hook to rotate freely under load. • Fatigue rated• The SHUR-LOC® hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used

for personnel lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926. 1431(g)(1)(i)(A) and 1926.1501 (g)(4)(iv)(B).

S-1326 Swivel Hooks Suitable for infrequent, non-continuous rotation under load.

S-13326 Swivel Hooks Suitable for frequent rotation under load.

* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. ** Deformation indicators.

* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit. ** Deformation indicators.

S-1326 S-13326

®

CHAIN SIZE GRADE 100 ALLOY CHAIN WLL (LBS) 4:1*

WIRE ROPE XXIP IWRC

MECHANICAL SPLICEWLL (LBS) 5:1*

S-1326 STOCK

NO.

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

IN MM A B C D E F H J L AA** – 6 3200 2560 1004304 1.26 1.50 1.32 6.13 .79 2.60 .67 .50 .63 1.13 1.50

1/4 - 5/16 7 - 8 5700 4560 1004313 2.62 1.75 1.59 7.60 1.10 3.50 .87 .63 .81 1.38 2.00

3/8 10 8800 7040 1004322 4.70 2.00 1.73 8.83 1.17 4.39 1.10 .75 .94 1.75 2.50

1/2 13 15000 12000 1004331 8.64 2.50 2.38 11.20 1.67 5.45 1.26 1.00 1.16 2.11 3.00

5/8 16 22600 18000 1004340 17.00 2.75 2.70 12.90 2.05 6.56 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.49 3.50

3/4 18 - 20 35300 28240 1004349 24.00 2.83 2.52 14.10 2.22 7.76 2.01 1.10 2.03 3.52 5.00

7/8 22 42700 34160 1004358 29.00 3.44 3.19 16.40 2.45 8.75 2.26 1.30 2.20 3.83 6.00

CHAIN SIZE GRADE 100 ALLOY CHAIN WLL (LBS) 4:1*

WIRE ROPE XXIP IWRC

MECHANICAL SPLICEWLL (LBS) 5:1*

S-13326 STOCK

NO.

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

IN MM A B C D E F H J L AA** – 6 3200 2560 1004404 1.50 1.50 1.14 6.17 .79 2.60 .67 .50 .63 1.13 1.50

1/4 - 5/16 7 - 8 5700 4560 1004413 3.10 1.75 1.52 7.54 1.10 3.50 .87 .63 .81 1.44 2.00

3/8 10 8800 7040 1004422 5.26 2.00 1.61 8.88 1.16 4.35 1.10 .75 .94 1.83 2.50

1/2 13 15000 12000 1004431 11.22 2.50 2.03 11.11 1.66 5.45 1.26 1.00 1.16 2.19 3.00

5/8 16 22600 18000 1004440 17.32 2.75 2.25 12.90 2.05 6.56 1.50 1.13 1.50 2.61 3.50


Crosby Shur-Loc HooksAll SHUR-LOC hooks have the following features: • Recessed trigger design is flush with the hook body, protecting the trigger

from potential damage. • Easy to operate with enlarged thumb access.

• Forged Alloy Steel - Quenched and Tempered. • Positive Lock Latch is Self-Locking when hook is loaded. • The SHUR-LOC hook, if properly installed and locked, can be used for personnel

lifting applications and meets the intent of OSHA Rule 1926.550 (g) (4) (iv) (B). Eye Style incorporates these added features: • Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 times the WLL with certification. • Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load Limit at 20,000 cycles. • 25% stronger than Grade 80. • Suitable for use with Grade 100 and Grade 80 chain. • Designed with “Engineered Flat” to connect to S-1325 chain coupler.

S-1316 Eye Hook

S-1317 Clevis Hooks* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit.

* Minimum Ultimate Load is 4 time the Working Load Limit.

CHAIN SIZE

WLL (LBS)*S-1316

STOCK NO

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

(IN) (MM) A C D E F H J L AA– 6 3200 1022896 0.85 0.78 3.95 0.79 2.60 .67 .31 0.63 1.14 1.50

1/4 - 5/16 7 - 8 5700 1022914 1.80 1.08 5.31 1.10 3.50 .87 .39 0.81 1.48 2.00

3/8 10 8800 1022923 3.40 1.30 6.57 1.17 4.39 1.10 .51 0.94 1.83 2.50

1/2 13 15000 1022932 6.00 1.65 8.23 1.67 5.45 1.26 .67 1.16 2.22 3.00

5/8 16 22600 1022941 15.1 2.20 10.06 2.04 6.56 1.50 .87 1.50 2.65 3.50

3/4 18 - 20 35300 1022942 19.0 2.60 10.77 2.22 7.76 2.01 .87 2.03 3.52 –

7/8 22 42700 1022943 28.0 2.87 12.49 2.45 8.75 2.27 .98 2.20 3.83 –

1 26 59700 1022944 49.5 3.15 14.60 3.21 9.87 2.46 1.26 2.68 4.09 –

CHAIN SIZEWLL

(LBS)*

S-1317 STOCK

NO

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

(IN) (MM) C D E G J L AA– 6 3200 1028991 .77 3.44 .79 2.60 4.75 .63 1.16 1.50

1/4 7 4300 1029000 1.80 4.48 1.10 3.51 6.25 .81 1.48 2.00

5/16 8 5700 1029009 1.80 4.47 1.10 3.51 6.25 .81 1.48 2.00

3/8 10 8800 1029018 3.66 5.53 1.17 4.39 7.54 .94 2.21 2.50

1/2 13 15000 1029027 6.80 6.81 1.67 5.49 9.52 1.16 2.22 3.00

5/8 16 22600 1029036 11.9 8.22 2.04 6.55 11.61 1.50 2.65 3.50

3/4 18-20 35300 1029071 15.0 9.42 2.22 7.76 13.21 2.03 3.52 –

7/8 22 42700 1029080 28.0 11.14 2.45 8.75 15.45 2.20 3.83 –

1 26 59700 1029089 49.5 12.56 3.21 9.87 18.44 2.68 4.09 –

S-1316 S-1317

®


Hooks

SINGLE PART ROPE SIZE

EIGHT PART ROPE SIZE

SAFE WORKING

LOAD* (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)WEIGHT

EACH (LBS)A C E L

3/8 – 2,500 2-1/16 5/8 5/8 4-9/32 .771/2 1/8 3,300 2-1/4 3/4 25/32 4-31/32 1.195/8† 3/16 5,000 3-1/16 3/4 OR 1 5/16 6-3/8 2.89

3/4† 1/4 8,000 3-3/8 1 OR 1-7/16 1-5/32 7-21/32 5.00

HOOK SIZE (IN)

SAFE WORKING

LOAD (LBS)

INSIDE DIAM. OF EYE (IN)

TROAT OPENING

(IN)

LENGTH OVERALL

(IN)

WEIGHT POUNDS PER 100

7/16 750 3/4 3/4 3-15/16 23.25

9/16 1,000 1-1/8 13/16 4-3/4 48.25

SIZE HOIST (TONS)

WIDTH BETWEEN JAWS (IN)

DIAM. BOLT (IN)

OVERALL LENGTH (IN)

THROAT OPENING

(IN)WEIGHT

EACH (LBS)1/2 9/16 3/8 6-1/8 31/32 1.25

1 11/16 7/16 7-11/16 1-1/8 2.61

Safe Working Load at Tip 2 TON

Safe Working Load at Bottom of Hook 7-1/2 TON

Overall Length 9-11/16"

I.D. of Eye 1-3/8"

Opening at Top of Hook 2-13/16"

Radius at Bottom of Hook 5/8"

Weight Each 6.42 LBS

HOOKS • SNAP • REPLACEMENT • SORTING • BARREL

A-350

SNAP HOOKS Forged Steel, Quenched & Tempered

REPLACEMENT HOOKS Quenched & Tempered

Forged Alloy SteelQuenched & Tempered

Forged Carbon SteelQuenched & Tempered

SORTING HOOKS

BARREL HOOKS

SLIDING CHOKER HOOKS Quenched & Tempered

G-3315

S-3316

A-378

S-377

• FORGED ALLOY STEEL through 3/4".

• Wide throat to take heavy thimbles

* Ultimate Load is 5 times Safe Working Load.

† When ordering, EYE diameter (“C”) should bespecified.

• Pressed steel latches and stain less steel springs, bolts and nuts.

• Safe Working Loads shown are based on Ultimate Load that is 4 times the Safe Working Load.

• Easily attached to any hoist with welded link load chain and roller chain or wire rope with suitable endfitting.

• Spring latch, latch bolt with self locking nut – stainless steel. Nuts cadmium plated brass.

• For chain and electric hoists with swivel jaw-forged.

•Deepstraightthroatpermitsefficienthandlingofflatplatesorlargecylindricalshapes.

• The long tapered point allow easy grab in rings, pear links, eye bolts or lifting holes.

• Ultimate load is 5 times the Safe Working Load.

• Meets the performance requirements of Federal SpecificationRR-C-271F,TypeV,Class6,except for those provisions required of the contractor.

I.D. of Eye 1-9/16"

O.D. of Eye 2-13/16"

Over-all Length 5"

Width of Lip 2-7/8"

Weight Per Pair 3.56 LBS


Golden Gate HooksGOLDEN GATE HOOKS

CLOSED SWIVEL BAILFor use where hoisting line or shackle can be inserted into the bail. Suitable for infrequent, non continuous rotation under load.Hook sizes: 1 through 14

UNIVERSAL TYPEOpen swivel bail for attachment to link chain. Suitable for infrequent, non continuous rotation under load. Hook sizes:3, 4 & 5

SHANK-TYPE HOOK(Standard Length)For use on existing load blocks, with standardshank length. Hook sizes:2 through 14

LINK CHAIN NESTWith ball-bearing swivel; attaches to chain by an alloy pin. Suitable for frequent rotation under load.Hook sizes:4, 5 & 6

SHANK-TYPE HOOK(Long Length) For use on existing load blocks requiring extra shank.Hook sizes:4 through 17

ROLLER CHAIN NESTAttachment with ball-bearing swivel and full-floating connector. Suitable for frequent rotation under load.Hook sizes:4, 5 & 6

The 6 connector styles shown below make it possible for Crosby to furnish a Golden Gate Hook to fit almost any make or model of hoisting equipment including American Engineering Lo-Hed, ARO, Coffing, Electro Lift, Ingersoll-Rand, P & H, Robbins and Myers, Shepard Niles, CM, Shaw-Box, Wright, Yale & Towne.

Style C - with self-closing gate. Style A - with manual-closing gate.

Style E - with self-closing gate. Style G - with manual-closing gate.

Style D - with self-closing gate. Style B - with manual-closing gate.

Style O - with self-closing gate. Style P - with manual-closing gate.

Style K - with self-closing gate. Style I - with manual-closing gate.

Style S - with self-closing gate. Style R - with manual-closing gate.

Letter designations shown beneath each illustration above indicate BOTH connector style and gate type. Each connector is available with either a self-closing or manual-closing gate. (e.g.: A size 4 hook with a closed swivel bail connector and self-closing gate is 4-C; with manual-closing gate, it is 4-A.)


Clevises

TABLE IIDIAMETER OF PIN – Inches

TABLE ISTANDARD CLEVIS DIMENSIONS – Inches

DIAM

ETER

OF

TAP

– Inc

hes

CLEVIS NO. D N

U MAX. W TOLERANCE A P MAX.

MAX WORKING

LOAD KIPS

WGT. EACH LBS.

2 1-7/16 5/8 5/8 1-1/16 5/16 + 1/32 - 0 3-9/16 3/4 3-1/2 12-1/2 2-1/2 1-1/8 7/8 1-1/4 5/16 + 1/32 - 0 4 1-1/2 7-1/2 2-1/2

3 3 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 1/2 + 1/32 - 1/32 5-1/16 1-3/4 15 43-1/2 3-1/2 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-3/4 1/2 + 1/16 - 1/16 6 2 18 6

4 4 1-3/4 1-3/4 2 1/2 + 1/16 - 1/16 5-15/16 2-1/4 21 85 5 2-1/4 2-1/8 2-1/2 5/8 + 3/32 - 0 7 2-1/2 37-1/2 166 6 2-3/4 2-1/2 3 3/4 + 3/32 - 0 8 3 54 267 7 3 3 3-1/2 7/8 + 1/8 - 1/16 9 3-3/4 68-1/2 368 8 4 4 4 1-1/2 + 1/8 -1/16 10-1/8 4-1/4 135 90

1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1¼ 1½ 1¾ 2 2¼ 2½ 2¾ 3 3¼ 3½ 3¾ 4 4¼3/8 2 2 21/2 2 2 25/8 2 2 2 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½3/4 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½ 2½7/8 2½ 2½ 2½ 3½1 3 3 3 3

1-1/8 3 3 3 3 3½1-1/4 3 3 3 3 3½1-3/8 3 3 3½ 3½ 41-1/2 3½ 3½ 4 4 51-5/8 4 4 4 5 5 51-3/4 4 5 5 5 51-7/8 5 5 5 5 5

2 5 5 5 5 5 6 62-1/8 5 5 6 6 6 62-1/4 6 6 6 6 6 7 72-3/8 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 72-1/2 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 72-5/8 7 7 7 7 7 82-3/4 7 7 7 7 8 82-7/8 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

3 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 83-1/8 8 8 8 8 8 8 83-1/4 8 8 8 8 8 8 83-3/8 8 8 8 8 8 8 83-1/2 8 8 8 8 8 83-5/8 8 8 8 8 83-3/4 8 8 8 8 83-7/8 8 8 8

4 8 8

Material: C-1035 and SA-182-F-11 in stockThreads: U.N.C. Class 2B, Right or Left HandFinish: Self-Colored, Galvanized, PlatedOptions: Stainless Steel; Other Alloys; Special ThreadingMaximum working loads have been established with a safety factor of 5:1 using the maximum pin diameter, the resulting net area of the eye at the pin hole, and the expected ultimate tensile strength of C-1035 steel.The maximum tap size (U dimension) shown in Table I is for reference purposes only. It should be used only to determine the largest tap diameter the clevis can accommodate without considering the pin diameter. Use Table II to select the proper combination of tap size and pin diameter for any given size of clevis.Clevis sizes in Table II for any given tap size and pin diameter combination are based upon the net area of the eye at the pin hole being equal to or greater than 125% of the net area at the minor diameter of a round rod without upset ends, threaded Unified National Coarse Series.For any combination of tap size and pin diameter shown, the pin in double shear will develop the strength of the rod if both the rod and pin are made from steel having the same physical properties. The pin must be investigated for bending, however; and if inadequate, a larger diameter pin selected. Pins supplied with clevises by Cleveland City Forge are made from steel having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 58,000 pounds per square inch, unless otherwise specified.If the pin is made from steel with physical properties lower in value than the steel used for the rod, the pin may not develop the strength of the rod in either shear or bending; requiring a larger diameter pin.Some combinations of tap size and pin diameter shown will not develop the maximum working load of the clevis shown in Table I.Selection of the rod and pin, the material from which both are made, as well as the clevis size adequate to meet the required design load is the responsi-bility of the purchaser or user. Load imposed upon the clevis should not exceed the maximum working load values shown in Table I.

U W

N AT

T

DP


Wedge Sockets

WEDGE SOCKETWARNINGS AND APPLICATION

INSTRUCTIONS• Use only if trained.• Loads may slip and fall if the Wedge Socket is not properly installed.• A failing load can seriously injure or kill.• Read and understand these instructions before installing the Wedge Socket.• Do not side load the Wedge Socket.• Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire

Rope in the socket. This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use.

WARNING!

S-421T“THE TERMINATOR™”

NOTE: Existing Crosby S-421 Wedge Sockets can be retrofitted with the New Terminator Wedge.

New QUIC-CHECK™ “Go” and “No-Go” features cast into wedge. The proper size wire rope is determined when the following criteria are met:1. The wire rope shall pass thru the “Go” hole in the wedge.2. The wire rope shall NOT pass thru the “No-Go” hole in the wedge.

Important Safety Information –Read and Follow

Inspection / Maintenance Safety

• Always inspect socket, wedge and pin before using.• Do not use part showing cracks.• Do not use modified or substitute parts.• Repair minor nicks or gouges to socket or pin by lightly grinding until sur-

faces are smooth. Do not reduce original dimension more than 10%. Do not repair by welding.

• Inspect permanent assemblies annually, or more often in severe operating conditions.

Assembly Safety• Use only with standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope of designated size.

For intermediate size rope, use next larger size socket. For example: When using 9/16" diameter wire rope use a 5/8" size Wedge Socket Assembly. Welding of the tail on the standard wire rope is not recom-mended. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 6 rope diameters but not less than 6". (See Figure 1)

• To use with Rotation Resistant wire rope (special wire rope construc-tions with 8 or more outer strands) ensure that the dead end is weld-ed, brazed or seized before inserting the wire rope into the wedge socket to prevent core slippage or loss of rope lay. The tail length of the dead end should be a minimum of 20 rope diameters but not less than 6". (See Figure 1)

• Properly match socket, wedge and clip (See Table I) to wire rope size.• Align live end of rope, with center line of pin. (See Figure 1)• Secure dead end section of rope. (See Figure 1)• Tighten nuts on clip to recommended torque. (Table I)• Do not attach dead end to live end or install wedge backwards.

(See Figure 2)• Use a hammer to seat Wedge and Rope as deep into socket

as possible before applying first load.

Operating Safety• Apply first load to fully seat the Wedge and Wire Rope in the socket.

This load should be of equal or greater weight than loads expected in use.

• Efficiency rating of the Wedge socket termination is based upon the catalog breaking strength of Wire Rope. The efficiency of a properly assembled Wedge Socket is 80%.

• During use, do not strike the dead end section with any other elements of the rigging (Called two-blocking).

TABLE I

Rope Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4

Clip Size 3/8 7/16 1/2 9/16 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4

*Torque Ft./Lbs. 45 65 65 95 95 130 225 225 225 360

*The tightening torque values shown are based upon the threads being clean, dry, and free of lubrication.

WRONGRope

Backward

WRONGWedge

Backward

FIGURE 2

Extended Wedge Socket AssemblyU.S. Patent No. 5,553,360

WRONGTail Clippedto live Line

*Tail Length

Standard 6 to 8 strand wire rope Rotation Resistant Wire Rope

A minimum of 6 rope diame-ters,but not less than 6".

A minimum of 20 rope diame-ters, but not less than 6".

FIGURE 1

RIGHT

*TAIL LENGTH

"No-Go"

"Go"


Wedge Sockets

“THE TERMINATOR™”

• Basket is cast steel.• Individually magnetic particle inspected.• Pin diameter and jaw opening allows wedge and socket to be used in conjunction with open swage and spelter sockets.• Secures the tail or “dead end” of the wire rope to the wedge, thus eliminates loss or “Punch out” of the wedge.• The TERMINATOR™ wedge eliminates the potential breaking off of the tail due to fatigue.• The tail, which is secured by the base of the clip and the wedge, is left undeformed and available for reuse.• Incorporates Crosby's patented QUIC-CHECK™ “Go” and “No-Go” feature cast into the wedge. The proper size rope is determined when the following criteria are met: 1. The wire rope should pass thru the “Go” hole in the wedge. 2. The wire rope should NOT pass thru the “No-Go” hole in the wedge.• Utilizes standard Crosby Red-U-Bolt wire rope clip.• Generates a minimum efficiency of 80% based on the catalog breaking strength of the wire rope.• Standard S-421 wedge socket can be retrofitted with the new style TERMINATOR™ wedge.• Available with Bolt, Nut and Cotter Pin.

WIRE ROPE DIA. ‡

(IN)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C +/- .09 D G H J† K† L P R S T U V3/8 5.69 2.72 .81 .81 1.38 3.06 7.80 1.88 .88 1.56 .44 2.13 .44 1.25 1.38

1/2 6.88 3.47 1.00 1.00 1.62 3.76 8.91 1.26 1.06 1.94 .50 2.56 .53 1.75 1.88

5/8 8.25 4.30 1.25 1.19 2.12 4.47 10.75 1.99 1.22 2.25 .56 3.25 .69 2.00 2.19

3/4 9.88 5.12 1.50 1.38 2.44 5.28 12.36 2.41 1.40 2.63 .66 3.63 .78 2.34 2.56

7/8 11.25 5.85 1.75 1.63 2.69 6.16 14.37 2.48 1.67 3.13 .75 4.31 .88 2.69 2.94

1 12.81 6.32 2.00 2.00 2.94 6.96 16.29 3.04 2.00 3.75 .88 4.70 1.03 2.88 3.28

1-1/8 14.38 6.92 2.25 2.25 3.31 7.62 18.34 2.56 2.25 4.25 1.00 5.44 1.10 3.25 3.56

1-1/4 16.34 8.73 2.62 2.50 3.56 9.39 20.48 2.94 2.34 4.50 1.06 6.13 1.19 4.62 4.94

WIRE ROPE SIZE (IN)

S-421T STOCK NO COMPLETE ASSEMBLY*

S-421T WEIGHT

EACH (LBS)

S-421TW STOCK NO.

WEDGE ONLY

WEDGE ONLY WEIGHT

(LBS)3/8 1035000 3.18 1035555 .50

1/2 1035009 6.15 1035564 1.05

5/8 1035018 9.70 1035573 1.79

3/4 1035027 14.50 1035582 2.60

7/8 1035036 21.50 1035591 4.00

1 1035045 30.75 1035600 5.37

1-1/8 1035054 45.30 1035609 730

1-1/4 1035063 64.90 1035618 10.60

*Terminator Assembly includes Socket, Wedge, Pin and Wire Rope Clip.

U.S. Patent No. 5,553,360 and foreign equivalents

†Nominal ‡For intermediate wire rope sizes use next larger size socket.


S-421T

S-421T WEDGE SOCKETS


Hook & Eye Turnbuckles

THREAD DIAMETER & TAKE UP

(IN)STOCK

NO. GALV.

WORKING LOAD LIMIT* (LBS)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A DE

CLOSED FJ

OPENK

CLOSEDM

OPENN

CLOSED R SX

CLOSED BB†1/4 x 4 1030636 400 .31 .25 .44 1.67 1.27 11.66 7.66 12.29 8.29 .81 .34 1.76 4.07

†5/16 x 4-1/2 1030654 700 .50 .31 .50 2.00 1.50 13.50 9.00 14.28 9.78 .95 .44 2.20 4.58

†3/8 x 6 1030672 1000 .79 .38 .56 2.28 1.76 17.09 11.09 18.04 12.04 1.13 .53 2.48 6.10

1/2 x 6 1030690 1500 1.80 .50 .65 3.53 2.28 19.57 13.57 20.79 14.79 1.41 .71 3.56 6.03

1/2 x 12 1030734 1500 2.70 .50 .65 3.51 2.28 31.86 19.86 33.08 21.08 1.41 .71 3.54 12.36

5/8 x 6 1030752 2250 2.98 .63 .90 4.24 2.81 21.11 15.11 22.61 16.61 1.80 .88 4.35 6.03

5/8 x 12 1030798 2250 4.35 .63 .90 4.23 2.81 33.45 21.45 34.95 22.95 1.80 .88 4.34 12.39

3/4 x 6 1030814 3000 4.21 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 22.61 16.61 24.45 18.45 2.09 1.00 5.12 6.13

3/4 x 12 1030850 3000 6.52 .75 .98 5.04 3.33 35.01 23.01 36.85 24.85 2.09 1.00 5.09 12.59

3/4 x 18 1030878 3000 8.24 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 47.01 29.01 48.85 30.85 2.09 1.00 5.12 18.53

7/8 x 12 1030896 4000 9.34 .88 1.13 5.82 3.78 36.11 24.11 38.23 26.23 2.38 1.25 5.79 12.16

1 x 12 1030958 5000 13.9 1.00 1.25 6.56 4.25 37.65 25.65 40.06 28.06 3.00 1.43 6.50 12.18

• Hot Dip galvanized steel.• End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing.• Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment

in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye.

• Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in a stronger hook with better fatigue properties.

• TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.• Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties.

Body has UNC threads.• Lock Nuts available for all sizes.• Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26.

Meets the performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-79 lb.,

Type 1, Form 1 – CLASS 6, and ASTM F-1145, except for those provisions

required of the contractor.

M OPENN CLOSED

E CLOSED

J OPENK CLOSED

X CLOSED

BB

D

F

RA

S

HG-225HOOK & EYE

*Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.† Mechanical Galvanized

®



Hook & Hook Turnbuckles


(IN)STOCK

NO.


WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A DE

CLOSED FJ

OPENK

CLOSEDM

OPENN

CLOSED BB†1/4 x 4 1030011 400 .33 .25 .44 1.67 1.27 9.79 7.38 12.20 8.20 4.07

†5/16 x 4-1/2 1030039 700 .52 .31 .50 2.00 1.50 11.58 8.58 14.08 9.58 4.58

†3/8 x 6 1030057 1000 .83 .38 .56 2.28 1.77 15.23 10.62 17.84 11.84 6.10

1/2 x 6 1030075 1500 1.88 .50 .65 3.53 2.28 17.98 13.20 20.76 14.76 6.03

1/2 x 12 1030119 1500 2.77 .50 .65 3.51 2.28 30.27 19.49 33.05 21.05 12.36

5/8 x 6 1030137 2250 3.21 .63 .90 4.24 2.81 19.50 14.50 22.50 16.50 6.03

5/8 x 12 1030173 2250 4.58 .63 .90 4.23 2.81 31.84 20.84 34.84 22.84 12.39

3/4 x 6 1030191 3000 4.20 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 21.19 15.98 24.40 18.40 6.13

3/4 x 12 1030235 3000 6.92 .75 .98 5.04 3.33 33.59 22.38 36.80 24.80 12.59

3/4 x 18 1030253 3000 8.65 .75 .98 5.07 3.33 45.59 28.38 48.80 30.80 18.53

7/8 x 12 1030271 4000 9.85 .88 1.13 5.82 3.78 34.89 23.52 38.26 26.26 12.16

1 x 12 1030333 5000 14.8 1.00 1.25 6.56 4.25 36.59 25.06 40.12 28.12 12.18

• Hot Dip galvanized steel.• End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing.• Turnbuckle hooks are forged with a greater cross sectional area that results in a

stronger hook with better fatigue properties.• TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.• Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. • Body has UNC threads.• Lock Nuts available for all sizes.• Fatigue Rated.• Meet or exceed all requirements of ASME B30.26.




M OPENN CLOSED

E CLOSED

J OPENK CLOSED

BB

D

F

AHG-223

HOOK & HOOK

®


Jaw & Eye Turnbuckles


(IN)

STOCK NO.

GALV.


WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A BE

CLOSED GJ

OPENK

CLOSEDM

OPENN

CLOSED R SX

CLOSED BB†1/4 x 4 1031877 500 .33 .25 .45 1.66 .64 11.57 7.57 12.28 8.28 .81 .34 1.76 4.07

†5/16 x 4-1/2 1031895 800 .52 .31 .50 2.02 .87 13.50 9.00 14.30 9.80 .95 .44 2.20 4.58†3/8 x 6 1031911 1200 .80 .38 .53 2.11 .85 16.91 10.91 17.87 11.87 1.13 .53 2.48 6.101/2 x 6 1031939 2200 1.77 .50 .64 3.22 1.07 19.30 13.30 20.48 14.48 1.41 .71 3.56 6.031/2 x 9 1031957 2200 2.25 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 25.59 16.59 26.77 17.77 1.41 .71 3.54 9.361/2 x 12 1031975 2200 2.67 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 31.59 19.59 32.77 20.77 1.41 .71 3.54 12.365/8 x 6 1031993 3500 2.98 .63 .79 3.90 1.32 20.73 14.73 22.27 16.27 1.80 .88 4.35 6.035/8 x 9 1032019 3500 3.72 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 27.07 18.07 28.61 19.61 1.80 .88 4.34 9.395/8 x 12 1032037 3500 4.35 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 33.07 21.07 34.61 22.61 1.80 .88 4.34 12.393/4 x 6 1032055 5200 4.51 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 22.17 16.17 24.09 18.09 2.09 1.00 5.12 6.133/4 x 9 1032073 5200 5.56 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 28.57 19.57 30.49 21.49 2.09 1.00 5.09 9.593/4 x 12 1032091 5200 6.42 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 34.57 22.57 36.49 24.49 2.09 1.00 5.09 12.593/4 x 18 1032117 5200 8.14 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 46.57 28.57 48.49 30.49 2.09 1.00 5.12 18.537/8 x 12 1032135 7200 9.10 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 35.68 23.68 37.91 25.91 2.38 1.25 5.79 12.167/8 x 18 1032153 7200 11.6 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 48.15 30.15 50.38 32.38 2.38 1.25 5.79 18.63

1 x 6 1032171 10000 10.0 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 25.03 19.03 27.59 21.59 3.00 1.43 6.50 6.181 x 12 1032199 10000 13.4 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 37.03 25.03 39.59 27.59 3.00 1.43 6.50 12.181 x 18 1032215 10000 16.7 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 49.03 31.03 51.59 33.59 3.00 1.43 6.50 18.181 x 24 1032233 10000 20.6 1.00 1.34 6.06 2.05 61.63 37.63 64.19 40.19 3.00 1.43 6.47 24.84

1-1/4 x 12 1032251 15200 20.9 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 40.76 28.76 43.98 31.98 3.59 1.82 8.49 12.061-1/4 x 18 1032279 15200 24.8 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 52.76 34.76 55.98 37.98 3.59 1.82 8.49 18.061-1/4 x 24 1032297 15200 28.8 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 65.32 41.32 68.54 44.54 3.59 1.82 8.49 24.621-1/2 x 12 1032313 21400 30.6 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 42.50 30.50 46.21 34.21 4.09 2.12 9.46 12.321-1/2 x 18 1032331 21400 36.0 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 54.50 36.50 58.21 40.21 4.09 2.12 9.46 18.321-1/2 x 24 1032359 21400 41.5 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 67.12 43.12 70.83 46.83 4.09 2.12 9.46 24.941-3/4 x 18 1032395 28000 52.1 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 55.37 37.37 59.77 41.77 4.65 2.38 9.97 18.371-3/4 x 24 1032411 28000 59.7 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 67.37 43.37 71.77 47.77 4.65 2.38 9.97 24.37

2 x 24 1032439 37000 89.9 2.00 2.62 11.80 3.74 72.66 48.66 77.95 53.95 5.81 2.69 13.03 24.482-1/2 x 24 1032457 60000 158 2.50 3.06 13.26 4.44 76.08 52.08 82.68 58.68 6.49 3.12 13.76 24.602-3/4 x 24 1032475 75000 187 2.75 3.69 14.92 4.19 78.05 54.05 85.67 61.67 7.00 3.25 15.09 24.65

• Hot Dip galvanized steel.• End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing.• Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment in system

and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye.

• Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4" through 5/8", and pins and cotters on 3/4" through 2-3/4" sizes.

• TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.• Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties.

Body has UNC threads.• Lock Nuts available for all sizes.




HG-227JAW & EYE

M OPENN CLOSED

E CLOSED

J OPENK CLOSED

X CLOSEDBB

G

B

RA

S

®

*Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. † Mechanical Galvanized


Eye & Eye Turnbuckles


(IN)STOCK NO.

GALV.

WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

(LBS)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

AJ

OPENK

CLOSEDM

OPENN

CLOSED R SX

CLOSED BB†1/4 x 4 1031252 500 .29 .25 11.94 7.94 12.38 8.38 .81 .34 1.76 4.07

†5/16 x 4-1/2 1031270 800 .48 .31 13.92 9.42 14.48 9.98 .95 .44 2.20 4.58†3/8 x 6 1031298 1200 .75 .38 17.56 11.56 18.24 12.24 1.13 .53 2.48 6.101/2 x 6 1031314 2200 1.72 .50 19.94 13.94 20.82 14.82 1.41 .71 3.56 6.03

1/2 x 12 1031350 2200 2.63 .50 32.23 20.23 33.11 21.11 1.41 .71 3.54 12.365/8 x 6 1031378 3500 2.75 .63 21.72 15.72 22.72 16.72 1.80 .88 4.35 6.03

5/8 x 12 1031412 3500 4.12 .63 34.06 22.06 35.06 23.06 1.80 .88 4.34 12.393/4 x 6 1031430 5200 4.22 .75 23.24 17.24 24.50 18.50 2.09 1.00 5.12 6.13

3/4 x 12 1031476 5200 6.12 .75 35.64 23.64 36.90 24.90 2.09 1.00 5.09 12.593/4 x 18 1031494 5200 7.83 .75 47.64 29.64 48.90 30.90 2.09 1.00 5.12 18.537/8 x 12 1031519 7200 8.83 .88 36.70 24.70 38.20 26.20 2.38 1.25 5.79 12.167/8 x 18 1031537 7200 11.5 .88 49.17 31.17 50.67 32.67 2.38 1.25 5.79 18.63

1 x 6 1031555 10000 9.62 1.00 26.24 20.24 28.00 22.00 3.00 1.43 6.50 6.181 x 12 1031573 10000 13.0 1.00 38.24 26.24 40.00 28.00 3.00 1.43 6.50 12.181 x 18 1031591 10000 16.3 1.00 50.24 32.24 52.00 34.00 3.00 1.43 6.50 18.181 x 24 1031617 10000 20.2 1.00 62.84 38.84 64.60 40.60 3.00 1.43 6.47 24.84

1-1/4 x 12 1031635 15200 19.9 1.25 42.14 30.14 44.38 32.38 3.59 1.82 8.49 12.061-1/4 x 18 1031653 15200 23.8 1.25 54.14 36.14 56.38 38.38 3.59 1.82 8.49 18.061-1/4 x 24 1031671 15200 27.8 1.25 66.70 42.70 68.94 44.94 3.59 1.82 8.49 24.621-1/2 x 12 1031699 21400 28.7 1.50 44.24 32.24 46.74 34.74 4.09 2.12 9.46 12.321-1/2 x 18 1031715 21400 34.1 1.50 56.24 38.24 58.74 40.74 4.09 2.12 9.46 18.321-1/2 x 24 1031733 21400 39.6 1.50 68.86 44.86 71.36 47.36 4.09 2.12 9.46 24.941-3/4 x 18 1031779 28000 50.7 1.75 57.38 39.38 60.38 42.38 4.65 2.38 9.97 18.371-3/4 x 24 1031797 28000 58.2 1.75 69.38 45.38 72.38 48.38 4.65 2.38 9.97 24.37

2 x 24 1031813 37000 83.5 2.00 75.68 51.68 79.18 55.18 5.81 2.69 13.03 24.482-1/2 x 24 1031831 60000 149 2.50 79.18 55.18 83.18 59.18 6.49 3.12 13.76 24.602-3/4 x 24 1031859 75000 174 2.75 81.34 57.34 85.84 61.84 7.00 3.25 15.09 24.65

• Hot Dip galvanized steel.• End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing.• Turnbuckle eyes are forged elongated, by design, to maximize easy attachment

in system and minimize stress in the eye. For turnbuckle sizes 1/4" through 2-1/2", a shackle one size smaller can be reeved through eye.

• TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.• Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties. • Body has UNC threads.• Lock Nuts available for all sizes.• Fatigue Rated.




HG-226EYE & EYE

M OPENN CLOSED

J OPENK CLOSED

X CLOSEDBB

RA

S

®



Jaw & Jaw Turnbuckles


(IN)STOCK NO.

GALV.

WORKING LOAD LIMIT*

(LBS)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A BE

CLOSED GJ

OPENK

CLOSEDM

OPENN

CLOSED BB†1/4 x 4 1032493 500 .37 .25 .45 1.66 .64 11.19 7.19 12.18 8.18 4.07

†5/16 x 4-1/2 1032518 800 .56 .31 .50 2.02 .87 13.07 8.57 14.12 9.62 4.58†3/8 x 6 1032536 1200 .85 .38 .53 2.11 .85 16.25 10.25 17.50 11.50 6.101/2 x 6 1032554 2200 1.82 .50 .64 3.22 1.07 18.65 12.65 20.14 14.14 6.031/2 x 9 1032572 2200 2.29 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 24.94 15.94 26.43 17.43 9.36

1/2 x 12 1032590 2200 2.71 .50 .64 3.20 1.07 30.94 18.94 32.43 20.43 12.365/8 x 6 1032616 3500 3.21 .63 .79 3.90 1.32 19.74 13.74 21.82 15.82 6.035/8 x 9 1032634 3500 3.95 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 26.08 17.08 28.16 19.16 9.39

5/8 x 12 1032652 3500 4.58 .63 .79 3.89 1.32 32.08 20.08 34.16 22.16 12.393/4 x 6 1032670 5200 4.80 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 21.09 15.09 23.68 17.68 6.133/4 x 9 1032698 5200 5.85 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 27.49 18.49 30.08 21.08 9.59

3/4 x 12 1032714 5200 6.72 .75 .97 4.68 1.52 33.49 21.49 36.08 24.08 12.593/4 x 18 1032732 5200 8.45 .75 .97 4.71 1.52 45.49 27.49 48.08 30.08 18.537/8 x 12 1032750 7200 9.37 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 34.65 22.65 37.62 25.62 12.167/8 x 18 1032778 7200 11.8 .88 1.16 5.50 1.77 47.12 29.12 50.09 32.09 18.63

1 x 6 1032796 10000 10.4 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 23.82 17.82 27.18 21.18 6.181 x 12 1032812 10000 13.8 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 35.82 23.82 39.18 27.18 12.181 x 18 1032830 10000 17.1 1.00 1.34 6.09 2.05 47.82 29.82 51.18 33.18 18.181 x 24 1032858 10000 21.0 1.00 1.34 6.06 2.05 60.42 36.42 63.78 39.78 24.84

1-1/4 x 12 1032876 15200 21.9 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 39.37 27.37 43.58 31.58 12.061-1/4 x 18 1032894 15200 25.9 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 51.37 33.37 55.58 37.58 18.061-1/4 x 24 1032910 15200 29.8 1.25 1.84 8.09 2.82 63.93 39.93 68.14 44.14 24.621-1/2 x 12 1032938 21400 32.6 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 40.76 28.76 45.68 33.68 12.321-1/2 x 18 1032956 21400 38.0 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 52.76 34.76 57.68 39.68 18.321-1/2 x 24 1032974 21400 43.5 1.50 2.06 8.93 2.81 65.38 41.38 70.30 46.30 24.941-3/4 x 18 1033018 28000 53.5 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 53.35 35.35 59.16 41.16 18.371-3/4 x 24 1033036 28000 61.1 1.75 2.60 9.36 3.35 65.35 41.35 71.16 47.16 24.37

2 x 24 1033054 37000 96.3 2.00 2.62 11.80 3.74 69.64 45.64 76.72 52.72 24.482-1/2 x 24 1033072 60000 167 2.50 3.06 13.26 4.44 72.97 48.97 82.18 58.18 24.602-3/4 x 24 1033090 75000 199 2.75 3.69 14.92 4.19 74.75 50.75 85.50 61.50 24.65

• Hot Dip galvanized steel.• End fittings are Quenched and Tempered, bodies heat treated by normalizing.• TURNBUCKLES RECOMMENDED FOR STRAIGHT OR IN-LINE PULL ONLY.• Forged jaw ends are fitted with bolts and nuts for 1/4" through 5/8",

and pins and cotters on 3/4" through 2-3/4" sizes.• Modified UNJ thread on end fittings for improved fatigue properties.

Body has UNC threads.• Lock Nuts available for all sizes.• Fatigue Rated.




HG-228JAW & JAW

M OPENN CLOSED

E CLOSED

J OPENK CLOSED

BB

G

B

A

®

*Proof Load is 2.5 times the Working Load Limit. Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit. † Mechanical Galvanized


Wire Rope Thimbles

ROPE DIAMETER (IN)

DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT POUNDS PER 100

(LBS)OVERALL LENGTH

OVERALL WIDTH

LENGTH INSIDE

WIDTH INSIDE

INSIDE WIDTH OF

SCORE1/8 1.94 1.06 1.31 .69 .16 3.50

3/16 1.94 1.06 1.31 .69 .22 3.501/4 1.94 1.06 1.31 .69 .28 3.50

5/16 2.13 1.25 1.50 .81 .34 4.003/8 2.38 1.47 1.63 .94 .41 6.701/2 2.75 1.75 1.88 1.13 .53 12.505/8 3.50 2.38 2.25 1.38 .66 34.503/4 3.75 2.69 2.50 1.63 .78 47.107/8 5.00 3.19 3.50 1.88 .94 84.601 5.69 3.75 4.25 2.50 1.06 97.50

1-1/8 - 1-1/4 6.25 4.31 4.50 2.75 1.31 175.00

ROPE DIAMETER (IN)

DIMENSIONS (IN)WEIGHT POUNDS PER 100

OVERALL LENGTH

OVERALL WIDTH

LENGTH INSIDE

WIDTH INSIDE

OVERALL THICK-NESS

*1/4 2.19 1.50 1.62 .88 .41 7*5/16 2.50 1.81 1.88 1.06 .50 14*3/8 2.88 2.12 2.12 1.12 .63 237/16 3.25 2.38 2.38 1.25 .72 37

*1/2 - 9/16 3.62 2.75 2.75 1.50 .89 50*5/8 4.25 3.12 3.25 1.75 1.00 82*3/4 5.00 3.81 3.75 2.00 1.22 1577/8 5.50 4.25 4.25 2.25 1.38 1901 6.12 4.75 4.50 2.50 1.56 280

1-1/8 - 1-1/4 7.00 5.88 5.12 2.88 1.88 —1-1/4 -1-3/8 9.08 6.81 6.50 3.50 2.25 8301-3/8 - 1-1/2 9.00 7.12 6.25 3.50 2.62 1250

1-5/8 11.25 8.12 8.00 4.00 3.00 —1-3/4 12.19 8.50 9.00 4.50 3.06 1860

1-7/8 - 2 15.12 10.38 12.00 6.00 3.38 27602-1/4 17.50 11.88 14.00 7.00 3.88 —

ROPE DIAMETER (IN)

DIMENSIONS (IN)WEIGHT PER

100 (LBS)OVERALL LENGTH

OVERALL WIDTH THICKNESS

1/2 2.81 2.13 .88 .61

5/8 4.69 3.38 1.13 2.21

3/4 4.69 3.38 1.38 2.32

7/8 6.06 4.50 1.63 5.45

1 6.06 4.50 1.81 5.25

1-1/8 7.25 5.38 2.06 9.29

1-1/4 - 1-3/8 7.25 5.38 2.31 9.81

SOLIDFits open wire rope socket, boom pendant clevis, as well as wedge socket.

EXTRA HEAVYRugged rope thimbles recommended for heavy duty service. Thimbles G-414 meet Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type III.

Recommended for light duty service. G-411 meets Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type II.

S-412

G-414 and SS-414STAINLESS STEEL

G-411STANDARD

GALVANIZED AND STAINLESS STEEL

GALVANIZED STEEL

*Sizes available in Stainless (304) Steel.

STANDARD WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

EXTRA HEAVY WIRE ROPE THIMBLES

SOLID WIRE ROPE THIMBLES


Thimbles

DIMENSIONS AND DATA

THIMBLE CODE

SLING SIZE DIMENSION (IN) WT. (LBS)SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. 4 PTS. A B C D ER F G

*W-2 5/16 - 3/8 3/32 - 1/8 3/32 - 1/8 1/8 -3/16 2-1/8 4-1/8 7/16 13/16 9/16 3-1/4 5-1/4 1.3

W-3 1/2 - 9/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 2-3/8 4-3/8 5/8 1 5/8 4 6 1.15

W-4 5/8 - 3/4 1/4 1/4 - 5/16 5/16 - 1/8 3-3/8 6-5/8 13/16 1-5/16 5/8 5-3/8 8-1/2 3.11

W-5 7/8 - 1 5/16 3/8 7/16 - 1/2 3-3/4 7-1/8 1-1/8 1-5/8 7/8 6-1/4 9-3/8 5.6

W-6 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 3/8 7/16 9/16 - 5/8 4-3/8 8-3/8 1-3/8 1-7/8 1 7-1/8 11 8.6

W-7 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 7/16 - 1/2 1/2 3/4 5 9-1/2 1-5/8 2-1/8 1-1/4 8-1/8 12-1/2 11.1

W-8 1-5/8 - 1-3/4 9/16 5/8 7/8 6-3/4 11-3/4 1-13/16 2-9/16 1-7/16 9-3/8 14-3/4 17.6

W-9 1-7/8 - 2 5/8 3/4 1 8 14-1/2 2-1/8 3-1/4 1-7/8 13 19-1/4 53

W-10 2-1/8 - 2-1/4 1/4 7/8 - 1 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 8 15-1/2 2-1/2 3-3/4 2 13 20-1/8 66

W-11 2-1/2 - 3 7/8 - 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 - 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 9 18-1/2 3-3/16 4-11/16 2-1/2 15-3/4 24-3/4 126

DIMENSIONS AND DATA

THIMBLE CODE

ROPE SIZE DIMENSION (IN) WT. (LBS)SINGLE 8 PTS. 6 PTS. 4 PTS. A B C D E F G H

6C 3/8 - 7/16 3-3/2 - 1/8 1/8 1/8 - 3/16 2 1 27/32 15/32 2-1/16 3/8 1/2 3/8 .758C 1/2 - 9/16 3/16 3/16 1/4 2-1/4 1-1/8 1 5/8 2-1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1.09C 5/8 – 1/4 5/16 2-3/4 1-3/8 1-5/32 23/32 3 19/32 9/16 19/32 1.210C 3/4 1/4 5/16 3/8 3-1/4 1-5/8 1-5/16 13/16 3-1/2 5/8 5/8 5/8 2.014C 7/8 – – 7/16 4-1/2 2-1/4 1-7/16 15/16 4-5/16 3/4 11/16 3/4 3.316C 1 5/16 3/8 1/2 4-1/2 2-1/4 1-9/16 1-1/16 4-19/32 13/16 3/4 7/8 3.818C 1-1/8 3/8 7/16 9/16 4-7/8 2-7/16 1-13/16 1-1/4 5-1/32 7/8 7/8 1 5.020C 1-1/4 7/16 1/2 5/8 5-1/2 2-3/4 2-1/16 1-7/16 5-3/4 15/16 15/16 1-1/8 6.822C 1-3/8 - 1-1/2 1/2 9/16 3/4 6 3 2-1/4 1-5/8 6-1/4 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-3/16 9.024C 1-5/8 9/16 5/8 – 6-1/2 3-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/4 6-11/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-1/4 12.028C 1-3/4 - 1-7/8 – – 7/8 7 3-1/2 2-15/16 1-15/16 7-3/8 1-1/4 1-3/8 1-1/2 16.632C 2 5/8 3/4 1 7 3-1/2 3-3/16 2-3/16 7-13/16 1-1/2 1-1/2 1-5/8 21.840C 2-1/4 - 2-1/2 3/4 - 7/8 1 1-1/8 - 1-1/4 8-1/2 4-1/4 4-1/8 2-7/8 9-5/8 1-5/8 1-7/8 2 39.048C 2-3/4 - 3 1 1-1/8 – 10 5 4-7/8 3-3/8 11-1/4 1-3/4 2-1/4 2-1/2 67.0

*Made from High Tensile Malleable.

*Made from High Tensile Malleable.DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND ARE APPROXIMATE.

NEWCO SLIP-THRU THIMBLES are designed to allow passage of an identical thimble through its eye. This is a necessity when a regular sling is used as a choker sling. SLIP-THRU THIMBLES also prevent the eye of the sling from mashing together and the top of the eye wearing excessively. The generous inside dimensions allow the thimbles to fit large crane hooks.

Designed to protect the bearing surface of a loop where a large dimension loop is necessary. The ears are tapered so that they can be bent over. Standard-Laid Rope Size 3/8" to 3".

SLIP-THRU THIMBLE

CRESCENT THIMBLE

A

GCD

E

N

F

B

C

D F

G

A

B


Open Spelter Sockets

*Cast alloy steel

Note: Above drawing illustrates one groove used on sockets 1/4" thru 3/4". Sizes 7/8" thru 1-1/2" use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8" and larger use 3 grooves.

NOTICE: All cast steel sockets 1-5/8" and larger are magnetic particle inspected and ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available on special order.

• Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2", cast alloy steel 1-5/8" thru 4".

• Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%, based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on recommended use with 6 x 7, 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope.

GROOVED OPEN SPELTER SOCKETS

ROPE DIAMETER

(IN)

STRUCTURAL STRAND DIAM.

(IN)


DIMENSIONS (IN)G-416GALV.

S-416S.C. A C D F G H J L M N

1/4 – 1039619 1039628 1.10 4.56 .75 .69 .38 .69 1.56 2.25 1.56 1.31 .36

5/16 - 3/8 – 1039637 1039646 1.30 4.84 .81 .81 .50 .81 1.69 2.25 1.75 1.50 .44

7/16 - 1/2 – 1039655 1039664 2.25 5.56 1.00 1.00 .56 .94 1.88 2.50 2.00 1.88 .50

9/16 - 5/8 1/2 1039673 1039682 3.60 6.75 1.25 1.19 .69 1.13 2.25 3.00 2.50 2.25 .56

3/4 9/16 - 5/8 1039691 1039708 5.83 7.94 1.50 1.38 .81 1.25 2.62 3.50 3.00 2.62 .62

7/8 11/16 - 3/4 1039717 1039726 9.65 9.25 1.75 1.63 .94 1.50 3.25 4.00 3.50 3.13 .80

1 13/16 - 7/8 1039735 1039744 15.50 10.56 2.00 2.00 1.13 1.75 3.75 4.50 4.00 3.75 .88

1-1/8 15/16 - 1 1039753 1039762 21.50 11.81 2.25 2.25 1.25 2.00 4.12 5.00 4.62 4.12 1.00

1-1/4 - 1-3/8 1-1/16 - 1-1/8 1039771 1039780 31.00 13.19 2.50 2.50 1.50 2.25 4.75 5.50 5.00 4.75 1.13

1-1/2 1-3/16 - 1-1/4 1039799 1039806 47.25 15.12 3.00 2.75 1.63 2.75 5.25 6.00 6.00 5.38 1.19

*1-5/8 1-5/16 - 1-3/8 1039815 1039824 55.00 16.25 3.00 3.00 1.75 3.00 5.50 6.50 6.50 5.75 1.31

*1-3/4 - 1-7/8 1-7/16 - 1-5/8 1039833 1039842 82.00 18.25 3.50 3.50 2.00 3.13 6.38 7.50 7.00 6.50 1.56

*2 - 2-1/8 1-11/16 - 1-3/4 1039851 1039860 129.00 21.50 4.00 3.75 2.25 3.75 7.38 8.50 9.00 7.00 1.81

*2-1/4 - 2-3/8 1-13/16 - 1-7/8 1039879 1039888 167.00 23.50 4.50 4.25 2.50 4.00 8.25 9.00 10.00 7.75 2.13

*2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1-15/16 - 2-1/8 1041633 1041642 252.00 25.50 5.00 4.75 2.88 4.50 9.25 9.75 10.75 8.50 2.38

*2-3/4 - 2-7/8 2-3/16 - 2-7/16 1041651 1041660 315.00 27.25 5.25 5.00 3.12 4.88 10.50 11.00 11.00 9.00 2.88

*3 - 3-1/8 2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1041679 1041688 380.00 29.00 5.75 5.25 3.38 5.25 11.12 12.00 11.25 9.50 3.00

*3-1/4 - 3-3/8 2-3/4 - 2-7/8 1041697 1041704 434.00 30.88 6.25 5.50 3.62 5.75 11.88 13.00 11.75 10.00 3.12

*3-1/2 - 3-5/8 3 - 3-1/8 1041713 1041722 563.00 33.25 6.75 6.00 3.88 6.50 12.38 14.00 12.50 10.75 3.25

*3-3/4 - 4 – 1041731 1041740 783.00 36.25 7.50 7.00 4.25 7.25 13.62 15.00 13.50 12.50 3.50

G-416/S-416


Closed Spelter Sockets

ROPE DIAMETER

(IN)

STRUCTURAL STRAND DIAM.

(IN)


DIMENSIONS (IN)G-417GALV.

S-417S.C. A B C D F G H J K L

1/4 – 1039897 1039904 .50 4.50 .50 1.50 .88 .38 .69 1.56 2.25 .50 1.75

5/16 - 3/8 – 1039913 1039922 .75 4.94 .62 1.69 .97 .50 .81 1.69 2.25 .69 2.06

7/16 - 1/2 – 1039931 1039940 1.50 5.50 .69 2.00 1.16 .56 .94 2.00 2.50 .88 2.31

9/16 - 5/8 1/2 1039959 1039968 2.50 6.31 .81 2.63 1.41 .69 1.12 2.38 3.00 1.00 2.50

3/4 9/16 - 5/8 1039977 1039986 4.25 7.62 1.06 3.00 1.66 .88 1.25 2.75 3.50 1.25 3.06

7/8 11/16 - 3/4 1039995 1040000 7.25 8.75 1.25 3.63 1.94 1.00 1.50 3.25 4.00 1.50 3.50

1 13/16 - 7/8 1040019 1040028 10.50 9.91 1.41 4.13 2.30 1.13 1.75 3.75 4.50 1.75 4.00

1-1/8 15/16 - 1 1040037 1040046 14.25 11.00 1.50 4.50 2.56 1.25 2.00 4.13 5.00 2.00 4.50

1-1/4 - 1-3/8 1-1/16 - 1-1/8 1040055 1040064 19.75 12.12 1.63 5.00 2.81 1.50 2.25 4.75 5.50 2.25 5.00

1-1/2 1-3/16 - 1-1/4 1040073 1040082 29.20 13.94 1.94 5.38 3.19 1.63 2.75 5.25 6.00 2.50 6.00

1-5/8 1-5/16 - 1-3/8 1040091 1040108 36.00 15.13 2.13 5.75 3.25 1.75 3.00 5.50 6.50 2.75 6.50

1-3/4 - 1-7/8 1-7/16 - 1-5/8 1040117 1040126 57.25 17.25 2.19 6.75 3.75 2.00 3.13 6.38 7.50 3.00 7.56

2 - 2-1/8 1-11/16 - 1-3/4 1040135 1040144 79.00 19.87 2.44 7.63 4.38 2.25 3.75 7.38 8.50 3.25 8.81

2-1/4 - 2-3/8 1-13/16 - 1-7/8 1040153 1040162 105.00 21.50 2.75 8.50 5.00 2.63 4.13 8.25 9.00 3.63 9.75

2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1-15/16 - 2-1/8 1041759 1041768 140.00 23.50 3.12 9.50 5.50 2.88 4.50 9.25 9.75 4.00 10.62

2-3/4 - 2-7/8 2-3/16 - 2-7/16 1041777 1041786 220.00 25.38 3.12 10.75 6.25 3.12 4.88 10.19 11.00 4.88 11.25

3 - 3-1/8 2-1/2 - 2-5/8 1041795 1041802 276.00 27.12 3.37 11.50 6.75 3.38 5.25 11.50 12.00 5.25 11.75

3-1/4 - 3-3/8 2-3/4 - 2-7/8 1041811 1041820 313.00 29.25 4.00 12.25 7.25 3.62 5.75 12.25 13.00 5.75 12.25

3-1/2 - 3-5/8 3 - 3-1/8 1041839 1041848 400.00 31.00 4.00 13.00 7.75 3.88 6.31 13.00 14.00 6.25 13.00

3-3/4 - 4 – 1041857 1041866 542.00 33.25 4.25 14.25 8.50 4.25 7.25 14.25 15.00 7.00 14.00

ClosedGroovedSocketsmeettherequirementsofFederalSpecificationsRR-S-550D,TypeB.

Note: Above drawing illustrates one groove used on sockets 1/4" thru 3/4". Sizes 7/8" thru 1-1/2" use 2 grooves. Sizes 1-5/8" and larger use 3 grooves.

NOTICE: All cast steel sockets 1-5/8" and larger are magnetic particle inspected and ultrasonic inspected. Proof testing available on special order.

• Forged Steel Sockets thru 1-1/2", cast alloy steel 1-5/8" thru 4".

• Spelter socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100%, based on the catalog strength of wire rope. Ratings are based on recommended use with 6 x 7, 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope.

GROOVED CLOSED SPELTER SOCKETS

G-417


Swage Buttons/Socket Compound

• Low carbon steel• Spherodize annealed• Quality controlled• Economical to use

A multi-purpose fitting for many swaging applications. Manufactured from a special analysis high quality, low carbon steel, and later heat treated. They are precision made with constant quality control checks through-out all stages of manufacturing to assure the best in quality and performance.

• Ideal for on-site applications• Improved fatigue life• For use on 416 & 417 Spelter Sockets only• 100% termination efficiency• Temperature operating range from -65°F to 240°F• One Booster pack needed if pouring temperature is 35°F to 48°F• Two Booster packs needed if pouring temperature is 27°F to 35°F

APPROXIMATE U.S. MEASUREMENTS 250cc Kit 1 Cup 500cc Kit 1 Pint 1,000cc Kit 1 QuartNATO NUMBERS 100cc 8030-21-902-1823 250cc 8030-21-902-1824 500cc 8030-21-902-1825 1,000cc 8030-21-902-1826Witnessed and tested by American Bureau of Shipping (ABS)

S-409 SWAGE BUTTONS

WIRELOCK® - RESIN FOR SPELTER SOCKETS

ITEMROPE

DIAMETERDIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E1 SB 1/8 .42 .50 .14 .40 .613 SB 3/16 .56 .70 .20 .52 .845 SB 1/4 .68 1.06 .31 .58 1.417 SB 5/16 .88 1.13 .36 .77 1.338 SB 3/8 .88 1.48 .42 .77 1.699 SB 7/16 1.13 1.63 .48 1.03 1.94

10 SB 1/2 1.31 1.89 .55 1.16 2.1711 SB 9/16 1.44 2.02 .61 1.29 2.4112 SB 5/8 1.56 2.42 .67 1.42 2.8913 SB 3/4 1.68 2.74 .80 1.55 3.2514 SB 7/8 2.00 3.27 .94 1.80 3.8615 SB 1 2.25 3.67 1.06 2.05 4.3616 SB 1-1/8 2.56 4.05 1.19 2.30 4.8117 SB 1-1/4 2.81 4.57 1.33 2.56 5.42

AMOUNT OF WIRELOCK® REQUIREDWIRE ROPE

SIZE (IN)WIRELOCK®

REQUIRED (CC)WIRE ROPE

SIZE (IN)WIRELOCK®

REQUIRED (CC)1/4 9 1-3/4 700

5/16 17 1-7/8 7003/8 17 2 1265

7/16 35 2-1/8 12651/2 35 2-1/4 14109/16 52 2-3/8 14105/8 52 2-1/2 18303/4 86 2-5/8 18307/8 125 2-3/4 22501 160 3 3160

1-1/8 210 3-1/4 37951-1/4 350 3-1/2 49201-3/8 350 3-3/4 59801-1/2 420 4 77301-5/8 495 — —

W416-7 KITS BOOSTER PACK

STOCK NO.KIT SIZE KIT PER CASE STOCK NO. WT. EACH (LBS)100 CC 20 1039602 .62 1039603

250 CC 12 1039604 1.25 1039605

500 CC 12 1039606 2.54 1039607

1000 CC 12 1039608 4.59 1039609

2000 CC 12 1039610 9.00 1039611

NOTE: Length is measured from outside end of terminal.

W416-7

CA

B

BEFORE SWAGE

E

DAFTER SWAGE


Open Swage Socket

• Forged from special bar quality carbon steel, suitable for cold forming.

• Hardness controlled by spheriodize annealing.

• Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope.

NOTE: S-501 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope.

OPEN SWAGE SOCKET

S-501

S-501 OPEN SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS SWAGER / DIE DATA

STOCK NO.

ROPE SIZE (IN)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

BEFORE SWAGE DIMENSIONS MAX AFTER SWAGE

DIM. (IN)

DIE DESCRIP. (SOCKET)

STOCK NO. SIDE LOAD

A B C D E F H L M N

500 TON1000 TON1500 TON

5 X 7

1500 TON3000 TON

6 X 12

1500 TONS6 X 12

3000 TONS 6 X 12

1039021 1/4 .52 4.78 .50 1.38 .69 .27 2.19 .69 4.00 .38 1.47 .46 1/4 1192845 – – –

1039049 5/16 1.12 6.30 .78 1.62 .81 .34 3.25 .80 5.34 .48 1.67 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –

1039067 3/8 1.30 6.30 .78 1.62 .81 .41 3.25 .80 5.34 .48 1.67 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –

1039085 7/16 2.08 7.82 1.01 2.00 1.00 .49 4.31 1.00 6.69 .56 1.96 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –

1039101 1/2 2.08 7.82 1.01 2.00 1.00 .55 4.31 1.00 6.69 .56 1.96 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –

1039129 9/16 4.67 9.54 1.27 2.38 1.19 .61 5.38 1.25 8.13 .68 2.21 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –

1039147 5/8 4.51 9.54 1.27 2.38 1.19 .68 5.38 1.25 8.13 .68 2.21 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –

1039165 3/4 7.97 11.61 1.56 2.75 1.38 .80 6.44 1.50 10.00 .80 2.69 1.42 3/4 1192925 – – –

1039183 7/8 11.52 13.37 1.72 3.13 1.63 .94 7.50 1.75 11.63 .94 3.20 1.55 7/8 1192943 – – –

1039209 1 17.80 15.47 2.00 3.69 2.00 1.07 8.63 2.00 13.38 1.07 3.68 1.80 1 1192961 – – –

1039227 1-1/8 25.25 17.35 2.25 4.12 2.25 1.19 9.63 2.25 15.00 1.19 4.18 2.05 1-1/8 1192989 – – –

1039245 1-1/4 35.56 19.20 2.53 4.59 2.50 1.34 10.69 2.50 16.50 1.27 4.68 2.30 1-1/4 1193005 – – –

1039263 1-3/8 43.75 21.10 2.81 5.25 2.50 1.46 11.88 2.41 18.13 1.46 5.25 2.56 1-3/8 1193023 – – –

1039281 1-1/2 58.50 23.17 3.08 5.50 2.75 1.59 12.81 3.00 19.75 1.70 5.70 2.81 1-1/2 1193041 1191267 1195355 1195192

1039307 1-3/4 88.75 26.70 3.40 6.25 3.50 1.87 15.06 3.50 23.00 2.11 6.67 3.06 1-3/4 1193069 1191276 1195367 1195209

1042767 2 146.25 31.15 3.94 7.80 3.75 2.12 17.06 4.00 26.75 1.81 8.19 3.56 2 1193087 1191294 1195379 1195218

A

L

F

B

ED

H

M

C

N


Closed Swage Sockets

• Forged from special bar quality carbon steel, suitable for cold forming.

• Hardness controlled by spheriodize annealing.

• Swage Socket terminations have an efficiency rating of 100% based on the catalog strength of wire rope.

NOTE: S-502 Swage Sockets are recommended for use with 6 x 19, or 6 x 37, IPS or XIP (EIP), RRL, FC, or IWRC wire rope.

CLOSED SWAGE SOCKET

S-502

S-502 CLOSED SOCKET SPECIFICATIONS

MAX AFTER SWAGE

DIM. (IN)

SWAGER / DIE DATA

STOCK NO.

ROPE SIZE (IN)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

BEFORE SWAGE DIMENSIONS

DIE DESCRIP. (SOCKET)

STOCK NO. SIDE LOAD

A B C D E F H L

500 TON1000 TON1500 TON

5 X 7

1500 TON3000 TON

6 X 12

1500 TONS6 X 12

3000 TONS 6 X 12

1039325 1/4 .33 4.28 .50 1.38 .76 .27 2.19 .50 3.50 .46 1/4 1192845 – – –

1039343 5/16 .75 5.42 .77 1.62 .88 .34 3.25 .68 4.50 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –

1039361 3/8 .72 5.42 .78 1.62 .88 .41 3.25 .68 4.50 .71 5/16 - 3/8 1192863 – – –

1039389 7/16 1.42 6.88 1.01 2.00 1.07 .49 4.31 .87 5.75 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –

1039405 1/2 1.42 6.88 1.01 2.00 1.07 .55 4.31 .87 5.75 .91 7/16 - 1/2 1192881 – – –

1039423 9/16 2.92 8.59 1.27 2.38 1.28 .61 5.38 1.14 7.25 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –

1039441 5/8 2.85 8.59 1.27 2.38 1.28 .68 5.38 1.14 7.25 1.16 9/16 - 5/8 1192907 – – –

1039469 3/4 5.00 10.25 1.56 2.88 1.49 .80 6.44 1.33 8.63 1.42 3/4 1192925 – – –

1039487 7/8 6.80 11.87 1.72 3.12 1.73 .94 7.50 1.53 10.09 1.55 7/8 1192943 – – –

1039502 1 10.40 13.56 2.00 3.62 2.11 1.07 8.63 1.78 11.50 1.80 1 1192961 – – –

1096520 1-1/8 14.82 15.03 2.25 4.00 2.37 1.19 9.75 2.03 12.75 2.05 1-1/8 1192989 – – –

1039548 1-1/4 21.57 16.94 2.53 4.50 2.62 1.34 10.81 2.25 14.38 2.30 1-1/4 1193005 – – –

1039566 1-3/8 28.54 18.59 2.81 5.00 2.62 1.46 11.88 2.29 15.75 2.56 1-3/8 1193023 – – –

1039584 1-1/2 38.06 20.13 3.08 5.38 2.87 1.59 12.81 2.56 17.00 2.81 1-1/2 1193041 1191267 1193355 1195192

1039600 1-3/4 51.00 23.56 3.40 6.25 3.63 1.87 15.06 3.08 20.00 3.06 1-3/4 1193069 1191276 1195367 1195209

1042589 2 89.25 27.13 3.94 7.25 3.88 2.12 17.06 3.31 23.00 3.56 2 1193087 1191294 1195379 1195218

B

E

FA

L

D C

H


Swaged Sockets

In mechanically swaged fittings, high pressure presses and precision dies cause metal of the socket to flow around wires and strands to offer the ultimate in compactness and strength with minimum weight. Material is weldless, drop-forged steel.

Normally, only regular lay rope is used. Swaged assemblies are interchangeable with *poured sockets up through 2" rope diameters. Assembly length is measured from centerline of pins for both open and closed sockets.When purchasing, indicate choice of end fittings by the suf-fixes “OS” or “CS” after the stock number, for open or closed type fittings. Pins and cotters are supplied as standard on open fittings, but assemblies may be specified without pins. Fittings are assembled in the same plane unless specified otherwise when ordered.

* These sockets are not interchangeable with zinc poured sockets.

SWAGED SOCKETS ASSEMBLIES

ROPE DIA.

OPEN SOCKET DIAMETER (IN) CLOSED SOCKET DIAMETER (IN)

C D E F PIN AsLs (AP-PROX.) C D E As

Ls (AP-PROX.)

1/4 11/16 5/16 1-1/2 1-3/8 .688 .438 4-7/16 1-7/16 .750 1/2 .438 3-15/165/16 13/16 13/32 1-3/4 1-5/8 .812 .688 5-15/16 1-11/16 .875 11/16 .688 5-1/83/8 13/16 13/32 1-3/4 1-5/8 .812 .688 5-15/16 1-11/16 .875 11/16 .688 5-1/87/16 1 1/2 2 2 1.00 .875 7-5/8 2 1.063 7/8 .875 6-5/81/2 1 1/2 2 2 1.00 .875 7-5/8 2 1.063 7/8 .875 6-5/89/16 1-1/4 5/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 1.19 1.125 9-3/16 2-1/2 1.250 1-1/8 1.125 8-5/165/8 1-1/4 5/8 2-1/4 2-1/2 1.19 1.125 9-3/16 2-1/2 1.250 1-1/8 1.125 8-5/163/4 1-1/2 3/4 2-3/4 3 1.38 1.375 11-1/4 3 1.438 1-5/16 1.375 9-15/167/8 1-3/4 15/16 3-1/4 3-3/8 1.63 1.50 13-1/8 3-1/2 1.688 1-1/2 1.50 11-5/81 2 1-1/32 3-3/4 4 2.00 1.75 15-1/16 4 2.063 1-3/4 1.75 13-3/16

1-1/8 2-1/4 1-3/16 4-1/4 4-1/2 2.25 2.00 16-15/16 4-1/2 2.313 2 2.00 14-11/161-1/4 2-1/2 1-3/16 4-3/4 5 2.50 2.25 18-5/8 5 2.563 2-1/4 2.25 16-1/21-3/8 2-1/2 1-5/16 5-1/4 5-1/4 2.50 2.50 20-1/2 5-1/4 2.563 2-1/4 2.50 18-1/81-1/2 3 1-7/16 5-3/4 5-3/4 2.75 2.75 22-5/16 5-1/2 2.813 2-1/2 2.75 19-9/161-3/4 3-1/2 1-11/16 6-3/4 7 3.50 3.00 26 6-3/4 3.563 3 3.00 23

2 4 1-13/16 8 8 3.75 3.50 30-1/8 7-3/4 3.813 3-1/4 3.50 26-7/162-1/4* 4-1/4 2-1/8 6-3/4 8-3/4 4.25 4.00 31-1/4 8-3/4 4.312 4 4.00 28-1/22-1/2* 4-1/4 2-1/8 6-3/4 8-3/4 4.25 4.40 33-3/8 8-3/4 4.312 4 4.40 30-1/4

CAPACITY (TONS*)

ROPE DIA.

6X19 & 6X37 IWRC

LPS XIP1/4 .588 .69

5/16 .916 1.053/8 1.3 1.5

7/16 1.778 2.041/2 2.3 2.66

9/16 2.9 3.365/8 3.58 4.123/4 5.12 5.887/8 6.92 7.961 8.98 10.34

1-1/8 11.3 131-1/4 13.88 15.981-3/8 16.7 19.21-1/2 19.78 22.81-3/4 26.6 30.6

2 34.4 39.62-1/4 43 49.42-1/2 52.4 60.4

OS-OS

PinsParallel500-P

Pins atRight Angles

500-R

Pins atRight Angles

502-R

Pins atRight Angles

503-R

PinsParallel502-P

PinsParallel503-P

CS-CS

OS-CS


Wire & Synthetic Rope Fittings and Swivels

Electroline manufactures non-swage end fittings and swivels for wire and synthetic rope, cable and line. End fittings include clevis, eyes, studs, hooks and turnbuckles.

An Electroline wire rope fitting is installed much like a compression fitting in a plumbing application. The wire rope passes through a sleeve. The strands are fanned-out and a plug is inserted. As the plug is driven into the fanned end of the rope, the diameter of the end increases so that the rope can't dislodge itself. The last thing you do is to put a socket over the sleeve and thread it on tight. It's a procedure essentially entailing three steps. Electroline fitting assemblies are testable as well via a seconds-long onsite inspection process. Each fitting is equipped with an inspection hole through which the rope strands are visible, and proper assembly confirmed.

An Electroline fitting is also esthetically pleasing, and therefore appropriate for many applications. More importantly, however, its highly polished, well-finished appearance conveys an impression of strength and security. The fittings are machined to incredible tolerances. They look and perform like the precision instruments they actually are.

Electroline fittings are used in a wide variety of applications. Because they are made of high-quality materials such as stainless steel they are a niche product for outdoor use where rust can be a problem. They can be found in zoos, outdoor parking lots, public ballparks, and in just about any other outdoor venue where wire or synthetic rope is employed.

TYPE C

TYPE A

TYPE B

ROPE DIA. (IN)

IMPROVED PLOW, IWRC EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW IWRCBREAKING STRENGTH

(TONS)

RECOMMENDED CAPACITY TONS

(AT 5:1 SF)

BREAKING STRENGTH

(TONS)

RECOMMENDED CAPACITY TONS

(AT 5:1 SF)1/2 11.2 2.3 13 2.7

9/16 14.1 2.9 16.4 3.4

5/8 17.4 3.6 20.1 4.1

3/4 25 5.1 28.7 5.9

7/8 33.7 6.9 38.8 8

1 43.8 9 50.4 10

1-1/8 55.1 11 63.4 13

1-1/4 67.7 14 77.9 16

1-3/8 81.4 17 93.6 19

BOOM PENDANT ASSEMBLIESSWAGED SOCKET TYPE

Note: 6 x 25 W Regular Lay construction is recommended for all sizes shown.


Eye Bolts

FORGED EYE BOLTWARNINGS AND APPLICATION

INSTRUCTIONS • Use only if trained.• Loads may slip or fall if proper eye bolt assembly & lifting procedures are not used.• A falling load can seriously injure or kill.• Read, understand & follow all eye bolt safety in-

formation & diagrams presented here.

WARNING!

Important Safety Information –Read and Follow

Inspection / Maintenance Safety

• Always inspect eye bolt before use.

• Never use eye bolt that shows signs of wear or damage.

• Never use eye bolt if eye or shank is bent or elongated.

• Always be sure threads on shank and receiving holes are clean.

• Never machine, grind, or cut eye bolt.

Assembly Safety

• Never exceed load limits specified in Table I.

• Never use regular nut eye bolts for angular lifts.

• Always use shoulder nut eye bolts (or machinery eye bolts) for angular lifts.

• For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows:

• Never undercut eye bolt to seat shoulder against the load.

• Always countersink receiving hole or use washers to seat shoulder.

• Always screw eye bolt down completely for proper seating.

• Always tighten nuts securely against the load.

Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt –Installation for Angular Loading

TABLE I (IN-LINE LOAD)

SIZE (IN) WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)1/4 650

5/16 1200

3/8 1550

1/2 2600

5/8 5200

3/4 7200

7/8 10600

1 13300

1-1/4 21000

1-1/2 24000

1-3/4 34000

2 42000

2-1/2 65000

• The threaded shank must protrude through the load sufficiently to allow full engagement of the nut.

• If the eye bolt protrudes so far through the load that the nut cannot be tightened securely against the load, use properly sized washers to take up the excess space BETWEEN THE NUT AND THE LOAD.

• Place washers or spacers between nut and load so that when the nut is tightened securely, the shoulder is secured flush against the load surface.

• Thickness of spacers must exceed this distance between the bottom of the load and the last thread of the eye bolt.

DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD45 degrees 30% of rated working load90 degrees 25% of rated working load

Regular Nut Eye BoltG-291

Shoulder Nut Eye BoltG-277

Machinery Eye Bolt

S-279/M-279

IN-LINE


Eye Bolts

• Always inspect eye bolt before use.• Always stand clear of load.• Always lift load with a steady, even pull – do not jerk.• Always apply load to eye bolt in the plane of the eye, not at an angle.

• Never exceed the capacity of the eyebolt – See Table I.• When using lifting slings of two or more legs, make sure the loads in the

legs are calculated using the angle from the vertical to the leg and prop-erly size the shoulder nut or machinery eye bolt for the angular load.

IMPORTANT – READ & UNDERSTAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE USING EYE BOLTS.

Regular Nut & Shoulder Nut Eye Bolt – Installation for In-Line Loading

Operating Safety

Machinery Eye Bolt – Installation for In-Line & Angular Loading

More than one eye bolt dia. of threads, only (1) nut required.

Tighten hex nut securely against load

Tighten hex nut securely against load

Tap Depth:2.5 x Dia.

Resultant Load

2x Dia.(Min.)

One eye bolt dia. or less

Do not reeve slings from one eye bolt to another. This will alter the load & angle of loading on the eye bolt.

Min. tap depth is basic shank length plus one-half the nominal eye bolt diameter.

After slings have been prop-erly attached to the eye bolts, apply force slowly. Watch the load carefully & be prepared to stop applying force if the load starts buckling.

Buckling may occur if the load is notstiffenoughtoresist the compres-sive forces which result from the angular loading.

One eye bolt dia. of threads or less, use two (2) nuts.

Tighten Hex Nut Securely Against Load.

These eye bolts are primarily intended to be installed into tapped holes.

1. After the loads on the eye bolts have been calculated, select the proper size eye bolt for the job.

For angular lifts, adjust working load as follows:

2. Drill and tap the load to the correct sizes to a minimum depth of one-half the eye bolt size beyond the shank length of the machinery eye bolt.

3. Thread the eye bolt into the load until the shoulder is flush and securely tightened against the load.

4. If the plane of the machinery eye bolt is not aligned with the sling line, estimate the amount of unthreading rotation necessary to align the plane of the eye properly.

5. Remove the machinery eye bolt from the load and add shims (washers) of proper thickness to adjust the angle of the plane of the eye to match the sling line. Use Table II to estimate the required shim thickness for the amount of unthreading rotation required.

DIRECTION OF PULL ADJUSTED WORKING LOAD45 degrees 30% of rated working load90 degrees 25% of rated working load

TABLE II

EYE BOLT SIZE (IN)SHIM THICKNESS REQUIRED EYE BOLT

SIZE TO CHANGE ROTATION 90° (IN)1/4 .01255/16 .01393/8 .01561/2 .01925/8 .02273/4 .02507/8 .02781 .0312

1-1/4 .03571-1/2 .0417

Shim added to change eye alignment 90°

RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT WRONG

WRONG


Eye BoltsREGULAR NUT EYE BOLTS

SHANK DIAMETER & LENGTH (IN)

G-219 STOCK

NO. GALV.

WORKING LOAD LIMIT (LBS)

WEIGHT PER 100

(LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E F G H1/4 x 2 1043230 650 8.20 .25 .50 1.00 .25 1.50 2.00 3.06 .561/4 x 4 1043258 650 11.70 .25 .50 1.00 .25 2.50 4.00 5.06 .56

5/16 x 2-1/4 1043276 1200 13.30 .31 .62 1.25 .31 1.50 2.25 3.56 .695/16 x 4-1/4 1043294 1200 25.00 .31 .62 1.25 .31 2.50 4.25 5.56 .693/8 x 2-1/2 1043310 1550 23.30 .38 .75 1.50 .38 1.50 2.50 4.12 .883/8 x 4-1/2 1043338 1550 29.50 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 4.50 6.12 .88

3/8 x 6 1043356 1550 35.20 .38 .75 1.50 .38 2.50 6.00 7.62 .881/2 x 3-1/4 1043374 2600 50.30 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 1.50 3.25 5.38 1.12

1/2 x 6 1043392 2600 66.10 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 6.00 8.12 1.121/2 x 8 1043418 2600 82.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 8.00 10.12 1.12

1/2 x 10 1043436 2600 88.00 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 10.00 12.12 1.121/2 x 12 1043454 2600 114.20 .50 1.00 2.00 .50 3.00 12.00 14.12 1.125/8 x 4 1043472 5200 103.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 2.00 4.00 6.69 1.445/8 x 6 1043490 5200 118.20 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 6.00 8.69 1.445/8 x 8 1043515 5200 135.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 8.00 10.69 1.445/8 x 10 1043533 5200 153.60 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 3.00 10.00 12.69 1.445/8 x 12 1043551 5200 167.10 .62 1.25 2.50 .62 4.00 12.00 14.69 1.44

3/4 x 4-1/2 1043579 7200 168.60 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 2.00 4.50 7.69 1.693/4 x 6 1043597 7200 184.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 6.00 9.19 1.693/4 x 8 1043613 7200 207.90 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 8.00 11.19 1.69

3/4 x 10 1043631 7200 235.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 3.00 10.00 13.19 1.693/4 x 12 1043659 7200 257.50 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 4.00 12.00 15.19 1.693/4 x 15 1043677 7200 298.00 .75 1.50 3.00 .75 5.00 15.00 18.19 1.697/8 x 5 1043695 10600 270.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 2.50 5.00 8.75 2.007/8 x 8 1043711 10600 308.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 8.00 11.75 2.00

7/8 x 12 1043739 10600 400.00 .88 1.75 3.50 .88 4.00 12.00 15.75 2.001 x 6 1043757 13300 421.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 3.00 6.00 10.31 2.311 x 9 1043775 13300 468.50 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 9.00 13.31 2.31

1 x 12 1043793 13300 540.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 4.00 12.00 16.31 2.311 x 18 1043819 13300 650.00 1.00 2.00 4.00 1.00 7.00 18.00 22.31 2.31

1-1/4 x 8 1043837 21000 750.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 8.00 13.38 2.881-1/4 x 12 1043855 21000 900.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 4.00 12.00 17.38 2.881-1/4 x 20 1043873 21000 1210.00 1.25 2.50 5.00 1.25 6.00 20.00 25.38 2.88

• Recommended for straight line pull.• All Bolts Hot Dip galvanized after threading.• Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized hex nuts.• Forged Steel – Quenched and Tempered.• Crosby products meet or exceed all the requirements of ASME B30.26

including identification, ductility, design factor, proof load and temperature requirements. Importantly, Crosby products meet other critical perfor-mance requirements including fatigue life, impact properties & material traceability, not addressed by ASME B30.26.


G-291

*Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.

F H

E

A

G

B C

D


Eye Bolts


G-277 STOCK NO.

GALV.


WEIGHT PER 100

(LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E F G H J1/4 x 2 1045014 650 6.60 .25 .50 .88 .19 1.50 2.00 2.94 .50 .471/4 x 4 1045032 650 9.10 .25 .50 .88 .19 2.50 4.00 4.94 .50 .47

5/16 x 2-1/4 1045050 1200 12.50 .31 .62 1.12 .25 1.50 2.25 3.50 .69 .565/16 x 4-1/4 1045078 1200 18.80 .31 .62 1.12 .25 2.50 4.25 5.50 .69 .563/8 x 2-1/2 1045096 1550 21.40 .38 .75 1.38 .31 1.50 2.50 3.97 .78 .663/8 x 4-1/2 1045112 1550 25.30 .38 .75 1.38 .31 2.50 4.50 5.97 .78 .661/2 x 3-1/4 1045130 2600 42.60 .50 1.00 1.75 .38 1.50 3.25 5.12 1.00 .91

1/2 x 6 1045158 2600 56.60 .50 1.00 1.75 .38 3.00 6.00 7.88 1.00 .915/8 x 4 1045176 5200 68.60 .62 1.25 2.25 .50 2.00 4.00 6.44 1.31 1.125/8 x 6 1045194 5200 102.40 .62 1.25 2.25 .50 3.00 6.00 8.44 1.31 1.12

3/4 x 4-1/2 1045210 7200 144.50 .75 1.50 2.75 .62 2.00 4.50 7.44 1.56 1.383/4 x 6 1045238 7200 167.50 .75 1.50 2.75 .62 3.00 6.00 8.94 1.56 1.387/8 x 5 1045256 10600 225.00 .88 1.75 3.25 .75 2.50 5.00 8.46 1.84 1.561 x 6 1045292 13300 366.30 1.00 2.00 3.75 .88 3.00 6.00 9.97 2.09 1.811 x 9 1045318 13300 422.50 1.00 2.00 3.75 .88 4.00 9.00 12.97 2.09 1.81

1-1/4 x 8 1045336 21000 650.00 1.25 2.50 4.50 1.00 4.00 8.00 12.72 2.47 2.281-1/4 x 12 1045354 21000 795.00 1.25 2.50 4.50 1.00 4.00 12.00 16.72 2.47 2.281-1/4 x 15 1045372 24000 1425.00 1.50 3.00 5.50 1.25 6.00 15.00 20.75 3.00 2.75


G-275 STOCK NO.

GALV.


WEIGHT PER 100 (LBS.)

DIMENSIONS (IN)

A B C D E F G H J1/4 x 2 1046111 500 4.30 .25 1.50 2.00 2.50 2.94 .50 .88 .19 .47

5/16 x 2-1/4 1046139 800 9.90 .31 1.69 2.25 2.94 3.50 .63 1.13 .25 .563/8 x 2-1/2 1046157 1200 18.88 .38 1.88 2.50 3.28 3.97 .75 1.38 .31 .661/2 x 3-1/4 1046175 2200 37.50 .50 2.44 3.25 4.25 5.12 1.00 1.75 .38 .91

5/8 x 4 1046193 3500 85.50 .63 3.00 4.00 5.31 6.44 1.25 2.25 .50 1.12

SHOULDER NUT EYE BOLTS

SCREW EYE BOLTS


• Forged Steel – Quenched and Tempered• Hot Dip galvanized

• Forged Steel• Hot Dip galvanized• Furnished with standard Hot Dip galvanized, heavy hex nuts

G-277

A

E

F H

GD

J

B C

*Ultimate Load is 5 times Working Load Limit.

G-275

A

BC

DE

G

H J

®



• Forged Steel – Quenched and Tempered.• Recommended for straight line pull• Working Load Limits shown are for In-line pull.• Fatigue rated at 1-1/2 times the Working Load

Limit at 20,000 cycles.• Meets or exceeds all requirements of ASME

B30.26.

S-279

Eye Bolts

SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS

*Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. Maximum Proof Load is 2 times the Working Load Limit.** All bolts threaded UNC

SIZE STOCK

NO.WLL

(LBS)*

WEIGHT PER 100

(LBS)

DIMENSIONS (IN)A**

THREAD B C D E F G H1/4 x 1 9900182 650 5.00 1/4 - 20 1.02 1.13 .75 2.29 .19 .53 .77

5/16 x 1-1/8 9900191 1200 9.00 5/16 - 18 1.15 1.38 .88 2.74 .25 .59 .95

3/8 x 1-1/4 9900208 1550 15.00 3/8 - 16 1.27 1.62 1.00 3.07 .31 .69 1.05

1/2 x 1-1/2 9900217 2600 28.00 1/2 - 13 1.53 1.95 1.19 3.70 .38 .91 1.27

5/8 x 1-3/4 9900226 5200 55.00 5/8 - 11 1.79 2.38 1.38 4.45 .50 1.13 1.53

3/4 x 2 9900235 7200 96.00 3/4 - 10 2.05 2.76 1.50 5.07 .63 1.38 1.71

7/8 x 2-1/4 9900244 10600 154.00 7/8 - 9 2.31 3.25 1.75 5.87 .75 1.56 2.00

1 x 2-1/2 9900253 13300 238.00 1 - 8 2.57 3.76 2.00 6.66 .88 1.81 2.30

1-1/8 x 2-3/4 9900257 15000 320.00 1-1/8 - 7 2.75 4.19 2.25 7.20 .97 2.06 2.35

1-1/4 x 3 9900262 21000 399.00 1-1/4 - 7 3.09 4.50 2.50 7.95 1.00 2.28 2.73

1-1/2 x 3-1/2 9900271 24000 720.00 1-1/2 - 6 3.60 5.50 3.00 9.49 1.25 2.75 3.28

1-3/4 x 3-3/4 9900280 34000 1040.00 1-3/4 - 5 3.75 6.26 3.50 10.48 1.38 3.00 3.60

2 x 4 9900289 42000 1880.00 2 - 4-1/2 4.00 7.26 4.00 12.31 1.81 3.38 4.50

2-1/2 x 5 9900298 65000 3250.00 2-1/2 - 4 5.00 8.76 4.50 14.88 2.12 4.25 5.50

®


Eye BoltsSHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS

METRIC SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTS

UNC-2A SHOULDER TYPE MACHINE EYE BOLTSHANES

PRODUCT NO. STOCK NO.

RATED CAPACITY (LBS)

SHANK DIA. & THREAD UNC-2A SHANK LENGTH EYE I.D. EYE O.D.

WEIGHTA B C DFIT50011 K2021 500 1/4 - 20 1 3/4 1-3/16 0.06FIT50031 K2022 900 5/16 - 18 1-1/8 7/8 1-7/16 0.11FIT50051 K2023 1300 3/8 - 16 1-1/4 1 1-21/32 0.18FIT50071 K2024 1800 7/16 - 14 1-3/8 1-3/32 1-27/32 0.23FIT50091 K2025 2400 1/2 - 13 1-1/2 1-3/16 2-1/16 0.35FIT50111 K2026 3000 9/16 - 12 1-5/8 1-9/32 2-9/32 0.47FIT50131 K2027 4000 5/8 - 11 1-3/4 1-3/8 2-1/2 0.70FIT50151 K2028 5000 3/4 - 10 2 1-1/2 2-13/16 1.10FIT50171 K2029 7000 7/8 - 9 2-1/4 1-11/16 3-1/4 1.70FIT50191 K2030 9000 1 - 8 2-1/2 1-13/16 3-9/16 2.36FIT50211 K2031 12000 1-1/8 - 7 2-3/4 2 4 3.41FIT50231 K2032 15000 1-1/4 - 7 3 2-3/16 4-7/16 4.68FIT50251 K2034 21000 1-1/2 - 6 3-1/2 2-1/2 5-3/16 7.77FIT50270 K2035 28000 1-3/4 - 5 3-3/4 2-7/8 6-1/16 11.35FIT50291 K2036 38000 2 - 4-1/2 4 3-1/4 6-7/8 16.70FIT50293 K2037** 56000 2-1/2 - 4 5 4 8-9/16 29.80

METRIC SIZE

APPROX. EQUIV. IN INCHES

THREAD SIZE SHANK LENGTH I.D. EYE O.D. EYE OVERALL LENGTH APPROX. WEIGHT PER

EACH

RATED CAPACITY

IN KGS.

RATED CAPACITY

IN LBSA B C D EM6 1/4 M6 x 1.0 25.4 19 30.0 60.3 .06 210 462M7 5/16 M7 x 1.0 28.5 22 36.5 71.4 .10 370 814M8 3/8 M8 x 1.25 31.7 25 43.0 82.5 .17 500 1,110

M10 7/16 M10 x 1.5 35.0 27 46.0 90.5 .24 740 1,628M12 1/2 M12 x 1.75 38.0 30 54.0 100.8 .36 1,030 2,266M14 9/16 M14 x 2.0 44.5 35 65.0 120.7 .48 1,600 3,520M16 5/8 M16 x 2.0 44.5 35 65.0 120.7 .69 1,600 3,520M18 3/4 M18 x 2.5 51.0 38 71.5 133.3 1.10 2,140 4,708M20 7/8 M20 x 2.5 57.0 41 81.0 152.4 1.51 2,860 6,292M24 1 M24 x 3.0 63.5 44 90.4 168.3 2.36 3,850 8,470M27 1-1/8 M27 x 3.0 70.0 51 103.0 191.3 3.41 5,200 11,440M30 1-1/4 M30 x 3.5 76.0 55 112.7 208.8 4.68 6,400 14,080M36 1-1/2 M36 x 4.0 89.0 63 131.8 240.5 7.77 8,970 19,734M42 1-5/8 M42 x 4.5 95.0 73 152.4 274.7 11.10 11,960 26,312M45 1-3/4 M45 x 4.5 95.0 73 152.4 274.7 11.35 12,720 27,984M48 1-7/8 M48 x 5.0 101.6 82 174.6 301.6 15.90 16,400 36,080M52 2 M52 x 5.0 101.6 82 174.6 301.6 16.70 17,300 38,060

• Drop Forged Carbon Steel, Self-Colored• ASTM A489• Fully threaded: UNC-2A

UNC-2A METRIC


Crosby's Slide-Loc™

CROSBY’S INNOVATIVE ALTERNATIVE TO STANDARD EYE BOLTS

The new Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc™ provides features not found on standard lifting eye bolts. At the center of the new design is the patent pending locking mech-anism that slides to lock the bolt for faster installation, then slides back to make ready for lifting — without the need for tools.

• When compared to respective size eye bolts, the Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc™:

- Has a larger eye opening for easy access. -Utilizesabailthatswivels360˚tokeepload aligned with the sling leg, and maintains full WLL at any angle.

• Fatigue Rated® to 20,000 cycles at 1.5 times the WLL.

• The patent pending locking mechanism provides quicker installation, without the need for tools.

• QUIC-CHECK® mark indicates if the Crosby SL150 Slide-Loc™ is ready for the lift.

• Forged alloy steel and Quenched and Tempered bail provides toughness in potentially abusive fieldconditions.

• Meets the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC guidelines and is marked with CE accordingly.

WORKING LOAD LIMIT

(T) BOLT SIZE (IN)VENDOR PART NO.

HSI PART NO.

0.5 3/8 - 16x1 1068407 FIT24600

0.75 1/2 - 13x1 - 1/4 1068416 FIT24605

1.5 5/8 - 11x1 - 5/8 1068425 FIT24610

2.3 3/4 - 10x2 1068434 FIT24615

2.3 7/8 - 9x2 - 1/1 1068443 FIT24620

3.2 1 - 8x3 1068452 FIT24625

Swivels 360°


Swivel Hoist RingsACTEK™ SWIVEL (SAFETY) HOIST RINGS

UNC THREADS

UNC THREADS

• Rated load from 400 lbs. to 125 tons.• Pivots 180°/ Swivels 360°• Material: AISI 4140 aircraft quality• Finish: Black oxide per mil spec cadmium plated

• Safety factor: 5:1• 100% magnetic particle inspected• Certified heat treatment

RATED LOADS (LBS)

THREAD SIZE (IN) A C D E

STANDARD U-BAR LONG U-BAR

G HTORQUE (FT/LB)

WT.(LBS)

PART NO. B F

PART NO. B F

600 1/4 - 20 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.54 46100 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 6 0.3800 5/16 - 18 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.29 46102 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 7 0.3800 5/16 - 18 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.54 46104 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 7 0.3

1,000 3/8 - 16 0.43 0.71 3/8 0.54 46106 1.27 2.67 – – – 1.84 1.00 12 0.32,000 7/16 - 14 0.70 0.93 1/2 1.07 46606 1.90 3.77 – – – 2.58 1.49 22 1.02,500 1/2 - 13 0.70 0.93 1/2 1.07 46602 1.84 3.77 – – – 2.58 1.49 28 1.02,000 7/16 - 14 0.88 1.22 3/4 0.78 46000 2.37 4.78 46638 4.34 6.72 3.52 1.99 22 2.62,500 1/2 - 13 0.88 1.22 3/4 0.78 46008 2.31 4.78 46644 4.25 6.72 3.52 1.99 28 2.62,500 1/2 - 13 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.03 46010 2.31 4.78 46646 4.25 6.72 3.52 1.99 28 2.62,500 1/2 - 13 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.28 46012 2.31 4.78 46648 4.25 6.72 3.52 1.99 28 2.64,000 5/8 - 11 0.88 1.22 3/4 0.78 46002 2.18 4.78 46641 4.12 6.72 3.52 1.99 60 2.64,000 5/8 - 11 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.03 46004 2.18 4.78 46640 4.12 6.72 3.52 1.99 60 2.64,000 5/8 - 11 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.28 46006 2.18 4.78 46642 4.12 6.72 3.52 1.99 60 2.65,000 3/4 - 10 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.03 46014 2.06 4.78 46650 4.00 6.72 3.52 1.99 100 3.05,000 3/4 - 10 0.88 1.22 3/4 1.53 46018 2.06 4.78 46654 4.00 6.72 3.52 1.99 100 3.07,000 3/4 - 10 1.40 1.71 1 1.04 46204 3.06 6.52 46658 4.65 8.11 5.14 3.00 100 7.07,000 3/4 - 10 1.40 1.71 1 1.54 46206 3.06 6.52 46660 4.65 8.11 5.14 3.00 100 7.08,000 7/8 - 9 1.40 1.71 1 1.04 46202 2.93 6.52 46656 4.52 8.11 5.14 3.00 160 7.08,000 7/8 - 9 1.40 1.71 1 1.29 46203 2.93 6.52 46657 4.52 8.11 5.14 3.00 160 7.010,000 1 - 8 1.40 1.71 1 1.29 46210 2.81 6.52 46662 4.40 8.11 5.14 3.00 230 7.510,000 1 - 8 1.40 1.71 1 1.54 46212 2.81 6.52 46664 4.40 8.11 5.14 3.00 230 7.510,000 1 - 8 1.40 1.71 1 2.29 46214 2.81 6.52 46666 4.40 8.11 5.14 3.00 230 7.515,000 1-1/4 - 7 1.75 2.11 1-1/4 1.89 46802 4.12 8.73 – – – 6.50 3.76 470 14.020,000 1-3/8 - 6 2.00 2.40 1-1/2 2.50 46702 5.50 10.20 – – – 7.46 4.31 540 23.024,000 1-1/2 - 6 2.25 2.81 1-3/4 2.70 46404 6.41 12.47 – – – 8.55 4.87 800 34.024,000 1-3/4 - 5 2.25 2.81 1-3/4 3.20 46408 6.16 12.47 – – – 8.55 4.87 800 34.030,000 2 - 4-1/2 2.25 2.81 1-3/4 3.20 46400 5.91 12.47 – – – 8.55 4.87 800 36.050,000 2-1/2 - 8 3.00 4.09 2-1/4 4.00 47002 8.03 16.87 – – – 11.67 6.52 2100 88.050,000 2-1/2 - 4 3.00 4.09 2-1/4 4.00 47006 8.03 16.87 – – – 11.67 6.52 2100 88.075,000 3 - 4 3.75 5.27 2-3/4 5.00 47200 8.48 19.50 – – – 14.15 8.10 4300 166.0100,000 3-1/2 - 4 4.00 6.06 3-1/4 7.00 47402 9.28 22.09 – – – 15.90 8.60 5100 265.0

250,000 6 - 4 6.00 14.00 5 9.00 47602 14.00 33.00 – – – 25.00 13.00 9900 790.0


Swivel Hoist Rings

HR-125Swivel Hoist Ring

FRAME SIZE NO.

HR-125 STOCK

NO.WLL

(LBS)*

TORQUE IN FT LBS

DIMENSIONS (IN)

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

BOLT SIZE A ‡

EFFECTIVE THREAD

PROJECTION LENGTH B C D

RADIUS E

DIAMETERF G H

1 † 1016887 800 7 5/16 - 18 x 1.50 .58 2.72 .97 .46 .34 1.87 1.12 .37

1 † 1016898 1000 12 3/8 - 16 x 1.50 .58 2.72 .97 .46 .34 1.87 1.05 .39

2 1016909 2500 28 1/2 - 13 x 2.00 .70 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.29 2.33

2 † 1016912 2500 28 1/2 - 13 x 2.50 1.20 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.29 2.36

2 1016920 4000 60 5/8 - 11 x 2.00 .70 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.16 2.41

2 † 1016924 4000 60 5/8 - 11 x 2.75 1.45 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.16 2.47

2 1016931 5000 100 3/4 - 10 x 2.25 .95 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.04 2.52

2 † 1016935 5000 100 3/4 - 10 x 2.75 1.45 4.85 1.96 .87 .75 3.35 2.04 2.59

3 1016942 7000** 100 3/4 - 10 x 2.75 .89 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.97 6.72

3 † 1016946 7000** 100 3/4 - 10 x 3.50 1.64 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.97 6.81

3 1016953 8000 160 7/8 - 9 x 2.75 .89 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.84 6.84

3 † 1016957 8000 160 7/8 - 9 x 3.50 1.64 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.84 6.96

3 1016964 10000 230 1 - 8 x 3.00 1.14 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.72 7.09

3 † 1016969 10000 230 1 - 8 x 4.00 2.14 6.57 2.96 1.36 .94 4.87 2.72 7.31

4 1016975 15000 470 1-1/4 - 7 x 4.50 2.21 8.72 3.71 1.75 1.19 6.18 3.93 14.51

5 1016986 24000 800 1-1/2 - 6 x 6.75 3.00 12.55 4.71 2.39 1.75 8.48 5.52 37.73

5 1016997 30000 1100 2 - 4-1/2 x 6.75 3.00 12.55 4.71 2.39 1.75 8.48 5.02 40.69

6 1017001 50000 2100 2-1/2 - 4 x 8.00 4.00 16.88 5.75 3.00 2.25 11.00 8.03 88.00

7 1017005 75000 4300 3 - 4 x 10.50 5.00 19.50 7.25 3.75 2.75 14.16 8.50 166.00

8 1017009 100000 5100 3-1/2 - 4 x 13.0 # 7.00 22.09 7.75 4.00 3.25 15.91 9.28 265.00

*Ultimate Load is 5 times the Working Load Limit. **Ultimate Load is 4.5 times the Working Load Limit for 7000# Hoist Ring when tested in 90 degree orientation. † Long Bolts are designed to be used with soft metal (i.e., aluminum) workpiece. While the long bolts may be used with ferrousmetal(i.e.,steel&iron)workpiece,shortboltsaredesignedforferrousworkpiecesonly.‡BoltspecificationisanAlloysocketheadcap screw to ASTMA 574. # Hex head bolt used on Frame 8 (100,000lb.) Hoist Ring.

• Top washer has the following features: • The Working Load Limit and Recommended Torque value

are permanently stamped into each washer. • Washer is color coded for easy identification: Red - UNC thread.• Individually Proof Tested to 2-1/2 time Working Load Limit.• Bolt specification is an Alloy socket head cap screw to ASTM A 574.• All threads listed are UNC.• BOLD SIZE IDENTIFICATION: The size of the bolt will be stated as in

the drawing above. Illustration shows meaning of each dimension given.• Frame 2 and larger are RFID EQUIPPED.


Lifting Clamps

“GXL” CLAMPS • Available in a 1/2, 1 and 2 ton capacity. • Exclusive feature is a patented wear indicator system. When any of cam’s straight line, convex teeth are flattened between unique wear indicator grooves, it is time to change the cam. • Drop forged and heat treated components, with gripping surfaces of case hardened alloy steel. • Newly designed “Cam Engaging Lever” keeps the cam in contact with the plate. The tension arm and spring mechanism facilitate attaching and removing the clamp. These clamps will not lift plate when in the “lever open” position.

Warning: Never tamper with a clamp’s tension arm and spring mechanism during a lift.

SAC (SCREW-ADJUSTED CAM) PLATE CLAMPS• Recommended for turning plates from horizontal to vertical as well as through a 180° arc.• The convex, serrated cam swivels on a ball joint so that the area of cam engagement increases as load increases• Drop forged body and shackle.• 100% proof tested with certificate of test attached to each clamp.

Note: Screw needs to be handtight only! Do not over tighten.

HORIZONTAL PLATE CLAMP • Dual springs hold cam on the work while the second clamp is placed • 100% proof tested with certificate of test attached to each clamp • Sold in pairs • One man can handle plates with this clamp

CAT NOUPC NO020418

GRIP RANGE(IN)

CLAMP WT (LBS)

WLL(TONS)

6422012 187049 1/16 - 5/8 5.5 1/2

6422001 187687 1/16 - 3/4 8 1

6422002 187032 1/16 - 7/8 10.5 2

MERRILL MODEL NO CAT NO

UPC NO020418

GRIP RANGE(IN)

CLAMP WT (LBS)

WLL(TONS)

SAC-1 6421000 096396 0 - 1 6-1/4 1

SAC- 3 6421001 096402 0 - 2 14-1/4 3

SAC- 6 6421002 096419 0 - 3 40 6

MERRILL MODEL

NO CAT NOUPC NO020418

WLL(TONS)

GRIP RANGE

(IN) WIDTH (IN)

CAM WIDTH

(IN)

WT PER PAIR (LBS)

6H 6421701 096686 6 0-1-1/2 5 3/4 32

Cam position under no load.

Cam under load. The heavier the load, the greater the bite.


Lifting Clamps

IPU10 / UNIVERSAL VERTICAL LIFTING CLAMP

IPHGZ / IPHGUZ HORIZONTAL LIFTING CLAMP

The IPU10 vertical lifting clamp is used for lifting, turning, mov-ing or vertical transfer of sheet, plates, or fabrications from hor-izontal to vertical and down to horizontal (180°) as needed. The hinged hoisting eye allows for the clamp to place and lift the load from any direction, or with a mul-tiple leg sling without side-loading the clamp.IPU10S: For use with Stainless Steel material.IPU10H: For use with materials with a surface hardness to 47Rc (450 HB)

*Design factor based on EN 13155 and ASME B30.20. Model IPU10R (remote control opening and closing via a cable) on request.

*Design factor based on EN 13155 and ASME B30.20.

MODEL WLL (T)* STOCK NO.WEIGHT

(LBS) JAW AIPU10 .5 2701675 4.19 0 - .63

IPU10 1 2701663 5.29 0 - .75

IPU10 2 2701677 18.7 0 - 1.38

IPU10 3 2701665 32.6 0 - 1.56

IPU10 4.5 2701667 35.3 0 - 1.56

IPU10 6 2701669 53.0 0 - 2.00

IPU1J 6 2702469 67.3 2.00 - 4.00

IPU10 9 2701671 65.0 0 - 2.00

IPU10J 9 2701673 67.2 2.00 - 4.00

IPU10 12 2701679 126 0 - 2.13

IPU10J 12 2701681 130 2.13 - 4.25

IPU10 16 2701683 159 .25 - 2.50

FOR STAINLESS STEEL - WITH UNIVERSAL HOISTING EYE

IPU10S .5 2702275 4.19 0 - .63

IPU10S 1 2702263 4.63 0 - .75

IPU10S 2 2702277 16.8 0 - 1.38

IPU10S 3 2702265 32.7 0 - 1.56

FOR VERY HARD MATERIALS - WITH UNIVERSAL HOISTING EYE

IPU10H .5 2702175 4.16 0 - .63

IPU10H 1 2702177 16.8 0 - 1.38

IPU10H 2 2702165 32.7 0 - 1.56

IPU10H 3 2702167 35.3 0 - 1.56

MODEL WLL (T)* IPBC STOCK NO. WEIGHT (LBS)IPBC 1 2700410 7.72

IPBC 2 2700411 14.3

IPBC 3 2700412 18.8

MODEL WLL (T)* STOCK NO. WEIGHT (LBS)IPHGUZ 1.5 2705455 19.8

IPHGZ .75 2705451 8.82

IPHGZ 1.5 2705452 16.1

IPHGZ 3.0 2705453 27.1

IPHGZ 4.5 2705454 55.1

The IPBC horizontal lifting clamps have a pretension feature that allows the

user to attach the clamps to the material for horizontal lifting and transfer of sagging and non-sagging material. These clamps may also be used to handle material that will be used in shears, bending and rolling machines or other fabrication equipment. May also be used for turning beams from the “H” into the “I” position.

The IPHGZ, IPHGUZ horizontal lifting clamps have a pretension locking feature that allows the user to attach the clamps to the material for horizontal lifting and transfer of sagging

and non-sagging material. These clamps may also be used to handle material that will be used in shears, bending and rolling machines or other fabrication equipment. May also be used to move and lift structural shapes such as I-Beams, H-Beams ect.


Lifting ClampsFIXED JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

SWIVEL JAW ADJUSTABLE GIRDER CLAMPS

ADJUSTABLE RUNWAY BEAM TROLLEYS

These Fixed Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps are truly versatile in application and may be used for lifting, pulling or as an anchor point.

• Designed specifically to provide maximum JAW GRIP ADJUSTMENT.• Engineered for practical use where mobility is essential.• Easily applied and do not require additional tools or width adjusting

components such as spacing washers.

Swivel Jaw Adjustable Girder Clamps incorporate the additional benefit of horizontal jaw adjustment. This enables the full length and maximum width of the swivel jaw to anchor evenly on a considerable surface area of the beam flange. Additional tools or width adjusting components are not required.

“SUPERCLAMP” Adjustable Runway Beam Trolleys are of acknowledged and experienced design. The unique quality features of this new range of manual traveling gear are the Wheel guarding Anti-drop Plates, which are incorporated into the practical design of these transferable and mobile securing attachments. To complement this range, reference is made to “SUPERCLAMP” Geared Runway Beam Trolleys which allow additional ease of load conveyance.

MODELWLL @ 0°

VERT. (LBS)

JAW GRIP ADJ. MIN-MAX (IN)

JAW APERTURE (IN)

INSIDE SHACK-LE CROWN TO SPACER (IN)

AVG. WT. (LBS)

S1 4480 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 3-3/4 9S2 6720 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 3-3/4 11

S2A 6720 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 3-3/4 18S3 8960 6 - 10 7/8 3-7/8 24

S3X 11200 3 - 7-1/2 7/8 4-1/8 22S3A 11200 6 - 12 1-5/8 4-1/8 33S4S 13440 8 - 18 1-5/8 4-1/8 41S4A 22400 8 - 18 1-5/8 4-1/2 62S12 33600 8 - 18 2 5-7/8 109S14 33600 16 - 24 2-1/2 5-7/8 129

MODELWLL @ 0°

VERT. (LBS)


JAW APERTURE (IN)


AVG. WT. (LBS)

S5 6720 3-1/2 - 12 1 3-3/4 22S5A 6720 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 31S6 11200 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 31

S6A 11200 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 34S11 22400 3-1/2 - 12 1 4-1/2 47

MODELWLL @ 0°

VERT. (LBS)


JAW APERTURE (IN)


AVG. WT. (LBS)

B1 6720 3 - 8 1-1/8 4-3/4 52B2 13440 4 - 12 1-1/4 3-7/8 110B3 22400 4 - 12 1-1/2 5-1/8 164


Lifting Clamps

RATED CAPACITY

(TONS)

PLATE THICKNESS

A (IN)B

(IN)C

(IN)MAX. D

(IN)E

(IN)

MAX. F

(IN)G

(IN)H

(IN)J

(IN)WEIGHT

(LBS)1/21/21/21/2

0 - 5/81/2 - 1

3/4 - 1-1/41-1/4 - 1-3/4

2-3/82-3/82-3/82-3/8

6-1/46-1/46-1/46-1/4

11-1/811-1/811-1/811-1/8

2-3/82-3/82-3/82-3/8

4-3/45-1/85-3/85-7/8

2-3/42-3/42-3/42-3/4

1-13/161-13/161-13/161-13/16

1/21/21/21/2

9101113

11111

0 - 3/41/2 - 1

3/4 - 1-1/41 - 1-1/21-1/2 - 2

33333

7-1/27-1/27-1/27-1/27-1/2

13-1/813-1/813-1/813-1/813-1/8

2-5/82-5/82-5/82-5/82-5/8

66-1/46-1/26-3/47-1/4

2-13/162-13/162-13/162-13/162-13/16

22222

5/85/85/85/85/8

1415161718

2222

0 - 13/4 - 1-1/21-1/4 - 22 - 2-3/4

3-1/23-1/23-1/23-1/2

9-3/89-3/89-3/89-3/8

16-1/416-1/416-1/416-1/4

3-5/83-5/83-5/83-5/8

8-7/89-3/89-7/8

10-5/8

3-3/43-3/43-3/43-3/4

2-7/82-7/82-7/82-7/8

3/43/43/43/4

32333537

4444

3/16 - 1-1/41 - 22 - 33 - 4

4444

9-7/89-7/89-7/89-7/8

17-5/817-5/817-5/817-5/8

3-5/83-5/83-5/83-5/8

99-3/4

10-3/411-3/4

3-13/163-13/163-13/163-13/16

3333

3/43/43/43/4

36374043

6666

1/4 - 1-3/81 - 2-1/82 - 3-1/83 - 4-1/8

4-5/84-5/84-5/84-5/8

11-1/811-1/811-1/811-1/8

20-1/820-1/820-1/820-1/8

3-1/23-1/23-1/23-1/2

10-1/4111213

3-7/83-7/83-7/83-7/8

3-3/83-3/83-3/83-3/8

3/43/43/43/4

49515457

8888

3/8 - 1-1/21 - 2-1/82 - 3-1/83 - 4-1/8

4-13/164-13/164-13/164-13/16

12-5/1612-5/1612-5/1612-5/16

21-5/1621-5/1621-5/1621-5/16

3-3/43-3/43-3/43-3/4

11-1/212-1/813-1/814-1/8

4-3/44-3/44-3/44-3/4

3-7/83-7/83-7/83-7/8

1111

72747780

RATED CAPACITY

(TONS)

PLATE THICKNESS

A (IN)B

(IN)C

(IN)MAX. D

(IN)E

(IN)F

(IN)G

(IN)H

(IN)J

(IN)WEIGHT

(LBS)1/21/21/21/21/2

0 - 3/41/2 - 1

3/4 - 1-1/41 - 1-1/2

1-1/4 - 1-3/4

2-13/162-13/162-13/162-13/163-13/16

77777

11-1/411-1/411-1/411-1/411-1/4

2-3/82-3/82-3/82-3/82-3/8

4-5/84-7/85-1/85-3/85-3/8

2-1/22-1/22-1/22-1/22-1/2

1-1/21-1/21-1/21-1/21-1/2

1/21/21/21/21/2

889

1011

111111

0 - 3/41/2 - 1

3/4 - 1-1/41 - 1-1/2

1-1/4 - 1-3/41-1/2 - 2

3-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/16

999999

13-3/413-3/413-3/413-3/413-3/413-3/4

2-5/82-5/82-5/82-5/82-5/82-5/8

5-7/86-1/86-3/86-5/86-7/87-1/8

3-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/163-3/16

1-5/81-5/81-5/81-5/81-5/81-5/8

5/85/85/85/85/85/8

141515161718

2222

0 - 13/4 - 1-1/21-1/4 - 2

1-3/4 - 2-1/2

3-1/23-1/23-1/23-1/2

9999

16-3/816-3/816-3/816-3/8

3-5/83-5/83-5/83-5/8

6-3/47-1/47-3/48-1/4

3-3/83-3/83-3/83-3/8

2-1/82-1/82-1/82-1/8

3/43/43/43/4

23232324

3333

0 - 1-1/43/4 - 1-1/21-1/4 - 2

1-3/4 - 2-1/2

4-3/164-3/164-3/164-3/16

10-3/410-3/410-3/410-3/4

18-3/818-3/818-3/818-3/8

3-5/83-5/83-5/83-5/8

7-5/87-7/88-3/88-7/8

3-9/163-9/163-9/163-9/16

2-7/162-7/162-7/162-7/16

3/43/43/43/4

30313233

The Model TLA is a vertical lifting clamp incorporating a “Lock Open” and a “Lock Closed” feature and an auxiliary lock. The clamp is capable of turning a steel plate from horizontal to vertical to horizontal through a 180 degree arc. The “Lock Open,” “Lock Closed” feature facilitates attaching and removing the clamp from the plate. The Model TL is identical to the Model TLA except that it does not contain the auxiliary lock. The Model TL is capable of turning a plate from horizontal to vertical and back through the same 90 degree arc.

The Model FR is a vertical lifting tool for relatively light work. It is small and easy to handle in capacities through three tons. It incorporates a “Lock Closed” feature which facilitates attaching the clamp to the plate.

MODEL TLA & TL

MODEL FR

MODEL TLAMODEL TL


Lifting Clamps

RATED CAPACITY

(TONS)

JAW OPENING

A (IN)B

(IN)C

(IN)D

(IN)E

(IN)F

(IN)G

(IN)H

(IN)J

(IN)K

(IN)WEIGHT

(LBS)1/4 0-1 2-3/4 1/2 + 1 3-9/16 4-1/16 3 3/8 1/2 3-1/21/2 0-2 4-1/4 1/2 + 1-3/8 5-5/8 6-1/8 7 3/4 1/2 143/4 0-2 4-3/8 5/8 + 1-3/8 5-5/8 6-1/4 7 3/4 3/4 19

1-1/2 0-2 4-3/8 3/4 + 1-3/8 5-5/8 6-3/8 7 3/4 3/4 233 0-2 4-5/8 5/8 1-5/8 1-3/8 5-5/8 7-1/4 7 3/4 3/4 244 0-3 5-5/8 3/4 2-1/8 1-3/8 7-1/2 9-5/8 7 1-1/8 1 44

RATED CAPACITY

(TONS)

JAW OPENING

A (IN)B

(IN)C

(IN)D

(IN)E

(IN)F

(IN)G

(IN)H

(IN)J

(IN)K

(IN)L

(IN)WEIGHT

(LBS)1-1/2 0-2 4-3/8 5/8 + 3-1/4 5-5/8 6-1/4 12 15/16 3/4 5 44

3 0-2 4-3/8 3/4 + 3-1/4 5-5/8 6-3/8 12 15/16 3/4 5 486 0-2 4-5/8 5/8 1-5/8 3-1/4 5-5/8 7-1/4 12 15/16 1-5/8 5 538 0-3 5-5/8 3/4 2-1/8 3-1/4 7-1/2 9-5/8 12-1/4 15/16 1-5/8 5-1/4 84

RATED CAPACITY

(TONS)

JAW OPENING

A (IN)B

(IN)C

(IN)C h(IN)

D (IN)

MAX. E

(IN)F

(IN)G

(IN)H

(IN)J

(IN)WEIGHT

(LBS)1/2 0 - 1 2-5/16 7-1/16 – 4-11/16 2-1/4 8-7/8 2-5/8 – 1-7/16 71/2 3/4 - 1-1/2 2-5/16 7-1/16 – 5-3/16 2-1/4 9-3/8 2-5/8 – 1-7/16 81/2 1-1/4 - 2 2-5/16 7-1/16 – 5-11/16 2-1/4 9-7/8 2-5/8 – 1-7/16 91 0 - 1 2-1/2 8-1/8 – 5-1/2 2-1/4 9-1/2 2-3/4 – 1-7/8 111 3/4 - 1-1/2 2-1/2 8-1/8 – 6 2-1/4 10 2-3/4 – 1-7/8 121 1-1/4 - 2 2-1/2 8-1/8 – 6-1/2 2-1/4 10-1/2 2-3/4 – 1-7/8 132 0 - 1-1/4 3-3/16 10-3/4 – 6-9/16 3-1/16 12-1/8 3-7/8 – 2 232 1 - 2 3-3/16 10-3/4 – 7-3/16 3-1/16 12-7/8 3-7/8 – 2 242 1-3/4 - 2-3/4 3-3/16 10-3/4 – 7-15/16 3-1/16 13-5/8 3-7/8 – 2 274 0 - 1-1/2 3-13/16 12 – 7-3/4 3-5/8 14-1/2 4-3/8 – 2-3/4 364 1-1/4 - 2-1/2 3-13/16 12 – 8-3/4 3-5/8 16-1/2 4-3/8 – 2-3/4 384 2-1/4 - 3-1/2 3-13/16 12 – 9-3/4 3-5/8 14-1/2 4-3/8 – 2-3/4 418 0 - 2 4-15/16 – 19-1/4 11-7/16 4 19-1/2 5-1/2 8 4 1078 1-3/4 - 3-1/2 4-15/16 – 19-1/4 12-15/16 4 21 5-1/2 8 4 1108 3-1/4 - 5 4-15/16 – 19-1/4 14-7/16 4 22-1/2 5-1/2 8 4 125

The Model HR is a horizontal lifting clamp intended to be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting steel plates horizontally. The Model HDR is similar to the Model HR except that it contains dual cam assemblies which provide two gripping surfaces.

Equipped with serrated gripping cams as standard equipment, both the HR and HDR models are available with smooth, bronze or stainless steel gripping cams to prevent marring when handling polished metals such as stainless steel, copper, aluminum, etc.

The Model M is shown with the structural shape lifting clamps but can also be used for horizontal lifting of plates and structural beams. The Model M incorporates a “Lock Closed” feature which facilities attaching the clamp to the member being lifted. These clamps must be used in pairs, sets of pairs, or in a tripod arrangement for transporting plate horizontally. Handle is available on 8 ton clamp only.

MODEL HR & HDR

MODEL M

MODEL HR

MODEL HDR


Bearing Equipped Swivels

SAFE WORKING LOAD* TYPE SWIVEL NUMBER

WIRE ROPE SIZE

WEIGHT EACH (LBS)

3 S - 1 3 - S - 1 1/2 9.813 S - 2 3 - S - 2 1/2 9.633 S - 3 3 - S - 3 1/2 9.123 S - 4 3 - S - 4 1/2 9.003 S - 5 3 - S - 5 1/2 8.503 S - 6 3 - S - 6 1/2 9.325 S - 1 5 - S - 1 5/8 15.515 S - 2 5 - S - 2 5/8 13.695 S - 3 5 - S - 3 5/8 13.505 S - 4 5 - S - 4 5/8 12.335 S - 5 5 - S - 5 5/8 11.305 S - 6 5 - S - 6 5/8 14.24

8-1/2 S - 1 8-1/2 - S - 1 3/4 29.428-1/2 S - 2 8-1/2 - S - 2 3/4 26.168-1/2 S - 3 8-1/2 - S - 3 3/4 24.908-1/2 S - 4 8-1/2 - S - 4 3/4 29.008-1/2 S - 5 8-1/2 - S - 5 3/4 29.258-1/2 S - 6 8-1/2 - S - 6 3/4 32.00

10 S - 1 10 - S - 1 7/8 46.7510 S - 2 10 - S - 2 7/8 45.7510 S - 3 10 - S - 3 7/8 43.5010 S - 4 10 - S - 4 7/8 44.0010 S - 5 10 - S - 5 7/8 42.0010 S - 6 10 - S - 6 7/8 45.5015 S - 1 15 - S - 1 1 73.7515 S - 2 15 - S - 2 1 62.7515 S - 3 15 - S - 3 1 61.0015 S - 4 15 - S - 4 1 61.0015 S - 5 15 - S - 5 1 49.0015 S - 6 15 - S - 6 1 63.0025 S - 1 25 - S - 1 – 140.0025 S - 2 25 - S - 2 – 140.0025 S - 3 25 - S - 3 – 135.0025 S - 4 25 - S - 4 – 135.0025 S - 5 25 - S - 5 – 130.0025 S - 6 25 - S - 6 – 135.0035 S - 1 35 - S - 1 – 220.0035 S - 2 35 - S - 2 – 155.0035 S - 3 35 - S - 3 – 150.0035 S - 4 35 - S - 4 – 150.0035 S - 5 35 - S - 5 – 145.0035 S - 6 35 - S - 6 – 215.0045 S - 1 45 - S - 1 – 251.0045 S - 2 45 - S - 2 – 235.0045 S - 3 45 - S - 3 – 225.0045 S - 4 45 - S - 4 – 225.0045 S - 5 45 - S - 5 – 215.0045 S - 6 45 - S - 6 – 270.00

SWIVELS TIMKEN BEARING EQUIPPED – LOAD RATED

*Safe working load in metric tons.

S-1JAW & HOOK

S-2JAW & JAW

S-3JAW & EYE

S-4EYE & JAW

S-5EYE & EYE

S-5EYE & HOOK


Swivels

SIZE(IN)

SAFE WORK-ING LOAD

(LBS)*

DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT EACH (LBS)A B C D R

1/4 850 1-1/4 11/16 3/4 1-1/16 2-15/16 .215/16 1250 1-5/8 13/16 1 1-1/4 3-9/16 .393/8 2250 2 15/16 1-1/4 1-1/2 4-5/16 .711/2 3600 2-1/2 1-5/16 1-1/2 2 5-7/16 1.325/8 5200 3 1-9/16 1-3/4 2-3/8 6-9/16 2.493/4 7200 3-1/2 1-3/4 2 2-5/8 7-3/16 4.027/8 10000 4 2-1/16 2-1/4 3-1/16 8-3/8 6.251 12500 4-1/2 2-5/16 2-1/2 3-1/2 9-5/8 8.95

1-1/4 18000 5-5/8 2-11/16 3-1/8 2-11/16 11-1/8 16.371-1/2 45200 7 4-3/16 4 4-3/16 17-1/8 45.79

SIZE(IN)

SAFE WORK-ING LOAD

(LBS)*

DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT EACH (LBS)A B C D E R

1/4 850 1-1/4 11/16 3/4 7/16 15/16 2-1/4 .135/16 1250 1-5/8 13/16 1 1/2 1-1/8 2-23/32 .253/8 2250 2 15/16 1-1/4 3/4 1-1/2 3-7/16 .541/2 3600 2-1/2 1-5/16 1-1/2 7/8 1-7/8 4-1/4 1.125/8 5200 3 1-9/16 1-3/4 1-1/16 2-3/16 5-1/8 2.093/4 7200 3-1/2 1-3/4 2 1-1/4 2-5/8 5-25/32 3.09

SIZE(IN)

SAFE WORKING

LOAD (LBS)*

DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT EACH (LBS)A B C K N P R

1/4 850 1-1/4 11/16 3/4 15/32 7/8 1/4 2-5/8 .215/16 1250 1-5/8 13/16 1 1/2 7/8 5/16 2-15/16 .343/8 2250 2 15/16 1-1/4 5/8 1-1/16 3/8 3-5/8 .661/2 3600 2-1/2 1-5/16 1-1/2 3/4 1-5/16 1/2 4-1/2 1.345/8 5200 3 1-9/16 1-3/4 15/16 1-1/2 5/8 5-5/16 2.483/4 7200 3-1/2 1-3/4 2 1-1/8 1-3/4 3/4 6-1/16 3.887/8 10000 4 2-1/16 2-1/4 1-3/16 2-1/16 7/8 7 5.871 12500 4-1/2 2-5/16 2-1/2 1-3/4 2-13/16 1-1/8 8-9/16 9.84

1-1/4 18000 5-5/8 2-11/16 3-1/8 2-1/16 2-13/16 1-3/8 9-7/16 15.751-1/2 45200 7 4-3/16 4 2-7/8 4-7/16 2-1/4 14-3/4 54.75

REGULAR

JAW END

CHAIN

*UltimateLoadisfivetimestheSafeWorkingLoad.



G-402REGULAR

QUENCHED& TEMPERED

G-401CHAIN

QUENCHED & TEMPERED

G-403JAW END

QUENCHED & TEMPERED

AC

B

D

R

CA

SIZE

SIZE

A

C

P

B

N

R

K

SIZE

AC

B

D

R

E

SIZE


Snatch BlocksCROSBY LIGHT CHAMPION BY McKISSICK®

*Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.**Available in Bronze Bushed only. 3" and 4-1/2" have self-lubricating Bronze Bushing.†Fitted with 1-1/4" ID Swivel Eye.‡May be furnished in other rope sizes.

418W/ Hook

419W/ Shackle

404Tail Board

SHEAVE DIA. (IN)

BEARING CODE

STOCK NO.

WIRE ROPE SIZE (IN) ‡


WEIGHT EACH (LBS)REPLACEMENT SHEAVE STOCK

NO.418 WITH

HOOK419 WITH SHACKLE

404 TAIL BOARD

418 WITH HOOK

419 WITH SHACKLE

404 TAIL BOARD

3** BB – 109091 – 5/16 - 3/8 2 – 4 – 460147

3** BB 108038 109037† 102016 5/16 - 3/8 2 5 4 3 460147

4-1/2** BB 108065 109064 102025 3/8 - 1/2 4 12 12 7 2000232

6 BB 108127 109126 102098 5/8 - 3/4 8 27 28 15 460815

6 RB 108154 109153 102114 5/8 - 3/4 8 27 28 15 472688

8 BB 108225 109224 102169 5/8 - 3/4 8 33 34 21 461164

8 RB 108252 109251 102187 5/8 - 3/4 8 33 34 21 473277

10 BB 108323 109322 102230 5/8 - 3/4 8 41 42 29 461805

10 RB 108350 109359 102258 5/8 - 3/4 8 41 42 29 473776

12 BB 169169 202961 178890 5/8 8 48 49 36 462270

12 RB 199911 169347 178934 5/8 8 48 49 36 474141

12 BB 108421 109420 102301 3/4 8 48 49 36 462289

12 RB 108458 109457 102329 3/4 8 48 49 36 474150

14 BB 194920 169356 – 5/8 8 55 56 – 463625

14 RB 199948 167857 – 5/8 8 55 56 – 474766

14 BB 108528 109527 – 3/4 8 55 56 – 463634

14 RB 108546 109545 – 3/4 8 55 56 – 474775

16 BB 199975 203041 – 3/4 15 130 135 – 4100056

16 RB 200008 203087 – 3/4 15 130 135 – 4200028

16 BB 108608 109607 – 7/8 15 130 135 – 4100065

16 RB 108626 109625 – 7/8 15 130 135 – 4200037

18 BB 200099 203130 – 7/8 15 150 155 – 464571

18 RB 200151 203176 – 7/8 15 150 155 – 475792

18 BB 108644 109643 – 1 15 150 155 – 4104640

18 RB 108662 109661 – 1 15 150 155 – 6000000

• Forged alloy heat treated hooks.• Forged steel swivel tees, yokes and shackles.• Hook and shackle assemblies on 4-1/2" through 14" sizes

can be interchanged.• Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings.• Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is sus-

pended from gin-pole.• 3" thru 18" 418 and 419 blocks have exclusive bolt retaining spring to assure no lost bolts.• Can be furnished with SS-4055 hook latch.• Pressure lube fittings.• Fatigue rated.• 3" - 10" feature dual rated wireline sheaves.


Snatch BlocksCROSBY CHAMPION BY McKISSICK®

* Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.† May be furnished in other rope sizes.

420W/ Hook

421W/ Shackle

406Tail Board

• Hooks and side plates are forged alloy steel and heat treated.• Shackles and yokes are forged and heat treated steel.• All parts are forged.• Side plates are designed to eliminate possibility of rope jamming.• Can be furnished with bronze bushings or sealed roller bearings.• Opening feature permits insertion of rope while block is suspended from gin-pole.• Can be furnished with S-4320 hook latch.• Pressure lube fittings.• Hook and shackle assemblies can be interchanged.• Blocks furnished with dual rated Wireline sheaves.• All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED.

SHEAVE DIAMETER

(IN)BEARING

CODE

STOCK NO.WIRELINE SIZE (IN)†

WORKING LOAD

LIMIT (T)*

WEIGHT EACH (LBS) REP. SHEAVE

STOCK NO.REP. LATCH STOCK NO.

420 WITH HOOK

421 WITH SHACKLE

406 TAIL BOARD

420 WITH HOOK

421 WITH SHACKLE

406 TAIL BOARD

6 BB 169374 169481 167973 3/4 - 7/8 12 40 48 24 460940 1096609 6 RB 169392 204120 167982 3/4 - 7/8 12 40 48 24 473035 10966098 BB 169418 169515 167991 3/4 - 7/8 15 51 57 30 461360 10966098 RB 169445 204193 168008 3/4 - 7/8 15 51 57 30 473534 1096609

10 BB 110221 110720 103186 3/4 - 7/8 15 63 69 42 462001 109660910 RB 110258 110757 103202 3/4 - 7/8 15 63 69 42 474025 1096609


Snatch Blocks

* Ultimate Load is 4 times the Working Load Limit.† May be furnished in other rope sizes.

SHEAVE DIAMETER

(IN)BEARING

CODE

STOCK NO.WIRELINE SIZE (IN)†

WORKING LOAD

LIMIT (T)*

WEIGHT EACH (LBS) REP. SHEAVE

STOCK NO.REP. LATCH STOCK NO.

430 WITH HOOK

431 WITH SHACKLE

407 TAIL BOARD

430 WITH HOOK

431 WITH SHACKLE

407 TAIL BOARD

8 BB 120023 121022 103523 1 - 1-1/8 20 75 87 42 461440 10966578 RB 120041 121040 103541 1 - 1-1/8 20 75 87 42 473614 1096657

10 BB 120096 121095 103603 1 - 1-1/8 20 89 101 55 462083 109665710 RB 120112 121111 103621 1 - 1-1/8 20 89 101 55 474105 109665712 BB 208536 169917 184375 1 20 103 115 70 462680 109665712 RB 208554 209303 184393 1 20 103 115 70 474524 109665712 BB 120176 121175 103685 1-1/8 20 103 115 70 462699 109665712 RB 120194 121193 103701 1-1/8 20 103 115 70 474533 109665714 BB 208572 209321 184419 1 20 123 135 90 463457 109665714 RB 208590 170424 184437 1 20 123 135 90 475024 109665714 BB 120256 121255 103765 1-1/8 20 123 135 90 463466 109665714 RB 120274 121273 103783 1-1/8 20 123 135 90 475033 109665718 BB 208689 209410 184552 1 25 240 260 165 4100298 109014318 RB 208732 209465 184605 1 25 240 260 165 4200331 109014318 BB 119482 119561 119641 1-1/8 25 240 260 165 4103348 109014318 RB 119491 119570 119650 1-1/8 25 240 260 165 4200322 109014320 BB 208750 209483 184623 1-1/8 30 375 400 215 4103936 1090189 20 RB 208787 169864 184650 1-1/8 30 375 400 215 4200769 109018920 BB 119507 119589 119669 1-1/4 30 375 400 215 4103945 109018920 RB 119516 119598 119678 1-1/4 30 375 400 215 4200778 109018924 BB 208812 209526 184687 1-1/8 30 450 475 290 4104114 109018924 RB 208858 209553 184721 1-1/8 30 450 475 290 4200983 109018924 BB 119525 119605 119687 1-1/4 30 450 475 290 4104123 109018924 RB 119534 119614 119696 1-1/4 30 450 475 290 4200992 1090189

CROSBY SUPER CHAMPION BY McKISSICK®

430W/ Hook

431W/ Shackle

407Tail Board

• Drop forged, heat treated swivel hook or swivel shackle.• Hook and shackle assemblies on 8" through 14" sizes can

be interchanged.• Can be furnished with bronze bushings or roller bearings.• Pressure lube fittings.• 430 and 431 blocks have exclusive bolt-retaining spring to as-

sure no lost bolts.• Can be furnished with hook latch.• 8" and 10" models furnished with dual rated Wireline sheaves.• Fatigue Rated.• All sizes are RFID EQUIPPED.


VB Model Snatch Blocks

Minimum Ultimate Strength = 4 x WLL*Represents Standard Models in Inventory. Available in Single or Double Sheave up to 350 Ton CapacityAll Models available with Roller Bearings and HooksAllblocksProofTestedandaresuppliedwithFactoryCertificates

• Manufactured from High Tensile Alloy Steel for light weight / high capacity ratio

• Designed with 4:1 Safety Factor• All Blocks are Individually Proof Tested• Sheave runs on lubricated bronze bushing• Open swivel with bronze thrust bearing• Available with the following fittings:• Machined Swivel Stud Eye with Shackle • Standard machined oblong-swivel eye accepts

shackle pin (standard) or shackle ear (upset) for direct connect to spreader bar or lifting fixture

• Swivel hook• Standard capacities from 22-150 Ton WLL;

Available up to 350 Ton WLL• Single or Double Sheave Models available

* MODEL NO.WLL US

TON

WIRE ØD DIMENSIONS (IN) WEIGHT LBSIN MM ØD1 ØD2 B H T TA TB TL

VB 240.28.1.20.S 22 1 - 1-1/8 28 11-13/16 9-1/2 10-1/16 1-7/16 2 12-1/4 3-5/16 28-1/2 120

VB 240.28.1.25.S 27.5 1 - 1-1/8 28 11-13/16 9-7/16 10-1/16 1-1/2 2-1/8 12-1/4 3-1/4 28-5/8 125

VB 300.28.1.20.S 22 1 - 1-1/8 28 14-3/8 11-13/16 11-5/16 1-7/16 2 14-3/4 3-1/4 31-1/4 130

VB 300.32.1.25.S 27.5 1 - 1-1/4 32 14-3/8 11-13/16 11-5/16 1-9/16 2-1/4 14-3/4 3-5/16 31-1/4 140

VB 345.32.1.32.S 35 1 - 1-1/4 32 15-3/4 13-9/16 12-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 16-1/8 4-7/16 37-5/16 265

VB 345.36.1.32.S 35 1-1/8 - 1-3/8 36 15-3/4 13-9/16 12-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 16-1/8 4-7/16 37-5/16 265

VB 390.32.1.32.S 35 1 - 1-1/4 32 17-11/16 15-1/4 13-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 18-1/2 4-7/16 39-1/2 310

VB 390.36.1.32.S 35.0 1-1/8 - 1-3/8 36 17-11/16 15-1/4 13-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 18-1/2 4-7/16 39-1/2 310

VB 430.32.1.32.2 35 1 - 1-1/4 32 19-1/2 17 14-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/4 20 4-7/16 41-1/4 330

VB 430.32.1.36,5.S 40 1 - 1-1/4 32 19-1/2 16-15/16 15-3/4 2-1/16 2-3/4 20 4-13/16 42-11/16 440

VB 430.38.1.32.S 35 1-1/8 - 1-1/2 38 19-1/2 16-15/16 14-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/4 20 4-7/16 41-1/4 330

VB 430.38.1.36,5.S 40 1-1/8 - 1-1/2 38 19-1/2 16-15/16 15-3/4 2-1/8 2-3/4 20 4-3/4 42-1/2 440

VB 520.38.1.55.S 60 1-1/8 - 1-1/2 38 23-7/16 20-1/2 18-1/8 2-15/16 3-1/8 24 5-9/16 50-3/8 680

VB 520.44.1.55.S 60 1-1/2 - 1-3/4 44 23-7/16 20-1/2 18-1/8 2-15/16 3-1/8 24 5-9/16 50-3/8 680


Skookum® Sheave Blocks

• Multi-use wide throat and Utili-Sheave for passing a variety of line, connecting links and terminations

• Work hardening manganese steel sheaves maximize wire rope and sheave life

• R-6, R-8 & R-10 equipped with tapered roller bearings for long life in higher line speed applications

• R-4 feature straight roller bearings to minimize size• Recessed sheave prevents wire rope from binding between sheave

and block side• Full sided block maximizes sheave protection and strength• Versatile draw pin design allows for rapid reeving and ex-change of

attaching style• Rugged cast alloy steel sides for demanding environments• ASTM B30.26 Compliant• Working loads from 5 tons to 9 tons.

SKOOKUM® R-SERIES UTILI-SHEAVE BLOCKS

A

C

J

D

B

G

H

E

Please specify Part Number, Sheave size, Working Load Limit (WLL), and Attaching Style when ordering.Ultimate load for yoke attachments is five times WLL. Ton equals 2,000 lbs.

BLOCK A B C D E G H JR-4 10.00 1.75 4.75 1.00 2.50 5.25 1.00 1.00

R-6 14.50 8.00 6.75 2.50 4.50 6.50 1.25 1.25

R-8 17.00 8.50 8.75 2.50 4.75 7.25 1.38 1.38

R-10 19.50 8.00 10.50 3.50 4.75 7.25 1.38 1.38

SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS (IN)

BLOCK NO.

SHEAVE DIAMETER

(IN) BEARING

REGULAR YOKE

PART NO.

WIRE ROPE MIN.

WIRE ROPE MAX

WLL (TONS)

REGULAR YOKE

WEIGHTSHEAVE

NO. DRAW PINR-4 4 RB 565303 3/8 3/8 5.00 11.45 571904 551401R-6 6 TRB 551100 3/8 1/2 8.00 30 574803 551413

R-8 8 TRB 557700 1/2 5/8 8.00 43 799203 551420

R-10 10 TRB 557800 1/2 5/8 9.00 50 539703 551420


Wire RopeCOMMONLY USED WIRE ROPE CROSS SECTIONS

6 x 19 Classification


6 x 19 SealeIWRC

6 x 21 Filler WireFC

6 x 25 Filler WireIWRC

6 x 26 Warrington SealeIWRC



Cross sections of rotation resistant rope constructions.

3 x 19 Seale

19 x 7

6 x 36 Seale Filler WireIWRC


8 x 19 SealeIWRC

19 x 19 Seale

6 x 36 Warrington SealeFC


8 x 25 Filler WireIWRC

35 x 7

6 x 31 Filler Wire SealeIWRC

6 x 49 Filler Wire SealeIWRC

8 x 17FC

35 x 19 Seale


General Purpose Wire Rope

DIA (IN)

NOMINAL STRENGTH (TONS)* - BRIGHT OR DRAWN GALVANIZED† APPROXWT/FT (LBS)EEIP EIP IPS

IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC FIBER CORE

1/4 3.59 3.17 3.27 2.90 2.84 2.64 0.10 0.0945/16 5.58 4.92 5.07 4.51 4.41 4.10 0.16 0.153/8 7.97 7.03 7.25 6.45 6.30 5.86 0.23 0.21

7/16 10.8 9.52 9.80 8.72 8.52 7.93 0.32 0.291/2 14.0 12.4 12.8 11.3 11.1 10.3 0.42 0.38

9/16 17.7 15.6 16.1 14.3 14.0 13.0 0.53 0.485/8 21.6 19.1 19.7 17.5 17.1 15.9 0.65 0.593/4 30.9 27.2 28.1 25.0 24.4 22.7 0.92 0.847/8 41.7 36.8 38.0 33.8 33.0 30.7 1.27 1.151 54.0 47.6 49.1 43.7 42.7 39.7 1.65 1.50

1-1/8 67.7 59.8 61.5 54.8 53.5 49.8 2.09 1.901-1/4 83.0 73.2 75.4 67.1 65.6 61.0 2.57 2.341-3/8 99.4 87.7 90.4 80.4 78.6 73.1 3.12 2.841-1/2 117.0 103.0 107.0 94.8 92.7 86.2 3.72 3.38

DIA (IN)



1/4 – – 3.40 3.02 2.94 2.74 0.116 0.1055/16 – – 5.27 4.69 4.58 4.26 0.18 0.1643/8 – – 7.55 6.71 6.56 6.10 0.26 0.236

7/16 11.2 9.90 10.2 9.09 8.89 8.27 0.35 0.321/2 14.6 12.9 13.3 11.8 11.5 10.7 0.46 0.42

9/16 18.5 16.2 16.8 14.9 14.5 13.5 0.59 0.535/8 22.7 20.0 20.6 18.3 17.9 16.7 0.72 0.663/4 32.4 28.6 29.4 26.2 25.6 23.8 1.04 0.957/8 43.8 38.6 39.8 35.4 34.6 32.2 1.42 1.291 57.5 50.0 51.7 46.0 44.9 41.8 1.85 1.68

1-1/8 71.5 63.0 65.0 57.9 56.5 52.6 2.34 2.131-1/4 87.9 77.5 79.9 71.0 69.4 64.6 2.89 2.631-3/8 106.0 93.0 96.0 85.4 83.5 77.7 3.50 3.181-1/2 125.0 111.0 114.0 101.0 98.9 92.0 4.16 3.78

1-5/8 145.0 129.0 132.0 118.0 115.0 107.0 4.88 4.44

1-3/4 168.0 149.0 153.0 136.0 133.0 124.0 5.67 5.15

1-7/8 191.0 169.0 174.0 155.0 152.0 141.0 6.50 5.91

2 218.0 192.0 198.0 176.0 172.0 160.0 7.39 6.72

2-1/8 – – 221.0 197.0 192.0 179.0 8.35 7.59

2-1/4 – – 247.0 220.0 215.0 200.0 9.36 8.51

2-3/8 – – 274.0 244.0 239.0 222.0 10.4 9.48

2-1/2 – – 302.0 269.0 262.0 244.0 11.6 10.5

2-5/8 – – 331.0 – 288.0 268.0 12.8 11.6

2-3/8 – – 361.0 – 314.0 292.0 14.0 12.7



6 x 7 Classification Wire Ropes give long service in operating conditions where ropes are dragged along the ground or over rollers. Larger sheaves and drums (than those used for more flexible constructions) are required to

avoid breakage from fatigue. 6 x 7 Classification Ropes contain 6 strands with 3 through 14 wires, no more than 9 of which are outside wires.Characteristics: Excellent abrasion resistance; less bend-ing fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Dragging and haulage in mines, inclined planes and tramways, sand lines. IWRC shown: fiber core availableOrder Guide: 6 x 7 classification wire ropes may be ordered in diameters from 1/4" to 1-1/2"... bright or galvanized... EEIP, EIP and IPS grades... fiber core or IWRC... right or left lay, regular or lang lay.

6 x 19 Classification ropes provide an excellent balance between fatigue and wear resistance. They give excellent service with sheaves and drums of moderate size. 6 x 19 Classification ropes contain 6 strands with 15 through 26 wires per strand, no more than 12 of which are outside wires.

6 x 19 Seale Characteristics: Resistant to abrasion and crushing; medium fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Haulage rope, choker rope, rotary drilling line. IWRC shown: fiber core available6 x 21 Filler Wire Characteristics: Less abrasion resistance; more bending fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Pull Ropes, load lines, backhaul ropes, draglines. IWRC shown; fiber core available6 x 25 Filler Wire Characteristics: Most flexible rope in classification; best balance of abrasion and fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Most widely used of all wire ropes - cranes hoists, skip hoists, haulage, mooring lines, conveyors, etc., IWRC shown; fiber core available6 x 26 Warrington Seale Charac-teristics: Good balance of abrasion and fatigue resistance. Typical Applications: Boom hoists, logging and tubing lines. IWRC shown, fiber core available

*Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal strengths listed.†Galvanizing: For class A galvanized wire rope (EIP and IPS grades only), deduct 10% from the nominal strength shown.


General Purpose Wire Rope

DIA (IN)



1/4 – – 3.40 3.02 2.94 2.74 0.116 0.1055/16 – – 5.27 4.69 4.58 4.26 0.18 0.1643/8 – – 7.55 6.71 6.56 6.10 0.26 0.236

7/16 11.2 9.90 10.2 9.09 8.89 8.27 0.35 0.321/2 14.6 12.9 13.3 11.8 11.5 10.7 0.46 0.42

9/16 18.5 16.2 16.8 14.9 14.5 13.5 0.59 0.535/8 22.7 20.0 20.6 18.3 17.9 16.7 0.72 0.663/4 32.4 28.6 29.4 26.2 25.6 23.8 1.04 0.957/8 43.8 38.6 39.8 35.4 34.6 32.2 1.42 1.291 57.5 50.0 51.7 46.0 44.9 41.8 1.85 1.68

1-1/8 71.5 63.0 65.0 57.9 56.5 52.6 2.34 2.131-1/4 87.9 77.5 79.9 71.0 69.4 64.6 2.89 2.631-3/8 106.0 93.0 96.0 85.4 83.5 77.7 3.50 3.181-1/2 125.0 111.0 114.0 101.0 98.9 92.0 4.16 3.78

1-5/8 145.0 129.0 132.0 118.0 115.0 107.0 4.88 4.44

1-3/4 168.0 149.0 153.0 136.0 133.0 124.0 5.67 5.15

1-7/8 191.0 169.0 174.0 155.0 152.0 141.0 6.50 5.91

2 218.0 192.0 198.0 176.0 172.0 160.0 7.39 6.72

2-1/8 243.0 215.0 221.0 197.0 192.0 179.0 8.35 7.59

2-1/4 272.0 240.0 247.0 220.0 215.0 200.0 9.36 8.51

2-3/8 301.0 266.0 274.0 244.0 239.0 222.0 10.4 9.48

2-1/2 332.0 293.0 302.0 269.0 262.0 244.0 11.6 10.5

2-5/8 – – 331.0 – 288.0 268.0 12.8 11.6

2-3/4 – – 361.0 – 314.0 292.0 14.0 12.7

2-7/8 – – 392.0 – 341.0 268.0 15.3 13.9

3 – – 425.0 – 370.0 292.0 16.6 15.1

6 x 37 Classification6 x 37 classification ropes contain 6 strands with 27 through 49 wires, no more than 18 of which are outside wires. More flexible but less abrasion resistant than the 6 X 19 classification. Each strand contains numerous small diameter wires. As the number of wires increases, flexibility increases.Order Guide: 6 x 37 classification wire ropes may be or-dered in diameters from 1/4" to 5"... bright or galvanized... EEIP, EIP or IPS grades... IWRC or fiber core... right or left lay, regular lang lay.

6 x 31 Warrington Seal Character-istics: 12 outside wires. Slightly more flexible than 6 x 25 rope with the same abrasion resistance. Typical Applications: Overhead crane and mobile crane hoist ropes. IWRC shown; fiber core available

6 x 36 Warrington Seale Characteristics: 14 outside wires. More fatigue resistance; but less abrasion resistance than 6 x 25 rope. Typical Applications: Overhead crane and mobile

crane hoist ropes; winch lines; large diameter towing lines. IWRC shown; fiber core available

6 x 41 Warrington Seale Characteristics: 16 outside wires. Good combination of fatigue and abrasion resistance for operating ropes Typical Applications: Overhead crane and mobile

crane hoist ropes; shovel and dragline hoist ropes. IWRC shown; fiber core available

6 x 41 Seale Filler Wire Characteristics: Same characteristics and applications as 6 x 41 Warrington Seale. IWRC shown; fiber core available

6 x 49 Seale Warrington Seale Charac-teristics: 16 outside wires. Best fatigue resistance and abrasion resistance in 6 x 37 classification Typical Applications: Mooring, towing and anchor lines. IWRC shown; fiber core available

*Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal strengths listed.†Galvanizing: For class A galvanized wire rope (EIP and IPS grades only), deduct 10% from the nominal strength shown.


Wire Ropes

In certain instances the use of rotation resistant wire rope is necessary to provide rotational stability to the lifted load. In general, the use of these specialized wire ropes is limited to those situations where it is impractical to:

1. Use a tag line.2. Relocate rope dead end.3. Increase sheave sizes.4. Eliminate “odd-part” reeving.5. Significantly reduce rope loading and rope length.

Rotation resistant wire ropes have less of a tendency to unlay when loaded than do conventional wire ropes. This results in improved rotational stability to the lifted load within a safe working load range. Rotation resistant wire ropes are designed in such a way that the rotational force of the outer rope is partially counteracted by the rotational force of the inner rope when the rope is subjected to a load.

The rated strengths of rotation resistant ropes are less than the conventional 6 x 19 and 6 x 36 Classification wire ropes, and larger sheaves and drums are required in order to achieve comparable fatigue life. Drum and sheave diam-eters should be 34 to 36 times rope diameter for the 19 x 7 and 35 x 7 rotation resistant ropes and 21 to 27 times rope diameter for 8 x 19 rotation resistant ropes.

Rotation Resistant Ropes are available in a full range of sizes, grades and constructions:• Standard constructions for single-part and multi-part lifting.• Special wire rope constructions for increased service life in

particularly demanding applications – Dyform®-18 HSLR, Dyform® 34LR and 35LS.

Note:1. Swivels are not recommended for use with rotation

resistant ropes.2. Although B30 standards permit rotation resistant ropes

to be used under certain conditions at design factors of 3.5:1, we recommend a minimum design factor of 5:1 & a design factor of 7:1 for extended rope life.

*Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal breaking strengths listed. NOTE: These strengths apply only when atestisconductedwithbothendsfixed.Wheninuse,thestrengthof these ropes may be reduced if one end is free to rotate. **Listed minimum breaking force is for 1960 & 2160 grade bright (ungalvanized) ropes. Inquire for a minimum breaking force of galvanized ropes.†Other sizes available upon request.

ROTATION RESISTANT WIRE ROPES

DYFORM®-34LR & 35LS ROTATION RESISTANCE ROPE

DIAMETER

MIN BREAKING FORCE** (TONS)

APPROX.WT/FT (LBS)

1960 216034LR 34LR 35LS(MM) (IN) 34LR 35LS

–1314

1/2––

15.4016.1918.88

13.6014.2816.52

17.4218.2121.13

.54

.57

.65

.49

.51

.60–

1516

9/16–

5/8

19.6722.0325.18

17.3119.1121.69

22.0324.7328.21

.69

.77

.87

.62

.69

.78171819

––

3/4

27.2030.8034.51

24.2827.0930.91

30.4634.6238.67

.941.071.20

.87

.971.11

202122

–––

38.3343.2846.65

33.6137.4341.37

42.9448.4552.38

1.321.491.61

1.211.341.49

–2324

7/8––

47.2150.6955.64

41.5944.7449.35

53.0656.8862.38

1.651.751.92

1.511.611.77

25–

26

–1–

60.5962.3866.09

52.9454.4057.78

67.8970.0374.19

2.102.162.28

1.911.972.08

28–

30

–1-1/8

–

75.9977.4586.44

66.9968.9075.99

85.2086.8997.01

2.632.702.99

2.412.502.74

323538

1-1/41-3/81-1/2

98.13116.90138.26

85.99105.89120.27

110.16123.65147.25

3.394.054.87

3.103.824.35

19 X 7 ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE

DIA.(IN)

NOMINAL STRENGTH* (TONS)

APPROX.WT/FT(LBS)EIP IPS

3/161/4

5/16

1.572.774.30

1.422.513.90

.064

.113

.1773/8

7/161/2

6.158.3310.8

5.597.589.85

.25

.35

.459/165/83/4

13.616.824.0

12.415.321.8

.58

.711.02

7/81

1-1/8

32.542.253.1

29.538.348.2

1.391.822.30

1-1/41-3/81-1/2

65.178.492.8

59.271.384.4

2.803.434.08

1-5/8 108.0 98.4 4.80

8 X 19 ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE7/161/2

9/16

8.9711.714.7

7.8010.212.8

.36

.47

.605/83/47/8

18.125.935.0

15.722.630.5

.731.061.44

11-1/81-1/4

45.557.370.5

39.649.861.3

1.882.392.94

1-3/81-1/2

84.9100.0

73.887.3

3.564.24

DYFORM®-18HSLR ROTATION RESISTANT ROPE

DIA. (IN)†

NOMINAL STRENGTH*

(TONS)APPROX.

WT/FT (LBS)3/87/161/2

8.311.214.6

.27

.37

.519/165/83/4

18.522.732.4

.64

.791.1

7/81

1-1/8

43.857.571.5

1.52.02.5

1-1/4 87.9 3.1

Dyform® - 34LR

35LS

19 x 7Rotation Resistant

8 x 19Rotation Resistant

Dyform® - 18HSLR Rotation Resistant

Strongest, most rotation resistant. For the most

demanding hoistingapplications.

For demandingapplications wherehighest strength is

not mandatory.

Not recommended for multiple part lifting.

Can be used formultiple part lifting.

For multi-part lifting. 35% greater strength..


Wire Ropes

CONSTRUCTEX® ROPE

DIA. (IN)†

NOMINAL STRENGTH*

(TONS)APPROX.

WT/FT (LBS)5/83/47/8

25.236.548.5

.861.11.5

11-1/81-1/4

62.579.597.6

2.02.63.2

1-3/81-1/21-5/8

118.0139.0162.0

3.84.65.3

Constructex® is made of three different strand constructions: 7-wire, 24-wire and 40-wire strands. The nine strands are closed in operation and lightly swaged to postform the rope and give the strands a triangular

shape. Compacting increases strength and resistance to crushing. The smooth outside surface enhances abrasion and scrubbing resistance. Constructex® can provide 1-1/2 to 2 times the service life of other wire ropes in severely abu-sive applications. Typical Applications include: tubing lines, logging lines, winch lines, boom hoists, scrap yard, mobile and overhead traveling cranes, hot bed conveyors, car haul-

age and marine cargo falls.

Aircraft Cable is pre-formed and made in accordance with commercial speci-fications. GAC to military and federal specifications is available.

CARBON STEEL AIRCRAFT CABLE

Galvanized cable has the highest strength and greatest fatigue life of the materials offered. It has good to fair corrosion resistance in rural to indus-trial atmosphere environments. This material is most widely used for small diameter cable. Tin over galvanized ca-ble offers greater corrosion resistance and reduced friction over pulleys.

6-PAC is recommended for use where the rope is subject-ed to heavy use or where conditions are extremely abu-sive, such as offshore pedestal, crawler and lattice boom equipped truck crane boom hoist applications. 6-PAC is also recommended for winch lines, overhead cranes,

multipart hoist lines where rotation-resistant ropes are not required, and other applica-tions where flexibility, high strength and resistance to crushing are important, and a cost-effective 6-strand rope is desired.

*Acceptance strength is not less than 2-1/2% below the nominal breaking strengths listed. †Other sizes avail able upon request.

Strands: 6Wires per strand: 19-36

Core: IWRCStandard grade: Royal Purple

Lay: Right RegularFinish: Bright

HIGH PERFORMANCE WIRE ROPE

AIRCRAFT CABLE

7 X 19 GALVANIZED MIN. BREAKING

STRENGTH (LBS)

STAINLESS STEEL MIN. BREAKING

STRENGTH (LBS.)DIA. (IN)APPROX. WT 1000 FT/LBS.

3/32 17. 1,000 9201/8 29. 2,000 1,7605/32 45. 2,800 2,4003/16 65. 4,200 3,7007/32 86. 5,600 5,0001/4 110. 7,000 6,4009/32 139. 8,000 7,8005/16 173. 9,800 9,0003/8 243. 14,400 12,000

VINYL COATED GALVANIZED AIRCRAFT CABLE

DIA. (IN)COATED TO (IN) CONSTRUCTION

APPROX WT/FT (LBS)

MIN. BREAKING STRENGTH (LBS)

3/32 3/16 7 x 7 28 9201/8 3/16 7 x 7 39 1,7001/8 3/16 7 x 19 39 2,0003/16 1/4 7 x 19 78 4,2001/4 5/16 7 x 19 125 7,0003/8 7/16 7 x 19 272 14,400

7 x 19

7 x 19

ROPE DIA. STANDARD CONSTRUC-

TIONS

APPROX. WEIGHT (LB/FT)

NOMINAL STRENGTH

(TONS)IN MM3/8 9.5 6x19 Seale 0.285 8.3

7/16 11.0 6x19 Seale 0.388 11.2

1/2 13.0 6x26 0.503 14.6

9/16 14.5 6x26 0.642 18.5

5/8 16.0 6x26 0.795 22.7

3/4 19.0 6x31 1.143 32.4

7/8 22.0 6x31 1.547 43.8

1 26.0 6x31 2.075 56.9

1-1/8 29.0 6x31 2.575 71.5

1-1/4 32.0 6x31 3.169 87.9

1-3/8 35.0 6x36 3.758 106.0

1-1/2 38.0 6x36 4.564 125.0

1-5/8 41.3 6x36 5.356 146.0

1-3/4 45.5 6x36 6.212 169.0


Wire RopesABRASION AND BENDING

THE “X CHART”: ABRASION RESISTANCE VS. BENDING-FATIGUE RESISTANCE

While there is a possibility, there is likelihood that an application can be found for which there is a precisely suitable wire rope – one that can satisfy every indicated requirement.

As with all engineering design problems, fea-sible solutions demand compromise to some degree. At times, it becomes necessary to set-tle for less than optimum resistance to abra-sion in order to obtain maximum flexibility; the latter being a more important requirement for the given job. A typical example of this kind of trade-off would be in selecting a highly flexible rope on an overhead crane. Conversely, in a haulage installation, a rope with greater resis-tance to abrasion would be chosen despite the fact that such ropes are markedly less flexible.

Two compelling factors that govern most decisions as to the selection of a wire rope are: abrasion resistance, and resistance to bending fatigue. Striking a proper balance with respect to these two important characteristics demands judgment of a very high order. A graphic presentation of just such comparison of qualities between the most widely used rope constructions and others is given by means of X-chart.

Referring to this chart when selecting a rope, the mid-point (at the X) comes closest to an even balance between abrasion resistance and resistance to bending fatigue. Reading up or down along either leg of the X, the inverse relationship becomes more apparent as one quality increases and the other decreases.

EFFECT OF SHEAVE SIZE

Wire ropes are manufactured in a great variety of constructions to meet the varying demands of wire rope usage. Where abrasion is an important factor, the rope must be made of a coarse construction containing relatively large wires. In other cases, the great amount of bending to which the rope is subjected is more important. Here, a more flexible construction, containing many relatively small wires, is required. In either case, however, if the rope operates over inadequate size sheaves, the severe bending stresses imposed will cause the wires to break from fatigue, even though

actual wear is slight. The smaller the diameter of the sheave, the sooner these fatigue breaks will occur and the shorter rope life becomes.

Another undesirable effect of small sheaves is accelerated wear of both rope and sheave groove. The pressure per unit area of rope on sheave groove for a given load is inversely proportional to the size of the sheave. In other words, the smaller the sheave the greater the rope pressure per unit area on the groove. Both sheaves and rope life can obviously be prolonged by using the proper diameter sheave for the size and construction of rope.

Sheave diameter can also influence rope strength. When a wire rope is bent around a

sheave, there is a loss of effective strength due to the inability of the individual strands and wire to adjust themselves entirely to their changed position. Tests show that rope strength efficiency decreases to a marked de-gree as the sheave diameter is reduced with respect to the diameter of the rope.

Therefore, it is evident that a definite relation-ship exists between rope service and sheave size. As a guide to rope users, wire rope manufacturers have established standards for various rope constructions. To secure the most economical service, it is important that the suggested size of sheaves given below be used.

6 x 76

6 x 19 S9

6 x 21 FW10

Flattened Strand12

6 x 25 FW12

6 x 31 WS12

6 x 36 WS14

6 x 49 WS16

6 x 64 SFWSLEAST×

RESISTANCE TO

ABRASION Ø

GREATESTLEAST×RESISTANCE TO BENDING FATIGUEØGREATESTNU

MBER

OF

OUTS

IDE

WIR

ES P

ER S

TRAN

D

PROPER SHEAVE AND DRUM SIZES

18

CONSTRUCTION SUGGESTED D/d* RATIO MINIMUM D/d* RATIO6 x 7 72 4219 x 7 or 18 x 7 Rotation Resistant 51 346 x 19 Seale 51 346 x 27 H Flattened strand 45 306 x 31 V Flattened strand 45 306 x 21 Filler wire 45 306 x 25 Filler wire 39 266 x 31 Warrington Seale 39 266 x 36 Warrington Seale 35 238 x 19 Seale 41 278 x 25 Filler wire 32 21

6 x 41 Warrington Seale 32 216 x 42 Filler 21 14

The wire rope industry refers to this as the X-chart. It serves to illustrate the inverse relationship between abrasion resistance and resistance to bending fatigue in a representative number of the most widely used wire ropes.


Wire Ropes

DIAMETER (IN)

NOMINAL STRENGTH IN TONS OF 20000 POUNDSAPPROXIMATE WEIGHT PER FOOT (LBS)

IMPROVED PLOW STEEL EXTRA IMPROVED PLOW STEEL

FIBER CORE IWRC IWRC FIBER CORE IWRC3/16 1.55 1.67 – .059 .065

1/4 2.74 2.94 3.40 .105 .116

5/16 4.26 4.58 5.27 .164 .18

3/8 6.10 6.56 7.55 .236 .26

7/16 8.27 8.89 10.2 .32 .35

1/2 10.7 11.5 13.3 .42 .469/16 13.5 14.5 16.8 .53 .595/8 16.7 17.9 20.6 .66 .72

3/4 23.8 25.6 29.4 .95 1.04

7/8 32.2 34.6 39.8 1.29 1.42

1 41.8 44.9 51.7 1.68 1.85

1-1/8 52.6 56.5 65.0 2.13 2.34

1-1/4 64.6 69.4 79.9 2.63 2.89

1-3/8 77.7 83.5 96. 3.18 3.50

1-1/2 92.0 98.9 114. 3.78 4.16

1-5/8 107. 115. 132. 4.44 4.88

1-3/4 124. 133. 153. 5.15 5.67

1-7/8 141. 152. 174. 5.91 6.50

2 160. 172. 198. 6.72 7.39

2-1/8 179. 192. 221. 7.59 8.35

2-1/4 200. 215. 247. 8.51 9.36

2-3/8 222. 239. 274. 9.48 10.4

2-1/2 244. 262. 302. 10.5 11.6

2-5/8 268. 288. 331. 11.6 12.8

2-3/4 292. 314. 361. 12.7 14.0

2-7/8 317. 341. 393. 13.9 15.3

3 – 370. 425. – 16.6

3-1/8 – 399. 458. – 18.0

3-1/4 – 429. 492 – 19.5

3-3/8 – 459. 529. – 21.0

3-1/2 – 491. 564. – 22.6

ABRASION RESISTANCE FATIGUE RESISTANCE...DECREASES

with Smaller Wires

...INCREASESwith More Wires

...INCREASESwith Larger Wires

...DECREASESwith Fewer Wires

WIRE ROPENOMINAL STRENGTHS AND WEIGHTS – 6 X 19 CLASS – 6 X 36 CLASS

Available galvanized at 10% lower strengths, or in equivalent strengths on special request.


Wire Ropes

INSPECTION – THE KEY TO LONGER, SAFER WIRE ROPE USE

Any wire rope in use should be inspected on a regular basis. You have too much at stake in lives and equipment to ignore thorough examination of the rope at prescribed intervals.

The purpose of inspection is to accurately estimate the ser-vice life and strength remaining in a rope so that maximum service can be had within the limits of safety. Results of the inspection should be recorded to provide a history of rope performance on a particular job. On most jobs, wire rope must be replaced before there is a risk of failure. A rope broken in service can destroy machinery and curtail produc-tion. It can also kill.

Because of the great responsibility involved in ensuring safe rigging on equipment, the man assigned to inspect should know wire rope and its operation thoroughly. Inspections should be made regularly and the results recorded.

When inspecting the rope, the condition of the drum, sheaves, guards, cable clamps and other end fittings should be noted. The condition of these parts affects rope wear; any defects detected should be repaired.

To ensure rope soundness between inspections, all work-ers should participate. The operation can be most helpful by watching the ropes under his control. If any accident involving the ropes occurs, the operator should immedi-ately shut down his equipment and report the accident to his supervisor. The equipment should be inspected before resuming operation.

The Occupational Safety and Health Act has made periodic inspection mandatory for most wire rope applications.

JUST LOOKING AT THE ROPE IS NOT ENOUGH

When an inspector takes a look at a rope, he may see sections show-ing excessive wear. By flagging the rope, he can quickly determine where the rope is rubbing or contacting parts of the equipment, and then repair, replace or modify the condition causing wear.

Inspections of sheaves is a relatively simple, yet very vital task. A sheave groove gauge, usually obtainable from a wire rope manu-facturer, is used to check the grooves in a sheave. Hold the gauge perpendicular to the surface of the groove to observe properly the groove size and contour, as in this illustration.

Photo shows new gauge and worn sheave. This new gauge is designed with one-half the allowable oversize (see table). Using the new gauge, when you do not see light, the sheave is OK. When you do see light under the new gauge, the sheave should be replaced.

NOMINAL ROPE DIAMETER

ALLOWABLE ROPE OVERSIZE

ONE-HALF ALLOW-ABLE ROPE OVERSIZE

0" - 3/4" +1/32" +1/64"

13/16" - 1-1/8" +3/64" +3/128"

1-3/16" - 1-1/2" +1/16" +1/32"

1-9/16" - 2-1/4" +3/32" +3/64"

2-5/16" - & larger +1/8" +1/16"


Wire RopesSHEAVES SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR:1. Correct groove diameter2. Roundness or contour to give proper support to the rope3. Small holes, cracks, uneven surfaces, or other defects that might be detrimental to the rope4. Extreme deep wear

A sheave should also be checked to make sure it turns freely, is prop-erly aligned, has no broken or cracked flanges, and has bearings that work properly.

Drums should also be inspected for signs of wear that could damage rope. Plain-faced or smooth drums can develop grooves or impressions that prevent rope from winding properly. Repair by resurfacing the face or replacing the lagging.

Scrubbing will occur if the rope tends to close wind. If the tendency is to open winding, the rope will encounter abnormal abuse as the second layer forces itself down between the open wraps of the first layer on the drum.

Operating with a smooth drum calls for special care. Be sure the rope is always tightly wound and thread laid on the first layer. Any loosening of the line is easily observed as the winding will be bad and the rope will be coming off with a series of “bad spots.”

Grooved drums should be examined for tight or corrugated grooves and for differences in depth or pitch that could damage the second and subsequent layers. Worn grooves can develop extremely sharp edges that shave away small particles of steel from the rope. Correct this condition by grinding or filing a radius to replace the sharp edge.

Drum flanges, as well as the starter, filler and riser strips, should be checked. Excessive wear here often causes unnecessary rope abuse at the change of layers and cross-over points.

Other places of contact such as rollers, scrub boards, guides and end-attachments should also be inspected.

MEASURE THE WIDEST DIAMETERRopes and sheave grooves must be precisely fitted to each other to get the most service out of your wire rope dollar. Make measurement of rope diameter a normal part of your inspection program.

There's only one right way to measure rope diameter: use machinist's calipers and be sure to measure the widest diameter. The drawings at the left compare the right way with the wrong way.

This method is not only useful for measuring the diameter of a new rope, but also for determining the amount of wear and compression that has occurred while the rope has been in use. Accurate recording of this information is essential in helping to decide when to replace wire rope.

RIGHT WAY Set the machinist's caliper to read the widest diame-ter. Vernier scale reads to 1/128th of an inch.

WRONG WAYThis is the wrong way to measure wire rope diame-ter. Widest diameter is not being read.


Wire RopesCOMMON WIRE ROPE ABUSES

Neglect and abuse are the two chief enemies of wire rope life. One costly form of neglect is lack of proper field lubrica-tion. Abuse takes many forms: improper reeling or unreeling, wrong size or worn sheaves, improper storage, and bad splicing are a few.

CONDITION OF MACHINERY

Wire rope performance depends upon the condition of the equipment on which it operates; poorly maintained equip-ment will usually result in reduced rope life.

EFFECTS OF SHOCK-LOADING AND VIBRATION

The destructive effects of jerking or shock-loading are visu-ally noticeable. Vibration has somewhat the same effect, and is equally destructive. An individual shock may be slight, but many rapidly repeated slight shocks can have the effect of several large shocks.

Vibration which occurs directly above a load is often unavoid-able. “Whipping” of the section of rope immediately above the load is also common. In these cases, rapid wire fatigue is possible. For reasons of safety, this section should be ex-amined regularly.

Wire rope failure is usually cumulative. Each repeated over-stress brings the rope nearer to failure. Thus, a wire rope may become fatigued to a point close to failure under a heavy load, and actually fail under a much lighter load.

OVERSTRESSING

In any hoisting operation, there should be no slack in the wire rope when the load is applied. Otherwise, the resulting stress will be excessive.

Overstressing can also be the result of too-rapid acceleration or deceleration. Wire rope will withstand considerable stress if the load is applied slowly. As with ordinary twine, a quick snap will cause overstressing and breakage. This applies both when starting to lift a load, and when bringing it to a stop.

CORROSION

Corrosion can seriously shorten wire rope life, both by metal loss & by formation of corrosion pits in the wires. These pits act as stress-concentration points in the wires in much the same manner as do nicks.

CRUSHING. Because of loose winding on drum, rope was pulled in between underlying wraps and crushed out of shape.

TOO SUDDEN LOAD RELEASE. The sudden release of a load caused birdcaging. Here individual strands open away from each other, displacing the core.

LACK OF LUBRICATION. Premature breakage of wires resulted from “locking”ofstrands,whichwascausedbyinsufficientlubrication.

INFREQUENT INSPECTION. Neglect of periodical inspection left this rope in service too long, resulting in considerable abrasion.

IMPROPER HANDLING. Kink or “dog leg” was caused by improper handling and/or installation. A kink causes excessive localized or spot abrasion.

continued...


Wire Ropes

WIRE ROPE ABUSE continuedWire rope left on machines shut down for long periods of time deteriorates rapidly. To preserve the rope for future sue, it should be removed, cleaned and thoroughly lubricated.

CAUSES OF CORROSION DAMAGE

Pitting, erosion and surface effects of many different types can all result in corrosion damage. Because they tend to increase corrosion, the following conditions should be con-sidered and noted when applicable, during the ordering of wire rope: acid and alkaline solutions, gases, fumes, brine and salt air, sulphurous compounds, and high humidity and temperature. Lubricants are readily available to reduce the severity of attack of most of these conditions.

EFFECTS OF SEVERE HEAT

Where wire rope is subjected to severe heat (e.g., foundry cranes) it will not give the service expected because it will deteriorate more quickly.

Wire ropes exposed to hot-metal handling or other extreme heat sometimes require independent wire rope cores.

SHIFTING ROPES FROM ONE JOB TO ANOTHER

Sometimes an idle wire rope from one operation is installed on another to keep the rope in continuous service. This ex-tremely poor practice is an expensive “economy.”

Because wire rope tends to “set” to the conditions of its particular operating job, the differing bends, abrasions and stresses of a new operation can produce premature failure. Therefore, for a maximum life and efficiency, a rope should be used only on the job for which it has been specified.

MACHINERY OPERATION

Some operators are harder on their machinery than others and as a result they get shorter rope life. In certain instanc-es, enough extra work is done to more than offset the addi-tional wear-and-tear on equipment and wire rope. The oper-ation may be more efficient from the production standpoint as a result, but those in charge of rope purchases should be made aware of the probable reduction in rope life and increased rope costs.

REVERSE BENDING. Running this rope over one sheave and under another caused fatigue breaks in wires.

EXCESSIVE EXPOSURE TO ELEMENTS. Too much exposure combined with surface wear and loss of lubrication caused corrosion and pitting.

TOO LONG IN SERVICE. Repeated winding and overwinding of this rope on a drum while it was under heavy stress caused the unusually severe wear shown.

UNDERSIZE SHEAVE GROOVES. Sheaves were too small, causing strands to pinch. Wires then fail in the valley between the strands.

POOR WORK PROCEDURES. Damage to strands and wires resulted from electric arcing.

LACK OF KNOWLEDGE. Here's what occurs when a loop which has been “pulled through” and tightened remains in service.


Wire Ropes

ROPE STRENGTH AND DESIGN FACTORS

The rope strength design factor is the ratio of the rated strength of the rope to its operating stress. If a particular rope has a rated strength of 100,000 lbs. and is working un-der an operating stress of 20,000 lbs., it has a rope strength design factor of 5. It is operating at one-fifth or 20% of its rated strength.

Many codes refer to this factor as the “Safety Factor” which is a misleading term, since this ratio obviously does not in-clude the many facets of an operation which must be consid-ered in determining safety.

Wire rope is an expendable item – a replacement part of a machine or installation. For economic and other reasons, some installations require ropes to operate at high stresses (low rope strength design factors). On some installations where high risk is involved, high rope strength design fac-tors must be maintained. However, operating and safety codes exist for most applications and these codes give specific factors for usage. When a machine is working and large dynamic loadings (shock loading) are imparted to the rope, the rope strength design factor will be reduced which could result in overstressing of the rope. Reduced rope strength design factors frequently result in reduced service life of wire rope.

A.N.S.I.NO. EQUIPMENT

NUMBER BROKEN WIRES IN RUNNING ROPES

NUMBER BROKEN WIRES IN STANDING ROPES

IN ONE ROPE LAY

IN ONE STRAND

IN ONE ROPE LAY

IN ONE STRAND

B30.2 Overhead & Gantry Cranes 12 4 Notspecified Notspecified

B30.4 Portal, Tower & Pillar Cranes 6 3 3 2

B30.5 Crawler, Locomotive & Truck Cranes 6 3 3 2

B30.6 Derricks 6 3 3 2

B30.7 Base Mounted Drum Hoists 6 3 3 2

B30.8 Floating Cranes & Derricks 6 3 3 2

A10.4 Personnel Hoists 6* 3 2* 2

A10.5 Material Hoists 6* Notspecified Notspecified Notspecified

ORIGINAL DIAMETER (IN) LOSS (IN)5/16 & smaller 1/64

3/8 - 1/2 1/32

9/16 - 3/4 3/64

7/8 - 1-1/8 1/16

1-1/4 - 1-1/2 3/32

*Also remove for 1 valley break. OSHA requires monthly record keeping of wire rope condition.

Note: Current industry recommendations and OSHA Standards are based upon the use of steel sheaves. The manufacturer of plastic or synthetic sheaves or liners should be consulted for their recommendations on the safe application of their product, and possible revision in rope inspection criteria when used with their product.

NUMBER OF WIRE BREAKS

DIAMETER LOSSO.S.H.A. (A.N.S.I.) Removal Criteria 5.A.N.S.I. Safety Codes, Standards and Requirements – rope must be removed from service when diameter loss or wire breakage occurs as follows:


Wire Ropes

UNDERSTAND WHAT THE “LAYS” OF WIRE ROPE MEAN

“Lay” of a wire rope is simply a description of the way wires and strands are placed during construction. Right lay and left lay refer to the direction of strands. Right lay means that the strands pass from left to right across the rope. Left lay means just the opposite; strands pass from right to left.

Regular lay and lang lay describe the way wires are placed within each strand. Regular lay means that wires in the strands are laid op-posite in direction to the lay of the strands. Lang lay means that wires are laid in the same direction as the lay of the strands.

Most of the wire rope used is right lay, regular lay. This specification has the widest range of applications and meets the requirements of most equipment. In fact, other lay specifications are considered ex-ceptions and must be requested when ordering.

HERE ARE SOME EXCEPTIONS

Lang lay is recommended for many excavating, construction, and mining applications, including draglines, hoist lines, dredgelines and other similar lines. Here's why. Lang lay ropes are more flexible than regular lay ropes. They also have greater wearing surface per wire than regular lay ropes.

Where properly recommended, installed and used, lang lay ropes can be used to greater advantage than regular lay ropes. However, lang lay ropes are more susceptible.

To the abuses of bending over small diameter sheaves, pinching in undersize sheave grooves, crushing when winding on drums, and failing due to excessive rotation. Left lay rope has greatest usage in oil fields on rod and tubing lines, blast hole rigs, and spudders where rotation of right lay rope would loosen couplings. The rotation of a left lay rope tightens a standard coupling.

A wire rope is a piece of flexible, multi-wired, stranded machinery made of many precision parts.

Usually a wire rope consists of a core member, around which a number of multi-wired strands are “laid” or helically bent. There are two general types of cores for wire rope – fiber cores and wire cores. The fiber core may be made from natural or synthetic fibers. The wire core can be an Independent Wire Core (IWRC), or Strand Core (SC).

The purpose of the core is to provide support and maintain the po-sition of the outer strands during operation.

Any number of multi-wired strands may be laid around the core. The most popular arrangement is six strands around the core, as this combination gives the best balance.

The number of wires per strand may vary from 3 to 91, with the majority or wire ropes falling into the 7-wire, 19-wire, or 36 wire strand categories.


LENGTH OF SERVICE DEPENDS ON HOW YOU TREAT YOUR WIRE ROPES.

RIGHT LAY REGULAR LAY

LEFT LAY REGULAR LAY

RIGHT LAY LANG LAY

LEFT LAY LANG LAY


D/d ratio = 15: 15" ÷ 1" = 1515:1 ratio = Approx. 88% efficiency.

D/d Ratio

Wire Rope SlingsThe diameter of curvature around which a wire rope sling is bent affects its capacity. This is known as the D/d ratio. The capital D refers to the diameter of a sheave, hoist drum, or with rigging the diameter of the object to which the sling hitch is applied. The lower case d represents the diameter of the wire rope.

To determine the D/d ratio, divide the diameter of the wire rope sling into the diameter of the load. A good rule to follow is to try and keep at least a 6:1 ratio which results in an 80% efficiency of the sling. A 1:1 ratio results in only 50% efficiency of the sling. Softeners, as seen above, are often used to help create a better D/d ratio. For example, when the diameter of the load is 15 times the diameter of the wire rope sling the D/d ratio is 15:1.

Chain SlingsAs with wire rope slings, the diameter of curvature around which an alloy chain sling is bent affects its capacity. To determine the D/d ratio, divide the diameter of the alloy chain sling into the diameter of the load. For example, when the diameter of the load is 4 times the diameter of the alloy chain sling the D/d ratio is 4:1.

HOW TO CALCULATE THE D/d RATIO

D/d Ratio Efficiencies D/d Ratio Efficiencies25 100% 3.5 73%

20 92% 3.25 72%

15 88% 3 71%

10 86% 2.75 70%

8 84% 2.5 68%

6 80% 2.25 67%

5 78% 2 65%

4.75 77% 1.75 62%

4.5 76% 1.5 59%

4 75% 1.25 55%

3.75 74% 1 50%

D/d Ratio Alloy Chain Sling

Strength Efficiencies6:1 or greater 100%

5:1 90%

4:1 80%

3:1 70%

2:1 60%

less than 2:1 Not recommended

15"

4"

1"

Radius of Contact

Softener protecting chain

1"

D/d ratio = 4:1 4" ÷ 1" = 44:1 ratio = Approx. 80% efficiency.


Wire RopesBLOCK TWISTING

Block twisting or “cabling” is one of the most fre-quently encountered wire rope problems in the construction field. When this problem occurs, the wire rope is most often blamed, and other equally important factors in the operation are overlooked.

Personnel experienced with handling of wire rope know that conventional wire ropes will twist or unlay slightly, when a load is applied. In a reeved hoisting system, subjected to loading and unloading such as a load hoisting line, this results in block twisting and possibly distortion of the wire rope. Cabling of the block most frequent-ly occurs as the load in the wire rope is released, and the “falls” are in a lowered position. Cabling may be considered as the twisting of the block beyond one-half of a revolution (180° twisting) of the traveling block. When this condition occurs, the operator shows good judgment in not making additional lifts, until the conditions causing the problem are corrected.

The following machine and site conditions should be investigated for possible improvement in block twisting.1. Reduced wire rope length. Longer rope lengths

cause more twisting than short rope lengths. This applies particularly to the amount of wire rope in the “falls.”

2. Reduce the amount of load lifted. Heavily loaded ropes have more torque and twist than

lightly loaded ropes. This condition would also apply to the speed of loading or “shock” loading, since this condition also causes higher wire rope loading.

3. Eliminate “odd-part” reeving, where the wire rope “dead-end” is on the traveling block. Wire rope torque, from the application of load, is greatest at the rope dead-end.

4. Relocate the rope dead-end at the boom, in order to increase the separation between the dead-end and the other rope parts. This applies a stabilizing load directly to the traveling block. The original equipment manufacturer should be consulted before making this modification.

5. Increase sheave size. This increases the amount of separation between wire rope parts and may improve the situation by applying sta-bilizing loads and reducing the amount of rope torque transmitted to the traveling block.

6. Restrain the twisting block with a “tag” line. One or more of the foregoing suggestions may elim-inate the problem without resorting to “special-ized” wire rope which may not only be difficult to locate but expensive as well.

The use of special “rotation resistant” wire ropes will not likely be required unless the intended length of rope “falls” exceeds 100 feet, or the length of the load hoisting line exceeds 600 feet. In the event these latter conditions exist, the user should also anticipate using a combination of the “rotation resistant” wire rope and the foregoing field suggestions for the more severe problems.

PHYSICAL PROPERTIES ELASTIC PROPERTIES OF WIRE ROPEThe following discussion relates to conventional 6- or 8-strand ropes that have either fiber or steel cores; it is not applicable to rotation-resistant ropes since these constitute a separate case. Wire rope is an elastic member; it stretches or elongates under load. This stretch derives from two sources: 1. Constructional, and 2. Elastic.In actuality, there may be a third source of stretch – a result of the rope rotating on its own axis. Such elongation, which may occur either as a result of using a swivel, or from the effect of a free-turning load, is brought about by the unlaying of the rope strands. Because the third source is a subject that is beyond the scope of this publication, discussion will be directed to constructional and elastic stretch.

CONSTRUCTIONAL STRETCH

When a load is applied to wire rope, the helical-ly-laid wires and strands act in a constricting manner thereby compressing the core and bringing all the rope elements into closer contact. The result is a slight reduction in diameter and an accompanying lengthening of the rope. Con-structional stretch is influenced by the following factors: 1. Type of core (fiber or steel), 2. Rope construction (6 x 7, 6 x 25 FW, 6 x 41 WS, 8 x 19 S, etc.), 3. Length of lay 4. Material.Ropes with wire strand core (WSC) or indepen-dent wire rope core (IWRC) have less construc-tional stretch than those with fiber core (FC). The reason for this is the fact that the steel cannot compress as much as the fiber core.

Usually, constructional stretch will cease at an early stage in the rope's life. However, some fi-ber core ropes, if lightly loaded (as in the case of elevator ropes), may display a degree of con-structional stretch over a considerable portion of their life.

A definite value for determining constructional stretch cannot be assigned since it is influenced by several factors. The following table gives some idea of the approximate stretch as a per-centage of rope under load.

ELASTIC STRETCH

Elastic stretch results from recoverable deformation of the metal itself. Here, again, a quantity cannot be precisely calculated. However, the following equation can provide a reasonable approximation for a good many situations.

Change in load (lb.) x Length (ft.)Changes in length (ft.) = Area (in.2) x Modulus of Elasticity (psi)

The modulus of elasticity is given below.

ROPE CONSTRUCTION APPROX. STRETCH*

6 strand FC 1/2% - 3/4%

6 strand IWRC 1/4% - 1/2%

8 strand FC 3/4% - 1%

ROPE CLASSIFICATION

ZERO THROUGH 20% LOADING

21 TO 65% LOADING*

6x7withfibercore 11,700,000 13,000,000

6x19withfibercore 10,800,000 12,000,000

6x36withfibercore 9,900,000 11,000,000

8x19withfibercore 8,100,000 9,000,000

6 x 19 with IWRC 13,500,000 15,000,000

6 x 36 with IWRC 12,600,000 14,000,000

*Applicable to new rope, i.e., not previously loaded.

APPROXIMATE MODULUS OF ELASTICITY(POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH)

*Varies with the magnitude of the loading.


General Information

VARYING SHEAVE REVOLUTIONS IN A PAIR OF TACKLE BLOCKS

To raise a load one foot, the lower block must be raised one foot, and in accomplishing this, each working rope must be shortened one foot.

In the example above, Ropes 1, 2, 3, etc., must be shortened one foot to raise the load one foot. Assuming that the circumference of each sheave is one foot, Sheave No.1 must make one revolution to shorten Rope No. 1; Sheave No. 2 must make one revolution to take up the one foot slack form Rope No. 1 and one additional revolution to shorten Rope No. 2; Sheave No. 3 must make two revolutions to take up the two feet of slack from Ropes 1 and 2 and one additional revolution to shorten Rope No. 3, etc. for each succeeding sheave.

Viz: Rope No. 1 must travel one foot on Sheave No. 1. Rope No. 2 must travel two feet on Sheave No. 2. Rope No. 3 must travel three feet on Sheave No. 3. Rope No. 4 must travel four feet on Sheave No. 4. Rope No. 5 must travel five feet on Sheave No. 5.

Therefore, all the sheaves in a set of blocks revolve at different rates of speed. Sheave No. 2 rotates twice as fast as No. 1, Sheave No. 3 rotates three times as fast as No.1, Sheave No. 4 four times as fast as No. 1, etc. Consequently the sheaves nearest the lead line, rotating at higher rates of speed, wear out more rapidly.

All sheaves should be kept well lubricated when in operation to reduce friction and wear.

To reeve by this method, the two blocks should be placed so that the sheaves in the upper block are at right angles to those in the lower one, as shown in the following illustrations. Start reeving with the becket, or standing end, of the rope.

It is good practice to use a shackle block as the upper one of a pair and a hook block as the lower one. A shackle would prevent any accidental dis-engagement of the block from its attaching point in the event of an unusual movement of the attaching point or block. The lower block having a hook is more readily attached or detached from the load. See Figures 1 through 5.

In reeving a pair of tackle blocks, one of which has more than two sheaves, the hoisting rope should lead from one of the center sheaves of the upper block.

When so reeved, the hoisting strain comes on the center of the blocks and they are prevented from toppling, with consequent injury to the rope by cutting across the edges of the block shell.


FIGURE 1

DOUBLE ANDDOUBLE

FIGURE 2

TRIPLE ANDDOUBLE

FIGURE 3

TRIPLE AND TRIPLE

FIGURE 4

FIGURE 5

QUADRUPLE AND TRIPLE

SHEAVENO. 5

SHEAVENO. 1

SHEAVENO. 3

SHEAVENO. 2

SHEAVENO. 4


General Information

To help figure the number of parts of line to be used for a given load or the line pull required for a given load, the following ratio table is provided with examples of how to use it:

HOW TO FIGURE LINE PARTS

USING THE RATIO TABLE RATIO FORMULA

NUMBER OF PARTS OF LINE

RATIO FOR BRONZE BUSHED

SHEAVES

RATIO FOR ANTI-FRICTION

BEARING SHEAVES1 .96 .98

2 1.87 1.94

3 2.75 2.88

4 3.59 3.81

5 4.39 4.71

6 5.16 5.60

7 5.90 6.47

8 6.60 7.32

9 7.27 8.16

10 7.91 8.98

11 8.52 9.79

12 9.11 10.6

13 9.68 11.4

14 10.2 12.1

15 10.7 12.9

16 11.2 13.6

17 11.7 14.3

18 12.2 15.0

19 12.6 15.7

20 13.0 16.4

21 13.4 17.0

22 13.8 17.7

23 14.2 18.3

24 14.5 18.9

1PART

OF LINE

2PART

OF LINE

3PART

OF LINE

4PART

OF LINE

5PART

OF LINE

Example:To find the number of parts of line needed when weight of load and single line pull is established.

Sample Problem:72,480 lbs. (load to be lifted)8,000 lbs. (single line pull) = 9.06 RATIO

Refer to ratio 9.06 in table or number nearest to it, then check column under heading “Number of Parts of Line”... 12 parts of line to be used for this load.

Example:To find single line pull needed when weight of load and number of parts of line are established.

Sample Problem:68,000 lbs. (load to be lifted)6.60 (ratio of 8 part line) = 10,300 lbs. (single line pull)

10,300 lbs. single line pull required to lift this load on 8 parts of line.

TOTAL LOAD TO BE LIFTED = RATIOSINGLE LINE PULL IN POUNDS


General InformationLOADS ON BLOCKS

The Rated Load Values for blocks shown in Crosby Group literature are shown as “Working Loads,” “Safe Working Load” and “Resultant Safe Working Load”; and all these terms are defined as the maximum amount of total load that should be exerted on the block and its fitting, the fitting being a hook, shackle, eye, loop, etc.

It must be recognized that this total load value MAY BE DIFFERENT than the weight being lifted or pulled by a hoisting or hauling sys-tem and, therefore, it is necessary to determine the total load being

Example: A gin pole truck being used to lift a weight of 1,000 lbs.

There is no mechanical advantage to a single part load line system, so, winch line pull is equal to 1,000 lbs. or the weight being lifted.

Total load on snatch block shown as A equals 1,000 lbs. times angle factor for 50°. Total load on A = 1,000 x 1.81 = 1,1810 lbs.

Total load on toggle block shown as B equals 1,000 lbs. times angle factor for 135°. Total load on B = 1,000 x .76 = 760 lbs.

Example: Hoisting system using a traveling block to lift a weight of 1,000 lbs.

The mechanical advantage at the traveling block C is 2 because 2 parts of a load line support the 1,000 lbs. weight; so, the line pull equals the 1,000 lbs. divided by 2 or 500 lbs.

Total load on traveling block shown as C equals 500 lbs. times angle factor for 0°. Total Load on C = 500 x 2.00 = 1,000 lbs.

Total load on stationary block shown as D equals the dead end load of 500 lbs. plus the line pull of 500 lbs. times the angle factor for 40°. Total Load on E = 500 x .84 = 420 lbs.

Total load on block shown as F equals 500 lbs. times the angle factor for 90°. Total Load on F = 500 x 1.41 = 705 lbs.

imposed on each block in the system in order to properly determine the rated capacity block to be used.

A single sheave block that is used to change direction of a load line can be subjected to total loads GREATLY DIFFERENT than the weight being lifted or pulled. The amount of total load changes with the angle between the incoming and departing lines to the block.

The following chart indicates the factor that is multiplied by the line pull to obtain the total load on the block:

ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR ANGLE FACTOR0° 2.00 60° 1.73 130° .84

10° 1.99 70° 1.64 135° .76

20° 1.97 80° 1.53 140° .68

30° 1.93 90° 1.41 150° .52

40° 1.87 100° 1.29 160° .35

45° 1.84 110° 1.15 170° .17

50° 1.81 120° 1.00 180° .00

TOTAL LOAD

LINE PULL

ANGLE

1000 LBS

1000 LBS

C

D

E

135°

B

WINCHLINEPULL

50°

50°

40°130°

A

LINE PULL


Basic Lift EngineeringEFFECT OF ANGLES

Various sling manufacturers refer in their speci-fication tables to leg angles of slings during lifts – since these angles have a direct relationship to lifting capability of a sling. Regardless of how the sling angle may be stated, or the method used to compute stress in a sling leg, the sling is the same. Capacity does not change – but stresses on sling legs change with rigging angles.

Much misunderstanding results because the carrying capacity of a sling leg is reduced by the rigging angle. What happens is that the operator is lifting the load straight up (vertical) while the legs are pulling at an angle, thereby causing a disadvantage.

For quick figuring in the shop, a 60-degree leg angle causes a loss in lifting capacity of 15%... a 45-degree angle reduces capacity by 30%... and a 30-degree angle, 50%. This rule of thumb is not 100% accurate, but is easy to remember and slightly on the safe side.

It is always good practice, within limits, to keep the sling leg angle as large as possible. The length and width of the load sling length, and available headroom are determining factors in this sling angle.

SELECTING A SLING

The following is presented as a guide only to help in selection of a sling for a lift.1.Determine the Load: The weight of the load

must be known. This is always the starting point.

2. Decide the Hitch: Shape and bulk of the load must be accommodated as well as weight. De-termine whether a straight attachment at some point on the load, a choker around the load, or some form of basket hitch will best control the load during the lift.

3. Adequacy of Lifting Device: The lifting device must have adequate capacity for making the lift, and provide any maneuverability required once the load is hoisted.

4. Room to Lift: Make certain the lifting device has sufficient headroom to raise the load to the height required. Headroom will affect the length of sling.

5. Length of Sling: By applying your decision on the type of hitch to knowledge of the headroom offered by the lifting device, the length of sling can be calculated.

6. Use Rated Capacity Chart: Always double- check that the sling type and capacity you choose, when rigged at the angle determined

It is neither economical nor good practice to ex-ceed a 45-degree sling leg angle.Angles less than 45 degrees not only build up tension in the sling legs out of all proportion to the weight of the load, they also create a much great-er “in-pull” on the ends of the load. This produces eccentrically loaded column effect, as an engineer would describe it – meaning simply that long, slender objects have a tendency to buckle. An-gles less than 45 degrees indicate some thought should be given to the use of a lifting beam or other device in connection with the lift.

Studying typical sling charts readily reveals that lifting capacities on slings are misleading unless the sling angle is stated. The same sling that will handle 10 tons at an 85-degree leg angle will only handle 5 tons if this angle is decreased to 30 degrees.

GOOD SLING PRACTICE

Regardless of what type of sling may be em-ployed, there are accepted good working rules which will help increase useful sling life – as well as improve safety. These include:1.Use The proper sling for the lift. Whether Twin-

Path, Web, Chain, or Wire Rope, the proper sling is the one with the best combination of

by the length of the sling, or the specific type of hitch, will handle the load.

Attaching the sling and completing the lift should be an orderly procedure without “surprises” when these steps have been followed. Two further pre-cautions should be noted, however.

First, plan to protect both load and sling from dam-age at sharp corners, etc. Cornermax™ and Syn-thetic Armor Wear Pads should be provided at the lift site. A protective pad should be used anytime a sling passes around a sharp corner.

Last – by no means unimportant by being last – every sling should be visually examined from end to end BEFORE EVERY LIFT. It must always be kept in mind that the manufacturer's Rated Capacity applies only to a new sling in “unused” condition. A sling should be carefully examined to determine that it is in as nearly new condition as practicable before each lift.

There are specific standards on the use and care of slings in industries such as shipping and con-struction, and these provide some guidance for sling inspectors. Consensus standards published as ANSI B30.9 are particularly helpful.

work and handling feature – of the proper length and rated capacity for the situation.

2.Start and stop slowly. Crane hooks should be raised slowly until the sling becomes taut and the load is suspended. Lifting or lowering speed should be in-creased or decreased gradually. Sudden starts or stops place heavier loads on a sling – comparable to jamming the brakes on a speeding automobile. A rule of thumb: Shock loads can double the stress on a sling.

3. If possible, set the load on blocks. Pulling a sling from under a load causes abrasion and “curling” – making the sling harder to handle on the next lift, while reducing strength through loss of metal.

4. Sharp corners cut slings. Use protector arcs, Cor-nermax™ and Synthetic Armor Wear Pads between sharp corners and the sling body.

5. Store in a dry room. Moisture is a natural enemy of wire rope – as are acid fumes and other caustic gases.

6. Avoid handling hot material or objects in direct con-tact with the sling. Strength goes down as tempera-ture goes up!

7. Dropping casting, tools or heavy objects on slings, or running over them with trucks, can cause damage. Always hang slings when not in use.

8. Use hooks properly. “Point loading” reduces hook capacity. Pull should be straight in the line of lift.

ANSI Standard B30.9 specifies that a wire rope sling should be removed form service any time any of the following conditions are detected:1. Ten randomly distributed broken wires in one rope

lay, or five broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.2. Kinking, crushing, bird caging or any other damage

resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure.3. Evidence of heat damage.4. End attachments that are cracked, deformed,

or worn.5. Hooks that have been opened more than 15% of the

normal throat opening measured at the narrowest point, or twisted more than 10 degrees from the plane of the unbent hook.

6. Corrosion of the rope or end attachments.

It is apparent from the foregoing that inspection of a wire rope sling to meet these removal criteria requires more than a casual understanding of wire rope design and manufacture, and the responsibility for daily in-spections must be in the hands of trained personnel.

Most of the foregoing applies equally to any type of sling and careful inspection by a trained inspector is necessary for safe sling use. If you require training for any type of sling inspection, contact Hanes Supply for more information.


Lift Engineering

L

15 — = LAF (Load Angle Factor) Example: — = 1.5 (LAF)

H 10

L Tension in L = — x L's share of the load H

15Tension in L = — x 5,000; 1.5 x 5,000 Ten. = 7,500 lbs. 10

6Ten. in A = — x 3,000 Ten. in A = 9,000 lbs. 2

(As load moves, tension changes)

Inverse Proportion To Distance

Lift Point A7 + 3 = 10,— = .70

1070 x 10,000 = 7,000 lbs.

W x D2 x L1 TL1 = (D2 x H1) + (D1 x H2) W x D1 x L2 TL2 = (D2 x H1) + (D1 x H2)

Lift Point B7 + 3 = 10,— = .30

10.30 x 10,000 = 3,000 lbs.

To find c (hypotenuse)Given: a2 + b2 = c2

Example: 42 + 32 = c2; 16 + 9 = c2; √25 = 5

With the Pythagorean Theorem knowing two sides of a right triangle makes it possible to calculate the third side

To find aGiven: c2 -b2 = a2

Example: 52 - 32 = a2; 25 - 9 = c2; √16 = 4

LEGENDW = Load WeightL1 = Length Leg 1L2 = Length Leg 2H1 = Vertical Height 1H2 = Vertical Height 2D1 = Horizontal Distance 1D2 = Horizontal Distance 2

6,000 LBS

10,000 LBS

10,000 LBS

5,000 LBS 5,000 LBS

CA

L

7 3

H

A

L1

D1 D2

L2

H1

H2

3' 7'

BA

6' 2' 6' B

H=10' L=15'

B

LOAD ANGLE FACTORS

TENSION IN OVERHEAD HOISTS

OFF-SET CENTER OF GRAVITY (SHARE OF THE LOAD)

OFF-LEVEL LIFT POINTS


Basic Lift Engineering

CALCULATING THE LOAD ON EACH LEG OF A SLING

STRAIGHT OR VERTICAL, attachment, is simply using a sling to connect a lifting hook to a load. Full rated lifting capacity of the sling may be utilized, but must not be exceeded. Whenever a single sling is used in this manner, a tagline should be used to prevent load rotation which may cause dam-age to the sling.When two or more slings are attached to the same lifting hook in straight or vertical man-ner, the total hitch becomes, in effect, a lifting bridle, and the load is distributed among the individual slings.CHOKER hitches reduce lifting capability of a sling, since this method of rigging affects ability of the wire rope components to adjust during the lift. A choker is used when the load will not be seriously damaged by the sling body – or the sling damaged by the load, and when the lift requires the sling to snug up against the load.

As the horizontal angle between the legs of a sling decreases, the load on each leg increases. The effect is the same whether a single sling is used as a basket, or two slings are used with each in a straight pull, as with a 2-legged bridle.

Anytime pull is exerted at an angle on a leg – or legs – of a sling, the load per leg can be deter-mined by using the data in the table at right. Proceed as follows to calculate this load – and determine the rated capacity required of the sling, or slings, needed for a lift.

1. First, divide the total load to be lifted by the number of legs to be used. This provides the load per leg if the lift were being made with all legs lifting vertically.

2. Determine the angle.3. Then MULTIPLY the load per leg (as computed in No. 1 above)

by the Load Factor for the leg angle being used (from the table below) – to compute the ACTUAL LOAD on each leg for this lift and angle. THE ACTUAL LOAD MUST NOT EXCEED THE RATED SLING CAPACITY.

Thus, in drawing three (sling angle at 60°):1000 ÷ 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if vertical lift)500 x 1.154 = 577 lbs. = ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 60° HORIZ. angle being used.

In drawing four (sling angle of 45°):1000 ÷ 2 = 500 (Load Per Leg if a vertical lift)500 x 1.414 = 707 lbs. = ACTUAL LOAD on each leg at the 45° HORIZ. angle being used.

The diameter of the bend where the sling contacts the load should keep the point of choke against the sling BODY – never against a splice or the base of the eye. When a choke is used, the sling rated capacity must be adjusted downward to compensate for loss of capability.A choker hitch should be pulled tight before a lift is made – NOT PULLED DOWN DURING THE LIFT. It is also dangerous to use only one choker hitch to lift a load which might shift or slide out of the choke.BASKET hitches distribute a load between the two legs of a sling – within limitations de-scribed below. Capacity of a sling used in a basket is affected by the bend, or curvature, where the sling body comes in contact with the load – just as any sling is affected and limited by bending action, as over a sheave.

LOAD

STRAIGHTCHOKER

BASKET

LOADLOAD

1000 LBS

90° 75° 60° 45°

1000 LBS 1000 LBS 1000 LBS

1000

LB

S1000

LB

S

1000

LB

S

500

LBS

518

LBS

577

LBS

707 L

BS

518 LBS

577 LBS

707 LBS

500

LBS

LEG ANGLES (DEGREES)

LOAD FACTOR

90° 1.00085° 1.00380° 1.01575° 1.03570° 1.06465° 1.10360° 1.15455° 1.22050° 1.30545° 1.41440° 1.55535° 1.56630° 2.000

Rated Capacity AdjustmentFor Choker Hitches

ANGLE OF CHOKE IN DEGREES

PERCENT OF SLING

RATEDCAPACITY

APPLICABLE

120-180 90-119 60-89 30-59 0-29

100%87%74%62%49%

When a choke is drawn down tight against a load, or a side pull is exerted resulting in an angle of less than 120°, an adjustment must be made for further reduction of the sling rated capacity.

EVERY LIFT USES 1 OF 3 BASIC HITCHES


Basic Lift Engineering

Bridle Sling Capacity CalculationRated Load = single leg sling rated capacity x number of legs x sine of the horizontal angle.

Sines• 60 deg. - 0.866• 45 deg. - 0.707• 30 deg. - 0.500

Ways to help equalize the loading on a 4-leg rigging system.• Leg lengths equal• Lever Hoists• Turnbuckles• Adjustable Hitches• Two 2-leg bridles instead of one 4-leg• Use sub-link assembles on 4-leg bridles

The number of legs in a multi-leg sling will also have some bearing on the total lifting capacity. Unless the load is flexible, it is wrong to assume that a 3 or 4 leg hitch will safely lift a load equal to the safe load on one leg multiplied by the number of legs, because there is no way of knowing that each leg is carrying its share of the load. With slings having more than 2 legs lifting a rigid load, it is possible for two of the legs to be carrying a majority of the load while the others only balance it. Equal loading can be maintained on all legs using adjustable hitches, turnbuckles, or chain lever hoists.

Carrying Full Load

Balancing Load


Sling Hitches

SLING HITCHESThere are three basic hitches; the vertical hitch, the choker hitch and the basket hitch. All other hitches are a combination or variation of the these sling hitches.

Vertical Hitch - A hitch where the sling is used in an eye and eye or straight-pull configuration. The vertical hitch capacity reflects a full 100% of the slings Working Load Limit (WLL). The hitch's efficiency is reduced when used at any angle less than 90° from the horizontal plane.

Choker Hitch - A hitch formed when one end of the sling is passed under or through the load and back up through the sling eye or hard-ware then is attached to the lifting hook or other device. The choker hitch WLL reflects 75% to 80% of the vertical hitch rating, when the angle of choke is 120° or greater. When the angle of the choke is less than 120°, the hitch efficiency is reduced accordingly.

Basket Hitch - A hitch formed when the sling is passed under or through the load and back up with both ends placed in the hoisting hook or other device. The basket hitch WLL is 200% of the vertical hitch rating as long as both legs of the hitch are within 5° of vertical and the correct D/d ratio for the sling type is achieved. When the legs of the hitch are less than 90°, its efficiency is reduced accordingly.

Vertical Hitch

Choker Hitch

Basket Hitch


Sling Hitches

Bridle Hitch - A hitch where multiple vertical hitches (usually 2 to 4 slings) are attached to a single upper attachment point to facilitate making the lift.

Bridle Sling - A sling where multiple legs are gathered on a master link during fabrication. Bridle sling capac-ities are based on a specific angle with all legs lifting an equal share of the load weight.

Rendered Choker Hitch - A hitch where the bite of the choke is rendered, to some degree, off to the side of the load. This helps to control a high center.

RENDERED CHOKER ADJUSTMENT

Rendered Hitch Capacity = Choker WLL X Angle of Choke Efficiency

ANGLE OF CHOKE EFFICIENCY

OVER 120° 100%

90° - 120° 87%

60° - 89° 74%

30° - 59° 62%

0° - 29° 49%

2-leg Bridle Hitch

2-leg Sling Hitch

Rendered Choke Hitch

Bite of Hitch

0°30°

60°

90°

120° 13

5°

180°


Sling Hitches

Double Wrap Choker Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a choker hitch that does not have an extra wrap. However, this hitch provides more load control because the extra wrap, around the load, provides 360° contact around the load. The double wrap is great for bundled loads and controlling a high center of gravity.

Double Wrap Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a basket hitch. The extra wrap provides 360° contact around the load. The double wrap is great for bundled loads and controlling a high center of gravity.

Double Choker Hitch - This hitch has double the choker hitch capac-ity when the body of the sling passes through the eyes and back to the hook. Thus allowing for full adjustment of the sling to equalize loading on all parts of the sling.

Inverted Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as a standard basket hitch: less the reduction of a small D/d ratio. It is used to in-crease the D/d ratio from a vertical basket through a shackle. It also provides continual adjustments when used in conjunction with snatch blocks during tilt up operations. It is possible for the inverted basket to run over the saddle of the hook unless restrained.

Dbl. Wrap Choker Hitch

Dbl. Wrap Basket Hitch

Dbl. Choker Hitch

Inverted Basket Hitch


Sling Hitches

Double Basket Hitch - This hitch has the same rating as two basket hitches (with the same angle). This hitch should be used at angles no less than 60° from the horizontal plane. A tighter angle may cause the basket part of the hitch to run, making the load unstable. The hitch achieves an equilateral triangle at 60°.

Adjustable Hitch - This hitch should be used with the choker hitch rating. This hitch is used for loads which have an offset center of grav-ity. For this hitch to work, the bends in the hitch must be tight. When slack, the hitch should be adjusted to the desired length. Once under load, friction will allow the hitch to stay in place. Rigging hardware should be used in the bite of the hitch.

Endless Choker Hitch - A choker hitch formed with an endless style sling provides a more stable hitch than if formed with an eye and eye style sling. This is because it provides a large base of support under the load.

Endless Basket Hitch - A basket hitch formed with an endless style sling provides a more stable hitch than a basket hitch formed with an eye and eye style sling because it gives a large base of support under the load.

Double Basket Hitch

Adjustable Hitch

Endless Choker Hitch

Endless Basket Hitch


Sling Hitches

Double Wrap Basket Hitches

Endless Sling Vertical Hitches

Rendered Choker Hitch

Adjustable Hitch

Two Vertical Hitches

Double Wrap Choker Hitches


Measuring Bridle Sling Length

Wire Rope Sling Bridle

Alloy Chain Sling Bridle

Not all bridle sling lengths are measured the same. See the following examples:

Sling Length

Sling Length

Wire rope, synthetic web and synthetic round-slings are measured from the sling's bearing point located on the lower part of the master link to the bearing point of the sling or hardware at-tached on its opposite end.

Alloy chain sling length is measured from bear-ing point to bearing point, this measurement is known as the Reach. The Reach is measured from the upper bearing point of master link to the bearing point of the sling or hardware attached on its opposite end.


How to Read a Tag

Each alloy chain sling shall be marked to show:1. Manufacturer's name or trademark2. Grade and unique identification (e.g., serial number)3. Nominal chain size4. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on5. Reach (length of sling measured from bearing to bearing point)6. Number of legs (branches)

23

4

5

1 23

4

Each wire rope sling shall be marked to show:1. Manufacturer name or trademark2. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on3. Diameter or size4. Number of legs if more than one

1

2

3

Each synthetic web sling shall be marked to show:1. Manufacturer's name or trademark2. Manufacturer's code or stock number3. Rated load for at least one hitch type and the angle it is based on4. Type of synthetic web material5. Number of legs if more than one


General Information

DEFINITIONS OF TERMS

Abrasion: The mechanical wearing of surface resulting from frictional contact with materials or objects.

Breaking Strength: That total force (lbs. or kg.) at which the sling fails. The total weight strain which can be applied before failure. Usually at five times the rated capacity.

Bunching: Squeezing of a synthetic sling in narrow hardware or in a narrow lifting point.

Competent Person: A person designated for inspection who is trained, qualified by knowledge and practical experience and the necessary instructions to enable the required test or examination to be carried out.

Design Factor (DF): A multiple of working load limit which varies from country to country. In North America a 5:1 DF is the standard. In Europe and Australia, a 7:1 DF is the standard. In Japan 6:1.

Double Basket Hitch: This is a basket hitch with the middle pulled up over the lifting hook between each eye (end) of the sling to form two basket hitches. It has the same rating as two basket hitches (with the same angle). This hitch should not be used at angles less than 60° to the horizontal.

Double Choker Hitch: This hitch has double the single choker hitch capacity when the body of the sling passes through the eyes and back to the hook.

Double Wrap Basket Hitch: A basket hitch with one addi tional wrap around the load, providing 360° contact around the load in order to have more control of the load during a lift. This hitch is great for bundled loads and high centers of gravity. The rating is the same as a single basket.

Double Wrap Choker Hitch: This hitch has the same rating as a single choker hitch except it has an extra wrap around the load for greater stability, providing 360° contact around the load.

Elongation: The measurement of stretch, expressed as a percentage of the finished length.

External Warning Indicator (EWI): A type of visual over load indicator that can be installed on Slingmax® roundslings.

Fitting: A load bearing metal component which is fitted to the sling. Can be of steel, aluminum or other material that will sustain the rated capacity of the sling.

Hitch/Vertical: A method of attachment whereby the sling extends from the crane hook to the load in a straight connection.

Hitch/Choker: The sling is passed around the load and back through itself and is connected to the crane hook. The sling then tightens around the load when it is strained.

Hitch/Basket: The sling is passed from the crane hook around the load and attached to the crane hook.


General Information


Length: The distance between bearing points of the sling.

Proof Load: The average load to which an item may be subjected before visual deformation occurs or a load that is applied in the performance of a proof test.

Proof Load Test: A non-destructive load test usually to twice the rated capacity of the sling.

Qualified Person: A person who, by possession of a recog nized degree or certificate of a professional standing in an applicable field, or who, by extensive knowledge, training and experience, has successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter and work.

Rated Load: The maximum recommended load that should be exerted on the item. The following terms are also used for the term Rated Load: “Working Load,” “Working Load Limit,” and “Resultant Working Load.” All rated load values, unless noted otherwise, are for in-line pull with respect to the centerline of the item.

Safe Working Load (SWL): See Working Load Limit (WLL).

Safety Factor: A measurement no longer used in the USA to describe the design factor of a sling.

Shock Load: A resulting load from the rapid change of movement, such as impacting or jerking, or a static load. A Shock Load is generally significantly greater than the static load.

Side Loading: A load applied at an angle to the vertical plane of a crane boom or the lifting axis of rigging hardware.

Sling Loading: The total tension load applied to a sling during a lifting application.

Synthetic Fiber: Man-made material used for the cover, the core and the thread of the Twin-Path® sling products.

Tell-Tails: Which extend past the tag area of Twin-Path® slings. Extension of the load core yarns. When the sling is stretched beyond its elastic limit, they shrink and eventually disappear under the tag. Take out of service if less than 1/2" is exposed.

Thread: The synthetic yarn which is used to sew the sling covers and tag and to provide the stitch which separates the individual load cores.

Twin-Path®: A patented and trademarked product which is composed of two separate load cores and two contrasting color covers.

Twin-Path® Core: The load bearing multiple fibers of polyester, aramids, or K-Spec™ which, when wound into the seamless tubes, become the load bearing yarns of the sling. If other materials are used, follow the manufacturers recommendations.


General Information


CAUTIONS OR WARNINGS

All ratings shown in this literature are based upon the items being new or “in as new” condition. Catalog rat-ings are considered to be the greatest load that should be applied to the item; therefore, any shock loading must be considered when selecting the item for use in a system.

The products shown in this literature are subject to wear, misuse, overloading, corrosion, deformation, inten-tional alteration and other usage factors which may necessitate a reduction in the product's Rated Capacity or a reduction in its Design Factor. Therefore, it is recommended that all products be regularly inspected to determine their condition as a basis for deciding if the product may continue to be used at the catalog assigned WL, a reduced WL, a reduced design factor, or removed from service.

Twin-Path® Cover: The seamless tubes, usually at least two separate and contrasting colors for easier inspection that contain the cores. Covers may be of polyester, Covermax nylon, or aramids depending on the desired finished characteristics of the product.

Ultimate Load: The average load at which the item is being tested fails or no longer supports the load.

Ultimate Strength: Same as break strength-that total force (lbs or kg) at which the sling fails. The total weight strain that can be applied before failure.

Vertical Rated Capacity (VRC): The Vertical Rated Capacity is the maximum rated capacity for a sling in a straight hitch or vertical configuration.

Working Load Limit (WLL): The maximum weight that a piece of rigging equipment should carry. Rated capacity, load rating, Safe Working Load (SWL) and Working Load Limit are frequently used interchange-ably. Break strength divided by design factor equals Working Load Limit.


Common Conversions

SUMMARY OF COMMON CONVERSIONS

FACTORS

DECIMAL / METRIC EQUIVALENT TABLE

IF YOU KNOW: MULTIPLY BY: TO FIND:Inches 25.4 Millimeters (mm)Inches 2.54 Centimeters (cm)

Feet 0.30 Meters (m)

Yard 0.3711 Meters (m)

Miles 1.61 Kilometers (km)

Millimeters .0394 Inches

Centimeters .39 Inches

Meters 3.28 Feet

Meters 1.09 Yard

Kilometers .62 Miles

Metric Tons 1.102 U.S. Tons

U.S. Tons .9072 Metric Tons

Kilograms 2.204 Pounds

Pounds .453 Kilograms

Metric tons 2204.62 Pounds

Metric tons 1000.0 Kilograms

Fahrenheit (temp.) 5/9 (after subtracting 32) Celsius (temp.)

Celsius (temp.) 9/5 (then add 32) Fahrenheit (temp.)

FRACTION (IN) DECIMAL (IN) METRIC (MM)1/16 .0625 1.588

1/8 .1250 3.175

3/16 .1875 4.762

1/4 .2500 6.350

5/16 .3125 7.938

3/8 .3750 9.525

7/16 .4375 11.112

1/2 .5000 12.700

9/16 .5625 14.288

5/8 .6250 15.875

11/16 .6875 17.462

3/4 .7500 19.050

13/16 .8125 20.638

7/8 .8750 22.225

15/16 .9375 23.812

1 1.0000 25.400


Weights of Material

FORMULAS AND INFORMATION

H = Height W = Width L = Length d = diameter r = radius (1/2 dia.) p = 3.14 (rounded 3.15)[area of a square or rectangle = HW] [Vol of cube = HWL] [Circumference of circle = pd]

[area of a circle = pr2 or the approximate area of a circle = 80% of the dia2 (dia x dia x .80)]

MATERIALS AND LIQUIDS - POUNDS/CU. FT.Aluminum 165 Granite, Solid 168

Asbestos 153 Iron Casting 450

Asphalt 81 Lead 710

Brass 524 Limestone, Solid 163

Brick, Soft 100 Lumber - Fir 32

Brick, Medium 115 Lumber - Oak 62

Brick, Hard 130 Lumber - RR Ties 50

Bronze 534 Marble, Solid 160

Coal 56 Oil, Motor 60

Concrete, Reinforced 150 Paper 75

Copper 556 Portland Cement, Loose 94

Crushed Rock 95 Portland Cement, Set 183

Diesel 52 River Sand 120

Dry Earth, Loose 75 Rubber 94

Dry Earth, Packed 95 Steel 490

Gasoline 45 Water, Fresh 63

Glass 161 Zinc 437

MATERIAL - POUNDS/SQ. FT.Steel Plate1/8" 5

Aluminum Plate1/8" 1.75

1/4" 10 1/4" 3.50

1/2" 20 1/2" 7.00

3/4" 30 3/4" 10.501" 40 1" 14.00


USA StandardCrane Hand Signals

Use Main Hoist.Tap fist on head;then use regular signals.

Extend Boom. (Telescoping Booms). Both fists in front of body with thumbs pointing outward

Hoist. With forearm vertical, forefinger pointing up, move hand in small horizontal circle.

Extend Boom. (Telescoping Boom). One Hand Signal. One fist in front of chest with thumb tapping chest.

Use Whipline.(Auxiliary Hoist).Tap elbow with one hand, then use regular signals.

Retract Boom. (Telescoping Booms). Both fists in front of body with thumbs pointing toward each other.

Lower. With arm extended down-ward, forefinger pointing down, move hand in small horizontal circles.

Retract Boom.(Telescoping Boom). One Hand Signal. One fist in front of chest, thumb pointing outward and heel of fist tapping chest.

Raise Boom. Arm extended, fingers closed, thumb pointing upward.

Stop. Arm extended, palm down, hold position rigidly.

Raise the Boom and Lower the Load. With arm extended, thumb pointing up, flex fingers in and out as long as load movement is desired.

Move Slowly. Use one hand to give any motion signal and place other hand motionless in front of hand giving the motion signal. (Hoist slowly shown as example.)

Lower Boom. Arm extended, fingers closed, thumb pointing downward.

Emergency Stop. Arm extended, palm down, move hand rapidly right and left.

Lower the Boom and Raise the Load. With arm extended, thumb pointing down, flex fingers in and out as load movement is desired.

Dog Everything. Clasp hands in front of body.

Travel. Arm extended forward, hand open and slightly raised, make pushing motion indirection of travel.

Bridge Travel. Arm extended forward, hand open and slightly raised, make pushing motion in direction of travel.

Additional Signals for Bridge Cranes

Travel. (One Track). Lock the track on side indicated by raised fist. Travel opposite track in direction indicated by circular motion of other fist, rotated vertically in front of body. (For crawler cranes only).

Multiple Trolleys. Hold up one finger for block marked “1” and two fingers for block marked “2”. Regular signals follow.

Swing. Arm extended, point with finger in direction of swing of boom.

Trolley Travel. Palm up, fingers closed, thumb pointing in direction of motion, jerk hand horizontally.

Travel.(Both Tracks). Use both fists in front of body, making a circular motion about each other, indicating direction of travel; forward or back-ward. (For crawler cranes only.)

Magnet is Discon-nected. Crane Operator spreads both hands apart palms up.


HSI Training

REVIEW OF ASME B30: • Overview of safety codes and standards

covering cranes and rigging equipment.

INSPECTION (B30.9/B30.26): • Rejection criteria• Identification/tags• Slings and hardware

EQUIPMENT SELECTION: • Hardware capabilities• Hitch selection

SAFE APPLICATIONS: • Share of load• Lifting at angles

Hanes Supply seminars are hands-on demonstrations for a wide range of industrial and contractor applications. Our rigging & safety specialists are available to conduct training seminars at your facility, or you can take advantage of our fully equipped facilities.

CONFINED SPACE: • An overview of entering a permit-required

confinedspaceasitrelatestoFallArrest–Rescue retrieval.

• Live davit arm demonstration and showing of the rescue retrieval and fall arrestequipmentrequiredinconfinedspace entry.

LANYARDS VS RETRACTABLES: • Discussion of the advantages

thatretractablesofferovertraditionallanyards as connecting devices.

• Discussion of minimum fall clearance heights for each device.

INSPECTION GUIDELINES: Discussion of OSHA requirements for inspection of fall protection products/equipment.

ABC’S OF FALL PROTECTION: Anchor Points, Bodywear, Connectors -

• An overview of proper fall protection configurationsthatarecapableofwith-standing fall arrest forces when connected.

• Discussion of fall protection harnesses: Anoverviewofthedifferenttypesandhow to wear them correctly.

FITTING OF HARNESSES: Discussionofproperfittingof Fall Protection harnesses.

100% TIE OFF APPLICATIONS: Review100%tieoffconnections with personal retractables and lanyards.

HORIZONTAL LIFELINE APPLICATIONS: Reviewdifferenttypesofhorizontallifelinesthat are temporary or permanent.

RIGGING

SAFETY

WE CAN CUSTOMIZE TRAINING TO YOUR SPECIFIC NEEDS


Rental and Repair

Air CompressorsAir ToolsBlocksCompaction EquipmentConcrete Core Drilling/SawingConcrete EquipmentElectric ToolsFastening

Ridgid Propress Ridgid SeesnakeRidgid Commercial

Gas Cutting EquipmentHoists/Lifting EquipmentHydraulic EquipmentLighting EquipmentMain Lifting EquipmentMaterial HandlingPaint Spray EquipmentPipe Equipment

GreenleeHougenMilwaukee

ArbortechDewaltMakitaHoneywellBw Technologies Stout

Pressure WashersPulling/Bending EquipmentPumpsSafety EquipmentSwaging ToolsVentilation EquipmentWelders/GeneratorsWinches

MetaboBoschStihl

EnerpacHonda DynadradeChicago Pneumatic ToolsMy-Te Fein / Jancy

REPAIRS

RENTAL

When purchasing isn't an option... Rent the equipment you need! We have a large selection of equipment where and when you need it.

Reliable, Dependable and Ready To Work!

Not limited to the list. Just give us a call and we will let know if we can service it 1-888-426-3755

Under Warranty

Husqvarna Construction Ingersoll-RandEibenstockSouthwire Crosby PanasonicCoffing Hoist

Diamond ProductsPowerteamSumnerYamaha Power

Columbus MckinnonMiller EquipmentMi-T-M CorpHarrington WekaSioux Wacker

We service what we sell

This Rigger’s Handbook is dedicated to Theodore C. Hanes, the founder of Hanes Supply. Ted left us on August 11, 1997. We know it is appropriate that the history of Hanes Supply should be told by Ted. His hard work, common sense and dedication enabled Hanes Supply to move forward into the next millennium.

“It all started when Tex McLaughlin taught me how to splice cable in order to obtain my Feder-al A and E Aircraft Mechanics License #8867 on May 1, 1930. After leaving American Airways August 20, 1936 to become a Professional Firefighter, I soon learned that splicing cable for local contractor friends like Herb Darling and Howard Stimm put extra bread on the table.

Soon we had to take operations into larger quarters at 23 Poplar Avenue. In 1962 we moved to the warehouse at 1294 Seneca Street, giving us the space for a larger Sling Shop and also the ability to be an Allied Products Supply House with more products and quicker, better service.

Our new 55,000 square feet warehouse at 55 James E. Casey Drive enables us to stock even more products to better service our customers. The increasing number of Hanes Supply custom-ers in Central New York State convinced us to open our new Rochester Warehouse. Hanes Sup-ply is committed to making the moves to give the best possible service to all of our customers.

On October 1, 1975 I retired as a Battalion Chief from the Buffalo Fire Department enabling me to devote more time to the company until my son Bill could take the wheel. Bill graduated in June 1980 as a Civil Engineer from the State University at Buffalo and is now President of Hanes Supply, Inc. Having been around watching Dad since he was 9 years old, he thoroughly knows the wire rope business. In association with his friends Dennis St. Germain and Jim Boyco, Bill and the Hanes Supply Crew have learned many modern improvements in sling productions.

Many thanks to our hard working staff led by our Operations Manager and son-in-law Dave Learn, Retired Office Manager Hermine Bruno, my other son Ted Hanes, II and my late wife Nellie C. Hanes who have all been very valuable assets to our business.”

Ted Hanes, 1996

Ted had many other accomplishments including being a Buffalo Firefighter for 39 years, retiring as Battalion Chief in 1975. During WWII, Ted served in the Coast Guard Reserve. Ted was Com-modore of the Buffalo Yacht Club in 1957 and Master of his Masonic Lodge in 1950.

Ted and Nellie had five children in the 1950’s. When most couples would be thinking of retire-ment, they were busy providing the best home and education for their children.

Work was never a four letter word to Ted. Long days and nights of working at Hanes Marine and Cable and the Buffalo Fire Department were common. He spent countless hours making slings by walking around the rigger’s vise. His strength and determination built Hanes Supply into what it is today. He also had the strength to pass the company to the next generation.

Your memory and leadership will never leave us. Special thanks to a great man who we are proud to have had as our father. God bless you.

Thank you,

Bill Hanes/ Dave Learn/ Ted Hanes II

WE PROUDLY FLY OUR FLAGS!

BUFFALO, NY ROCHESTER, NY ALBANY, NY SYRACUSE, NY WATERTOWN, NY BRANFORD, CT NORTH & SOUTH CAROLINA

One of the foremost leaders in the industry Specializing in Lifting Solutions Manufacturer of Slingmax, Wire Rope, Chain & Nylon Slings

Complete Contractor & Industrial Supplier

55 James E. Casey Drive • Buffalo, NY 14206 • U.S.A.PHONE 888-426-3755

WWW.HANESSUPPLY.COM$12.95 US DollarsPrinted in Canada

ISO 9001:2015REGISTERED

RIGGERS HANDBOOK - Hanes Supply Inc. Handbook 2017-web.pdf · RIGGERS HANDBOOK A tremendous...

Documents

Transcript of RIGGERS HANDBOOK - Hanes Supply Inc. Handbook 2017-web.pdf · RIGGERS HANDBOOK A tremendous...